Renesas H8S-2626 16-bit single-chip microcomputer Datasheet

REJ09B0275-0500
The revision list can be viewed directly by
clicking the title page.
The revision list summarizes the locations of
revisions and additions. Details should always
be checked by referring to the relevant text.
16
H8S/2626 Group, H8S/2623 Group,
H8S/2626F-ZTAT™, H8S/2623F-ZTAT™
Hardware Manual
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8S Family/H8S/2600 Series
H8S/2626
H8S/2625
H8S/2623
H8S/2622
H8S/2621
Rev. 5.00
Revision Date: Jan 10, 2006
HD6432626
HD64F2626
HD6432625
HD6432623
HD64F2623
HD6432622
HD64F2621
Keep safety first in your circuit designs!
1. Renesas Technology Corp. puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and
more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with
semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage.
Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate
measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or
(iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap.
Notes regarding these materials
1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas
Technology Corp. product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license
under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corp. or
a third party.
2. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any thirdparty's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or
circuit application examples contained in these materials.
3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and
algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are
subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp. without notice due to product improvements or
other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp. or
an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor for the latest product information
before purchasing a product listed herein.
The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising
from these inaccuracies or errors.
Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp. by various means,
including the Renesas Technology Corp. Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com).
4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data,
diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total
system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas
Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the
information contained herein.
5. Renesas Technology Corp. semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or
system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact
Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor when
considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or
systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use.
6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp. is necessary to reprint or reproduce in
whole or in part these materials.
7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must
be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country
other than the approved destination.
Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the
country of destination is prohibited.
8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. for further details on these materials or the products
contained therein.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page ii of xxiv
General Precautions on the Handling of Products
1. Treatment of NC Pins
Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins.
The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are
used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the
operation of the LSI is not guaranteed.
2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins
Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level.
Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins
are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur.
3. Processing before Initialization
Note: When power is first supplied, the product’s state is undefined. The states of internal
circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the chip and a low level is
input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are undefined, the register
settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design your system so that it
does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this undefined state. For those
products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately after the power supply has
been turned on.
4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Address
Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited.
The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers
may have been be allocated to these address. Do not access these registers: the system’s
operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page iii of xxiv
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page iv of xxiv
Preface
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group are series of high-performance microcontrollers with a
32-bit H8S/2600 CPU core, and a set of on-chip supporting modules required for system
configuration.
The H8S/2600 CPU can execute basic instructions in one state, and is provided with sixteen 16-bit
general registers with a 32-bit internal configuration, and a concise and optimized instruction set.
The CPU can handle a 16 Mbyte linear address space (architecturally 4 Gbytes). Programs based
on the high-level language C can also be run efficiently.
The address space is divided into eight areas. The data bus width and access states can be selected
for each of these areas, and various kinds of memory can be connected fast and easily.
Single-power-supply flash memory (F-ZTAT™*), and mask ROM versions are available,
providing a quick and flexible response to conditions from ramp-up through full-scale volume
production, even for applications with frequently changing specifications.
On-chip supporting functions include a 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU), programmable pulse
generator (PPG), watchdog timer (WDT), serial communication interface (SCI), controller area
network (HCAN), A/D converter, D/A converter (H8S/2626 Group only), and I/O ports.
In addition, data transfer controller (DTC) is provided, enabling high-speed data transfer without
CPU intervention.
Use of the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group enables easy implementation of compact, highperformance systems capable of processing large volumes of data.
This manual describes the hardware of the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group. Refer to the
H8S/2600 Series and H8S/2000 Series Programming Manual for a detailed description of the
instruction set.
Note: * F-ZTAT (Flexible-ZTAT) is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page v of xxiv
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page vi of xxiv
Main Revisions in This Edition
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
All
—
•
All references to Hitachi, Hitachi, Ltd., Hitachi Semiconductors, and
other Hitachi brand names changed to Renesas Technology Corp.
•
Designation for categories changed from “series” to “group”
19.13 Flash
Memory
Programming
and Erasing
Precautions
682
Figure 19.26 amended
Figure 19.26
Power-On/Off
Timing (Boot
Mode)
Wait time:
x
Programming/
erasing
possible
Wait time:
100 µs
φ
Min 0 µs
tOSC1
VCC
tMDS*3
FWE
Min 0 µs
MD2 to MD0*1
tMDS*3
RES
SWE1 set
SWE1 cleared
SWE1 bit
Period during which flash memory access is prohibited
(x: Wait time after setting SWE1 bit)*2
Period during which flash memory can be programmed
(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations
prohibited)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page vii of xxiv
Item
Page
Revision (See Manual for Details)
19.13 Flash
Memory
Programming
and Erasing
Precautions
683
Figure 19.27 amended
Figure 19.27
Power-On/Off
Timing (User
Program Mode)
Wait time:
x
Programming/
erasing
possible
Wait time:
100 µs
φ
Min 0 µs
tOSC1
VCC
FWE
MD2 to MD0*1
tMDS*3
RES
SWE1 set
SWE1 cleared
SWE1 bit
Period during which flash memory access is prohibited
(x: Wait time after setting SWE1 bit)*2
Period during which flash memory can be programmed
(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations
prohibited)
Wait time: 100 µs
Programming/
erasing possible
Wait time: x
Wait time: x
Programming/
erasing possible
Wait time: 100 µs
Wait time: 100 µs
Wait time: x
Programming/
erasing possible
Wait time: 100 µs
Figure 19.28 amended
Wait time: x
Programming/
erasing possible
Figure 19.28
684
Mode
Transition
Timing
(Example: Boot
Mode → User
Mode ↔ User
Program Mode)
φ
tOSC1
VCC
Min 0µs
FWE
tMDS
tMDS*2
MD2 to MD0
tMDS
tRESW
RES
SWE1
cleared
SWE1 set
SWE1 bit
Mode
change*1
Boot
mode
Mode
User
change*1 mode
User program mode
User
mode
Period during which flash memory access is prohibited
(x: Wait time after setting SWE1 bit)*3
Period during which flash memory can be programmed
(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations prohibited)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page viii of xxiv
User program
mode
Contents
Section 1 Overview .............................................................................................................
1.1
1.2
1.3
1
Overview........................................................................................................................... 1
Internal Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 6
Pin Descriptions ................................................................................................................ 8
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement .................................................................................................. 8
1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................... 10
1.3.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 18
Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 23
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Overview...........................................................................................................................
2.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU ..................................
2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU ............................................................................
2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU..........................................................................
CPU Operating Modes ......................................................................................................
Address Space...................................................................................................................
Register Configuration......................................................................................................
2.4.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
2.4.2 General Registers .................................................................................................
2.4.3 Control Registers .................................................................................................
2.4.4 Initial Register Values..........................................................................................
Data Formats.....................................................................................................................
2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................
2.5.2 Memory Data Formats .........................................................................................
Instruction Set ...................................................................................................................
2.6.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes .....................................................................
2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function .......................................................
2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats ....................................................................................
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation .....................................................
2.7.1 Addressing Mode.................................................................................................
2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation .............................................................................
Processing States...............................................................................................................
2.8.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
2.8.2 Reset State............................................................................................................
2.8.3 Exception-Handling State ....................................................................................
2.8.4 Program Execution State......................................................................................
23
23
24
25
25
26
31
32
32
33
34
36
37
37
39
40
40
41
42
51
53
53
56
60
60
61
62
65
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page ix of xxiv
2.8.5 Bus-Released State...............................................................................................
2.8.6 Power-Down State ...............................................................................................
2.9 Basic Timing .....................................................................................................................
2.9.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) .........................................................................
2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing ......................................................
2.9.4 On-Chip HCAN Module Access Timing .............................................................
2.9.5 External Address Space Access Timing ..............................................................
2.10 Usage Note........................................................................................................................
2.10.1 TAS Instruction....................................................................................................
65
65
66
66
66
68
70
72
72
72
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes .................................................................................. 73
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Overview...........................................................................................................................
3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection ...................................................................................
3.1.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) .........................................................................
3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ......................................................................
3.2.3 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) ................................................................
Operating Mode Descriptions ...........................................................................................
3.3.1 Mode 4 .................................................................................................................
3.3.2 Mode 5 .................................................................................................................
3.3.3 Mode 6 .................................................................................................................
3.3.4 Mode 7 .................................................................................................................
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................
Address Map in Each Operating Mode .............................................................................
73
73
74
75
75
75
77
79
79
79
79
79
80
80
Section 4 Exception Handling ......................................................................................... 85
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Overview...........................................................................................................................
4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority...............................................................
4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation.............................................................................
4.1.3 Exception Vector Table .......................................................................................
Reset..................................................................................................................................
4.2.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
4.2.2 Reset Sequence ....................................................................................................
4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................
4.2.4 State of On-Chip Supporting Modules after Reset Release .................................
Traces................................................................................................................................
Interrupts ...........................................................................................................................
Trap Instruction.................................................................................................................
Stack Status after Exception Handling..............................................................................
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page x of xxiv
85
85
86
86
88
88
88
90
90
91
92
93
94
4.7
Notes on Use of the Stack ................................................................................................. 95
Section 5 Interrupt Controller .......................................................................................... 97
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Overview...........................................................................................................................
5.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
5.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
5.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
5.1.4 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ......................................................................
5.2.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A to K, M (IPRA to IPRK, IPRM)...........................
5.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IER) ..................................................................................
5.2.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL).....................................
5.2.5 IRQ Status Register (ISR)....................................................................................
Interrupt Sources...............................................................................................................
5.3.1 External Interrupts ...............................................................................................
5.3.2 Internal Interrupts.................................................................................................
5.3.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table.........................................................
Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................
5.4.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ................................................
5.4.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0 .....................................................................................
5.4.3 Interrupt Control Mode 2 .....................................................................................
5.4.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence ..............................................................
5.4.5 Interrupt Response Times ....................................................................................
Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
5.5.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling.....................................
5.5.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ......................................................................
5.5.3 Times when Interrupts are Disabled ....................................................................
5.5.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction..........................................
DTC Activation by Interrupt.............................................................................................
5.6.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
5.6.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
5.6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................
97
97
98
99
99
100
100
101
103
104
105
106
106
108
108
112
112
116
118
120
121
122
122
123
123
124
124
124
125
125
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) ........................................................................... 127
6.1
6.2
Overview...........................................................................................................................
6.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
6.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
6.1.3 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
6.2.1 Break Address Register A (BARA) .....................................................................
127
127
128
129
129
129
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xi of xxiv
6.3
6.2.2 Break Address Register B (BARB)......................................................................
6.2.3 Break Control Register A (BCRA) ......................................................................
6.2.4 Break Control Register B (BCRB).......................................................................
6.2.5 Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC)....................................................
Operation ..........................................................................................................................
6.3.1 PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch .......................................................
6.3.2 PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access...............................................................
6.3.3 Notes on PC Break Interrupt Handling ................................................................
6.3.4 Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes ................................................
6.3.5 PC Break Operation in Continuous Data Transfer...............................................
6.3.6 When Instruction Execution is Delayed by One State .........................................
6.3.7 Additional Notes ..................................................................................................
130
130
132
132
133
133
134
134
135
136
137
138
Section 7 Bus Controller ................................................................................................... 139
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Overview...........................................................................................................................
7.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
7.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
7.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
7.1.4 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
7.2.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)...............................................................
7.2.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) .............................................................
7.2.3 Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL)..............................................
7.2.4 Bus Control Register H (BCRH)..........................................................................
7.2.5 Bus Control Register L (BCRL) ..........................................................................
7.2.6 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) ................................................................
Overview of Bus Control ..................................................................................................
7.3.1 Area Partitioning..................................................................................................
7.3.2 Bus Specifications................................................................................................
7.3.3 Memory Interfaces ...............................................................................................
7.3.4 Interface Specifications for Each Area ................................................................
Basic Bus Interface ...........................................................................................................
7.4.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
7.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment.............................................................................
7.4.3 Valid Strobes........................................................................................................
7.4.4 Basic Timing........................................................................................................
7.4.5 Wait Control ........................................................................................................
Burst ROM Interface.........................................................................................................
7.5.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
7.5.2 Basic Timing........................................................................................................
7.5.3 Wait Control ........................................................................................................
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xii of xxiv
139
139
140
141
142
143
143
144
145
149
151
152
154
154
155
156
157
158
158
158
160
161
169
171
171
171
173
7.6
Idle Cycle ..........................................................................................................................
7.6.1 Operation .............................................................................................................
7.6.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle ........................................................................................
7.7 Write Data Buffer Function ..............................................................................................
7.8 Bus Release.......................................................................................................................
7.8.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
7.8.2 Operation .............................................................................................................
7.8.3 Pin States in External Bus Released State............................................................
7.8.4 Transition Timing ................................................................................................
7.8.5 Usage Note...........................................................................................................
7.9 Bus Arbitration..................................................................................................................
7.9.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
7.9.2 Operation .............................................................................................................
7.9.3 Bus Transfer Timing ............................................................................................
7.10 Resets and the Bus Controller ...........................................................................................
174
174
176
177
178
178
178
179
180
181
181
181
181
182
182
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) ................................................................... 183
8.1
8.2
8.3
Overview...........................................................................................................................
8.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
8.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
8.1.3 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
8.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) ............................................................................
8.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB).............................................................................
8.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR)..................................................................
8.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR)..........................................................
8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) ..............................................................
8.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)...............................................................
8.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTCER) .........................................................................
8.2.8 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)........................................................................
8.2.9 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ...................................................
Operation ..........................................................................................................................
8.3.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
8.3.2 Activation Sources ...............................................................................................
8.3.3 DTC Vector Table................................................................................................
8.3.4 Location of Register Information in Address Space ............................................
8.3.5 Normal Mode.......................................................................................................
8.3.6 Repeat Mode ........................................................................................................
8.3.7 Block Transfer Mode ...........................................................................................
8.3.8 Chain Transfer .....................................................................................................
8.3.9 Operation Timing.................................................................................................
183
183
184
185
186
186
188
189
189
190
190
191
192
193
193
193
195
197
200
201
202
203
205
206
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xiii of xxiv
8.4
8.5
8.3.10 Number of DTC Execution States........................................................................
8.3.11 Procedures for Using DTC...................................................................................
8.3.12 Examples of Use of the DTC ...............................................................................
Interrupts ...........................................................................................................................
Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
207
209
210
213
213
Section 9 I/O Ports .............................................................................................................. 215
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
Overview...........................................................................................................................
Port 1.................................................................................................................................
9.2.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
9.2.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
9.2.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................
Port 4.................................................................................................................................
9.3.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
9.3.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
9.3.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................
Port 9.................................................................................................................................
9.4.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
9.4.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
9.4.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................
Port A................................................................................................................................
9.5.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
9.5.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
9.5.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................
9.5.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function...............................................................................
Port B ................................................................................................................................
9.6.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
9.6.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
9.6.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................
9.6.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function...............................................................................
Port C ................................................................................................................................
9.7.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
9.7.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
9.7.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................
9.7.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function...............................................................................
Port D................................................................................................................................
9.8.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
9.8.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
9.8.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................
9.8.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function...............................................................................
Port E ................................................................................................................................
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xiv of xxiv
215
219
219
220
222
234
234
235
235
236
236
237
237
237
237
238
242
245
246
246
247
249
258
259
259
260
263
268
269
269
270
272
273
274
9.9.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
9.9.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
9.9.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................
9.9.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function...............................................................................
9.10 Port F.................................................................................................................................
9.10.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
9.10.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
9.10.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................
274
275
277
278
279
279
280
282
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) .................................................................. 285
10.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................
10.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
10.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
10.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
10.1.4 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
10.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
10.2.1 Timer Control Register (TCR) .............................................................................
10.2.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) ............................................................................
10.2.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) .....................................................................
10.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) ..............................................................
10.2.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................
10.2.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................
10.2.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................
10.2.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR)................................................................................
10.2.9 Timer Synchro Register (TSYR) .........................................................................
10.2.10 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ...................................................
10.3 Interface to Bus Master .....................................................................................................
10.3.1 16-Bit Registers ...................................................................................................
10.3.2 8-Bit Registers .....................................................................................................
10.4 Operation ..........................................................................................................................
10.4.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
10.4.2 Basic Functions....................................................................................................
10.4.3 Synchronous Operation........................................................................................
10.4.4 Buffer Operation ..................................................................................................
10.4.5 Cascaded Operation .............................................................................................
10.4.6 PWM Modes ........................................................................................................
10.4.7 Phase Counting Mode ..........................................................................................
10.5 Interrupts ...........................................................................................................................
10.5.1 Interrupt Sources and Priorities............................................................................
10.5.2 DTC Activation....................................................................................................
10.5.3 A/D Converter Activation....................................................................................
285
285
289
290
292
294
294
299
301
314
316
320
320
321
321
322
323
323
323
325
325
326
331
334
338
340
345
351
351
353
353
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xv of xxiv
10.6 Operation Timing..............................................................................................................
10.6.1 Input/Output Timing ............................................................................................
10.6.2 Interrupt Signal Timing........................................................................................
10.7 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
354
354
358
362
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) .................................................... 373
11.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................
11.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
11.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
11.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
11.1.4 Registers...............................................................................................................
11.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
11.2.1 Next Data Enable Registers H and L (NDERH, NDERL)...................................
11.2.2 Output Data Registers H and L (PODRH, PODRL) ............................................
11.2.3 Next Data Registers H and L (NDRH, NDRL)....................................................
11.2.4 Notes on NDR Access..........................................................................................
11.2.5 PPG Output Control Register (PCR)....................................................................
11.2.6 PPG Output Mode Register (PMR)......................................................................
11.2.7 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR).............................................................
11.2.8 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ...................................................
11.3 Operation ..........................................................................................................................
11.3.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
11.3.2 Output Timing......................................................................................................
11.3.3 Normal Pulse Output............................................................................................
11.3.4 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output............................................................................
11.3.5 Inverted Pulse Output ..........................................................................................
11.3.6 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture ............................................................
11.4 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
373
373
374
375
376
377
377
378
379
379
381
383
385
386
387
387
388
389
391
394
395
396
Section 12 Watchdog Timer ............................................................................................. 399
12.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................
12.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
12.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
12.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
12.1.4 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
12.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................
12.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................
12.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) ............................................................
12.2.4 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) ................................................................
12.2.5 Notes on Register Access.....................................................................................
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xvi of xxiv
399
399
400
402
402
403
403
404
408
410
410
12.3 Operation ..........................................................................................................................
12.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation .................................................................................
12.3.2 Interval Timer Operation .....................................................................................
12.3.3 Timing of Setting Overflow Flag (OVF) .............................................................
12.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF) .........................
12.4 Interrupts ...........................................................................................................................
12.5 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
12.5.1 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment .....................
12.5.2 Changing Value of PSS and CKS2 to CKS0 .......................................................
12.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................
12.5.4 System Reset by WDTOVF Signal......................................................................
12.5.5 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode.............................................................
12.5.6 OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode ........................................................
412
412
415
415
416
417
417
417
418
418
418
418
419
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) .................................................... 421
13.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................
13.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
13.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
13.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
13.1.4 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
13.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
13.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ..............................................................................
13.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) ..............................................................................
13.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) .............................................................................
13.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR).............................................................................
13.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)................................................................................
13.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)..............................................................................
13.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................
13.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ......................................................................................
13.2.9 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR) ....................................................................
13.2.10 Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB)....................................................
13.3 Operation ..........................................................................................................................
13.3.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
13.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode .......................................................................
13.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function............................................................
13.3.4 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ...........................................................
13.4 SCI Interrupts....................................................................................................................
13.5 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
421
421
423
424
425
426
426
426
427
427
428
431
435
439
447
448
450
450
452
463
471
480
482
Section 14 Smart Card Interface ..................................................................................... 491
14.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 491
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xvii of xxiv
14.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
14.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
14.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
14.1.4 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
14.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
14.2.1 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR) ....................................................................
14.2.2 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................
14.2.3 Serial Mode Register (SMR)................................................................................
14.2.4 Serial Control Register (SCR)..............................................................................
14.3 Operation ..........................................................................................................................
14.3.1 Overview..............................................................................................................
14.3.2 Pin Connections ...................................................................................................
14.3.3 Data Format .........................................................................................................
14.3.4 Register Settings ..................................................................................................
14.3.5 Clock....................................................................................................................
14.3.6 Data Transfer Operations.....................................................................................
14.3.7 Operation in GSM Mode .....................................................................................
14.3.8 Operation in Block Transfer Mode ......................................................................
14.4 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
491
492
493
494
495
495
496
498
500
501
501
501
503
505
507
509
516
517
518
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)............................................................ 523
15.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................
15.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
15.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
15.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
15.1.4 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
15.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
15.2.1 Master Control Register (MCR)...........................................................................
15.2.2 General Status Register (GSR) ............................................................................
15.2.3 Bit Configuration Register (BCR) .......................................................................
15.2.4 Mailbox Configuration Register (MBCR) ...........................................................
15.2.5 Transmit Wait Register (TXPR) ..........................................................................
15.2.6 Transmit Wait Cancel Register (TXCR)..............................................................
15.2.7 Transmit Acknowledge Register (TXACK) ........................................................
15.2.8 Abort Acknowledge Register (ABACK) .............................................................
15.2.9 Receive Complete Register (RXPR) ....................................................................
15.2.10 Remote Request Register (RFPR)........................................................................
15.2.11 Interrupt Register (IRR) .......................................................................................
15.2.12 Mailbox Interrupt Mask Register (MBIMR)........................................................
15.2.13 Interrupt Mask Register (IMR) ............................................................................
15.2.14 Receive Error Counter (REC) ..............................................................................
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xviii of xxiv
523
523
524
525
526
528
528
530
531
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
545
546
549
15.2.15 Transmit Error Counter (TEC).............................................................................
15.2.16 Unread Message Status Register (UMSR) ...........................................................
15.2.17 Local Acceptance Filter Masks (LAFML, LAFMH)...........................................
15.2.18 Message Control (MC0 to MC15) .......................................................................
15.2.19 Message Data (MD0 to MD15) ...........................................................................
15.2.20 Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC)....................................................
15.3 Operation ..........................................................................................................................
15.3.1 Hardware and Software Resets ............................................................................
15.3.2 Initialization after Hardware Reset ......................................................................
15.3.3 Transmit Mode.....................................................................................................
15.3.4 Receive Mode ......................................................................................................
15.3.5 HCAN Sleep Mode ..............................................................................................
15.3.6 HCAN Halt Mode ................................................................................................
15.3.7 Interrupt Interface ................................................................................................
15.3.8 DTC Interface ......................................................................................................
15.4 CAN Bus Interface............................................................................................................
15.5 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
549
550
551
553
557
559
560
560
563
568
574
579
582
583
584
585
585
Section 16 A/D Converter ................................................................................................. 589
16.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................
16.1.1 Features................................................................................................................
16.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
16.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
16.1.4 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
16.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
16.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)..............................................
16.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ...............................................................
16.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................
16.2.4 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ...................................................
16.3 Interface to Bus Master .....................................................................................................
16.4 Operation ..........................................................................................................................
16.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) ....................................................................................
16.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1).......................................................................................
16.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .........................................................
16.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing.............................................................................
16.5 Interrupts ...........................................................................................................................
16.6 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
589
589
590
591
592
593
593
594
597
598
599
600
600
602
604
605
606
607
Section 17 D/A Converter [Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only] .................... 613
17.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 613
17.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 613
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xix of xxiv
17.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
17.1.3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................
17.1.4 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
17.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
17.2.1 D/A Data Registers 2 and 3 (DADR2, DADR3) .................................................
17.2.2 D/A Control Register 23 (DACR23)....................................................................
17.2.3 Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC)....................................................
17.3 Operation ..........................................................................................................................
614
615
615
616
616
616
618
618
Section 18 RAM .................................................................................................................. 621
18.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................
18.1.1 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
18.1.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
18.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
18.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ......................................................................
18.3 Operation ..........................................................................................................................
18.4 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................
621
621
622
622
622
623
623
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)........................................................................................ 625
19.1 Features .............................................................................................................................
19.2 Overview...........................................................................................................................
19.2.1 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
19.2.2 Mode Transitions .................................................................................................
19.2.3 On-Board Programming Modes...........................................................................
19.2.4 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ......................................................................
19.2.5 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode .................................
19.2.6 Block Configuration ............................................................................................
19.3 Pin Configuration..............................................................................................................
19.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................................
19.5 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
19.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1).....................................................
19.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2).....................................................
19.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ...........................................................................
19.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ...........................................................................
19.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)...................................................................
19.5.6 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR) ............................................
19.5.7 Serial Control Register X (SCRX).......................................................................
19.6 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................
19.6.1 Boot Mode ...........................................................................................................
19.6.2 User Program Mode.............................................................................................
19.7 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ...............................................................................
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xx of xxiv
625
626
626
627
628
630
631
632
632
633
633
633
637
638
638
639
641
641
642
643
647
649
19.8
19.9
19.10
19.11
19.12
19.13
19.14
19.7.1 Program Mode .....................................................................................................
19.7.2 Program-Verify Mode..........................................................................................
19.7.3 Erase Mode ..........................................................................................................
19.7.4 Erase-Verify Mode ..............................................................................................
Protection ..........................................................................................................................
19.8.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................
19.8.2 Software Protection..............................................................................................
19.8.3 Error Protection....................................................................................................
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ...................................................................................
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory.......................................
Flash Memory Programmer Mode ....................................................................................
19.11.1 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram.....................................................
19.11.2 Programmer Mode Operation ..............................................................................
19.11.3 Memory Read Mode ............................................................................................
19.11.4 Auto-Program Mode ............................................................................................
19.11.5 Auto-Erase Mode.................................................................................................
19.11.6 Status Read Mode ................................................................................................
19.11.7 Status Polling .......................................................................................................
19.11.8 Programmer Mode Transition Time ....................................................................
19.11.9 Notes on Memory Programming..........................................................................
Flash Memory and Power-Down States............................................................................
19.12.1 Note on Power-Down States ................................................................................
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.....................................................
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version ..................................
651
652
656
656
658
658
659
660
662
664
664
665
667
668
672
674
676
677
677
678
679
679
680
685
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator .................................................................................. 687
20.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................
20.1.1 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
20.1.2 Register Configuration.........................................................................................
20.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................
20.2.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) ...........................................................
20.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ...........................................................
20.3 Oscillator...........................................................................................................................
20.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator...........................................................................
20.3.2 External Clock Input ............................................................................................
20.4 PLL Circuit .......................................................................................................................
20.5 Medium-Speed Clock Divider ..........................................................................................
20.6 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit ..................................................................................
20.7 Subclock Oscillator (H8S/2626 Group Only) ...................................................................
20.8 Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit (H8S/2626 Group Only)........................................
20.9 Note on Crystal Resonator ................................................................................................
687
688
688
689
689
690
691
691
694
696
696
697
697
698
698
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xxi of xxiv
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group] ............................................. 699
21A.1
21A.2
21A.3
21A.4
21A.5
21A.6
21A.7
21A.8
Overview .......................................................................................................................
21A.1.1 Register Configuration..................................................................................
Register Descriptions.....................................................................................................
21A.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .............................................................
21A.2.2 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) ....................................................
21A.2.3 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ....................................................
21A.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ...................................................
Medium-Speed Mode ....................................................................................................
Sleep Mode....................................................................................................................
21A.4.1 Sleep Mode ...................................................................................................
21A.4.2 Exiting Sleep Mode ......................................................................................
Module Stop Mode........................................................................................................
21A.5.1 Module Stop Mode .......................................................................................
21A.5.2 Usage Notes ..................................................................................................
Software Standby Mode ................................................................................................
21A.6.1 Software Standby Mode................................................................................
21A.6.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode.................................................................
21A.6.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software
Standby Mode...............................................................................................
21A.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example.............................................
21A.6.5 Usage Notes ..................................................................................................
Hardware Standby Mode...............................................................................................
21A.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode ..............................................................................
21A.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing..................................................................
φ Clock Output Disabling Function...............................................................................
699
702
702
702
704
705
706
707
708
708
708
708
708
710
710
710
710
711
712
713
713
713
714
714
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group].............................................. 715
21B.1
21B.2
21B.3
21B.4
21B.5
Overview .......................................................................................................................
21B.1.1 Register Configuration..................................................................................
Register Descriptions.....................................................................................................
21B.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .............................................................
21B.2.2 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) ....................................................
21B.2.3 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ....................................................
21B.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR).........................................................
21B.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ...................................................
Medium-Speed Mode ....................................................................................................
Sleep Mode....................................................................................................................
21B.4.1 Sleep Mode ...................................................................................................
21B.4.2 Exiting Sleep Mode ......................................................................................
Module Stop Mode........................................................................................................
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xxii of xxiv
715
719
719
719
721
722
725
726
727
728
728
728
728
21B.5.1 Module Stop Mode .......................................................................................
21B.5.2 Usage Notes ..................................................................................................
Software Standby Mode ................................................................................................
21B.6.1 Software Standby Mode................................................................................
21B.6.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode.................................................................
21B.6.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software
Standby Mode...............................................................................................
21B.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example.............................................
21B.6.5 Usage Notes ..................................................................................................
Hardware Standby Mode...............................................................................................
21B.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode ..............................................................................
21B.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing..................................................................
Watch Mode ..................................................................................................................
21B.8.1 Watch Mode..................................................................................................
21B.8.2 Exiting Watch Mode.....................................................................................
21B.8.3 Notes.............................................................................................................
Sub-Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................
21B.9.1 Sub-Sleep Mode............................................................................................
21B.9.2 Exiting Sub-Sleep Mode...............................................................................
Sub-Active Mode ..........................................................................................................
21B.10.1 Sub-Active Mode.........................................................................................
21B.10.2 Exiting Sub-Active Mode ............................................................................
Direct Transitions..........................................................................................................
21B.11.1 Overview of Direct Transitions....................................................................
φ Clock Output Disabling Function ..............................................................................
Usage Notes...................................................................................................................
731
732
733
733
733
734
734
734
735
735
736
736
736
737
737
737
738
738
738
739
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary) ...................................................
22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................................................
22.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................................
22.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................................
22.3.1 Clock Timing .......................................................................................................
22.3.2 Control Signal Timing .........................................................................................
22.3.3 Bus Timing ..........................................................................................................
22.3.4 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules.............................................................
22.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................................
22.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................................
22.6 Flash Memory Characteristics...........................................................................................
22.7 Usage Note........................................................................................................................
741
741
742
745
746
747
749
756
760
760
761
762
21B.6
21B.7
21B.8
21B.9
21B.10
21B.11
21B.12
21B.13
728
730
730
730
730
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xxiii of xxiv
Appendix A Instruction Set .............................................................................................. 763
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
A.6
Instruction List ..................................................................................................................
Instruction Codes ..............................................................................................................
Operation Code Map.........................................................................................................
Number of States Required for Instruction Execution ......................................................
Bus States during Instruction Execution ...........................................................................
Condition Code Modification ...........................................................................................
763
787
802
806
817
831
Appendix B Internal I/O Register ................................................................................... 837
B.1
B.2
Address ............................................................................................................................. 837
Functions........................................................................................................................... 852
Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams......................................................................... 1008
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.6
C.7
C.8
C.9
Port 1 Block Diagrams....................................................................................................
Port 4 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
Port 9 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
Port A Block Diagrams ...................................................................................................
Port B Block Diagram.....................................................................................................
Port C Block Diagrams ...................................................................................................
Port D Block Diagram.....................................................................................................
Port E Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
Port F Block Diagrams....................................................................................................
1008
1014
1014
1015
1020
1021
1025
1026
1027
Appendix D Pin States ...................................................................................................... 1036
D.1
Port States in Each Mode ................................................................................................ 1036
Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware
Standby Mode ............................................................................................. 1039
Appendix F Product Code Lineup ................................................................................ 1040
Appendix G Package Dimensions ................................................................................. 1041
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page xxiv of xxiv
Section 1 Overview
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group are series of microcomputers (MCUs) that integrate
peripheral functions required for system configuration together with an H8S/2600 CPU employing
an original Renesas architecture.
The H8S/2600 CPU has an internal 32-bit architecture, is provided with sixteen 16-bit general
registers and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for high-speed operation, and can
address a 16-Mbyte linear address space. The instruction set is upward-compatible with H8/300
and H8/300H CPU instructions at the object-code level, facilitating migration from the H8/300,
H8/300L, or H8/300H Series.
On-chip peripheral functions required for system configuration include a data transfer controller
(DTC) bus master, ROM and RAM, a16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU), programmable pulse
generator (PPG), watchdog timer (WDT), serial communication interface (SCI), controller area
network (HCAN), A/D converter, D/A converter (H8S/2626 Group only), and I/O ports.
The on-chip ROM is 256-kbyte flash memory (F-ZTAT™)* or 256-, 128-, or 64-kbyte mask
ROM. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte and word data
to be accessed in one state. Instruction fetching has been speeded up, and processing speed
increased.
Four operating modes, modes 4 to 7, are provided, and there is a choice of single-chip mode or
external expansion mode.
The features of the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group are shown in table 1.1.
Note: * F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 1 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Table 1.1
Overview
Item
Specifications
CPU
•
General-register machine
 Sixteen 16-bit general registers
(also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers)
•
High-speed operation suitable for realtime control
 Maximum operating frequency: 20 MHz
 High-speed arithmetic operations
8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 50 ns
16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 200 ns
16 × 16 + 42-bit multiply and accumulate: 200 ns
32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 1000 ns
•
Instruction set suitable for high-speed operation
 69 basic instructions
 8/16/32-bit move/arithmetic and logic instructions
 Unsigned/signed multiply and divide instructions
 Multiply-and accumulate instruction
 Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
•
Two CPU operating modes
 Normal mode: 64-kbyte address space
(Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group)
 Advanced mode: 16-Mbyte address space
Bus controller
PC break
controller
•
Address space divided into 8 areas, with bus specifications settable
independently for each area
•
Choice of 8-bit or 16-bit access space for each area
•
2-state or 3-state access space can be designated for each area
•
Number of program wait states can be set for each area
•
Burst ROM directly connectable
•
External bus release function
•
Supports debugging functions by means of PC break interrupts
•
Two break channels
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 2 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Item
Specifications
Data transfer
controller (DTC)
•
Can be activated by internal interrupt or software
•
Multiple transfers or multiple types of transfer possible for one activation
source
•
Transfer possible in repeat mode, block transfer mode, etc.
•
Request can be sent to CPU for interrupt that activated DTC
•
6-channel 16-bit timer
•
Pulse input/output processing capability for up to 16 pins
•
Automatic 2-phase encoder count capability
•
Maximum 8-bit pulse output possible with TPU as time base
•
Output trigger selectable in 4-bit groups
•
Non-overlap margin can be set
•
Direct output or inverse output setting
Watchdog timer
(WDT), 2 channels
(H8S/2626 Group)
•
Watchdog timer or interval timer selectable
•
Subclock operation possible (one channel only)
Watchdog timer
(WDT), 1 channel
(H8S/2623 Group)
•
Watchdog timer or interval timer selectable
Serial communication interface
(SCI), 3 channels
(SCI0 to SCI2)
•
Asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable
•
Multiprocessor communication function
•
Smart card interface function
Controller area
network (HCAN), 1
channel
•
CAN: Ver. 2.0B compliant
•
Buffer size: 15 transmit/receive buffers, one transmit-only buffer
•
Receive message filtering
•
Resolution: 10 bits
•
Input: 16 channels
•
13.3 µs minimum conversion time (at 20 MHz operation)
•
Single or scan mode selectable
•
Sample-and-hold function
•
A/D conversion can be activated by external trigger or timer trigger
16-bit timer-pulse
unit (TPU)
Programmable
pulse generator
(PPG)
A/D converter
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 3 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Item
Specifications
D/A converter
(H8S/2626 Group
only)
•
Resolution: 8 bits
• Output: 2 channels
I/O ports
(H8S/2626 Group)
•
51 input/output pins, 17 input-only pins
I/O ports
(H8S/2623 Group)
•
53 input/output pins, 17 input-only pins
Memory
•
Flash memory or masked ROM
•
High-speed static RAM
Interrupt controller
Product Name
ROM
RAM
H8S/2626, H8S/2623
256 kbytes
12 kbytes
H8S/2625, H8S/2622
128 kbytes
8 kbytes
H8S/2624, H8S/2621
64 kbytes
4 kbytes
•
Seven external interrupt pins (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ5)
•
Internal interrupt sources
H8S/2626: 48
H8S/2623: 47
Power-down state
•
Eight priority levels settable
•
Medium-speed mode
•
Sleep mode
•
Module stop mode
•
Software standby mode
•
Hardware standby mode
•
Subclock operation (H8S/2626 Group only)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 4 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Item
Specifications
Operating modes
•
Four MCU operating modes
Mode
CPU
Operating
Mode
4
Advanced
External Data Bus
On-Chip
ROM
Initial
Width
Max.
Width
On-chip ROM disabled
expansion mode
Disabled
16 bits
16 bits
5
On-chip ROM disabled
expansion mode
Disabled
8 bits
16 bits
6
On-chip ROM enabled
expansion mode
Enabled
8 bits
16 bits
7
Single-chip mode
Enabled
—
—
Description
Clock pulse
generator
•
Built-in PLL circuit (×1, ×2, ×4)
•
Input clock frequency: 2 to 20 MHz
Package
•
100-pin plastic QFP (FP-100B)
Product lineup
Model
Mask ROM Version
F-ZTAT Version
ROM/RAM (Bytes)
Package
HD6432626
HD6432623
HD64F2626
HD64F2623
256 k/12 k
FP-100B
HD6432625
HD6432622
—
128 k/8 k
FP-100B
HD6432624
HD6432621
—
64 k/4 k
FP-100B
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 5 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
1.2
Internal Block Diagram
Port A
WDT × 1 channel
Port B
ROM
(Mask ROM,
flash memory)
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
Port C
Peripheral data bus
PC break controller
(2 channels)
PA5
PA4
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA0/A16
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5/SCK1/IRQ5
PC4/A4/RxD1
PC3/A3/TxD1
PC2/A2/SCK0/IRQ4
PC1/A1/RxD0
PC0/A0/TxD0
Port 9
Bus controller
DTC
Peripheral address bus
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
Internal address bus
Port E
Internal data bus
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
PD0/D8
Port D
H8S/2600 CPU
Interrupt controller
Port F
PF7/φ
PF6/AS
PF5/RD
PF4/HWR
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF1/BACK
PF0/BREQ/IRQ2
PLL
MD2
MD1
MD0
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLVCC
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
STBY
RES
WDTOVF
NMI
FWE*
Clock pulse
generator
PVCC1
PVCC2
PVCC3
PVCC4
VCC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
Figures 1.1 and 1.2 show internal block diagrams of the H8S/2623 Group and H8S/2626 Group.
P97/AN15
P96/AN14
P95/AN13
P94/AN12
P93/AN11
P92/AN10
P91/AN9
P90/AN8
RAM
SCI × 3 channels
HCAN × 1 channel
TPU
A/D converter
PPG
P47/ AN7
P46/ AN6
P45/ AN5
P44/ AN4
P43/ AN3
P42/ AN2
P41/ AN1
P40/ AN0
Port 4
HRxD
HTxD
Vref
AVCC
AVSS
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
Port 1
Note: * The FWE pin is used only in the flash memory version.
Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram (H8S/2623 Group)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 6 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Port B
WDT × 2 channels
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
Port C
ROM
(mask ROM or
flash memory)
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA0/A16
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5/SCK1/IRQ5
PC4/A4/RxD1
PC3/A3/TxD1
PC2/A2/SCK0/IRQ4
PC1/A1/RxD0
PC0/A0/TxD0
Port 9
PC break controller
(2 channels)
Peripheral address bus
DTC
Peripheral data bus
Bus controller
Internal address bus
H8S/2600 CPU
Port A
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
Port E
Internal data bus
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
PD0/D8
Port D
Interrupt controller
Port F
PF7/φ
PF6/AS
PF5/RD
PF4/HWR
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF1/BACK
PF0/BREQ/IRQ2
PLL
MD2
MD1
MD0
OSC1
OSC2
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLVCC
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
STBY
RES
WDTOVF
NMI
FWE*
Clock pulse
generator
PVCC1
PVCC2
PVCC3
PVCC4
VCC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
Section 1 Overview
P97/AN15/DA3
P96/AN14/DA2
P95/AN13
P94/AN12
P93 /AN11
P92 /AN10
P91 /AN9
P90 /AN8
RAM
SCI × 3 channels
HCAN × 1 channel
TPU
D/A converter
PPG
A/D converter
P47/AN7
P46/AN6
P45/AN5
P44/AN4
P43/AN3
P42/AN2
P41/AN1
P40/AN0
Port 4
HRxD
HTxD
Vref
AVCC
AVSS
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
Port 1
Note: * The FWE pin is provided in the flash memory version only.
Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram (H8S/2626 Group)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 7 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
1.3
Pin Descriptions
1.3.1
Pin Arrangement
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
Top view
(FP-100B)
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
PA4
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA0/A16
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PVCC2
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
VSS
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5/SCK1/IRQ5
PC4/A4/RxD1
PC3/A3/TxD1
PC2/A2/SCK0/IRQ4
PC1/A1/RxD0
PC0/A0/TxD0
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
VCC
HTxD
VSS
HRxD
PE0/D0
PE1/D1
PE2/D2
PE3/D3
PE4/D4
VSS
PE5/D5
PVCC1
PE6/D6
PE7/D7
PD0/D8
PD1/D9
PD2/D10
PD3/D11
PD4/D12
PD5/D13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
AVCC
Vref
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6
P47/AN7
P90/AN8
P91/AN9
P92/AN10
P93/AN11
P94/AN12
P95/AN13
P96/AN14
P97/AN15
AVSS
VSS
WDTOVF
PVCC4
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
PF0/BREQ/IRQ2
PF1/BACK
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF4/HWR
PF5/PD
PF6/AS
PF7/φ
FWE
EXTAL
VSS
XTAL
VCC
STBY
NMI
RES
PLLVCC
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
MD2
MD1
VSS
MD0
PVCC3
PA5
Figures 1.3 and 1.4 show pin arrangements of the H8S/2623 Group and H8S/2626 Group.
Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement (FP-100B: Top View) (H8S/2623 Group)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 8 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
Top view
(FP-100B)
OSC1
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA0/A16
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PVCC2
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
VSS
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5/SCK1/IRQ5
PC4/A4/RxD1
PC3/A3/TxD1
PC2/A2/SCK0/IRQ4
PC1/A1/RxD0
PC0/A0/TxD0
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
VCC
HTxD
VSS
HRxD
PE0/D0
PE1/D1
PE2/D2
PE3/D3
PE4/D4
VSS
PE5/D5
PVCC1
PE6/D6
PE7/D7
PD0/D8
PD1/D9
PD2/D10
PD3/D11
PD4/D12
PD5/D13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
AVCC
Vref
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6
P47/AN7
P90/AN8
P91/AN9
P92/AN10
P93/AN11
P94/AN12
P95/AN13
P96/AN14/DA2
P97/AN15/DA3
AVSS
VSS
WDTOVF
PVCC4
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
PF0/BREQ/IRQ2
PF1/BACK/BUZZ
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF4/HWR
PF5/PD
PF6/AS
PF7/φ
FWE
EXTAL
VSS
XTAL
VCC
STBY
NMI
RES
PLLVCC
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
MD2
MD1
VSS
MD0
PVCC3
OSC2
Section 1 Overview
Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement (FP-100B: Top View) (H8S/2626 Group)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 9 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
1.3.2
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
Tables 1.2 and 1.3 show the pin functions in each of the operating modes of the H8S/2623 Group
and H8S/2626 Group.
Table 1.2
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-100B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
1
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ P13/PO11/TIOCD0/
TCLKB/A23
TCLKB/A23
TCLKB/A23
TCLKB
2
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
3
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ P15/PO13/TIOCB1/
TCLKC
TCLKC
TCLKC
TCLKC
4
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ P16/PO14/TIOCA2/
IRQ1
IRQ1
IRQ1
IRQ1
5
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ P17/PO15/TIOCB2/
TCLKD
TCLKD
TCLKD
TCLKD
6
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
7
HTxD
HTxD
HTxD
HTxD
8
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
9
HRxD
HRxD
HRxD
HRxD
10
PE0/D0
PE0/D0
PE0/D0
PE0
11
PE1/D1
PE1/D1
PE1/D1
PE1
12
PE2/D2
PE2/D2
PE2/D2
PE2
13
PE3/D3
PE3/D3
PE3/D3
PE3
14
PE4/D4
PE4/D4
PE4/D4
PE4
15
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
16
PE5/D5
PE5/D5
PE5/D5
PE5
17
PVCC1
PVCC1
PVCC1
PVCC1
18
PE6/D6
PE6/D6
PE6/D6
PE6
19
PE7/D7
PE7/D7
PE7/D7
PE7
20
D8
D8
D8
PD0
21
D9
D9
D9
PD1
22
D10
D10
D10
PD2
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 10 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-100B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
23
D11
D11
D11
PD3
24
D12
D12
D12
PD4
25
D13
D13
D13
PD5
26
D14
D14
D14
PD6
27
D15
D15
D15
PD7
28
A0
A0
PC0/A0/TxD0
PC0/TxD0
29
A1
A1
PC1/A1/RxD0
PC1/RxD0
30
A2
A2
PC2/A2/SCK0/IRQ4 PC2/SCK0/IRQ4
31
A3
A3
PC3/A3/TxD1
PC3/TxD1
32
A4
A4
PC4/A4/RxD1
PC4/RxD1
33
A5
A5
PC5/A5/SCK1/IRQ5 PC5/SCK1/IRQ5
34
A6
A6
PC6/A6
35
A7
A7
PC7/A7
PC7
36
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PB0/TIOCA3
37
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
38
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB1/TIOCB3
39
PVCC2
PVCC2
PVCC2
PVCC2
40
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2/TIOCC3
41
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3/TIOCD3
42
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4/TIOCA4
43
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5/TIOCB4
44
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6/TIOCA5
45
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7/TIOCB5
PC6
46
PA0/A16
PA0/A16
PA0/A16
PA0
47
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1/TxD2
48
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2/RxD2
49
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3/SCK2
50
PA4
PA4
PA4
PA4
51
PA5
PA5
PA5
PA5
52
PVCC3
PVCC3
PVCC3
PVCC3
53
MD0
MD0
MD0
MD0
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 11 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-100B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
54
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
55
MD1
MD1
MD1
MD1
56
MD2
MD2
MD2
MD2
57
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
58
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
59
PLLVCC
PLLVCC
PLLVCC
PLLVCC
60
RES
RES
RES
RES
61
NMI
NMI
NMI
NMI
62
STBY
STBY
STBY
STBY
63
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
64
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
65
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
66
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
67
FWE
FWE
FWE
FWE
68
PF7/φ
PF7/φ
PF7/φ
PF7/φ
69
AS
AS
AS
PF6
70
RD
RD
RD
PF5
71
HWR
HWR
HWR
PF4
72
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF3/ADTRG/
IRQ3
73
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF2
74
PF1/BACK
PF1/BACK
PF1/BACK
PF1
75
PF0/BREQ/IRQ2
PF0/BREQ/IIRQ2
PF0/BREQ/IIRQ2
PF0/IRQ2
76
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
77
Vref
Vref
Vref
Vref
78
P40/AN0
P40/AN0
P40/AN0
P40/AN0
79
P41/AN1
P41/AN1
P41/AN1
P41/AN1
80
P42/AN2
P42/AN2
P42/AN2
P42/AN2
81
P43/AN3
P43/AN3
P43/AN3
P43/AN3
82
P44/AN4
P44/AN4
P44/AN4
P44/AN4
83
P45/AN5
P45/AN5
P45/AN5
P45/AN5
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 12 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-100B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
84
P46/AN6
P46/AN6
P46/AN6
P46/AN6
85
P47/AN7
P47/AN7
P47/AN7
P47/AN7
86
P90/AN8
P90/AN8
P90/AN8
P90/AN8
87
P91/AN9
P91/AN9
P91/AN9
P91/AN9
88
P92/AN10
P92/AN10
P92/AN10
P92/AN10
89
P93/AN11
P93/AN11
P93/AN11
P93/AN11
90
P94/AN12
P94/AN12
P94/AN12
P94/AN12
91
P95/AN13
P95/AN13
P95/AN13
P95/AN13
92
P96/AN14
P96/AN14
P96/AN14
P96/AN14
93
P97/AN15
P97/AN15
P97/AN15
P97/AN15
94
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
95
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
96
WDTOVF
WDTOVF
WDTOVF
WDTOVF
97
PVCC4
PVCC4
PVCC4
PVCC4
98
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/
A20
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/
A20
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/
A20
P10/PO8/TIOCA0
99
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/
A21
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/
A21
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/
A21
P11/PO9/TIOCB0
100
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ P12/PO10/TIOCC0/
TCLKA/A22
TCLKA/A22
TCLKA/A22
TCLKA
Note: NC pins should be connected to VSS or left open.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 13 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Table 1.3
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-100B
Mode 4
Mode 5
1
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ P13/PO11/TIOCD0/
TCLKB/A23
TCLKB/A23
TCLKB/A23
TCLKB
2
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
3
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ P15/PO13/TIOCB1/
TCLKC
TCLKC
TCLKC
TCLKC
4
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ P16/PO14/TIOCA2/
IRQ1
IRQ1
IRQ1
IRQ1
5
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ P17/PO15/TIOCB2/
TCLKD
TCLKD
TCLKD
TCLKD
6
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
7
HTxD
HTxD
HTxD
HTxD
8
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
9
HRxD
HRxD
HRxD
HRxD
10
PE0/D0
PE0/D0
PE0/D0
PE0
11
PE1/D1
PE1/D1
PE1/D1
PE1
12
PE2/D2
PE2/D2
PE2/D2
PE2
13
PE3/D3
PE3/D3
PE3/D3
PE3
14
PE4/D4
PE4/D4
PE4/D4
PE4
15
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
16
PE5/D5
PE5/D5
PE5/D5
PE5
17
PVCC1
PVCC1
PVCC1
PVCC1
18
PE6/D6
PE6/D6
PE6/D6
PE6
19
PE7/D7
PE7/D7
PE7/D7
PE7
20
D8
D8
D8
PD0
21
D9
D9
D9
PD1
22
D10
D10
D10
PD2
23
D11
D11
D11
PD3
24
D12
D12
D12
PD4
25
D13
D13
D13
PD5
26
D14
D14
D14
PD6
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 14 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Mode 6
Mode 7
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-100B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
27
D15
D15
D15
PD7
28
A0
A0
PC0/A0/TxD0
PC0/TxD0
29
A1
A1
PC1/A1/RxD0
PC1/RxD0
30
A2
A2
PC2/A2/SCK0/IRQ4 PC2/SCK0/IRQ4
31
A3
A3
PC3/A3/TxD1
PC3/TxD1
32
A4
A4
PC4/A4/RxD1
PC4/RxD1
33
A5
A5
PC5/A5/SCK1/IRQ5 PC5/SCK1/IRQ5
34
A6
A6
PC6/A6
PC6
35
A7
A7
PC7/A7
PC7
36
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
PB0/TIOCA3
37
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
38
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB1/TIOCB3
39
PVCC2
PVCC2
PVCC2
PVCC2
40
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
PB2/TIOCC3
41
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB3/TIOCD3
42
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
PB4/TIOCA4
43
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB5/TIOCB4
44
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB6/TIOCA5
45
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB7/TIOCB5
46
PA0/A16
PA0/A16
PA0/A16
PA0
47
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1/TxD2
48
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2/RxD2
49
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3/SCK2
50
OSC1
OSC1
OSC1
OSC1
51
OSC2
OSC2
OSC2
OSC2
52
PVCC3
PVCC3
PVCC3
PVCC3
53
MD0
MD0
MD0
MD0
54
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
55
MD1
MD1
MD1
MD1
56
MD2
MD2
MD2
MD2
57
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 15 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-100B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
58
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
59
PLLVCC
PLLVCC
PLLVCC
PLLVCC
60
RES
RES
RES
RES
61
NMI
NMI
NMI
NMI
62
STBY
STBY
STBY
STBY
63
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
64
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
65
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
66
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
67
FWE
FWE
FWE
FWE
68
PF7/φ
PF7/φ
PF7/φ
PF7/φ
69
AS
AS
AS
PF6
70
RD
RD
RD
PF5
71
HWR
HWR
HWR
PF4
72
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/
IRQ3
PF3/ADTRG/
IRQ3
73
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF2
74
PF1/BACK/BUZZ
PF1/BACK/BUZZ
PF1/BACK/BUZZ
PF1/BUZZ
75
PF0/BREQ/IRQ2
PF0/BREQ/IIRQ2
PF0/BREQ/IIRQ2
PF0/IRQ2
76
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
77
Vref
Vref
Vref
Vref
78
P40/AN0
P40/AN0
P40/AN0
P40/AN0
79
P41/AN1
P41/AN1
P41/AN1
P41/AN1
80
P42/AN2
P42/AN2
P42/AN2
P42/AN2
81
P43/AN3
P43/AN3
P43/AN3
P43/AN3
82
P44/AN4
P44/AN4
P44/AN4
P44/AN4
83
P45/AN5
P45/AN5
P45/AN5
P45/AN5
84
P46/AN6
P46/AN6
P46/AN6
P46/AN6
85
P47/AN7
P47/AN7
P47/AN7
P47/AN7
86
P90/AN8
P90/AN8
P90/AN8
P90/AN8
87
P91/AN9
P91/AN9
P91/AN9
P91/AN9
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 16 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
Pin Name
FP-100B
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
88
P92/AN10
P92/AN10
P92/AN10
P92/AN10
89
P93/AN11
P93/AN11
P93/AN11
P93/AN11
90
P94/AN12
P94/AN12
P94/AN12
P94/AN12
91
P95/AN13
P95/AN13
P95/AN13
P95/AN13
92
P96/AN14/DA2
P96/AN14/DA2
P96/AN14/DA2
P96/AN14/DA2
93
P97/AN15/DA3
P97/AN15/DA3
P97/AN15/DA3
P97/AN15/DA3
94
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
95
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
96
WDTOVF
WDTOVF
WDTOVF
WDTOVF
97
PVCC4
PVCC4
PVCC4
PVCC4
98
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/
A20
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/
A20
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/
A20
P10/PO8/TIOCA0
99
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/
A21
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/
A21
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/
A21
P11/PO9/TIOCB0
100
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ P12/PO10/TIOCC0/
TCLKA/A22
TCLKA/A22
TCLKA/A22
TCLKA
Note: NC pins should be connected to VSS or left open.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 17 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
1.3.3
Pin Functions
Table 1.4 summarizes the pin functions.
Table 1.4
Pin Functions
Type
Symbol
I/O
Pin Name
Function
Power supply
VCC
Input
Power supply
For connection to the power supply.
Connect all VCC pins to the system
power supply.
PVCC1
Input
PVCC2
Input
Port power supply Port power supply pins. Connect all
Port power supply these pins to the same power supply.
PVCC3
Input
Port power supply
PVCC4
Input
Port power supply
VSS
Input
Ground
PLLVCC
Input
PLL power supply On-chip PLL oscillator power supply
PLLVSS
Input
PLL ground
On-chip PLL oscillator ground
PLLCAP
Input
PLL capacitance
On-chip PLL oscillator external
capacitance pin
XTAL
Input
Crystal
For connection to a crystal resonator.
For examples of crystal resonator
connection and external clock input,
see section 20, Clock Pulse
Generator.
EXTAL
Input
External clock
For connection to a crystal resonator.
For examples of crystal resonator
connection and external clock input,
see section 20, Clock Pulse
Generator.
Clock
For connection to the power supply
(0 V). Connect all VSS pins to the
system power supply (0 V).
OSC1*
1
Input
Subclock
For connection to a recommended
32.768 kHz resonator. For examples
of crystal resonator connection, see
section 20, Clock Pulse Generator.
OSC2*
1
Input
Subclock
For connection to a recommended
32.768 kHz resonator. For examples
of crystal resonator connection, see
section 20, Clock Pulse Generator.
Output
System clock
Supplies the system clock to external
devices.
φ
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 18 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
I/O
Pin Name
Function
Operating
mode control
MD2 to
MD0
Input
Mode pins
These pins set the operating mode.
The relation between the settings of
pins MD2 to MD0 and the operating
mode is shown below. Inputs at these
pins should not be changed during
operation.
MD2
MD1
MD0
Operating Mode
0
0
0
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
0
Mode 4
1
Mode 5
0
Mode 6
1
Mode 7
1
1
0
1
System
control
Interrupts
Address bus
RES
Input
Reset input
When this pin is driven low, the chip is
reset.
STBY
Input
Standby
When this pin is driven low, a
transition is made to hardware standby
mode.
BREQ
Input
Bus request
Used by an external bus master to
issue a bus request to the chip.
BREQO
Output
Bus request
output
External bus request signal used when
an internal bus master accesses
external space in the external busreleased state.
BACK
Output
Bus request
acknowledge
Indicates that the bus has been
released to an external bus master.
FWE
Input
Flash write enable Pin for use by flash memory
NMI
Input
Nonmaskable
interrupt
Requests a nonmaskable interrupt. If
this pin is not used, it should be fixed
high.
IRQ5 to
IRQ0
Input
Interrupt request
5 to 0
These pins request a maskable
interrupt.
A23 to A0
Output
Address bus
These pins output address signals.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 19 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
I/O
Pin Name
Function
Data bus
D15 to D0
Input/
output
Data bus
Bidirectional data bus
Bus control
AS
Output
Address strobe
Goes low to indicate valid address
output on the address bus.
RD
Output
Read
Goes low to indicate reading from the
external address space.
HWR
Output
High write
Strobe signal indicating writing to the
external address space; indicates valid
data on the upper data bus (D15 to
D8).
LWR
Output
Low write
Strobe signal indicating writing to the
external address space; indicates valid
data on the lower data bus (D7 to D0).
WAIT
Input
Wait
Requests insertion of wait states in
bus cycles during access to 3-state
external address space.
TCLKD to
TCLKA
Input
Clock input
D to A
These pins input an external clock.
TIOCA0,
TIOCB0,
TIOCC0,
TIOCD0
Input/
output
Input capture/
output compare
match A0 to D0
The TGR0A to TGR0D input capture
input/output compare output/PWM
output pins
TIOCA1,
TIOCB1
Input/
output
Input capture/
output compare
match A1 and B1
The TGR1A and TGR1B input capture
input/output compare output/PWM
output pins
TIOCA2,
TIOCB2
Input/
output
Input capture/
output compare
match A2 and B2
The TGR2A and TGR2B input capture
input/output compare output/PWM
output pins
TIOCA3,
TIOCB3,
TIOCC3,
TIOCD3
Input/
output
Input capture/
output compare
match A3 to D3
The TGR3A to TGR3D input capture
input/output compare output/PWM
output pins
TIOCA4,
TIOCB4
Input/
output
Input capture/
output compare
match A4 and B4
The TGR4A and TGR4B input capture
input/output compare output/PWM
output pins
TIOCA5,
TIOCB5
Input/
output
Input capture/
output compare
match A5 and B5
The TGR5A and TGR5B input capture
input/output compare output/PWM
output pins
16-bit timerpulse unit
(TPU)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 20 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Programmable PO15 to
pulse
PO8
generator
(PPG)
I/O
Pin Name
Function
Output
Pulse output
15 to 8
Pulse output pins
Watchdog
timer (WDT)
WDTOVF
Output
Watchdog timer
overflow
The counter overflow signal output pin
in watchdog timer mode
Serial
communication
interface (SCI)/
smart card
interface
TxD2,
TxD1,
TxD0
Output
Transmit data
Data output pins
RxD2,
RxD1,
RxD0
Input
Receive data
Data input pins
SCK2,
SCK1,
SCK0
Input/
output
Serial clock
Clock input/output pins
HTxD
Output
HCAN transmit
data
The CAN bus transmission pin
HRxD
Input
HCAN receive
data
The CAN bus reception pin
AN15 to
AN0
Input
Analog 15 to 0
Analog input pins
ADTRG
Input
A/D conversion
external trigger
input
Pin for input of an external trigger to
start A/D conversion
D/A converter
pin
DA3, DA2
Output
Analog output
D/A converter analog output pins
A/D converter/
D/A converter
AVCC
Input
Analog power
supply
The power supply pin for the A/D and
D/A converters. When the A/D and
D/A converters are not used, connect
this pin to the system power supply
(+5 V).
AVSS
Input
Analog ground
The ground pin and reference voltage
for the A/D and D/A converters.
Connect this pin to the system power
supply (0 V).
Vref
Input
Analog reference
power supply
The reference voltage input pin for the
A/D and D/A converters. When the
A/D and D/A converters are not used,
connect this pin to the system power
supply (+5 V).
Controller
area network
(HCAN)
A/D converter
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 21 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
I/O
Pin Name
Function
I/O ports
P17 to
P10
Input/
output
Port 1
Eight input/output pins. Input or output
can be selected for each pin in the
port 1 data direction register (P1DDR).
P47 to
P40
Input
Port 4
Eight input pins
P97 to
P90
Input
Port 9
Eight input pins
PA5 to
2
PA0*
Input/
output
Port A
Six input/output pins. Input or output
can be selected for each pin in the
port A data direction register
(PADDR).
PB7 to
PB0
Input/
output
Port B
Eight input/output pins. Input or output
can be selected for each pin in the
port B data direction register
(PBDDR).
PC7 to
PC0
Input/
output
Port C
Eight input/output pins. Input or output
can be selected for each pin in the
port C data direction register
(PCDDR).
PD7 to
PD0
Input/
output
Port D
Eight input/output pins. Input or output
can be selected for each pin in the
port D data direction register
(PDDDR).
PE7 to
PE0
Input/
output
Port E
Eight input/output pins. Input or output
can be selected for each pin in the
port E data direction register
(PEDDR).
PF7 to
PF0
Input/
output
Port F
Eight input/output pins. Input or output
can be selected for each pin in the
port F data direction register (PFDDR).
Notes: 1. Applies to the H8S/2626 Group only.
2. PA3 to PA0 in the H8S/2626 Group.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 22 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Section 2 CPU
2.1
Overview
The H8S/2600 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that
is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2600 CPU has sixteen 16-bit
general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) linear address space, and is
ideal for realtime control.
2.1.1
Features
The H8S/2600 CPU has the following features.
• Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs
 Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H object programs
• General-register architecture
 Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit
registers)
• Sixty-nine basic instructions
 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions
 Multiply and divide instructions
 Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
 Multiply-and-accumulate instruction
• Eight addressing modes
 Register direct [Rn]
 Register indirect [@ERn]
 Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)]
 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn]
 Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32]
 Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
 Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]
 Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
• 16-Mbyte address space
 Program: 16 Mbytes
 Data:
16 Mbytes (4 Gbytes architecturally)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 23 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
• High-speed operation
 All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states
 Maximum clock rate:
20 MHz
 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 50 ns
 8 × 8-bit register-register multiply:
150 ns
 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide:
600 ns
 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply:
200 ns
 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide:
1000 ns
• Two CPU operating modes
 Normal mode*
 Advanced mode
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
• Power-down state
 Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction
 CPU clock speed selection
2.1.2
Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU
The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are as shown below.
• Register configuration
The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU.
• Basic instructions
The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the
H8S/2600 CPU.
• Number of execution states
The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions is different in each
CPU.
Execution States
Instruction
MULXU
MULXS
Mnemonic
H8S/2600
H8S/2000
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
3
12
MULXU.W Rs, ERd
4
20
MULXS.B Rs, Rd
4
13
MULXS.W Rs, ERd
5
21
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 24 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
In addition, there are differences in address space, CCR and EXR register functions, power-down
modes, etc., depending on the model.
2.1.3
Differences from H8/300 CPU
In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements.
• More general registers and control registers
 Eight 16-bit expanded registers, and one 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers, have been
added.
• Expanded address space
 Normal mode* supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU.
 Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space.
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
• Enhanced addressing
 The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address
space.
• Enhanced instructions
 Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.
 Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added.
 A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added.
 Two-bit shift instructions have been added.
 Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.
 A test and set instruction has been added.
• Higher speed
 Basic instructions execute twice as fast.
2.1.4
Differences from H8/300H CPU
In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements.
• Additional control register
 One 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers have been added.
• Enhanced instructions
 Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.
 A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added.
 Two-bit shift instructions have been added.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 25 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
 Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.
 A test and set instruction has been added.
• Higher speed
 Basic instructions execute twice as fast.
2.2
CPU Operating Modes
The H8S/2600 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode* supports a
maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address
space (architecturally a maximum 16-Mbyte program area and a maximum of 4 Gbytes for
program and data areas combined). The mode is selected by the mode pins of the microcontroller.
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Normal mode*
Maximum 64 kbytes, program
and data areas combined
CPU operating modes
Advanced mode
Maximum 16-Mbytes for
program and data areas
combined
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes
(1) Normal Mode (Not Available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group)
The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU.
Address Space: A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed.
Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as
the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain
any value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the
general register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@–Rn)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 26 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
or post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding
extended register (En) will be affected.
Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of
effective addresses (EA) are valid.
Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In normal mode the top area
starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One branch address is stored per 16
bits (figure 2.2). The exception vector table differs depending on the microcontroller. For details
of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling.
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
H'0004
H'0005
H'0006
H'0007
H'0008
H'0009
H'000A
H'000B
Reset exception vector
Manual reset exception vector*
(Reserved for system use)
Exception
vector table
Exception vector 1
Exception vector 2
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses
an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that
contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand, providing a 16bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note
that this area is also used for the exception vector table.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 27 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Stack Structure: When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call,
and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto
the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.3. When EXR is invalid, it is
not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling.
SP
PC
(16 bits)
EXR*1
Reserved*1 *3
CCR
CCR*3
SP
*2
(SP
)
PC
(16 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch
(b) Exception Handling
Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack.
2. SP when EXR is not used.
3. Ignored when returning.
Figure 2.3 Stack Structure in Normal Mode
(2) Advanced Mode
Address Space: Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space (architecturally
a maximum 16-Mbyte program area and a maximum 4-Gbyte data area, with a maximum of 4
Gbytes for program and data areas combined).
Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as
the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers.
Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 28 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In advanced mode the top
area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in units of 32 bits. In each 32
bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2.4).
For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling.
H'00000000
Reserved
Reset exception vector
H'00000003
H'00000004
Reserved
Manual reset exception vector*
H'00000007
H'00000008
Exception vector table
H'0000000B
(Reserved for system use)
H'0000000C
H'00000010
Reserved
Exception vector 1
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses
an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that
contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing
a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 29 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the
first part of this range is also the exception vector table.
Stack Structure: In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a
subroutine call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR)
are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.5. When
EXR is invalid, it is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling.
EXR*1
Reserved*1 *3
CCR
SP
SP
Reserved
PC
(24 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch
*2
(SP
)
PC
(24 bits)
(b) Exception Handling
Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack.
2. SP when EXR is not used.
3. Ignored when returning.
Figure 2.5 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 30 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.3
Address Space
Figure 2.6 shows a memory map of the H8S/2600 CPU. The H8S/2600 CPU provides linear
access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte
(architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode.
H'0000
H'00000000
H'FFFF
Program area
H'00FFFFFF
Data area
Cannot be
used by the
H8S/2626
Group or
H8S/2623
Group
H'FFFFFFFF
(a) Normal Mode*
(b) Advanced Mode
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Figure 2.6 Memory Map
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 31 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.4
Register Configuration
2.4.1
Overview
The CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.7. There are two types of registers: general
registers and control registers.
General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En)
15
07
07
0
ER0
E0
R0H
R0L
ER1
E1
R1H
R1L
ER2
E2
R2H
R2L
ER3
E3
R3H
R3L
ER4
E4
R4H
R4L
ER5
E5
R5H
R5L
ER6
E6
R6H
R6L
ER7 (SP)
E7
R7H
R7L
Control Registers (CR)
23
0
PC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EXR T — — — — I2 I1 I0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CCR I UI H U N Z V C
63
MAC
32
41
MACH
Sign extension
MACL
31
Legend:
SP:
PC:
EXR:
T:
I2 to I0:
CCR:
I:
UI:
0
Stack pointer
Program counter
Extended control register
Trace bit
Interrupt mask bits
Condition-code register
Interrupt mask bit
User bit or interrupt mask bit*
H:
U:
N:
Z:
V:
C:
MAC:
Half-carry flag
User bit
Negative flag
Zero flag
Overflow flag
Carry flag
Multiply-accumulate register
Note: * Cannot be used as an interrupt mask bit in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Figure 2.7 CPU Registers
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 32 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.4.2
General Registers
The CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and
can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data
register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers are used
as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7).
The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R
(R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit
registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers.
The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and
RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit
registers.
Figure 2.8 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected
independently.
• Address registers
• 32-bit registers
• 16-bit registers
• 8-bit registers
E registers (extended registers)
(E0 to E7)
RH registers
(R0H to R7H)
ER registers
(ER0 to ER7)
R registers
(R0 to R7)
RL registers
(R0L to R7L)
Figure 2.8 Usage of General Registers
General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.9 shows the
stack.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 33 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Free area
SP (ER7)
Stack area
Figure 2.9 Stack
2.4.3
Control Registers
The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC), 8-bit extended control register (EXR),
8-bit condition-code register (CCR), and 64-bit multiply-accumulate register (MAC).
(1) Program Counter (PC)
This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length
of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an
instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.)
(2) Extended Control Register (EXR)
This 8-bit register contains the trace bit (T) and three interrupt mask bits (I2 to I0).
Bit 7—Trace Bit (T): Selects trace mode. When this bit is cleared to 0, instructions are executed
in sequence. When this bit is set to 1, a trace exception is generated each time an instruction is
executed.
Bits 6 to 3—Reserved: They are always read as 1.
Bits 2 to 0—Interrupt Mask Bits (I2 to I0): These bits designate the interrupt mask level (0 to
7). For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Operations can be performed on the EXR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled for three states after one of these
instructions is executed, except for STC.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 34 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
(3) Condition-Code Register (CCR)
This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and
half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags.
Bit 7—Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. (NMI is accepted
regardless of the I bit setting.) The I bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exceptionhandling sequence. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Bit 6—User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask
bit. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Bit 5—Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B
instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is
set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L,
SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or
borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
Bit 4—User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and
XORC instructions.
Bit 3—Negative Flag (N): Stores the value of the most significant bit (sign bit) of data.
Bit 2—Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data.
Bit 1—Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other
times.
Bit 0—Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by:
• Add instructions, to indicate a carry
• Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
• Shift and rotate instructions, to store the value shifted out of the end bit
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions.
Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged. For the action of each instruction
on the flag bits, refer to appendix A.1, Instruction List.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 35 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch
(Bcc) instructions.
(4) Multiply-Accumulate Register (MAC)
This 64-bit register stores the results of multiply-and-accumulate operations. It consists of two 32bit registers denoted MACH and MACL. The lower 10 bits of MACH are valid; the upper bits are
a sign extension.
2.4.4
Initial Register Values
Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the
trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits
and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized.
The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately
after a reset.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 36 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.5
Data Formats
The CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data.
Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, …, 7) of byte
operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit
BCD data.
2.5.1
General Register Data Formats
Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in general registers.
Data Type
Register Number
Data Format
1-bit data
RnH
7
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Don’t care
Don’t care
7
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1-bit data
4-bit BCD data
RnL
RnH
4 3
7
Upper
4-bit BCD data
0
Lower
Don’t care
RnL
Byte data
RnH
4 3
7
Upper
Don’t care
7
0
Lower
0
Don’t care
MSB
Byte data
LSB
RnL
7
0
Don’t care
MSB
LSB
Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 37 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Data Type
Register Number
Word data
Rn
Word data
En
Data Format
15
0
MSB
15
0
MSB
Longword data
LSB
ERn
31
MSB
LSB
16 15
En
0
Rn
Legend:
ERn: General register ER
En:
General register E
Rn:
General register R
RnH: General register RH
RnL: General register RL
MSB: Most significant bit
LSB: Least significant bit
Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats (cont)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 38 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
LSB
Section 2 CPU
2.5.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.11 shows the data formats in memory. The CPU can access word data and longword data
in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to
access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant
bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to
instruction fetches.
Data Type
Data Format
Address
7
1-bit data
Address L
Byte data
Address L MSB
Word data
7
0
6
5
4
2
1
0
LSB
Address 2M MSB
Address 2M + 1
Longword data
3
LSB
Address 2N MSB
Address 2N + 1
Address 2N + 2
Address 2N + 3
LSB
Figure 2.11 Memory Data Formats
When ER7 is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size
or longword size.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 39 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.6
Instruction Set
2.6.1
Overview
The H8S/2600 CPU has 69 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function in
table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Instruction Classification
Function
Instructions
Size
Types
Data transfer
MOV
1
1
POP* , PUSH*
BWL
5
Arithmetic
operations
WL
LDM, STM
3
3
MOVFPE* , MOVTPE*
L
B
ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG
BWL
ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS
B
INC, DEC
BWL
23
ADDS, SUBS
L
MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS
BW
EXTU, EXTS
4
TAS*
WL
B
MAC, LDMAC, STMAC, CLRMAC
—
Logic operations
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
BWL
4
Shift
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR
BWL
8
Bit manipulation
B
14
Branch
BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND,
BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR
2
Bcc* , JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS
—
5
System control
TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP —
9
Block data transfer EEPMOV
—
1
Total: 69
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Notes: 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn,
@-SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L
ERn, @-SP.
2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.
3. Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Legend:
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 40 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.6.2
Instructions and Addressing Modes
Table 2.2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the H8S/2600 CPU
can use.
Table 2.2
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
@aa:24
@aa:32
BWL
BWL
B
BWL
—
BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
WL
LDM, STM
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L
MOVEPE*1,
MOVTPE*1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
Arithmetic
operations
ADD, CMP
BWL
BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
WL
BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ADDX, SUBX
B
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ADDS, SUBS
—
L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
INC, DEC
—
BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DAA, DAS
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MULXU, DIVXU
—
BW
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MULXS, DIVXS
—
BW
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NEG
—
BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
EXTU, EXTS
—
WL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TAS*2
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MAC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CLRMAC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SUB
LDMAC, STMAC
—
@–ERn/@ERn+
BWL
—
@@aa:8
@(d:32,ERn)
BWL
—
@(d:16,PC)
@(d:16,ERn)
BWL
—
MOV
@(d:8,PC)
@ERn
Data
transfer
Instruction
@aa:16
Rn
BWL
POP, PUSH
Function
@aa:8
#xx
Addressing Modes
—
L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BWL
BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Shift
—
BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit manipulation
—
B
B
—
—
—
B
B
—
B
—
—
—
—
Branch
Bcc, BSR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
JMP, JSR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RTS
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TRAPA
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RTE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SLEEP
—
—
—
—
—
—
LDC
B
B
W
W
W
STC
—
B
W
W
ANDC, ORC,
XORC
B
—
—
NOP
—
—
Block data transfer
—
—
Logic
operations
System
control
Legend: B:
W:
L:
Notes:
1.
2.
AND, OR, XOR
NOT
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
—
W
—
W
—
—
—
W
W
—
W
—
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BW
Byte
Word
Longword
Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 41 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.6.3
Table of Instructions Classified by Function
Table 2.3 summarizes the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in table 2.3
is defined below.
Operation Notation
Rs
General register (destination)*
General register (source)*
Rn
General register*
Rd
ERn
General register (32-bit register)
MAC
Multiply-accumulate register (32-bit register)
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
EXR
Extended control register
CCR
Condition-code register
N
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#IMM
Immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
Logical AND
∨
Logical OR
⊕
Logical exclusive OR
→
Move
¬
NOT (logical complement)
:8/:16/:24/:32
8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length
Note:
*
General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0
to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 42 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.3
Instructions Classified by Function
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Data transfer
MOV
B/W/L
(EAs) → Rd, Rs → (Ead)
1
Moves data between two general registers or between a
general register and memory, or moves immediate data
to a general register.
MOVFPE
B
Cannot be used in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623
Group.
MOVTPE
B
Cannot be used in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623
Group.
POP
W/L
@SP+ → Rn
Pops a register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to
MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L
@SP+, ERn.
PUSH
W/L
Rn → @–SP
Pushes a register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is
identical to MOV.W Rn, @–SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical
to MOV.L ERn, @–SP.
LDM
L
@SP+ → Rn (register list)
Pops two or more general registers from the stack.
STM
L
Rn (register list) → @–SP
Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 43 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Arithmetic
operations
ADD
SUB
B/W/L
Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd
ADDX
SUBX
B
INC
DEC
B/W/L
ADDS
SUBS
L
DAA
DAS
B
MULXU
B/W
1
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general
registers, or on immediate data and data in a general
register. (Immediate byte data cannot be subtracted
from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX or
ADD instruction.)
Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on
byte data in two general registers, or on immediate data
and data in a general register.
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2.
(Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by
1 only.)
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a
32-bit register.
Rd decimal adjust → Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a
general register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit
BCD data.
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general
registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits ×
16 bits → 32 bits.
MULXS
B/W
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general
registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits ×
16 bits → 32 bits.
DIVXU
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general
registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit
remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 44 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Arithmetic
operations
DIVXS
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
1
Performs signed division on data in two general
registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit
remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder.
CMP
B/W/L
Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another
general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR
bits according to the result.
NEG
B/W/L
0 – Rd → Rd
Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of
data in a general register.
EXTU
W/L
Rd (zero extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size,
or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size,
by padding with zeros on the left.
EXTS
TAS
W/L
Rd (sign extension) → Rd
B
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size,
or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size,
by extending the sign bit.
2
@ERd – 0, 1 → (<bit 7> of @ERd)*
Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit
(bit 7) to 1.
MAC
—
(EAs) × (EAd) + MAC → MAC
Performs signed multiplication on memory contents and
adds the result to the multiply-accumulate register. The
following operations can be performed:
16 bits × 16 bits + 32 bits → 32 bits, saturating
16 bits × 16 bits + 42 bits → 42 bits, non-saturating
CLRMAC
—
0 → MAC
Clears the multiply-accumulate register to zero.
LDMAC
STMAC
L
Rs → MAC, MAC → Rd
Transfers data between a general register and a
multiply-accumulate register.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 45 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Logic
operations
AND
B/W/L
Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd
1
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register
and another general register or immediate data.
OR
B/W/L
Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register
and another general register or immediate data.
XOR
B/W/L
Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general
register and another general register or immediate data.
NOT
B/W/L
¬ (Rd) → (Rd)
Takes the one's complement of general register
contents.
Shift
operations
SHAL
SHAR
B/W/L
SHLL
SHLR
B/W/L
ROTL
ROTR
B/W/L
ROTXL
ROTXR
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents.
1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible.
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs a logical shift on general register contents.
1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible.
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents.
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 46 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents through the carry flag.
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible.
Section 2 CPU
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Bitmanipulation
instructions
BSET
B
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
1
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to 1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data or the lower three bits of a general
register.
BCLR
B
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to 0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data or the lower three bits of a general
register.
BNOT
B
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate
data or the lower three bits of a general register.
BTST
B
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The
bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the
lower three bits of a general register.
BAND
B
C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the
carry flag.
BIAND
B
C ∧ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in
a general register or memory operand and stores the
result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BOR
B
C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the
carry flag.
BIOR
B
C ∨ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand and stores the
result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 47 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Bitmanipulation
instructions
BXOR
B
C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
1
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand and stores the
result in the carry flag.
BIXOR
B
C ⊕ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a
specified bit in a general register or memory operand
and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BLD
B
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to the carry flag.
BILD
B
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand to the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BST
B
C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand.
BIST
B
¬ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a
specified bit in a general register or memory operand.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 48 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Branch
instructions
Bcc
—
Branches to a specified address if a specified condition
is true. The branching conditions are listed below.
1
Mnemonic
Description
Condition
BRA(BT)
Always (true)
Always
BRN(BF)
Never (false)
Never
BHI
High
C∨Z=0
BLS
Low or same
C∨Z=1
BCC(BHS)
Carry clear
(high or same)
C=0
BCS(BLO)
Carry set (low)
C=1
BNE
Not equal
Z=0
BEQ
Equal
Z=1
BVC
Overflow clear
V=0
BVS
Overflow set
V=1
BPL
Plus
N=0
BMI
Minus
N=1
BGE
Greater or equal
N⊕V=0
BLT
Less than
N⊕V=1
BGT
Greater than
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 0
BLE
Less or equal
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 1
JMP
—
Branches unconditionally to a specified address.
BSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
JSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
RTS
—
Returns from a subroutine
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 49 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
System
control
instructions
TRAPA
—
Starts trap-instruction exception handling.
RTE
—
Returns from an exception-handling routine.
1
SLEEP
—
Causes a transition to a power-down state.
LDC
B/W
(EAs) → CCR, (EAs) → EXR
Moves the source operand contents or immediate data
to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit
registers, word-size transfers are performed between
them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.
STC
B/W
CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd)
Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or
memory. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers,
word-size transfers are performed between them and
memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.
ANDC
B
CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR
Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with
immediate data.
ORC
B
CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR
Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate
data.
XORC
B
CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR
Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with
immediate data.
NOP
—
PC + 2 → PC
Only increments the program counter.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 50 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Type
Instruction
Size*
Function
Block data
transfer
instruction
EEPMOV.B
—
if R4L ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+
R4L–1 → R4L
Until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W
—
if R4 ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+
R4–1 → R4
Until R4 = 0
else next;
1
Transfers a data block according to parameters set in
general registers R4L or R4, ER5, and ER6.
R4L or R4: size of block (bytes)
ER5: starting source address
ER6: starting destination address
Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the
transfer is completed.
Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
2.6.4
Basic Instruction Formats
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An
instruction consists of an operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address
extension (EA field), and a condition field (cc).
(1) Operation Field: Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the
operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of
the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields.
(2) Register Field: Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data
registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register
field.
(3) Effective Address Extension: Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute
address, or a displacement.
(4) Condition Field: Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 51 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Figure 2.12 shows examples of instruction formats.
(1) Operation field only
op
NOP, RTS, etc.
(2) Operation field and register fields
op
rm
rn
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
op
rn
rm
MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc.
EA (disp)
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op
cc
EA (disp)
BRA d:16, etc.
Figure 2.12 Instruction Formats (Examples)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 52 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.7
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
2.7.1
Addressing Mode
The CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.4. Each instruction uses a subset of
these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and
immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter
relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or
absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and
BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand.
Table 2.4
Addressing Modes
No.
Addressing Mode
Symbol
1
Register direct
Rn
2
Register indirect
@ERn
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn)
4
Register indirect with post-increment
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@ERn+
@–ERn
5
Absolute address
@aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32
6
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
7
Program-counter relative
@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
8
Memory indirect
@@aa:8
(1) Register Direct—Rn
The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the
operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7
can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers.
(2) Register Indirect—@ERn
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the
address of the operand on memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24
bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 53 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
(3) Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)
A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn)
specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory
operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added.
(4) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn
• Register indirect with post-increment—@ERn+
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the
address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address
register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte
access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. For word or
longword transfer instruction, the register value should be even.
• Register indirect with pre-decrement—@-ERn
The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field
in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. The result is
also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer
instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. For word or longword transfer instruction,
the register value should be even.
(5) Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32
The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address
may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long
(@aa:32).
To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits
(@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF).
For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can
access the entire address space.
A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8
bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Table 2.5 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 54 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.5
Absolute Address Access Ranges
Normal Mode*
Advanced Mode
8 bits (@aa:8)
H'FF00 to H'FFFF
H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF
16 bits (@aa:16)
H'0000 to H'FFFF
H'000000 to H'007FFF,
H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF
Absolute Address
Data address
32 bits (@aa:32)
Program instruction
address
Note:
*
H'000000 to H'FFFFFF
24 bits (@aa:24)
Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
(6) Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32
The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an
operand.
The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit
number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a
vector address.
(7) Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in
the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address.
Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0
(H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next
instruction, so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to
+32768 bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should
be an even number.
(8) Memory Indirect—@@aa:8
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit
absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address.
The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255
(H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode*
the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode
the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be all 0 (H'00).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 55 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details,
refer to section 4, Exception Handling.
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Specified
by @aa:8
Branch address
Reserved
Specified
by @aa:8
Branch address
(a) Normal Mode*
(b) Advanced Mode
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Figure 2.13 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the
least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or instruction code to be fetched
at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory
Data Formats.)
2.7.2
Effective Address Calculation
Table 2.6 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal
mode* the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address.
Note: * Cannot be set in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 56 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
4
3
rm
rn
r
r
disp
r
op
r
• Register indirect with pre-decrement @–ERn
op
Register indirect with post-increment or
pre-decrement
• Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
op
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)
op
Register indirect (@ERn)
op
Register direct (Rn)
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
disp
1
2
4
0
1, 2, or 4
General register contents
Byte
Word
Longword
0
0
0
0
1, 2, or 4
General register contents
Sign extension
General register contents
General register contents
Operand Size Value added
31
31
31
31
31
Effective Address Calculation
24 23
24 23
24 23
24 23
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Operand is general register contents.
Effective Address (EA)
0
0
0
0
Table 2.6
2
1
No.
Section 2 CPU
Effective Address Calculation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 57 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 58 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
6
op
op
abs
abs
abs
op
IMM
Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
@aa:32
op
@aa:24
@aa:16
op
abs
Absolute address
5
@aa:8
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
No.
Effective Address Calculation
24 23
24 23
24 23
24 23
87
16 15
Sign extension
H'FFFF
Operand is immediate data.
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Effective Address (EA)
0
0
0
0
Section 2 CPU
abs
op
abs
• Advanced mode
op
• Normal mode*
Memory indirect @@aa:8
op
@(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC)
Program-counter relative
disp
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
31
31
31
87
abs
87
abs
Memory contents
15
Memory contents
H'000000
H'000000
disp
PC contents
Sign
extension
23
23
Effective Address Calculation
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
8
7
No.
0
0
0
0
0
0
24 23
24 23
24 23
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
Don’t care
31
H'00
16 15
Effective Address (EA)
0
0
0
Section 2 CPU
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 59 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.8
Processing States
2.8.1
Overview
The CPU has five main processing states: the reset state, exception handling state, program
execution state, bus-released state, and power-down state. Figure 2.14 shows a diagram of the
processing states. Figure 2.15 indicates the state transitions.
Reset state
The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules have been
initialized and are stopped.
Exception-handling
state
A transient state in which the CPU changes the normal
processing flow in response to a reset, interrupt, or trap
instruction.
Processing
states
Program execution
state
The CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
Bus-released state
The external bus has been released in response to a bus
request signal from a bus master other than the CPU.
Sleep mode
Power-down state
CPU operation is stopped
to conserve power.*
Software standby
mode
Hardware standby
mode
Note: * The power-down state also includes a medium-speed mode, module stop mode,
subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. Subclock functions (subactive
mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are not available in the H8S/2623 Group,
but are available in the H8S/2626 Group.
Figure 2.14 Processing States
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 60 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
End of bus request
Bus request
Program execution state
SLEEP
instruction
with
SSBY = 0
ha
nd
lin
g
d
o
ha f ex
nd ce
lin pti
g on
Re
qu
es
tf
or
ex
ce
pt
ion
s
bu
t
of est
es
d u
qu
En req
re
s
Bu
Bus-released state
Sleep mode
upt
req
SLEEP
instruction
with
SSBY = 1
En
rr
Inte
t
ues
Exception handling state
External interrupt request
Software standby mode
RES= High
STBY= High, RES= Low
Reset state*1
Hardware standby mode*2
Reset state
Power-down state*3
Notes: 1. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES
goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows.
2. From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low.
3. Apart from these states, there are also the watch mode, subactive mode, and the subsleep mode in the
H8S/2626 Group. See section 21B, Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group].
Figure 2.15 State Transitions
2.8.2
Reset State
When the RES input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. All
interrupts are masked in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal
changes from low to high.
The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details, refer to section 12,
Watchdog Timer.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 61 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.8.3
Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal
processing flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address
(vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address.
(1) Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority
Exception handling is performed for traces, resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2.7
indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exception handling is
always accepted, in the program execution state.
Exception handling and the stack structure depend on the interrupt control mode set in SYSCR.
Table 2.7
Exception Handling Types and Priority
Priority
Type of Exception
Detection Timing
Start of Exception Handling
High
Reset
Synchronized with clock
Exception handling starts
immediately after a low-to-high
transition at the RES pin, or
when the watchdog timer
overflows.
Trace
End of instruction execution
or end of exception-handling
1
sequence*
When the trace (T) bit is set to
1, the trace starts at the end of
the current instruction or current
exception-handling sequence
Interrupt
End of instruction execution
or end of exception-handling
2
sequence*
When an interrupt is requested,
exception handling starts at the
end of the current instruction or
current exception-handling
sequence
Trap instruction
When TRAPA instruction
is executed
Exception handling starts when
a trap (TRAPA) instruction is
3
executed*
Low
Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception-handling is not
executed at the end of the RTE instruction.
2. Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions,
or immediately after reset exception handling.
3. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted, in the program execution state.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 62 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
(2) Reset Exception Handling
After the RES pin has gone low and the reset state has been entered, when RES pin goes high
again, reset exception handling starts. The CPU enters the reset state when the RES is low. When
reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector
table and starts program execution from that address. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled
during reset exception handling and after it ends.
(3) Traces
Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is entered when the T bit of EXR
is set to 1. When trace mode is established, trace exception handling starts at the end of each
instruction.
At the end of a trace exception-handling sequence, the T bit of EXR is cleared to 0 and trace mode
is cleared. Interrupt masks are not affected.
The T bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when the RTE instruction is executed to
return from the trace exception-handling routine, trace mode is entered again. Trace exceptionhandling is not executed at the end of the RTE instruction.
Trace mode is not entered in interrupt control mode 0, regardless of the state of the T bit.
(4) Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling
When interrupt or trap-instruction exception handling begins, the CPU references the stack pointer
(ER7) and pushes the program counter and other control registers onto the stack. Next, the CPU
alters the settings of the interrupt mask bits in the control registers. Then the CPU fetches a start
address (vector) from the exception vector table and program execution starts from that start
address.
Figure 2.16 shows the stack after exception handling ends.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 63 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Normal mode*2
SP
SP
EXR
Reserved*1
CCR
CCR*1
CCR
CCR*1
PC
(16 bits)
PC
(16 bits)
(a) Interrupt control mode 0
(b) Interrupt control mode 2
Advanced mode
SP
SP
EXR
Reserved*1
CCR
CCR
PC
(24 bits)
PC
(24 bits)
(c) Interrupt control mode 0
(d) Interrupt control mode 2
Notes: 1. Ignored when returning.
2. Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Figure 2.16 Stack Structure after Exception Handling (Examples)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 64 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.8.4
Program Execution State
In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
2.8.5
Bus-Released State
This is a state in which the bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master
other than the CPU. While the bus is released, the CPU halts operations.
Bus masters other than the CPU are data transfer controller (DTC).
For further details, refer to section 7, Bus Controller.
2.8.6
Power-Down State
The power-down state includes both modes in which the CPU stops operating and modes in which
the CPU does not stop. There are five modes in which the CPU stops operating: sleep mode,
software standby mode, hardware standby mode, subsleep mode*, and watch mode*. There are
also three other power-down modes: medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and subactive
mode*. In medium-speed mode the CPU and other bus masters operate on a medium-speed clock.
Module stop mode permits halting of the operation of individual modules, other than the CPU.
Subactive mode*, subsleep mode*, and watch mode* are power-down states using subclock input.
For details, refer to section 21B, Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group].
Note: * Supported only in the H8S/2626 Group; not available in the H8S/2623 Group.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 65 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.9
Basic Timing
2.9.1
Overview
The H8S/2600 CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol φ. The period from one
rising edge of φ to the next is referred to as a "state." The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of
one, two, or three states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory, on-chip
supporting modules, and the external address space.
2.9.2
On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM)
On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and
word transfer instruction. Figure 2.17 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 2.18 shows
the pin states.
Bus cycle
T1
φ
Internal address bus
Read
access
Address
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
Read data
Internal write signal
Write
access
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 2.17 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 66 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Bus cycle
T1
φ
Address bus
Retained
AS
High
RD
High
HWR, LWR
High
Data bus
High-impedance state
Figure 2.18 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 67 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.9.3
On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing
The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits
wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed. Figure 2.19 shows the
access timing for the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 2.20 shows the pin states.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
φ
Internal address bus
Address
Internal read signal
Read
access
Internal data bus
Read data
Internal write signal
Write
access
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 2.19 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 68 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Bus cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address bus
Retained
AS
High
RD
High
HWR, LWR
High
Data bus
High-impedance state
Figure 2.20 Pin States during On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 69 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.9.4
On-Chip HCAN Module Access Timing
On-chip HCAN module access is performed in four states. The data bus width is 16 bits. Wait
states can be inserted by means of a wait request from the HCAN. On-chip HCAN module access
timing is shown in figures 2.21 and 2.22, and the pin states in figure 2.23.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
T4
φ
Internal address bus
Address
HCAN read signal
Read
Internal data bus
Read data
HCAN write signal
Write
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 2.21 On-Chip HCAN Module Access Cycle (No Wait State)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 70 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
Bus cycle
T2
T1
T3
Tw
Tw
T4
φ
Internal address bus
Address
HCAN read signal
Read
Internal data bus
Read data
HCAN write signal
Write
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 2.22 On-Chip HCAN Module Access Cycle (Wait States Inserted)
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
T4
φ
Address bus
Retained
AS
High
RD
High
HWR, LWR
High
Data bus
High-impedance state
Figure 2.23 Pin States in On-Chip HCAN Module Access
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 71 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 2 CPU
2.9.5
External Address Space Access Timing
The external address space is accessed with an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus width in a two-state or
three-state bus cycle. In three-state access, wait states can be inserted. For further details, refer to
section 7, Bus Controller.
2.10
Usage Note
2.10.1
TAS Instruction
Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. The TAS
instruction is not generated by the Renesas Technology H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers.
If the TAS instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, ensure that only register ER0,
ER1, ER4, or ER5 is used.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 72 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.1
Overview
3.1.1
Operating Mode Selection
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have four operating modes (modes 4 to 7). These
modes enable selection of the CPU operating mode, enabling/disabling of on-chip ROM, and the
initial bus width setting, by setting the mode pins (MD2 to MD0).
Table 3.1 lists the MCU operating modes.
Table 3.1
MCU Operating Mode Selection
External Data Bus
MCU
CPU
Operating
Operating
MD2 MD1 MD0 Mode
Description
Mode
0*
1*
0
2*
0
1
3*
—
1
—
—
Initial
Width
—
—
Max.
Width
0
1
4
1
0
5
0
1
6
1
7
Note:
0
On-Chip
ROM
*
Advanced On-chip ROM disabled, Disabled
expanded mode
16 bits
16 bits
8 bits
16 bits
16 bits
0
On-chip ROM enabled, Enabled
expanded mode
8 bits
1
Single-chip mode
—
Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
The CPU’s architecture allows for 4 Gbytes of address space, but the H8S/2626 Group and
H8S/2623 Group actually access a maximum of 16 Mbytes.
Modes 4 to 6 are externally expanded modes that allow access to external memory and peripheral
devices.
The external expansion modes allow switching between 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes. After program
execution starts, an 8-bit or 16-bit address space can be set for each area, depending on the bus
controller setting. If 16-bit access is selected for any one area, 16-bit bus mode is set; if 8-bit
access is selected for all areas, 8-bit bus mode is set.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 73 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Note that the functions of each pin depend on the operating mode.
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group can be used only in modes 4 to 7. This means that the
mode pins must be set to select one of these modes. Do not change the inputs at the mode pins
during operation.
3.1.2
Register Configuration
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates
the inputs at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0), and a system control register (SYSCR) that controls
the operation of the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group chip. Table 3.2 summarizes these
registers.
Table 3.2
MCU Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Mode control register
MDCR
R/W
Undetermined
H'FDE7
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'01
H'FDE5
Pin function control register
PFCR
R/W
H'0D/H'00
H'FDEB
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 74 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.2
Register Descriptions
3.2.1
Mode Control Register (MDCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
1
0
0
0
0
—*
—*
—*
R/W
—
—
—
—
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by pins MD2 to MD0.
MDCR is an 8-bit register that indicates the current operating mode of the H8S/2626 Group or
H8S/2623 Group chip.
Bit 7—Reserved: Only 1 should be written to this bit.
Bits 6 to 3—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bits 2 to 0—Mode Select 2 to 0 (MDS2 to MDS0): These bits indicate the input levels at pins
MD2 to MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS2 to MDS0 correspond to MD2 to MD0.
MDS2 to MDS0 are read-only bits-they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD2 to MD0) input
levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. These latches are canceled by a reset.
3.2.2
Bit
System Control Register (SYSCR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MACS
—
INTM1
INTM0
NMIEG
—
—
RAME
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects saturating or non-saturating calculation
for the MAC instruction, selects the interrupt control mode and the detected edge for NMI, and
enables or disables on-chip RAM.
SYSCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. SYSCR is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 75 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Bit 7—MAC Saturation (MACS): Selects either saturating or non-saturating calculation for the
MAC instruction.
Bit 7
MACS
Description
0
Non-saturating calculation for MAC instruction
1
Saturating calculation for MAC instruction
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Reserved: This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bits 5 and 4—Interrupt Control Mode 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select the control
mode of the interrupt controller. For details of the interrupt control modes, see section 5.4.1,
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation.
Bit 5
Bit 4
INTM1
INTM0
Interrupt
Control Mode
Description
0
0
0
Control of interrupts by I bit
1
—
Setting prohibited
0
2
Control of interrupts by I2 to I0 bits and IPR
1
—
Setting prohibited
1
(Initial value)
Bit 3—NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the valid edge of the NMI interrupt input.
Bit 3
NMIEG
Description
0
An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI input
1
An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI input
Bit 2—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to this bit.
Bit 1—Reserved: This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 76 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is
initialized when the reset status is released. It is not initialized in software standby mode.
Bit 0
RAME
Description
0
On-chip RAM is disabled
1
On-chip RAM is enabled
(Initial value)
Note: When the DTC is used, the RAME bit must be set to 1.
3.2.3
Bit
Pin Function Control Register (PFCR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
BUZZE
—
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
0
0
0
0
1/0
1/0
0
1/0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PFCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs address output control in external
expanded mode.
PFCR is initialized to H'0D/H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its previous
state in software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Bit 5—BUZZE Output Enable (BUZZE): This bit is for use only in the H8S/2626. Only 0
should be writtn to this bit.
Bits 3 to 0—Address Output Enable 3 to 0 (AE3 to AE0): These bits select enabling or
disabling of address outputs A8 to A23 in ROMless expanded mode and modes with ROM. When
a pin is enabled for address output, the address is output regardless of the corresponding DDR
setting. When a pin is disabled for address output, it becomes an output port when the
corresponding DDR bit is set to 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 77 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
Description
0
0
0
0
A8–A23 address output disabled
1
A8 address output enabled; A9–A23 address output disabled
0
A8, A9 address output enabled; A10–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A10 address output enabled; A11–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A11 address output enabled; A12–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A12 address output enabled; A13–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A13 address output enabled; A14–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A14 address output enabled; A15–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A15 address output enabled; A16–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A16 address output enabled; A17–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A17 address output enabled; A18–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A18 address output enabled; A19–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A19 address output enabled; A20–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A20 address output enabled; A21–A23 address output
disabled
(Initial value*)
0
A8–A21 address output enabled; A22, A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A23 address output enabled
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Note:
*
(Initial value*)
In expanded mode with ROM, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'0000.
In ROMless expanded mode, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'1101.
Address pins A0 to A7 are made address outputs by setting the corresponding DDR
bits to 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 78 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.3
Operating Mode Descriptions
3.3.1
Mode 4
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled.
Ports 1, A, B, and C, function as an address bus, ports D and E function as a data bus, and part of
port F carries bus control signals.
The initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 8bit access is designated by the bus controller for all areas, the bus mode switches to 8 bits.
3.3.2
Mode 5
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled.
Ports 1, A, B, and C, function as an address bus, ports D and E function as a data bus, and part of
port F carries bus control signals.
The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 16bit access is designated by the bus controller for any area, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and
port E becomes a data bus.
3.3.3
Mode 6
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled.
Ports 1, A, B, and C, function as input port pins immediately after a reset. Address output can be
performed by setting the corresponding DDR (data direction register) bits to 1.
Port D function as a data bus, and part of port F carries data bus signals.
The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 16bit access is designated by the bus controller for any area, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and
port E becomes a data bus.
3.3.4
Mode 7
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled,
but external addresses cannot be accessed.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 79 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
All I/O ports are available for use as input-output ports.
3.4
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
The pin functions of ports 1 and A to F vary depending on the operating mode. Table 3.3 shows
their functions in each operating mode.
Table 3.3
Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
A
P*/A
P*/A
P*/A
P
P
Port 1
P10
P11 to P13
A
P*/A
Port A
PA4 to PA0
A
A
A
A
P*/A
P*/A
P
P
Port B
Port C
A
A
P*/A
Port D
D
Port E
D
P*/D
D
P*/D
PF7
P/D*
P/C*
P/C*
P/C*
PF6 to PF4
C
PF3
P/C*
P*/C
C
P*/C
C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
Port F
PF2 to PF0
P
P
P
P*/C
P
Legend:
P: I/O port
A: Address bus output
D: Data bus I/O
C: Control signals, clock I/O
Note: * After reset
3.5
Address Map in Each Operating Mode
An address map of the H8S/2623 and H8S/2626 is shown in figure 3.1, and an address map of the
H8S/2622, and H8S/2625 in figure 3.2, and an address map of the H8S/2621 and H8S/2624 in
figure 3.3.
The address space is 16 Mbytes in modes 4 to 7 (advanced modes).
The address space is divided into eight areas for modes 4 to 7. For details, see section 7, Bus
Controller.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 80 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Modes 4 and 5
(advanced expanded modes
with on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
Mode 6
(advanced expanded mode
with on-chip ROM enabled)
H'000000
External address
space
Mode 7
(advanced single-chip mode)
H'000000
On-chip ROM
On-chip ROM
H'03FFFF
H'040000
H'FFB000
H'FFC000
Reserved area
On-chip RAM*
H'FFB000
H'FFC000
External address
space
Reserved area
On-chip RAM*
H'FFC000
On-chip RAM
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
External area
H'FFEFC0
External area
H'FFF800
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
External area
H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0 On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF40
External area
H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0 On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3.1 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2623 and H8S/2626
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 81 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Modes 4 and 5
(advanced expanded modes
with on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
Mode 6
(advanced expanded mode
with on-chip ROM enabled)
H'000000
Mode 7
(advanced single-chip mode)
H'000000
On-chip ROM
External address
space
On-chip ROM
H'01FFFF
H'020000
Reserved area
H'040000
H'FFB000
H'FFD000
Reserved area
On-chip RAM*
H'FFB000
H'FFD000
External address
space
Reserved area
On-chip RAM*
H'FFD000
On-chip RAM
H'FFEFBF
H'FFEFC0
External area
H'FFEFC0
External area
H'FFF800
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
External area
H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0 On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF40
External area
H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0 On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3.2 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2622 and H8S/2625
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 82 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Modes 4 and 5
(advanced expanded modes
with on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
Mode 6
(advanced expanded mode
with on-chip ROM enabled)
H'000000
Mode 7
(advanced single-chip mode)
H'000000
On-chip ROM
On-chip ROM
H'00FFFF
H'010000
External address
space
Reserved area
H'040000
External address
space
H'FFB000
H'FFB000
Reserved area
Reserved area
H'FFE000
On-chip RAM*
H'FFE000
On-chip RAM*
H'FFEFC0
External area
H'FFEFC0
External area
H'FFF800
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
H'FFE000
H'FFEFBF
On-chip RAM
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF40
External area
H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0 On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF40
External area
H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0 On-chip RAM*
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3.3 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2621 and H8S/2624
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 83 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 84 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1
Overview
4.1.1
Exception Handling Types and Priority
As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt.
Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions occur
simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Trap instruction exceptions
are accepted at all times, in the program execution state.
Exception handling sources, the stack structure, and the operation of the CPU vary depending on
the interrupt control mode set by the INTM0 and INTM1 bits of SYSCR.
Table 4.1
Exception Types and Priority
Priority
Exception Type
Start of Exception Handling
High
Reset
Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or
when the watchdog timer overflows. The CPU enters the reset
state when the RES pin is low.
Low
1
Trace*
Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
handling ends, if the trace (T) bit is set to 1
Direct transition
Starts when a direction transition occurs as the result of SLEEP
instruction execution.
Interrupt
Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
2
handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued*
Trap instruction
3
(TRAPA)*
Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA)
Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception handling is not
executed after execution of an RTE instruction.
2. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC
instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling.
3. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in program
execution state.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 85 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1.2
Exception Handling Operation
Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows:
1. The program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended register (EXR) are
pushed onto the stack.
2. The interrupt mask bits are updated. The T bit is cleared to 0.
3. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution
starts from that address.
For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out.
4.1.3
Exception Vector Table
The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4.1. Different vector addresses are
assigned to different exception sources.
Table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses.
Reset
Reset
Manual reset*1
Trace
Exception
sources
External interrupts: NMI, IRQ5 to IRQ0
Interrupts
Internal interrupts: 47 interrupt sources*2 in
on-chip supporting modules
Trap instruction
Notes: 1. Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
2. 48 interrupt sources in the H8S/2626 Group.
Figure 4.1 Exception Sources
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 86 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
Table 4.2
Exception Vector Table
Vector Address*
Exception Source
Vector Number
Advanced Mode
Reset
0
H'0000 to H'0003
3
Manual reset*
1
H'0004 to H'0007
Reserved
2
H'0008 to H'000B
3
H'000C to H'000F
4
H'0010 to H'0013
5
H'0014 to H'0017
Direct transitions* (H8S/2626 only)
6
H'0018 to H'001B
External interrupt
7
H'001C to H'001F
Trace
4
NMI
Trap instruction (4 sources)
Reserved
External interrupt
Reserved
2
Internal interrupt*
8
H'0020 to H'0023
9
H'0024 to H'0027
10
H'0028 to H'002B
11
H'002C to H'002F
12
H'0030 to H'0033
13
H'0034 to H'0037
1
14
H'0038 to H'003B
15
H'003C to H'003F
IRQ0
16
H'0040 to H'0043
IRQ1
17
H'0044 to H'0047
IRQ2
18
H'0048 to H'004B
IRQ3
19
H'004C to H'004F
IRQ4
20
H'0050 to H'0053
IRQ5
21
H'0054 to H'0057
22
H'0058 to H'005B
23
H'005C to H'005F
24

127
H'0060 to H'0063

H'01FC to H'01FF
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. For details of internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, Interrupt Exception Handling
Vector Table.
3. Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
4. See section 21B.11, Direct Transitions, for details.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 87 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.2
Reset
4.2.1
Overview
A reset has the highest exception priority.
When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group
enters the reset state. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip
supporting modules. Immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set.
Reset exception handling begins when the RES pin changes from low to high.
The chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details see section 12,
Watchdog Timer.
4.2.2
Reset Sequence
The chip enters the reset state when the RES pin goes low.
To ensure that the chip is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. To reset the
chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states.
When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset
exception handling as follows:
1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are
initialized, the T bit is cleared to 0 in EXR, and the I bit is set to 1 in EXR and CCR.
2. The reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program
execution starts from the address indicated by the PC.
Figures 4.2 and 4.3 show examples of the reset sequence.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 88 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
Internal
Prefetch of first
processing program instruction
Vector fetch
φ
*
*
*
(1)
(3)
(5)
RES
Address bus
RD
High
HWR, LWR
D15 to D0
(1) (3)
(2) (4)
(5)
(6)
(2)
(4)
(6)
Reset exception handling vector address (when reset, (1) = H'000000, (3) = H'000002)
Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)
Start address ((5) = (2) (4))
First program instruction
Note: * Three program wait states are inserted.
Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Modes 4 and 5)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 89 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
Prefetch of
Internal first program
processing instruction
Vector fetch
φ
RES
(3)
(1)
Internal
address bus
(5)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
High
Internal data
bus
(2)
(4)
(6)
(1) (3) Reset exception handling vector address (when reset, (1) = H'000000,
(3) = H'000002)
(2) (4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)
(5)
Start address ((5) = (2) (4))
(6)
First program instruction
Figure 4.3 Reset Sequence (Modes 6 and 7)
4.2.3
Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and
CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests,
including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is
always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes
the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx: 32, SP).
4.2.4
State of On-Chip Supporting Modules after Reset Release
After reset release, MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC are initialized to H'3F, H'FF, and H'FF, respectively,
and all modules except the DTC enter module stop mode. Consequently, on-chip supporting
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 90 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
module registers cannot be read or written to. Register reading and writing is enabled when
module stop mode is exited.
4.3
Traces
Traces are enabled in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is not activated in interrupt control
mode 0, irrespective of the state of the T bit. For details of interrupt control modes, see section 5,
Interrupt Controller.
If the T bit in EXR is set to 1, trace mode is activated. In trace mode, a trace exception occurs on
completion of each instruction.
Trace mode is canceled by clearing the T bit in EXR to 0. It is not affected by interrupt masking.
Table 4.3 shows the state of CCR and EXR after execution of trace exception handling.
Interrupts are accepted even within the trace exception handling routine.
The T bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when control is returned from the trace
exception handling routine by the RTE instruction, trace mode resumes.
Trace exception handling is not carried out after execution of the RTE instruction.
Table 4.3
Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling
Interrupt Control Mode
CCR
I
0
2
EXR
UI
I2 to I0
T
Trace exception handling cannot be used.
1
—
—
0
Legend:
1: Set to 1
0: Cleared to 0
—: Retains value prior to execution.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 91 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.4
Interrupts
Interrupt exception handling can be requested by seven external sources (NMI, IRQ5 to IRQ0) and
internal sources (H8S/2626 Group: 48, H8S/2623 Group: 47) in the on-chip supporting modules.
Figure 4.4 classifies the interrupt sources and the number of interrupts of each type.
The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts include the watchdog timer (WDT),
16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU), serial communication interface (SCI), data transfer controller
(DTC), PC break controller (PBC), controller area network (HCAN), and A/D converter. Each
interrupt source has a separate vector address.
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The
interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to
eight priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control.
For details of interrupts, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
External
interrupts
Interrupts
Internal
interrupts
Notes:
NMI (1)
IRQ5 to IRQ0 (6)
WDT* H8S/2626 Group (2), H8S/2623 Group (1)
TPU (26)
SCI (12)
DTC (1)
PBC (1)
HCAN (5)
A/D converter (1)
Numbers in parentheses are the numbers of interrupt sources.
* When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt
request at each counter overflow.
Figure 4.4 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 92 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.5
Trap Instruction
Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction
exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state.
The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector
number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code.
Table 4.4 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling.
Table 4.4
Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling
Interrupt Control Mode
CCR
EXR
I
UI
I2 to I0
T
0
1
—
—
—
2
1
—
—
0
Legend:
1: Set to 1
0: Cleared to 0
—: Retains value prior to execution.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 93 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.6
Stack Status after Exception Handling
Figures 4.5 (1) and 4.5 (2) show the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling
and interrupt exception handling.
SP
SP
CCR
CCR*
PC
(16 bits)
(a) Interrupt control mode 0
EXR
Reserved*
CCR
CCR*
PC
(16 bits)
(b) Interrupt control mode 2
Note: * Ignored on return.
Figure 4.5 (1) Stack Status after Exception Handling
(Normal Modes: Not Available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group)
SP
SP
CCR
EXR
Reserved*
CCR
PC
(24 bits)
PC
(24 bits)
(a) Interrupt control mode 0
(b) Interrupt control mode 2
Note: * Ignored on return.
Figure 4.5 (2) Stack Status after Exception Handling
(Advanced Modes)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 94 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.7
Notes on Use of the Stack
When accessing word data or longword data, the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group assumes
that the lowest address bit is 0. The stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction
or longword transfer instruction, and the value of the stack pointer (SP, ER7) should always be
kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers:
PUSH.W
Rn
(or MOV.W Rn, @-SP)
PUSH.L
ERn
(or MOV.L ERn, @-SP)
Use the following instructions to restore registers:
POP.W
Rn
(or MOV.W @SP+, Rn)
POP.L
ERn
(or MOV.L @SP+, ERn)
Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.6 shows an example of what
happens when the SP value is odd.
CCR
SP
R1L
SP
PC
PC
SP
H'FFFEFA
H'FFFEFB
H'FFFEFC
H'FFFEFD
H'FFFEFF
TRAP instruction executed MOV.B R1L, @–ER7
SP set to H'FFFEFF
Data saved above SP
Contents of CCR lost
Legend: CCR: Condition code register
PC: Program counter
R1L: General register R1L
SP: Stack pointer
Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode
is 0, in advanced mode.
Figure 4.6 Operation when SP Value is Odd
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 95 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 4 Exception Handling
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 96 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1
Overview
5.1.1
Features
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group control interrupts by means of an interrupt controller.
The interrupt controller has the following features:
• Two interrupt control modes
 Any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in
the system control register (SYSCR).
• Priorities settable with IPR
 An interrupt priority register (IPR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Eight priority
levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI.
 NMI is assigned the highest priority level of 8, and can be accepted at all times.
• Independent vector addresses
 All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for
the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine.
• Seven external interrupts
 NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising edge or falling
edge can be selected for NMI.
 Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, can be selected for IRQ5
to IRQ0.
• DTC control
 DTC activation is performed by means of interrupts.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 97 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1.2
Block Diagram
A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 5.1.
CPU
INTM1 INTM0
SYSCR
NMIEG
NMI input
NMI input unit
IRQ input
IRQ input unit
ISR
ISCR
IER
Interrupt
request
Vector
number
Priority
determination
I
Internal interrupt
request
SWDTEND to
SLE0
CCR
I2 to I0
IPR
Interrupt controller
Legend:
ISCR
IER
ISR
IPR
SYSCR
: IRQ sense control register
: IRQ enable register
: IRQ status register
: Interrupt priority register
: System control register
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 98 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
EXR
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller.
Table 5.1
Interrupt Controller Pins
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Nonmaskable interrupt
NMI
Input
Nonmaskable external interrupt; rising or
falling edge can be selected
External interrupt
requests 5 to 0
IRQ5 to IRQ0
Input
Maskable external interrupts; rising, falling, or
both edges, or level sensing, can be selected
5.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 5.2 summarizes the registers of the interrupt controller.
Table 5.2
Interrupt Controller Registers
1
Address*
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'01
H'FDE5
IRQ sense control register H
ISCRH
R/W
H'00
H'FE12
IRQ sense control register L
ISCRL
R/W
H'00
H'FE13
IRQ enable register
IER
R/W
H'00
H'FE14
IRQ status register
ISR
2
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FE15
Interrupt priority register A
IPRA
R/W
H'77
H'FEC0
Interrupt priority register B
IPRB
R/W
H'77
H'FEC1
Interrupt priority register C
IPRC
R/W
H'77
H'FEC2
Interrupt priority register D
IPRD
R/W
H'77
H'FEC3
Interrupt priority register E
IPRE
R/W
H'77
H'FEC4
Interrupt priority register F
IPRF
R/W
H'77
H'FEC5
Interrupt priority register G
IPRG
R/W
H'77
H'FEC6
Interrupt priority register H
IPRH
R/W
H'77
H'FEC7
Interrupt priority register I
IPRI
R/W
H'77
H'FEC8
Interrupt priority register J
IPRJ
R/W
H'77
H'FEC9
Interrupt priority register K
IPRK
R/W
H'77
H'FECA
Interrupt priority register M
IPRM
R/W
H'77
H'FECC
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 99 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2
Register Descriptions
5.2.1
System Control Register (SYSCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MACS
—
INTM1
INTM0
NMIEG
—
—
RAME
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the interrupt control mode, and the
detected edge for NMI.
Only bits 5 to 3 are described here; for details of the other bits, see section 3.2.2, System Control
Register (SYSCR).
SYSCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. SYSCR is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 5 and 4—Interrupt Control Mode 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select one of two
interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller.
Bit 5
Bit 4
INTM1
INTM0
Interrupt
Control Mode
Description
0
0
0
Interrupts are controlled by I bit
1
—
Setting prohibited
0
2
Interrupts are controlled by bits I2 to I0, and IPR
1
—
Setting prohibited
1
(Initial value)
Bit 3—NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the input edge for the NMI pin.
Bit 3
NMIEG
Description
0
Interrupt request generated at falling edge of NMI input
1
Interrupt request generated at rising edge of NMI input
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 100 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2.2
Bit
Interrupt Priority Registers A to K, M (IPRA to IPRK, IPRM)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
IPR6
IPR5
IPR4
—
IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
Initial value :
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
The IPR registers are twelve 8-bit readable/writable registers that set priorities (levels 7 to 0) for
interrupts other than NMI.
The correspondence between IPR settings and interrupt sources is shown in table 5.3.
The IPR registers set a priority (level 7 to 0) for each interrupt source other than NMI.
The IPR registers are initialized to H'77 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
They are not initialized in software standby mode.
Bits 7 and 3—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 101 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.3
Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and IPR Settings
Bits
Register
6 to 4
2 to 0
IPRA
IRQ0
IRQ1
IPRB
IRQ4
IRQ5
IPRC
IRQ2
IRQ3
1
—*
IPRD
WDT0
DTC
1
—*
IPRE
PC break
A/D converter, WDT1*
IPRF
TPU channel 0
TPU channel 1
IPRG
TPU channel 2
TPU channel 3
IPRH
TPU channel 4
TPU channel 5
IPRI
—*
IPRJ
—*
1
—*
IPRK
SCI channel 1
IPRM
HCAN
SCI channel 2
1
—*
1
2
1
SCI channel 0
Notes: 1. Reserved bits. These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
2. Valid only in the H8S/2626 Group.
As shown in table 5.3, multiple interrupts are assigned to one IPR. Setting a value in the range
from H'0 to H'7 in the 3-bit groups of bits 6 to 4 and 2 to 0 sets the priority of the corresponding
interrupt. The lowest priority level, level 0, is assigned by setting H'0, and the highest priority
level, level 7, by setting H'7.
When interrupt requests are generated, the highest-priority interrupt according to the priority
levels set in the IPR registers is selected. This interrupt level is then compared with the interrupt
mask level set by the interrupt mask bits (I2 to I0) in the extend register (EXR) in the CPU, and if
the priority level of the interrupt is higher than the set mask level, an interrupt request is issued to
the CPU.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 102 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2.3
Bit
IRQ Enable Register (IER)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling and disabling of interrupt requests
IRQ5 to IRQ0.
IER is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
They are not initialized in software standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Bits 5 to 0—IRQ5 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ7E to IRQ0E): These bits select whether IRQ5 to
IRQ0 are enabled or disabled.
Bit n
IRQnE
Description
0
IRQn interrupts disabled
1
IRQn interrupts enabled
(Initial value)
(n = 5 to 0)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 103 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2.4
IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)
ISCRH
Bit
15
14
13
12
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
:
Initial value :
R/W
11
10
9
8
IRQ5SCB IRQ5SCA IRQ4SCB IRQ4SCA
ISCRL
Bit
IRQ3SCB IRQ3SCA IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The ISCR registers are 16-bit readable/writable registers that select rising edge, falling edge, or
both edge detection, or level sensing, for the input at pins IRQ5 to IRQ0.
The ISCR registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
They are not initialized in software standby mode.
Bits 15 to 12—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Bits 11 to 0: IRQ7 Sense Control A and B (IRQ5SCA, IRQ5SCB) to IRQ0 Sense Control A and
B (IRQ0SCA, IRQ0SCB)
Bits 11 to 0
IRQ5SCB to
IRQ0SCB
IRQ5SCA to
IRQ0SCA
0
0
Interrupt request generated at IRQ5 to IRQ0 input low level
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ5 to IRQ0 input
0
Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ5 to IRQ0 input
1
Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of
IRQ5 to IRQ0 input
1
Description
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 104 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2.5
Bit
IRQ Status Register (ISR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
IRQ5F
IRQ4F
IRQ3F
IRQ2F
IRQ1F
IRQ0F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt
requests.
ISR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
They are not initialized in software standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Bits 5 to 0—IRQ5 to IRQ0 flags (IRQ5F to IRQ0F): These bits indicate the status of IRQ7 to
IRQ0 interrupt requests.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 105 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit n
IRQnF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions] (Initial value)
1
•
Cleared by reading IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1, then writing 0 to IRQnF flag
•
When interrupt exception handling is executed when low-level detection is set
(IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) and IRQn input is high
•
When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed when falling, rising, or bothedge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1 or IRQnSCA = 1)
•
When the DTC is activated by an IRQn interrupt, and the DISEL bit in MRB of the
DTC is cleared to 0
[Setting conditions]
•
When IRQn input goes low when low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA =
0)
•
When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input when falling edge detection is set
(IRQnSCB = 0, IRQnSCA = 1)
•
When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input when rising edge detection is set
(IRQnSCB = 1, IRQnSCA = 0)
•
When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQn input when both-edge detection is set
(IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 1)
(n = 5 to 0)
5.3
Interrupt Sources
Interrupt sources comprise external interrupts (NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0) and internal interrupts (48
sources: H8S/2626 Group, 47 sources: H8S/2623 Group).
5.3.1
External Interrupts
There are seven external interrupts: NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0. These interrupts can be used to
restore the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group chip from software standby mode.
NMI Interrupt: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU
regardless of the interrupt control mode or the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG
bit in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling
edge on the NMI pin.
The vector number for NMI interrupt exception handling is 7.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 106 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
IRQ5 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ5
to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 have the following features:
• Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling
edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ5 to IRQ0.
• Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 can be selected with IER.
• The interrupt priority level can be set with IPR.
• The status of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0
by software.
A block diagram of interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 is shown in figure 5.2.
IRQnE
IRQnSCA, IRQnSCB
IRQnF
Edge/level
detection circuit
IRQn interrupt
S
Q
request
R
IRQn input
Clear signal
Note: n = 5 to 0
Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0
Figure 5.3 shows the timing of setting IRQnF.
φ
IRQn
input pin
IRQnF
Figure 5.3 Timing of Setting IRQnF
The vector numbers for IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt exception handling are 21 to 16.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 107 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Detection of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for
input or output. However, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the
corresponding DDR to 0 and use the pin as an I/O pin for another function.
5.3.2
Internal Interrupts
There are 48 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules in the H8S/2626
Group, and 47 in the H8S/2623 Group.
• For each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status,
and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If both of these are set to 1
for a particular interrupt source, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller.
• The interrupt priority level can be set by means of IPR.
• The DTC can be activated by a TPU, 8-bit timer, SCI, or other interrupt request. When the
DTC is activated by an interrupt, the interrupt control mode and interrupt mask bits are not
affected.
5.3.3
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table
Table 5.4 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities.
For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority.
Priorities among modules can be set by means of the IPR. The situation when two or more
modules are set to the same priority, and priorities within a module, are fixed as shown in
table 5.4.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 108 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.4
Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities
Interrupt Source
NMI
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
External
pin
Vector
Address*
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
IPR
7
H'001C
16
H'0040
IPRA6 to 4
IRQ1
17
H'0044
IPRA2 to 0
IRQ2
IRQ3
18
19
H'0048
H'004C
IPRB6 to 4
IRQ4
IRQ5
20
21
H'0050
H'0054
IPRB2 to 0
IRQ0
High
Reserved
—
22
23
H'0058
H'005C
IPRC6 to 4
SWDTEND (software activation
interrupt end)
DTC
24
H'0060
IPRC2 to 0
WOVI0 (interval timer)
Watchdog
timer 0
25
H'0064
IPRD6 to 4
Reserved
—
26
H'0068
IPRD2 to 0
PC break
PC break
27
H'006C
IPRE6 to 4
ADI (A/D conversion end)
A/D
28
H'0070
IPRE2 to 0
WOVI1 (interval timer)
(H8S/2626 Group only)
Watchdog
timer 1
29
H'0074
Reserved
—
30
31
H'0078
H'007C
TGI0A (TGR0A input capture/
compare match)
TPU
channel 0
32
H'0080
TGI0B (TGR0B input capture/
compare match)
33
H'0084
TGI0C (TGR0C input capture/
compare match)
34
H'0088
TGI0D (TGR0D input capture/
compare match)
35
H'008C
TCI0V (overflow 0)
36
H'0090
37
38
39
H'0094
H'0098
H'009C
Reserved
—
Priority
IPRF6 to 4
Low
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 109 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
TGI1A (TGR1A input capture/
compare match)
TPU
channel 1
Vector
Address*
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
IPR
Priority
40
H'00A0
IPRF2 to 0
High
TGI1B (TGR1B input capture/
compare match)
41
H'00A4
TCI1V (overflow 1)
42
H'00A8
TCI1U (underflow 1)
43
H'00AC
44
H'00B0
TGI2B (TGR2B input capture/
compare match)
45
H'00B4
TCI2V (overflow 2)
46
H'00B8
TCI2U (underflow 2)
47
H'00BC
48
H'00C0
TGI3B (TGR3B input capture/
compare match)
49
H'00C4
TGI3C (TGR3C input capture/
compare match)
50
H'00C8
TGI3D (TGR3D input capture/
compare match)
51
H'00CC
TGI2A (TGR2A input capture/
compare match)
TGI3A (TGR3A input capture/
compare match)
TPU
channel 2
TPU
channel 3
52
H'00D0
Reserved
—
53
54
55
H'00D4
H'00D8
H'00DC
TGI4A (TGR4A input capture/
compare match)
TPU
channel 4
56
H'00E0
TGI4B (TGR4B input capture/
compare match)
57
H'00E4
TCI4V (overflow 4)
58
H'00E8
TCI4U (underflow 4)
59
H'00EC
TCI3V (overflow 3)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 110 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
IPRG6 to 4
IPRG2 to 0
IPRH6 to 4
Low
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
TGI5A (TGR5A input capture/
compare match)
TPU
channel 5
Vector
Address*
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
IPR
Priority
60
H'00F0
IPRH2 to 0
High
TGI5B (TGR5B input capture/
compare match)
61
H'00F4
TCI5V (overflow 5)
62
H'00F8
TCI5U (underflow 5)
63
H'00FC
64
65
66
H'0100
H'0104
H'0108
67
H'010C
68
69
70
H'0110
H'0114
H'0118
71
72
73
74
75
H'011C
H'0120
H'0124
H'0128
H'012C
76
77
78
79
H'0130
H'0134
H'0138
H'013C
80
H'0140
81
H'0144
TXI0 (transmit data empty 0)
82
H'0148
TEI0 (transmission end 0)
83
H'014C
84
H'0150
85
H'0154
TXI1 (transmit data empty 1)
86
H'0158
TEI1 (transmission end 1)
87
H'015C
88
H'0160
89
H'0164
TXI2 (transmit data empty 2)
90
H'0168
TEI2 (transmission end 2)
91
H'016C
Reserved
ERI0 (receive error 0)
RXI0 (reception completed 0)
ERI1 (receive error 1)
RXI1 (reception completed 1)
ERI2 (receive error 2)
RXI2 (reception completed 2)
—
SCI
channel 0
SCI
channel 1
SCI
channel 2
IPRI6 to 4
IPRI2 to 0
IPRJ6 to 4
IPRJ2 to 0
IPRK6 to 4
IPRK2 to 0
Low
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 111 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Vector
Address*
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
IPR
Priority
ERS0
HCAN
104
H'01A0
IPRM6 to 4
High
OVR0
105
H'01A4
RM0
106
H'01A8
RM1
107
H'01AC
SLE0
108
H'01B0
IPRM2 to 0
Low
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the start address.
5.4
Interrupt Operation
5.4.1
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation
Interrupt operations in the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group differ depending on the
interrupt control mode.
NMI interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state and the hardware standby state. In
the case of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts, an enable bit is provided for
each interrupt. Clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt request. Interrupt
sources for which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt controller.
Table 5.5 shows the interrupt control modes.
The interrupt controller performs interrupt control according to the interrupt control mode set by
the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in SYSCR, the priorities set in IPR, and the masking state indicated
by the I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR, and bits I2 to I0 in EXR.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 112 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.5
Interrupt Control Modes
SYSCR
Interrupt
Control Mode
Priority Setting
INTM1 INTM0 Registers
Interrupt
Mask Bits
0
0
—
2
1
—
Description
0
—
I
Interrupt mask control is
performed by the I bit.
1
—
—
Setting prohibited
0
IPR
I2 to I0
8-level interrupt mask control
is performed by bits I2 to I0.
8 priority levels can be set
with IPR.
1
—
—
Setting prohibited
Figure 5.4 shows a block diagram of the priority decision circuit.
Interrupt
control
mode 0
I
Interrupt
acceptance
control
Default priority
determination
Interrupt source
Vector number
8-level
mask control
IPR
I2 to I0
Interrupt control mode 2
Figure 5.4 Block Diagram of Interrupt Control Operation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 113 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
(1) Interrupt Acceptance Control
In interrupt control mode 0, interrupt acceptance is controlled by the I bit in CCR.
Table 5.6 shows the interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode.
Table 5.6
Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode (1)
Interrupt Mask Bits
Interrupt Control Mode
I
Selected Interrupts
0
0
All interrupts
1
NMI interrupts
*
All interrupts
2
*: Don't care
(2) 8-Level Control
In interrupt control mode 2, 8-level mask level determination is performed for the selected
interrupts in interrupt acceptance control according to the interrupt priority level (IPR).
The interrupt source selected is the interrupt with the highest priority level, and whose priority
level set in IPR is higher than the mask level.
Table 5.7
Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode (2)
Interrupt Control Mode
Selected Interrupts
0
All interrupts
2
Highest-priority-level (IPR) interrupt whose priority level is greater
than the mask level (IPR > I2 to I0).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 114 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
(3) Default Priority Determination
When an interrupt is selected by 8-level control, its priority is determined and a vector number is
generated.
If the same value is set for IPR, acceptance of multiple interrupts is enabled, and so only the
interrupt source with the highest priority according to the preset default priorities is selected and
has a vector number generated.
Interrupt sources with a lower priority than the accepted interrupt source are held pending.
Table 5.8 shows operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode.
Table 5.8
Operations and Control Signal Functions in Each Interrupt Control Mode
Interrupt
Acceptance Control
Interrupt
Control
Mode
INTM1
INTM0
I
0
0
0
2
1
0
IM
1
—*
Setting
X
8-Level Control
X
Default Priority
Determination
I2 to I0
IPR
—
—*
IM
PR
2
T
(Trace)
—
T
Legend:
: Interrupt operation control performed
X : No operation. (All interrupts enabled)
IM : Used as interrupt mask bit
PR: Sets priority.
— : Not used.
Notes: 1. Set to 1 when interrupt is accepted.
2. Keep the initial setting.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 115 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4.2
Interrupt Control Mode 0
Enabling and disabling of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts can be set by
means of the I bit in the CPU’s CCR. Interrupts are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and
disabled when set to 1.
Figure 5.5 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.
[1] If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
[2] The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt request is accepted. If the I
bit is set to 1, only an NMI interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending.
[3] Interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the highest-ranked interrupt according to
the priority system is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending.
[4] When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the
current instruction has been completed.
[5] The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on
the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the
interrupt handling routine.
[6] Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI.
[7] A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt
handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 116 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Program execution status
No
Interrupt generated?
Yes
Yes
NMI
No
No
I=0
Hold pending
Yes
No
IRQ0
Yes
No
IRQ1
Yes
SLE0
Yes
Save PC and CCR
I←1
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5.5 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance
in Interrupt Control Mode 0
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 117 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4.3
Interrupt Control Mode 2
Eight-level masking is implemented for IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts
by comparing the interrupt mask level set by bits I2 to I0 of EXR in the CPU with IPR.
Figure 5.6 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.
[1] If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
[2] When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the interrupt with the highest
priority according to the interrupt priority levels set in IPR is selected, and lower-priority
interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same priority are
generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the
priority system shown in table 5.4 is selected.
[3] Next, the priority of the selected interrupt request is compared with the interrupt mask level set
in EXR. An interrupt request with a priority no higher than the mask level set at that time is
held pending, and only an interrupt request with a priority higher than the interrupt mask level
is accepted.
[4] When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the
current instruction has been completed.
[5] The PC, CCR, and EXR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC
saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from
the interrupt handling routine.
[6] The T bit in EXR is cleared to 0. The interrupt mask level is rewritten with the priority level of
the accepted interrupt.
If the accepted interrupt is NMI, the interrupt mask level is set to H'7.
[7] A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt
handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 118 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Program execution status
Interrupt generated?
No
Yes
Yes
NMI
No
Level 7 interrupt?
No
Yes
Mask level 6
or below?
Yes
No
Level 6 interrupt?
No
Yes
Level 1 interrupt?
No
Mask level 5
or below?
No
Yes
Yes
Mask level 0?
No
Yes
Save PC, CCR, and EXR
Hold pending
Clear T bit to 0
Update mask level
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5.6 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in
Interrupt Control Mode 2
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 119 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 120 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
Internal
operation
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.
This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address.)
(2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed.)
(3)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.)
(5)
SP-2
(7)
SP-4
(1)
Internal
data us
Internal
write signal
Internal
read signal
Internal
address bus
Interrupt
request signal
φ
Instruction
prefetch
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Vector fetch
(12)
(11)
Internal
operation
(14)
(13)
Interrupt service
routine instruction
prefetch
(6) (8)
Saved PC and saved CCR
(9) (11) Vector address
(10) (12) Interrupt handling routine start address (vector
address contents)
(13)
Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10) (12))
(14)
First instruction of interrupt handling routine
(6)
Stack
5.4.4
Interrupt level determination
Wait for end of instruction
Interrupt
acceptance
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
Figure 5.7 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case
where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are
in on-chip memory.
Figure 5.7 Interrupt Exception Handling
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4.5
Interrupt Response Times
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group are capable of fast word transfer to on-chip memory,
and have the program area in on-chip ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM, enabling highspeed processing.
Table 5.9 shows interrupt response times - the interval between generation of an interrupt request
and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The execution status
symbols used in table 5.9 are explained in table 5.10.
Table 5.9
Interrupt Response Times
Normal Mode*
5
Advanced Mode
No.
Execution Status
INTM1 = 0
INTM1 = 1
INTM1 = 0
INTM1 = 1
1
1
Interrupt priority determination*
3
3
3
3
2
Number of wait states until
2
executing instruction ends*
1 to
(19+2·SI)
1 to
(19+2·SI)
1 to
(19+2·SI)
1 to
(19+2·SI)
3
PC, CCR, EXR stack save
2·SK
3·SK
2·SK
3·SK
4
Vector fetch
SI
SI
2·SI
2·SI
5
3
Instruction fetch*
2·SI
2·SI
2·SI
2·SI
6
4
Internal processing*
2
2
2
2
11 to 31
12 to 32
12 to 32
13 to 33
Total (using on-chip memory)
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Two states in case of internal interrupt.
Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions.
Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch.
Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch.
Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 121 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.10 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Statuses
Object of Access
External Device
8 Bit Bus
Symbol
Instruction fetch
SI
Branch address read
SJ
Stack manipulation
SK
16 Bit Bus
Internal
Memory
2-State
Access
3-State
Access
2-State
Access
3-State
Access
1
4
6+2m
2
3+m
Legend:
m: Number of wait states in an external device access.
5.5
Usage Notes
5.5.1
Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective
after execution of the instruction.
In other words, when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or
MOV, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will
still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that
interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt
request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the
higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored.
The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0.
Figure 5.8 shows an example in which the TCIEV bit in the TPU’s TIER0 register is cleared to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 122 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
TIER0 write cycle by CPU
TCIV exception handling
φ
Internal
address bus
TIER0 address
Internal
write signal
TCIEV
TCFV
TCIV
interrupt signal
Figure 5.8 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while
the interrupt is masked.
5.5.2
Instructions that Disable Interrupts
Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these
instructions is executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is
always executed. When the I bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid
two states after execution of the instruction ends.
5.5.3
Times when Interrupts are Disabled
There are times when interrupt acceptance is disabled by the interrupt controller.
The interrupt controller disables interrupt acceptance for a 3-state period after the CPU has
updated the mask level with an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 123 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.5.4
Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction
Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction.
With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer
is not accepted until the move is completed.
With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt
exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this
case is the address of the next instruction.
Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the
following coding should be used.
L1:
EEPMOV.W
MOV.W
R4,R4
BNE
L1
5.6
DTC Activation by Interrupt
5.6.1
Overview
The DTC can be activated by an interrupt. In this case, the following options are available:
• Interrupt request to CPU
• Activation request to DTC
• Selection of a number of the above
For details of interrupt requests that can be used with to activate the DTC, see section 8, Data
Transfer Controller (DTC).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 124 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.2
Block Diagram
Figure 5.9 shows a block diagram of the DTC interrupt controller.
Interrupt
request
IRQ
interrupt
On-chip
supporting
module
Interrupt source
clear signal
DTC activation
request vector
number
Selection
circuit
Select
signal
Clear signal
DTCER
Control logic
DTC
Clear signal
DTVECR
SWDTE
clear signal
Determination of
priority
CPU interrupt
request vector
number
CPU
I, I2 to I0
Interrupt controller
Figure 5.9 Interrupt Control for DTC
5.6.3
Operation
The interrupt controller has three main functions in DTC control.
(1) Selection of Interrupt Source
Interrupt sources can be specified as DTC activation requests or CPU interrupt requests by means
of the DTCE bit of DTCERA to DTCERG in the DTC.
After a DTC data transfer, the DTCE bit can be cleared to 0 and an interrupt request sent to the
CPU in accordance with the specification of the DISEL bit of MRB in the DTC.
When the DTC has performed the specified number of data transfers and the transfer counter value
is zero, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and an interrupt request is sent to the CPU after the DTC data
transfer.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 125 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
(2) Determination of Priority
The DTC activation source is selected in accordance with the default priority order, and is not
affected by mask or priority levels. See section 8.3.3, DTC Vector Table, for the respective
priorities.
(3) Operation Order
If the same interrupt is selected as a DTC activation source and a CPU interrupt source, the DTC
data transfer is performed first, followed by CPU interrupt exception handling.
Table 5.11 summarizes interrupt source selection and interrupt source clearance control according
to the settings of the DTCE bit of DTCERA to DTCERG in the DTC, and the DISEL bit of MRB
in the DTC.
Table 5.11 Interrupt Source Selection and Clearing Control
Settings
DTC
Interrupt Source Selection/Clearing Control
DTCE
DISEL
DTC
CPU
0
*
X
∆
1
0
∆
X
1
O
∆
Legend:
∆ : The relevant interrupt is used. Interrupt source clearing is performed.
(The CPU should clear the source flag in the interrupt handling routine.)
O: The relevant interrupt is used. The interrupt source is not cleared.
X : The relevant bit cannot be used.
* : Don’t care
(4) Notes on Use
SCI and A/D converter interrupt sources are cleared when the DTC reads or writes to the
prescribed register.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 126 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.1
Overview
The PC break controller (PBC) provides functions that simplify program debugging. Using these
functions, it is easy to create a self-monitoring debugger, enabling programs to be debugged with
the chip alone, without using an in-circuit emulator. Four break conditions can be set in the PBC:
instruction fetch, data read, data write, and data read/write.
6.1.1
Features
The PC break controller has the following features:
• Two break channels (A and B)
• The following can be set as break compare conditions:
 24 address bits
Bit masking possible
 Bus cycle
Instruction fetch
Data access: data read, data write, data read/write
 Bus master
Either CPU or CPU/DTC can be selected
• The timing of PC break exception handling after the occurrence of a break condition is as
follows:
 Immediately before execution of the instruction fetched at the set address (instruction
fetch)
 Immediately after execution of the instruction that accesses data at the set address (data
access)
• Module stop mode can be set
 The initial setting is for PBC operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing
module stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 127 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the PC break controller.
BARA
Mask control
Output control
BCRA
Control
logic
Comparator
Match signal
Internal address
Control
logic
Comparator
Match signal
Mask control
BARB
Output control
Access
status
PC break
interrupt
BCRB
Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of PC Break Controller
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 128 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.1.3
Register Configuration
Table 6.1 shows the PC break controller registers.
Table 6.1
PC Break Controller Registers
Initial Value
Address*
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Reset
Manual Reset*
Break address register A
BARA
R/W
H'000000
Retained
H'FE00
Break address register B
BARB
R/W
H'000000
Retained
H'FE04
Break control register A
BCRA
H'00
Retained
H'FE08
Break control register B
BCRB
R/(W)*
2
R/(W)*
H'00
Retained
H'FE09
Module stop control
register C
MSTPCRC
R/W
H'FF
Retained
H'FDEA
2
3
1
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
3. Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
6.2
Register Descriptions
6.2.1
Break Address Register A (BARA)
Bit
31
•••
24
—
•••
—
Initial value Undefined
—
R/W
•••
•••
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Unde- 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
fined
— R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
•••
•••
•••
•••
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
BARA is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the channel A break address.
BAA23 to BAA0 are initialized to H'000000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 31 to 24—Reserved: These bits return an undefined value if read, and cannot be modified.
Bits 23 to 0—Break Address A23 to A0 (BAA23 to BAA0): These bits hold the channel A PC
break address.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 129 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.2.2
Break Address Register B (BARB)
BARB is the channel B break address register. The bit configuration is the same as for BARA.
6.2.3
Break Control Register A (BCRA)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CMFA
CDA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
BAMRA2 BAMRA1 BAMRA0 CSELA1 CSELA0
0
BIEA
Note: * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
BCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls channel A PC breaks. BCRA (1) selects
the break condition bus master, (2) specifies bits subject to address comparison masking, and (3)
specifies whether the break condition is applied to an instruction fetch or a data access. It also
contains a condition match flag.
BCRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—Condition Match Flag A (CMFA): Set to 1 when a break condition set for channel A is
satisfied. This flag is not cleared to 0.
Bit 7
CMFA
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to CMFA after reading CMFA = 1
1
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When a condition set for channel A is satisfied
Bit 6—CPU Cycle/DTC Cycle Select A (CDA): Selects the channel A break condition bus
master.
Bit 6
CDA
Description
0
PC break is performed when CPU is bus master
1
PC break is performed when CPU or DTC is bus master
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 130 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Bits 5 to 3—Break Address Mask Register A2 to A0 (BAMRA2 to BAMRA0): These bits
specify which bits of the break address (BAA23–BAA0) set in BARA are to be masked.
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
BAMRA2 BAMRA1 BAMRA0 Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
All BARA bits are unmasked and included in break conditions
(Initial value)
1
BAA0 (lowest bit) is masked, and not included in break
conditions
0
BAA1–0 (lower 2 bits) are masked, and not included in break
conditions
1
BAA2–0 (lower 3 bits) are masked, and not included in break
conditions
0
BAA3–0 (lower 4 bits) are masked, and not included in break
conditions
1
BAA7–0 (lower 8 bits) are masked, and not included in break
conditions
0
BAA11–0 (lower 12 bits) are masked, and not included in break
conditions
1
BAA15–0 (lower 16 bits) are masked, and not included in break
conditions
Bits 2 and 1—Break Condition Select A (CSELA1, CSELA0): These bits select an instruction
fetch, data read, data write, or data read/write cycle as the channel A break condition.
Bit 2
Bit 1
CSELA1
CSELA0
Description
0
0
Instruction fetch is used as break condition
1
Data read cycle is used as break condition
0
Data write cycle is used as break condition
1
Data read/write cycle is used as break condition
1
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 131 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Bit 0—Break Interrupt Enable A (BIEA): Enables or disables channel A PC break interrupts.
Bit 0
BIEA
Description
0
PC break interrupts are disabled
1
PC break interrupts are enabled
6.2.4
(Initial value)
Break Control Register B (BCRB)
BCRB is the channel B break control register. The bit configuration is the same as for BCRA.
6.2.5
Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0
Initial value
R/W
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPC4 bit is set to 1, PC break controller operation is stopped at the end of the bus
cycle, and module stop mode is entered. Register read/write accesses are not possible in module
stop mode. For details, see sections 21A.5, 21B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRC is initialized to H'FF by a power on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not
initialized in software standby mode.
Bit 4—Module Stop (MSTPC4): Specifies the PC break controller module stop mode.
Bit 4
MSTPC4
Description
0
PC break controller module stop mode is cleared
1
PC break controller module stop mode is set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 132 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3
Operation
The operation flow from break condition setting to PC break interrupt exception handling is
shown in sections 6.3.1, PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch and 6.3.2, PC Break Interrupt
Due to Data Access, taking the example of channel A.
6.3.1
PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch
(1) Initial settings
 Set the break address in BARA. For a PC break caused by an instruction fetch, set the
address of the first instruction byte as the break address.
 Set the break conditions in BCRA.
BCRA bit 6 (CDA): With a PC break caused by an instruction fetch, the bus master must
be the CPU. Set 0 to select the CPU.
BCRA bits 5–3 (BAMA2–0): Set the address bits to be masked.
BCRA bits 2, 1 (CSELA1, 0): Set 00 to specify an instruction fetch as the break condition.
BCRA bit 0 (BIEA): Set to 1 to enable break interrupts.
(2) Satisfaction of break condition
 When the instruction at the set address is fetched, a PC break request is generated
immediately before execution of the fetched instruction, and the condition match flag
(CMFA) is set.
(3) Interrupt handling
 After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception
handling is started.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 133 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3.2
PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access
(1) Initial settings
 Set the break address in BARA. For a PC break caused by a data access, set the target
ROM, RAM, I/O, or external address space address as the break address. Stack operations
and branch address reads are included in data accesses.
 Set the break conditions in BCRA.
BCRA bit 6 (CDA): Select the bus master.
BCRA bits 5–3 (BAMA2–0): Set the address bits to be masked.
BCRA bits 2, 1 (CSELA1, 0): Set 01, 10, or 11 to specify data access as the break
condition.
BCRA bit 0 (BIEA): Set to 1 to enable break interrupts.
(2) Satisfaction of break condition
 After execution of the instruction that performs a data access on the set address, a PC break
request is generated and the condition match flag (CMFA) is set.
(3) Interrupt handling
 After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception
handling is started.
6.3.3
Notes on PC Break Interrupt Handling
(1) The PC break interrupt is shared by channels A and B. The channel from which the request
was issued must be determined by the interrupt handler.
(2) The CMFA and CMFB flags are not cleared to 0, so 0 must be written to CMFA or CMFB
after first reading the flag while it is set to 1. If the flag is left set to 1, another interrupt will be
requested after interrupt handling ends.
(3) A PC break interrupt generated when the DTC is the bus master is accepted after the bus has
been transferred to the CPU by the bus controller.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 134 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3.4
Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes
The operation when a PC break interrupt is set for an instruction fetch at the address after a
SLEEP instruction is shown below.
(1) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from high-speed (medium-speed) mode to
sleep mode, or from subactive mode to subsleep mode:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is not made to sleep mode or subsleep
mode, and PC break interrupt handling is executed. After execution of PC break interrupt
handling, the instruction at the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6.2 (A)).
(2) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from high-speed (medium-speed) mode to
subactive mode:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is made to subactive mode via direct
transition exception handling. After the transition, PC break interrupt handling is executed,
then the instruction at the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6.2 (B))
(Supported only in the H8S/2626 Group).
(3) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from subactive mode to high-speed (mediumspeed) mode:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, and following the clock oscillation settling time, a
transition is made to high-speed (medium-speed) mode via direct transition exception
handling. After the transition, PC break interrupt handling is executed, then the instruction at
the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6.2 (C)) (Supported only in the
H8S/2626 Group).
(4) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition to software standby mode or watch mode:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is made to the respective mode, and PC
break interrupt handling is not executed. However, the CMFA or CMFB flag is set (figure 6.2
(D)).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 135 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
SLEEP instruction
execution
SLEEP instruction
execution
SLEEP instruction
execution
SLEEP instruction
execution
PC break exception
handling
System clock
→ subclock
Subclock →
system clock,
oscillation settling time
Transition to
respective mode
(D)
Execution of instruction
after sleep instruction
Direct transition
exception handling
(A)
PC break exception
handling
Direct transition
exception handling
Subactive
mode
PC break exception
handling
Execution of instruction
after sleep instruction
Execution of instruction
after sleep instruction
(B)*
(C)*
High-speed
(medium-speed)
mode
Note: * Supported only in the H8S/2626 Group.
Figure 6.2 Operation in Power-Down Mode Transitions
6.3.5
PC Break Operation in Continuous Data Transfer
If a PC break interrupt is generated when the following operations are being performed, exception
handling is executed on completion of the specified transfer.
(1) When a PC break interrupt is generated at the transfer address of an EEPMOV.B instruction:
PC break exception handling is executed after all data transfers have been completed and the
EEPMOV.B instruction has ended.
(2) When a PC break interrupt is generated at a DTC transfer address:
PC break exception handling is executed after the DTC has completed the specified number of
data transfers, or after data for which the DISEL bit is set to 1 has been transferred.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 136 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3.6
When Instruction Execution is Delayed by One State
Caution is required in the following cases, as instruction execution is one state later than usual.
(1) When the PBC is enabled (i.e. when the break interrupt enable bit is set to 1), execution of a
one-word branch instruction (Bcc d:8, BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS) located in onchip ROM or RAM is always delayed by one state.
(2) When break interruption by instruction fetch is set, the set address indicates on-chip ROM or
RAM space, and that address is used for data access, the instruction that executes the data
access is one state later than in normal operation.
(3) When break interruption by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the
executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction has one of the addressing
modes shown below, and that address indicates on-chip ROM or RAM, and that address is
used for data access, the instruction will be one state later than in normal operation.
@ERn, @(d:16,ERn), @(d:32,ERn), @-ERn/ERn+, @aa:8, @aa:24, @aa:32, @(d:8,PC),
@(d:16,PC), @@aa:8
(4) When break interruption by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the
executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction is NOP or SLEEP, or has
#xx,Rn as its addressing mode, and that instruction is located in on-chip ROM or RAM, the
instruction will be one state later than in normal operation.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 137 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3.7
Additional Notes
(1) When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the address following a BSR, JSR, JMP,
TRAPA, RTE, or RTS instruction:
Even if the instruction at the address following a BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS
instruction is fetched, it is not executed, and so a PC break interrupt is not generated by the
instruction fetch at the next address.
(2) When the I bit is set by an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction, a PC break interrupt
becomes valid two states after the end of the executing instruction. If a PC break interrupt is
set for the instruction following one of these instructions, since interrupts, including NMI, are
disabled for a 3-state period in the case of LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC, the next instruction
is always executed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
(3) When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the address following a Bcc instruction:
A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the next address is executed in
accordance with the branch condition, but is not generated if the instruction at the next address
is not executed.
(4) When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the branch destination address of a Bcc
instruction:
A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the branch destination is executed in
accordance with the branch condition, but is not generated if the instruction at the branch
destination is not executed.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 138 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have an on-chip bus controller (BSC) that manages
the external address space divided into eight areas. The bus specifications, such as bus width and
number of access states, can be set independently for each area, enabling multiple memories to be
connected easily.
The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the internal bus
masters: the CPU and data transfer controller (DTC).
7.1.1
Features
The features of the bus controller are listed below.
• Manages external address space in area units
 Manages the external space as 8 areas of 2 Mbytes
 Bus specifications can be set independently for each area
 Burst ROM interface can be set
• Basic bus interface
 8-bit access or 16-bit access can be selected for each area
 2-state access or 3-state access can be selected for each area
 Program wait states can be inserted for each area
• Burst ROM interface
 Burst ROM interface can be set for area 0
 Choice of 1- or 2-state burst access
• Idle cycle insertion
 An idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external read cycle between different areas
 An idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external write cycle immediately after an
external read cycle
• Write buffer functions
 External write cycle and internal access can be executed in parallel
• Bus arbitration function
 Includes a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus mastership among the CPU and DTC
• Other features
 External bus release function
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 139 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller.
Internal
address bus
Area decoder
ABWCR
External bus control signals
ASTCR
BCRH
BREQ
BACK
BREQO
Bus
controller
Wait
controller
WAIT
Internal data bus
BCRL
Internal control
signals
Bus mode signal
WCRH
WCRL
CPU bus request signal
DTC bus request signal
Bus arbiter
CPU bus acknowledge signal
DTC bus acknowledge signal
Legend:
ABWCR:
ASTCR:
BCRH:
BCRL:
WCRH:
WCRL:
Bus width control register
Access state control register
Bus control register H
Bus control register L
Wait control register H
Wait control register L
Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 140 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 7.1 summarizes the pins of the bus controller.
Table 7.1
Bus Controller Pins
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Address strobe
AS
Output
Strobe signal indicating that address output on address
bus is enabled.
Read
RD
Output
Strobe signal indicating that external space is being
read.
High write
HWR
Output
Strobe signal indicating that external space is to be
written, and upper half (D15 to D8) of data bus is
enabled.
Low write
LWR
Output
Strobe signal indicating that external space is to be
written, and lower half (D7 to D0) of data bus is
enabled.
Wait
WAIT
Input
Wait request signal when accessing external 3-state
access space.
Bus request
BREQ
Input
Request signal that releases bus to external device.
Bus request
acknowledge
BACK
Output
Acknowledge signal indicating that bus has been
released.
Bus request
output
BREQO
Output
External bus request signal used when internal bus
master accesses external space when external bus is
released.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 141 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 7.2 summarizes the registers of the bus controller.
Table 7.2
Bus Controller Registers
Initial Value
Manual Reset*
3
Address*
1
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Reset
Bus width control register
ABWCR
R/W
2
H'FF/H'00* Retained
H'FED0
Access state control register
ASTCR
R/W
H'FF
Retained
H'FED1
Wait control register H
WCRH
R/W
H'FF
Retained
H'FED2
Wait control register L
WCRL
R/W
H'FF
Retained
H'FED3
Bus control register H
BCRH
R/W
H'D0
Retained
H'FED4
Bus control register L
BCRL
R/W
H'08
Retained
H'FED5
Pin function control register
PFCR
R/W
H'0D/H'00
Retained
H'FDEB
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Determined by the MCU operating mode.
3. Not available in the H8S/2623 Group.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 142 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2
Register Descriptions
7.2.1
Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)
Bit
:
Modes 5 to 7
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ABW7
ABW6
ABW5
ABW4
ABW3
ABW2
ABW1
ABW0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Mode 4
Initial value :
R/W
:
ABWCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that designates each area for either 8-bit access or
16-bit access.
ABWCR sets the data bus width for the external memory space. The bus width for on-chip
memory and internal I/O registers is fixed regardless of the settings in ABWCR.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, ABWCR is initialized to H'FF in modes 5 to 7, and to
H'00 in mode 4. It is not initialized in software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 0—Area 7 to 0 Bus Width Control (ABW7 to ABW0): These bits select whether the
corresponding area is to be designated for 8-bit access or 16-bit access.
Bit n
ABWn
Description
0
Area n is designated for 16-bit access
1
Area n is designated for 8-bit access
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 143 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2.2
Bit
Access State Control Register (ASTCR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AST7
AST6
AST5
AST4
AST3
AST2
AST1
AST0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ASTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that designates each area as either a 2-state access
space or a 3-state access space.
ASTCR sets the number of access states for the external memory space. The number of access
states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers is fixed regardless of the settings in ASTCR.
ASTCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 0—Area 7 to 0 Access State Control (AST7 to AST0): These bits select whether the
corresponding area is to be designated as a 2-state access space or a 3-state access space.
Wait state insertion is enabled or disabled at the same time.
Bit n
ASTn
Description
0
Area n is designated for 2-state access
Wait state insertion in area n external space is disabled
1
Area n is designated for 3-state access
Wait state insertion in area n external space is enabled
(Initial value)
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 144 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2.3
Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL)
WCRH and WCRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the number of program wait
states for each area.
Program waits are not inserted in the case of on-chip memory or internal I/O registers.
WCRH and WCRL are initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not
initialized in software standby mode.
(1) WCRH
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
W71
W70
W61
W60
W51
W50
W41
W40
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 and 6—Area 7 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W71, W70): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 7 in external space is accessed while the AST7 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 7
Bit 6
W71
W70
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 7 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 7 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 145 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bits 5 and 4—Area 6 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W61, W60): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 6 in external space is accessed while the AST6 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 5
Bit 4
W61
W60
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 6 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 6 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Bits 3 and 2—Area 5 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W51, W50): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 5 in external space is accessed while the AST5 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 3
Bit 2
W51
W50
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 5 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 5 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Bits 1 and 0—Area 4 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W41, W40): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 4 in external space is accessed while the AST4 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 1
Bit 0
W41
W40
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 4 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 4 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 146 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
(2) WCRL
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
W31
W30
W21
W20
W11
W10
W01
W00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 and 6—Area 3 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W31, W30): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 3 in external space is accessed while the AST3 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 7
Bit 6
W31
W30
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 3 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 3 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Bits 5 and 4—Area 2 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W21, W20): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 2 in external space is accessed while the AST2 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 5
Bit 4
W21
W20
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 2 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 2 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 147 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bits 3 and 2—Area 1 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W11, W10): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 1 in external space is accessed while the AST1 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 3
Bit 2
W11
W10
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 1 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 1 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Bits 1 and 0—Area 0 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W01, W00): These bits select the number of
program wait states when area 0 in external space is accessed while the AST0 bit in ASTCR is set
to 1.
Bit 1
Bit 0
W01
W00
Description
0
0
Program wait not inserted when external space area 0 is accessed
1
1 program wait state inserted when external space area 0 is accessed
0
2 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed
1
3 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed
(Initial value)
1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 148 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2.4
Bit
Bus Control Register H (BCRH)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
ICIS1
ICIS0
5
4
3
BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0
2
1
0
—
—
—
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
BCRH is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects enabling or disabling of idle cycle
insertion, and the memory interface for area 0.
BCRH is initialized to H'D0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—Idle Cycle Insert 1 (ICIS1): Selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be inserted
between bus cycles when successive external read cycles are performed in different areas.
Bit 7
ICIS1
Description
0
Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas
1
Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Idle Cycle Insert 0 (ICIS0): Selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be inserted
between bus cycles when successive external read and external write cycles are performed .
Bit 6
ICIS0
Description
0
Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles
1
Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 149 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bit 5—Burst ROM Enable (BRSTRM): Selects whether area 0 is used as a burst ROM
interface.
Bit 5
BRSTRM
Description
0
Area 0 is basic bus interface
1
Area 0 is burst ROM interface
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Burst Cycle Select 1 (BRSTS1): Selects the number of burst cycles for the burst ROM
interface.
Bit 4
BRSTS1
Description
0
Burst cycle comprises 1 state
1
Burst cycle comprises 2 states
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Burst Cycle Select 0 (BRSTS0): Selects the number of words that can be accessed in a
burst ROM interface burst access.
Bit 3
BRSTS0
Description
0
Max. 4 words in burst access
1
Max. 8 words in burst access
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 150 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2.5
Bit
Bus Control Register L (BCRL)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BRLE
BREQOE
—
—
—
—
WDBE
WAITE
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
BCRL is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs selection of the external bus-released
state protocol, enabling or disabling of the write data buffer function, and enabling or disabling of
WAIT pin input.
BCRL is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—Bus Release Enable (BRLE): Enables or disables external bus release.
Bit 7
BRLE
Description
0
External bus release is disabled. BREQ, BACK, and BREQO can be used as I/O
ports.
(Initial value)
1
External bus release is enabled.
Bit 6—BREQO Pin Enable (BREQOE): Outputs a signal that requests the external bus master
to drop the bus request signal (BREQ) in the external bus release state, when an internal bus
master performs an external space access, or when a refresh request is generated.
Bit 6
BREQOE
Description
0
BREQO output disabled. BREQO can be used as I/O port.
1
BREQO output enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 0.
Bit 4—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to this bit.
Bit 3—Reserved: Only 1 should be written to this bit.
Bit 2—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to this bit.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 151 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bit 1—Write Data Buffer Enable (WDBE): Selects whether or not the write buffer function is
used for an external write cycle.
Bit 1
WDBE
Description
0
Write data buffer function not used
1
Write data buffer function used
(Initial value)
Bit 0—WAIT Pin Enable (WAITE): Selects enabling or disabling of wait input by the WAIT
pin.
Bit 0
WAITE
Description
0
Wait input by WAIT pin disabled. WAIT pin can be used as I/O port.
1
Wait input by WAIT pin enabled
7.2.6
Bit
Pin Function Control Register (PFCR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
(Initial value)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
BUZZE
—
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
0
0
0
0
1/0
1/0
0
1/0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PFCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs address output control in external
expanded mode.
PFCR is initialized to H'0D/H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its previous
state in software standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Bit 5—BUZZ Output Enable (BUZZE): Enables or disables BUZZ output from the PF1 pin. For
details, see section 12.2.4, Pin Function Control Register (PFCR).
Bit 4—Reserved: Only 0 should be written to this bit.
Bits 3 to 0—Address Output Enable 3 to 0 (AE3 to AE0): These bits select enabling or
disabling of address outputs A8 to A23 in ROMless expanded mode and modes with ROM. When
a pin is enabled for address output, the address is output regardless of the corresponding DDR
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 152 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
setting. When a pin is disabled for address output, it becomes an output port when the
corresponding DDR bit is set to 1.
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
Description
0
0
0
0
A8–A23 address output disabled
1
A8 address output enabled; A9–A23 address output disabled
0
A8, A9 address output enabled; A10–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A10 address output enabled; A11–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A11 address output enabled; A12–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A12 address output enabled; A13–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A13 address output enabled; A14–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A14 address output enabled; A15–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A15 address output enabled; A16–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A16 address output enabled; A17–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A17 address output enabled; A18–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A18 address output enabled; A19–A23 address output
disabled
0
A8–A19 address output enabled; A20–A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A20 address output enabled; A21–A23 address output
disabled
(Initial value*)
0
A8–A21 address output enabled; A22, A23 address output
disabled
1
A8–A23 address output enabled
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Note:
*
(Initial value*)
In expanded mode with ROM, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'0000.
In ROMless expanded mode, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'1101.
Address pins A0 to A7 are made address outputs by setting the corresponding DDR
bits to 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 153 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.3
Overview of Bus Control
7.3.1
Area Partitioning
In advanced mode, the bus controller partitions the 16 Mbytes address space into eight areas, 0 to
7, in 2-Mbyte units, and performs bus control for external space in area units. In normal mode*, it
controls a 64-kbyte address space comprising part of area 0. Figure 7.2 shows an outline of the
memory map.
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
H'0000
H'000000
Area 0
(2 Mbytes)
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 1
(2 Mbytes)
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
Area 2
(2 Mbytes)
H'FFFF
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
Area 3
(2 Mbytes)
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
Area 4
(2 Mbytes)
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
Area 5
(2 Mbytes)
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
Area 6
(2 Mbytes)
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
Area 7
(2 Mbytes)
H'FFFFFF
(1)
Advanced mode
(2)
Normal mode*
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Figure 7.2 Overview of Area Partitioning
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 154 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.3.2
Bus Specifications
The external space bus specifications consist of three elements: bus width, number of access
states, and number of program wait states.
The bus width and number of access states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers are
fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller.
(1) Bus Width: A bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with ADWCR. An area for which an
8-bit bus is selected functions as an 8-bit access space, and an area for which a 16-bit bus is
selected functions as a16-bit access space.
If all areas are designated for 8-bit access, 8-bit bus mode is set; if any area is designated for 16-bit
access, 16-bit bus mode is set. When the burst ROM interface is designated, 16-bit bus mode is
always set.
(2) Number of Access States: Two or three access states can be selected with ASTCR. An area
for which 2-state access is selected functions as a 2-state access space, and an area for which 3state access is selected functions as a 3-state access space.
With the burst ROM interface, the number of access states may be determined without regard to
ASTCR.
When 2-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled.
(3) Number of Program Wait States: When 3-state access space is designated by ASTCR, the
number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with WCRH and WCRL.
From 0 to 3 program wait states can be selected.
Table 7.3 shows the bus specifications for each basic bus interface area.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 155 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Table 7.3
Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface)
ABWCR
ASTCR
ABWn
ASTn
Wn1
Wn0
Bus Width
Program Wait
Access States States
0
0
—
—
16
2
0
1
0
0
3
0
1
1
1
0
2
1
3
1
7.3.3
WCRH, WCRL
Bus Specifications (Basic Bus Interface)
0
—
—
8
2
0
1
0
0
3
0
1
1
1
0
2
1
3
Memory Interfaces
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group memory interfaces comprise a basic bus interface that
allows direct connection or ROM, SRAM, and so on, and a burst ROM interface that allows direct
connection of burst ROM. The memory interface can be selected independently for each area.
An area for which the basic bus interface is designated functions as normal space, and an area for
which the burst ROM interface is designated functions as burst ROM space.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 156 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.3.4
Interface Specifications for Each Area
The initial state of each area is basic bus interface, 3-state access space. The initial bus width is
selected according to the operating mode. The bus specifications described here cover basic items
only, and the sections on each memory interface (7.4, Basic Bus Interface, and 7.5, Burst ROM
Interface) should be referred to for further details.
Area 0: Area 0 includes on-chip ROM, and in ROM-disabled expansion mode, all of area 0 is
external space. In ROM-enabled expansion mode, the space excluding on-chip ROM is external
space.
Either basic bus interface or burst ROM interface can be selected for area 0.
Areas 1 to 6: In external expansion mode, all of areas 1 to 6 is external space.
Only the basic bus interface can be used for areas 1 to 6.
Area 7: Area 7 includes the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers. In external expansion mode,
the space excluding the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers is external space. The on-chip
RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1; when the
RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is disabled and the corresponding space becomes
external space.
Only the basic bus interface can be used for the area 7.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 157 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.4
Basic Bus Interface
7.4.1
Overview
The basic bus interface enables direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on.
The bus specifications can be selected with ABWCR, ASTCR, WCRH, and WCRL (see table
7.3).
7.4.2
Data Size and Data Alignment
Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus
controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the
upper data bus (D15 to D8) or lower data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus
specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space) and the data
size.
8-Bit Access Space: Figure 7.3 illustrates data alignment control for the 8-bit access space. With
the 8-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is always used for accesses. The amount of
data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word transfer instruction is performed as two
byte accesses, and a longword transfer instruction, as four byte accesses.
Upper data bus
Lower data bus
D15
D8 D7
D0
Byte size
Word size
1st bus cycle
2nd bus cycle
1st bus cycle
Longword size
2nd bus cycle
3rd bus cycle
4th bus cycle
Figure 7.3 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 158 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
16-Bit Access Space: Figure 7.4 illustrates data alignment control for the 16-bit access space.
With the 16-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) and lower data bus (D7 to D0) are
used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word,
and a longword transfer instruction is executed as two word transfer instructions.
In byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is
even or odd. The upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd
address.
Lower data bus
Upper data bus
D15
D8 D7
D0
Byte size
• Even address
Byte size
• Odd address
Word size
Longword
size
1st bus cycle
2nd bus cycle
Figure 7.4 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-Bit Access Space)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 159 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.4.3
Valid Strobes
Table 7.4 shows the data buses used and valid strobes for the access spaces.
In a read, the RD signal is valid without discrimination between the upper and lower halves of the
data bus.
In a write, the HWR signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the LWR signal for the
lower half.
Table 7.4
Area
8-bit access
space
Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes
Access
Size
Read/
Write
Address
Valid
Strobe
Upper Data Bus
(D15 to D8)
Lower data bus
(D7 to D0)
Byte
Read
—
RD
Valid
Invalid
Write
—
HWR
Even
RD
16-bit access Byte
space
Read
Odd
Valid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid
Even
HWR
Valid
Hi-Z
Odd
LWR
Hi-Z
Valid
Read
—
RD
Valid
Valid
Write
—
HWR, LWR Valid
Valid
Write
Word
Hi-Z
Notes: Hi-Z:
High impedance.
Invalid: Input state; input value is ignored.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 160 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.4.4
Basic Timing
8-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figure 7.5 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 2-state access space.
When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used.
The LWR pin is fixed high. Wait states cannot be inserted.
Bus cycle
T2
T1
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
HWR
LWR
High
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
Valid
High impedance
Figure 7.5 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 2-State Access Space
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 161 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
8-Bit 3-State Access Space: Figure 7.6 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 3-state access space.
When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used.
The LWR pin is fixed high. Wait states can be inserted.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
HWR
LWR
High
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
Valid
High impedance
Figure 7.6 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 3-State Access Space
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 162 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
16-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figures 7.7 to 7.9 show bus timings for a 16-bit 2-state access
space. When a 16-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used
for the even address, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for the odd address.
Wait states cannot be inserted.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
HWR
LWR
High
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
Valid
High impedance
Figure 7.7 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 163 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus cycle
T2
T1
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Invalid
D7 to D0
Valid
HWR
High
LWR
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
High impedance
Valid
Figure 7.8 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 164 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus cycle
T2
T1
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
HWR
LWR
Write
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
Figure 7.9 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (3) (Word Access)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 165 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
16-Bit 3-State Access Space: Figures 7.10 to 7.12 show bus timings for a 16-bit 3-state access
space. When a 16-bit access space is accessed , the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used
for the even address, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for the odd address.
Wait states can be inserted.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
HWR
LWR
High
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
Valid
High impedance
Figure 7.10 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 166 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Invalid
D7 to D0
Valid
HWR
High
LWR
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
High impedance
Valid
Figure 7.11 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 167 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
φ
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
HWR
LWR
Write
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
Figure 7.12 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (3) (Word Access)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 168 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.4.5
Wait Control
When accessing external space, the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group can extend the bus cycle
by inserting one or more wait states (Tw). There are two ways of inserting wait states: program
wait insertion and pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin.
Program Wait Insertion
From 0 to 3 wait states can be inserted automatically between the T2 state and T3 state on an
individual area basis in 3-state access space, according to the settings of WCRH and WCRL.
Pin Wait Insertion
Setting the WAITE bit in BCRL to 1 enables wait insertion by means of the WAIT pin. Program
wait insertion is first carried out according to the settings in WCRH and WCRL. Then , if the
WAIT pin is low at the falling edge of φ in the last T2 or Tw state, a Tw state is inserted. If the
WAIT pin is held low, Tw states are inserted until it goes high.
This is useful when inserting four or more Tw states, or when changing the number of Tw states for
different external devices.
The WAITE bit setting applies to all areas.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 169 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Figure 7.13 shows an example of wait state insertion timing.
By program wait
T1
T2
Tw
By WAIT pin
Tw
Tw
T3
φ
WAIT
Address bus
AS
RD
Read
Data bus
Read data
HWR, LWR
Write
Data bus
Note:
Write data
indicates the timing of WAIT pin sampling.
Figure 7.13 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing
The settings after a reset are: 3-state access, 3 program wait state insertion, and WAIT input
disabled.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 170 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.5
Burst ROM Interface
7.5.1
Overview
With the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group, external space area 0 can be designated as burst
ROM space, and burst ROM interfacing can be performed. The burst ROM space interface enables
16-bit configuration ROM with burst access capability to be accessed at high speed.
Area 0 can be designated as burst ROM space by means of the BRSTRM bit in BCRH.
Consecutive burst accesses of a maximum of 4 words or 8 words can be performed for CPU
instruction fetches only. One or two states can be selected for burst access.
7.5.2
Basic Timing
The number of states in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface is in accordance
with the setting of the AST0 bit in ASTCR. Also, when the AST0 bit is set to 1, wait state
insertion is possible. One or two states can be selected for the burst cycle, according to the setting
of the BRSTS1 bit in BCRH. Wait states cannot be inserted. When area 0 is designated as burst
ROM space, it becomes 16-bit access space regardless of the setting of the ABW0 bit in ABWCR.
When the BRSTS0 bit in BCRH is cleared to 0, burst access of up to 4 words is performed; when
the BRSTS0 bit is set to 1, burst access of up to 8 words is performed.
The basic access timing for burst ROM space is shown in figures 7.14 (a) and (b). The timing
shown in figure 7.14 (a) is for the case where the AST0 and BRSTS1 bits are both set to 1, and
that in figure 7.14 (b) is for the case where both these bits are cleared to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 171 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Full access
T1
T2
Burst access
T3
T1
T2
T1
T2
φ
Only lower address changed
Address bus
AS
RD
Data bus
Read data
Read data
Read data
Figure 7.14 (a) Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST0 = BRSTS1 = 1)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 172 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
Full access
T1
T2
Burst access
T1
T1
φ
Only lower address changed
Address bus
AS
RD
Data bus
Read data
Read data Read data
Figure 7.14 (b) Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST0 = BRSTS1 = 0)
7.5.3
Wait Control
As with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion using the WAIT
pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface. See section 7.4.5, Wait
Control.
Wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 173 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.6
Idle Cycle
7.6.1
Operation
When the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group accesses external space , it can insert a 1-state idle
cycle (TI) between bus cycles in the following two cases: (1) when read accesses between different
areas occur consecutively, and (2) when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle. By
inserting an idle cycle it is possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between ROM, with a
long output floating time, and high-speed memory, I/O interfaces, and so on.
(1) Consecutive Reads between Different Areas
If consecutive reads between different areas occur while the ICIS1 bit in BCRH is set to 1, an idle
cycle is inserted at the start of the second read cycle.
Figure 7.15 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read
cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a read cycle from SRAM,
each being located in a different area. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in
cycle B between the read data from ROM and that from SRAM. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted,
and a data collision is prevented.
Bus cycle A
φ
T1
T2
Bus cycle B
T3
T1
Bus cycle A
T2
φ
Address bus
Address bus
CS* (area A)
CS* (area A)
CS* (area B)
CS* (area B)
RD
RD
Data bus
Data bus
Long output
floating time
T1
T2
T3
TI
T1
Data
collision
(a) Idle cycle not inserted
(ICIS1 = 0)
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(Initial value ICIS1 = 1)
Note: * The CS signals are generated off-chip.
Figure 7.15 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (1)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 174 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Bus cycle B
T2
Section 7 Bus Controller
(2) Write after Read
If an external write occurs after an external read while the ICIS0 bit in BCRH is set to 1, an idle
cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle.
Figure 7.16 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read
cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an
idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle B between the read data from ROM and
the CPU write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented.
Bus cycle A
φ
T1
T2
T3
Bus cycle B
T1
T2
Bus cycle A
φ
Address bus
Address bus
CS* (area A)
CS* (area A)
CS* (area B)
CS* (area B)
RD
RD
T1
T2
T3
Bus cycle B
TI
T1
T2
Possibility of overlap between
CS (area B) and RD
(a) Idle cycle not inserted
(ICIS1 = 0)
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(Initial value ICIS1 = 1)
Note: * The CS signals are generated off-chip.
Figure 7.16 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (2)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 175 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.6.2
Pin States in Idle Cycle
Table 7.5 shows pin states in an idle cycle.
Table 7.5
Pin States in Idle Cycle
Pins
Pin State
A23 to A0
Contents of next bus cycle
D15 to D0
High impedance
AS
High
RD
High
HWR
High
LWR
High
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 176 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.7
Write Data Buffer Function
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have a write data buffer function in the external data
bus. Using the write data buffer function enables external writes to be executed in parallel with
internal accesses. The write data buffer function is made available by setting the WDBE bit in
BCRL to 1.
Figure 7.17 shows an example of the timing when the write data buffer function is used. When this
function is used, if an external write continues for 2 states or longer, and there is an internal access
next, only an external write is executed in the first state, but from the next state onward an internal
access (on-chip memory or internal I/O register read/write) is executed in parallel with the external
write rather than waiting until it ends.
On-chip memory read Internal I/O register read
External write cycle
T1
T2
TW
TW
T3
Internal address bus
Internal memory
Internal I/O register address
Internal read signal
A23 to A0
External
space
write
External address
HWR, LWR
D15 to D0
Figure 7.17 Example of Timing when Write Data Buffer Function is Used
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 177 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.8
Bus Release
7.8.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group can release the external bus in response to a bus
request from an external device. In the external bus released state, the internal bus master
continues to operate as long as there is no external access.
If an internal bus master wants to make an external access in the external bus released state, it can
issue a bus request off-chip.
7.8.2
Operation
In external expansion mode, the bus can be released to an external device by setting the BRLE bit
in BCRL to 1. Driving the BREQ pin low issues an external bus request to the H8S/2626 Group or
H8S/2623 Group. When the BREQ pin is sampled, at the prescribed timing the BACK pin is
driven low, and the address bus, data bus, and bus control signals are placed in the highimpedance state, establishing the external bus-released state.
In the external bus released state, an internal bus master can perform accesses using the internal
bus. When an internal bus master wants to make an external access, it temporarily defers
activation of the bus cycle, and waits for the bus request from the external bus master to be
dropped.
If the BREQOE bit in BCRL is set to 1, when an internal bus master wants to make an external
access in the external bus released state, the BREQO pin is driven low and a request can be made
off-chip to drop the bus request.
When the BREQ pin is driven high, the BACK pin is driven high at the prescribed timing and the
external bus released state is terminated.
If an external bus release request and internal bus master external access occur simultaneously, the
order of priority is as follows:
(High) External bus release > Internal bus master external access (Low)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 178 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.8.3
Pin States in External Bus Released State
Table 7.6 shows pin states in the external bus released state.
Table 7.6
Pin States in Bus Released State
Pins
Pin State
A23 to A0
High impedance
D15 to D0
High impedance
AS
High impedance
RD
High impedance
HWR
High impedance
LWR
High impedance
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 179 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.8.4
Transition Timing
Figure 7.18 shows the timing for transition to the bus-released state.
CPU cycle
T0
T1
CPU
cycle
External bus released state
T2
φ
High impedance
Address bus
Address
High impedance
Data bus
High impedance
AS
High impedance
RD
High impedance
HWR, LWR
BREQ
BACK
BREQO *
Minimum
1 state
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Low level of BREQ pin is sampled at rise of T2 state.
BACK pin is driven low at end of CPU read cycle, releasing bus to external bus master.
BREQ pin state is still sampled in external bus released state.
High level of BREQ pin is sampled.
BACK pin is driven high, ending bus release cycle.
BREQO signal goes high 1.5 clocks after BACK signal goes high.
Note: * Output only when BREQOE is set to 1.
Figure 7.18 Bus-Released State Transition Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 180 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
[5]
[6]
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.8.5
Usage Note
If MSTPCR is set to H'FFFFFF or H'EFFFFF and a transition is made to sleep mode, the external
bus release function will halt. Therefore, these values should not be set in MSTPCR if the external
bus release function is to be used in sleep mode.
7.9
Bus Arbitration
7.9.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master
operations.
There are two bus masters, the CPU and DTC, which perform read/write operations when they
have possession of the bus. Each bus master requests the bus by means of a bus request signal. The
bus arbiter determines priorities at the prescribed timing, and permits use of the bus by means of a
bus request acknowledge signal. The selected bus master then takes possession of the bus and
begins its operation.
7.9.2
Operation
The bus arbiter detects the bus masters’ bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus
request acknowledge signal to the bus master making the request. If there are bus requests from
more than one bus master, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the highest
priority. When a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the
bus until that signal is canceled.
The order of priority of the bus masters is as follows:
(High)
DTC
>
CPU
(Low)
An internal bus access by an internal bus master, and external bus release, can be executed in
parallel.
In the event of simultaneous external bus release request, and internal bus master external access
request generation, the order of priority is as follows:
(High) External bus release > Internal bus master external access (Low)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 181 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.9.3
Bus Transfer Timing
Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus
master that has acquired the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily transferred
immediately. There are specific times at which each bus master can relinquish the bus.
CPU: The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the DTC,
the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the bus master that issued the request. The timing for transfer of
the bus is as follows:
• The bus is transferred at a break between bus cycles. However, if a bus cycle is executed in
discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size access, the bus is not transferred between
the operations. See appendix A.5, Bus States During Instruction Execution, for timings at
which the bus is not transferred.
• If the CPU is in sleep mode, it transfers the bus immediately.
DTC: The DTC sends the bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is generated.
The DTC can release the bus after a vector read, a register information read (3 states), a single data
transfer, or a register information write (3 states). It does not release the bus during a register
information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states).
7.10
Resets and the Bus Controller
In a reset, the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group, including the bus controller, enters the reset
state at that point, and an executing bus cycle is discontinued.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 182 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group include a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can
be activated by an interrupt or software, to transfer data.
8.1.1
Features
The features of the DTC are:
• Transfer possible over any number of channels
 Transfer information is stored in memory
 One activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer)
• Wide range of transfer modes
 Normal, repeat, and block transfer modes available
 Incrementing, decrementing, and fixing of source and destination addresses can be selected
• Direct specification of 16-Mbyte address space possible
 24-bit transfer source and destination addresses can be specified
• Transfer can be set in byte or word units
• A CPU interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the DTC
 An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after one data transfer ends
 An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after the specified data transfers have
completely ended
• Activation by software is possible
• Module stop mode can be set
 The initial setting enables DTC registers to be accessed. DTC operation is halted by setting
module stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 183 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the DTC.
The DTC’s register information is stored in the on-chip RAM*. A 32-bit bus connects the DTC to
the on-chip RAM (1 kbyte), enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the DTC register
information.
Note: * When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must be set to 1.
Internal address bus
On-chip
RAM
CPU interrupt
request
Register information
MRA MRB
CRA
CRB
DAR
SAR
DTC
Control logic
DTC service
request
DTVECR
Interrupt
request
DTCERA
to
DTCERG
Interrupt controller
Internal data bus
Legend:
MRA, MRB
CRA, CRB
SAR
DAR
DTCERA to DTCERG
DTVECR
: DTC mode registers A and B
: DTC transfer count registers A and B
: DTC source address register
: DTC destination address register
: DTC enable registers A to G
: DTC vector register
Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DTC
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 184 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.1.3
Register Configuration
Table 8.1 summarizes the DTC registers.
Table 8.1
DTC Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
1
Address*
DTC mode register A
MRA
Undefined
DTC mode register B
MRB
—*
2
—*
3
—*
3
—*
DTC source address register
SAR
2
—*
Undefined
DTC destination address register
DAR
Undefined
DTC transfer count register A
CRA
2
—*
2
—*
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
—*
Undefined
3
—*
3
—*
DTC enable registers
DTCER
R/W
H'00
H'FE16 to H'FE1C
DTC vector register
DTVECR
R/W
H'00
H'FE1F
Module stop control register
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
2
2
Undefined
Undefined
3
—*
3
—*
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Registers within the DTC cannot be read or written to directly.
3. Register information is located in on-chip RAM addresses H'EBC0 to H'EFBF. It cannot
be located in external memory space. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR
must be set to 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 185 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2
Register Descriptions
8.2.1
DTC Mode Register A (MRA)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SM1
SM0
DM1
DM0
MD1
MD0
DTS
Sz
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
MRA is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Source Address Mode 1 and 0 (SM1, SM0): These bits specify whether SAR is
to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer.
Bit 7
Bit 6
SM1
SM0
Description
0
—
SAR is fixed
1
0
SAR is incremented after a transfer
(by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1)
1
SAR is decremented after a transfer
(by –1 when Sz = 0; by –2 when Sz = 1)
Bits 5 and 4—Destination Address Mode 1 and 0 (DM1, DM0): These bits specify whether
DAR is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer.
Bit 5
Bit 4
DM1
DM0
Description
0
—
DAR is fixed
1
0
DAR is incremented after a transfer
(by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1)
1
DAR is decremented after a transfer
(by –1 when Sz = 0; by –2 when Sz = 1)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 186 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Bits 3 and 2—DTC Mode (MD1, MD0): These bits specify the DTC transfer mode.
Bit 3
Bit 2
MD1
MD0
Description
0
0
Normal mode
1
Repeat mode
0
Block transfer mode
1
—
1
Bit 1—DTC Transfer Mode Select (DTS): Specifies whether the source side or the destination
side is set to be a repeat area or block area, in repeat mode or block transfer mode.
Bit 1
DTS
Description
0
Destination side is repeat area or block area
1
Source side is repeat area or block area
Bit 0—DTC Data Transfer Size (Sz): Specifies the size of data to be transferred.
Bit 0
Sz
Description
0
Byte-size transfer
1
Word-size transfer
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 187 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.2
Bit
DTC Mode Register B (MRB)
:
Initial value:
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHNE
DISEL
—
—
—
—
—
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
Undefined
—
MRB is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode.
Bit 7—DTC Chain Transfer Enable (CHNE): Specifies chain transfer. With chain transfer, a
number of data transfers can be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request.
In data transfer with CHNE set to 1, determination of the end of the specified number of transfers,
clearing of the interrupt source flag, and clearing of DTCER is not performed.
Bit 7
CHNE
Description
0
End of DTC data transfer (activation waiting state is entered)
1
DTC chain transfer (new register information is read, then data is transferred)
Bit 6—DTC Interrupt Select (DISEL): Specifies whether interrupt requests to the CPU are
disabled or enabled after a data transfer.
Bit 6
DISEL
Description
0
After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is disabled unless the transfer counter is
0 (the DTC clears the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0)
1
After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is enabled (the DTC does not clear the
interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0)
Bits 5 to 0—Reserved: These bits have no effect on DTC operation in the H8S/2626 Group and
H8S/2623 Group, and should always be written with 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 188 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.3
Bit
DTC Source Address Register (SAR)
23
:
21
20
19
Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined
— — — — —
Initial value:
R/W
22
:
4
3
2
1
0
Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined
— — — — —
SAR is a 24-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the DTC.
For word-size transfer, specify an even source address.
8.2.4
Bit
DTC Destination Address Register (DAR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
23
22
21
20
19
Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined
— — — — —
4
3
2
1
0
Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined
— — — — —
DAR is a 24-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the
DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even destination address.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 189 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.5
Bit
DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA)
:
Initial value:
R/W
:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
CRAH
CRAL
CRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC.
In normal mode, the entire CRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536). It is
decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000.
In repeat mode or block transfer mode, the CRA is divided into two parts: the upper 8 bits
(CRAH) and the lower 8 bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the number of transfers while CRAL
functions as an 8-bit transfer counter (1 to 256). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time data is
transferred, and the contents of CRAH are sent when the count reaches H'00. This operation is
repeated.
8.2.6
Bit
DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)
:
Initial value:
R/W
:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
CRB is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC in
block transfer mode. It functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536) that is decremented by 1
every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 190 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.7
Bit
DTC Enable Registers (DTCER)
:
Initial value:
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTCE7
DTCE6
DTCE5
DTCE4
DTCE3
DTCE2
DTCE1
DTCE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The DTC enable registers comprise seven 8-bit readable/writable registers, DTCERA to
DTCERG, with bits corresponding to the interrupt sources that can control enabling and disabling
of DTC activation. These bits enable or disable DTC service for the corresponding interrupt
sources.
The DTC enable registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit n—DTC Activation Enable (DTCEn)
Bit n
DTCEn
Description
0
DTC activation by this interrupt is disabled
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When the DISEL bit is 1 and the data transfer has ended
•
When the specified number of transfers have ended
DTC activation by this interrupt is enabled
[Holding condition]
When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended
(n = 7 to 0)
A DTCE bit can be set for each interrupt source that can activate the DTC. The correspondence
between interrupt sources and DTCE bits is shown in table 8.4, together with the vector number
generated for each interrupt controller.
For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR for reading and
writing. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time by writing
data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 191 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.8
Bit
DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWDTE DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0
Initial value:
R/W
:
0
R/(W)*1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*2 R/(W)*2 R/(W)*2 R/(W)*2 R/(W)*2 R/(W)*2 R/(W)*2
Notes: 1. Only 1 can be written to the SWDTE bit.
2. Bits DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 can be written to when SWDTE = 0.
DTVECR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables DTC activation by
software, and sets a vector number for the software activation interrupt.
DTVECR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—DTC Software Activation Enable (SWDTE): Enables or disables DTC activation by
software.
Bit 7
SWDTE
Description
0
DTC software activation is disabled
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended
•
When 0 s written to the DISEL bit after a software-activated data transfer end
interrupt (SWDTEND) request has been sent to the CPU
DTC software activation is enabled
[Holding conditions]
•
When the DISEL bit is 1 and data transfer has ended
•
When the specified number of transfers have ended
•
During data transfer due to software activation
Bits 6 to 0—DTC Software Activation Vectors 6 to 0 (DTVEC6 to DTVEC0): These bits
specify a vector number for DTC software activation.
The vector address is expressed as H'0400 + ((vector number) << 1). <<1 indicates a one-bit leftshift. For example, when DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 = H'10, the vector address is H'0420.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 192 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.9
Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPA7
MSTPA6
MSTPA5
MSTPA4
MSTPA3
MSTPA2
MSTPA1
MSTPA0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPA6 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, the DTC operation stops at the end of the bus
cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. However, 1 cannot be written in the MSTPA6
bit while the DTC is operating. For details, see sections 21A.5, 21B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 6—Module Stop (MSTPA6): Specifies the DTC module stop mode.
Bit 6
MSTPA6
Description
0
DTC module stop mode cleared
1
DTC module stop mode set
8.3
Operation
8.3.1
Overview
(Initial value)
When activated, the DTC reads register information that is already stored in memory and transfers
data on the basis of that register information. After the data transfer, it writes updated register
information back to memory. Pre-storage of register information in memory makes it possible to
transfer data over any required number of channels. Setting the CHNE bit to 1 makes it possible to
perform a number of transfers with a single activation.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 193 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Figure 8.2 shows a flowchart of DTC operation.
Start
Read DTC vector
Next transfer
Read register information
Data transfer
Write register information
CHNE=1
Yes
No
Transfer Counter = 0
or DISEL = 1
Yes
No
Clear an activation flag
Clear DTCER
End
Interrupt exception
handling
Figure 8.2 Flowchart of DTC Operation
The DTC transfer mode can be normal mode, repeat mode, or block transfer mode.
The 24-bit SAR designates the DTC transfer source address and the 24-bit DAR designates the
transfer destination address. After each transfer, SAR and DAR are independently incremented,
decremented, or left fixed.
Table 8.2 outlines the functions of the DTC.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 194 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.2
DTC Functions
Address Registers
Transfer Mode
Activation Source
Transfer
Source
Transfer
Destination
•
Normal mode
•
24 bits
24 bits
 One transfer request transfers one
byte or one word
•
TPU TGI
•
SCI TXI or RXI
•
A/D converter ADI
•
Software
•
HCAN RM0
 Memory addresses are incremented
or decremented by 1 or 2
 Up to 65,536 transfers possible
•
IRQ
Repeat mode
 One transfer request transfers one
byte or one word
 Memory addresses are incremented
or decremented by 1 or 2
 After the specified number of
transfers (1 to 256), the initial state
resumes and operation continues
•
Block transfer mode
 One transfer request transfers a
block of the specified size
 Block size is from 1 to 256 bytes or
words
 Up to 65,536 transfers possible
 A block area can be designated at
either the source or destination
8.3.2
Activation Sources
The DTC operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to DTVECR by software. An
interrupt request can be directed to the CPU or DTC, as designated by the corresponding DTCER
bit. An interrupt becomes a DTC activation source when the corresponding bit is set to 1, and a
CPU interrupt source when the bit is cleared to 0.
At the end of a data transfer (or the last consecutive transfer in the case of chain transfer), the
activation source or corresponding DTCER bit is cleared. Table 8.3 shows activation source and
DTCER clearance. The activation source flag, in the case of RXI0, for example, is the RDRF flag
of SCI0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 195 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.3
Activation Source and DTCER Clearance
Activation Source
When the DISEL Bit Is 0 and
the Specified Number of
Transfers Have Not Ended
When the DISEL Bit Is 1, or when
the Specified Number of Transfers
Have Ended
Software activation
The SWDTE bit is cleared to 0
The SWDTE bit remains set to 1
An interrupt is issued to the CPU
Interrupt activation
The corresponding DTCER bit
remains set to 1
The activation source flag is
cleared to 0
The corresponding DTCER bit is cleared
to 0
The activation source flag remains set to 1
A request is issued to the CPU for the
activation source interrupt
Figure 8.3 shows a block diagram of activation source control. For details see section 5, Interrupt
Controller.
Source flag cleared
Clear
controller
Clear
DTCER
Clear request
On-chip
supporting
module
IRQ interrupt
Interrupt
request
Selection circuit
Select
DTVECR
DTC
Interrupt controller
CPU
Interrupt mask
Figure 8.3 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control
When an interrupt has been designated a DTC activation source, existing CPU mask level and
interrupt controller priorities have no effect. If there is more than one activation source at the same
time, the DTC operates in accordance with the default priorities.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 196 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.3
DTC Vector Table
Figure 8.4 shows the correspondence between DTC vector addresses and register information.
Table 8.4 shows the correspondence between activation and vector addresses. When the DTC is
activated by software, the vector address is obtained from: H'0400 + (DTVECR[6:0] << 1) (where
<< 1 indicates a 1-bit left shift). For example, if DTVECR is H'10, the vector address is H'0420.
The DTC reads the start address of the register information from the vector address set for each
activation source, and then reads the register information from that start address. The register
information can be placed at predetermined addresses in the on-chip RAM. The start address of
the register information should be an integral multiple of four.
The configuration of the vector address is the same in both normal* and advanced modes, a 2-byte
unit being used in both cases. These two bytes specify the lower bits of the address in the on-chip
RAM.
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
DTC vector
address
Register information
start address
Register information
Chain transfer
Figure 8.4 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 197 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.4
Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
Vector
Number
Vector
Address
Write to DTVECR
Software
DTVECR
IRQ0
External pin
DTCE*
Priority
H'0400+
(DTVECR
[6:0] <<1)
—
High
16
H'0420
DTCEA7
IRQ1
17
H'0422
DTCEA6
IRQ2
18
H'0424
DTCEA5
IRQ3
19
H'0426
DTCEA4
IRQ4
20
H'0428
DTCEA3
IRQ5
21
H'042A
DTCEA2
Reserved
22
H'042C
DTCEA1
23
H'042E
DTCEA0
ADI (A/D conversion end)
A/D
28
H'0438
DTCEB6
TGI0A (GR0A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 0
32
H'0440
DTCEB5
TGI0B (GR0B compare match/
input capture)
33
H'0442
DTCEB4
TGI0C (GR0C compare match/
input capture)
34
H'0444
DTCEB3
TGI0D (GR0D compare match/
input capture)
35
H'0446
DTCEB2
40
H'0450
DTCEB1
41
H'0452
DTCEB0
44
H'0458
DTCEC7
45
H'045A
DTCEC6
TGI1A (GR1A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 1
TGI1B (GR1B compare match/
input capture)
TGI2A (GR2A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 2
TGI2B (GR2B compare match/
input capture)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 198 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Low
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt
Source
TGI3A (GR3A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 3
Vector
Number
Vector
Address
DTCE*
Priority
48
H'0460
DTCEC5
High
TGI3B (GR3B compare match/
input capture)
49
H'0462
DTCEC4
TGI3C (GR3C compare match/
input capture)
50
H'0464
DTCEC3
TGI3D (GR3D compare match/
input capture)
51
H'0466
DTCEC2
56
H'0470
DTCEC1
57
H'0472
DTCEC0
60
H'0478
DTCED5
61
H'047A
DTCED4
64
H'0480
DTCED3
65
H'0482
DTCED2
68
H'0488
DTCED1
69
H'048A
DTCED0
72
H'0490
DTCEE7
73
H'0492
DTCEE6
74
H'0494
DTCEE5
TGI4A (GR4A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 4
TGI4B (GR4B compare match/
input capture)
TGI5A (GR5A compare match/
input capture)
TPU
channel 5
TGI5B (GR5B compare match/
input capture)
Reserved
—
75
H'0496
DTCEE4
SCI
channel 0
81
H'04A2
DTCEE3
82
H'04A4
DTCEE2
SCI
channel 1
85
H'04AA
DTCEE1
86
H'04AC
DTCEE0
89
H'04B2
DTCEF7
TXI2 (transmit data empty 2)
SCI
channel 2
90
H'04B4
DTCEF6
RM0
HCAN
106
H'04D4
DTCEG5
RXI0 (reception complete 0)
TXI0 (transmit data empty 0)
RXI1 (reception complete 1)
TXI1 (transmit data empty 1)
RXI2 (reception complete 2)
Note:
*
Low
DTCE bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and should be written with 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 199 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.4
Location of Register Information in Address Space
Figure 8.5 shows how the register information should be located in the address space.
Locate the MRA, SAR, MRB, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers, in that order, from the start address
of the register information (contents of the vector address). In the case of chain transfer, register
information should be located in consecutive areas.
Locate the register information in the on-chip RAM (addresses: H'FFEBC0 to H'FFEFBF).
Lower address
Register
information
start address
Chain
transfer
0
1
2
3
MRA
SAR
MRB
DAR
CRA
Register information
CRB
MRA
SAR
MRB
DAR
CRA
Register information
for 2nd transfer in
chain transfer
CRB
4 bytes
Figure 8.5 Location of Register Information in Address Space
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 200 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.5
Normal Mode
In normal mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data.
From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a
CPU interrupt can be requested.
Table 8.5 lists the register information in normal mode and figure 8.6 shows memory mapping in
normal mode.
Table 8.5
Register Information in Normal Mode
Name
Abbreviation
Function
DTC source address register
SAR
Designates source address
DTC destination address register
DAR
Designates destination address
DTC transfer count register A
CRA
Designates transfer count
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
Not used
SAR
DAR
Transfer
Figure 8.6 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 201 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.6
Repeat Mode
In repeat mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data.
From 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, the
initial state of the transfer counter and the address register specified as the repeat area is restored,
and transfer is repeated. In repeat mode the transfer counter value does not reach H'00, and
therefore CPU interrupts cannot be requested when DISEL = 0.
Table 8.6 lists the register information in repeat mode and figure 8.7 shows memory mapping in
repeat mode.
Table 8.6
Register Information in Repeat Mode
Name
Abbreviation
Function
DTC source address register
SAR
Designates source address
DTC destination address register
DAR
Designates destination address
DTC transfer count register AH
CRAH
Holds number of transfers
DTC transfer count register AL
CRAL
Designates transfer count
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
Not used
SAR or
DAR
Repeat area
Transfer
Figure 8.7 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 202 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
DAR or
SAR
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.7
Block Transfer Mode
In block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. Either the transfer source or the
transfer destination is designated as a block area.
The block size is 1 to 256. When the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of the block size
counter and the address register specified as the block area is restored. The other address register
is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed.
From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a
CPU interrupt is requested.
Table 8.7 lists the register information in block transfer mode and figure 8.8 shows memory
mapping in block transfer mode.
Table 8.7
Register Information in Block Transfer Mode
Name
Abbreviation
Function
DTC source address register
SAR
Designates source address
DTC destination address register
DAR
Designates destination address
DTC transfer count register AH
CRAH
Holds block size
DTC transfer count register AL
CRAL
Designates block size count
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
Transfer count
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 203 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
First block
SAR or
DAR
·
·
·
Block area
Transfer
Nth block
Figure 8.8 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 204 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
DAR or
SAR
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.8
Chain Transfer
Setting the CHNE bit to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed consectutively in
response to a single transfer request. SAR, DAR, CRA, CRB, MRA, and MRB, which define data
transfers, can be set independently.
Figure 8.9 shows the memory map for chain transfer.
Source
Destination
Register information
CHNE = 1
DTC vector
address
Register information
start address
Register information
CHNE = 0
Source
Destination
Figure 8.9 Chain Transfer Memory Map
In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the
end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt
source flag for the activation source is not affected.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 205 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.9
Operation Timing
Figures 8.10 to 8.12 show an example of DTC operation timing.
φ
DTC activation
request
DTC
request
Data transfer
Vector read
Address
Read Write
Transfer
information read
Transfer
information write
Figure 8.10 DTC Operation Timing (Example in Normal Mode or Repeat Mode)
φ
DTC activation
request
DTC request
Data transfer
Vector read
Address
Read Write Read Write
Transfer
information read
Transfer
information write
Figure 8.11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Block Transfer Mode,
with Block Size of 2)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 206 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
φ
DTC activation
request
DTC
request
Data transfer
Data transfer
Read Write
Read Write
Vector read
Address
Transfer
information
read
Transfer
Transfer
information information
write
read
Transfer
information
write
Figure 8.12 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Chain Transfer)
8.3.10
Number of DTC Execution States
Table 8.8 lists execution statuses for a single DTC data transfer, and table 8.9 shows the number of
states required for each execution status.
Table 8.8
DTC Execution Statuses
Mode
Vector Read
I
Register Information
Read/Write
Data Read
J
K
Data Write
L
Internal
Operations
M
Normal
1
6
1
1
3
Repeat
1
6
1
1
3
Block transfer
1
6
N
N
3
N: Block size (initial setting of CRAH and CRAL)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 207 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.9
Number of States Required for Each Execution Status
OnChip
RAM
OnChip
ROM
Bus width
32
16
8
16
Access states
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
3
Object to be Accessed
Execution
status
On-Chip I/O
Registers
External Devices
8
16
Vector read
SI
—
1
—
—
4
6+2m
2
3+m
Register
information
read/write
SJ
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Byte data read
SK
1
1
2
2
2
3+m
2
3+m
Word data read
SK
1
1
4
2
4
6+2m
2
3+m
Byte data write
SL
1
1
2
2
2
3+m
2
3+m
Word data write
SL
1
1
4
2
4
6+2m
2
3+m
Internal operation
SM
1
The number of execution states is calculated from the formula below. Note that Σ means the sum
of all transfers activated by one activation event (the number in which the CHNE bit is set to 1,
plus 1).
Number of execution states = I · (SI + 1) + Σ (J · SJ + K · SK + L · SL) + M · SM
For example, when the DTC vector address table is located in on-chip ROM, normal mode is set,
and data is transferred from the on-chip ROM to an internal I/O register, the time required for the
DTC operation is 14 states. The time from activation to the end of the data write is 11 states.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 208 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.11
Procedures for Using DTC
Activation by Interrupt: The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is as follows:
[1] Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM.
[2] Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address.
[3] Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1.
[4] Set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the activation sources to 1. The DTC
is activated when an interrupt used as an activation source is generated.
[5] After the end of one data transfer, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended,
the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and a CPU interrupt is requested. If the DTC is to continue
transferring data, set the DTCE bit to 1.
Activation by Software: The procedure for using the DTC with software activation is as follows:
[1] Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM.
[2] Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address.
[3] Check that the SWDTE bit is 0.
[4] Write 1 to SWDTE bit and the vector number to DTVECR.
[5] Check the vector number written to DTVECR.
[6] After the end of one data transfer, if the DISEL bit is 0 and a CPU interrupt is not requested,
the SWDTE bit is cleared to 0. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the SWDTE bit
to 1. When the DISEL bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the
SWDTE bit is held at 1 and a CPU interrupt is requested.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 209 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3.12
Examples of Use of the DTC
(1) Normal Mode
An example is shown in which the DTC is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the SCI.
[1] Set MRA to fixed source address (SM1 = SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 =
1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have
any value. Set MRB for one data transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0, DISEL = 0). Set the
SCI RDR address in SAR, the start address of the RAM area where the data will be received in
DAR, and 128 (H'0080) in CRA. CRB can be set to any value.
[2] Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address.
[3] Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1.
[4] Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the reception
complete (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI reception
operation will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept receive error
interrupts.
[5] Each time reception of one byte of data ends on the SCI, the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an
RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is transferred from RDR
to RAM by the DTC. DAR is incremented and CRA is decremented. The RDRF flag is
automatically cleared to 0.
[6] When CRA becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have ended, the RDRF flag is held at 1, the
DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The interrupt
handling routine should perform wrap-up processing.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 210 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
(2) Chain Transfer
An example of DTC chain transfer is shown in which pulse output is performed using the PPG.
Chain transfer can be used to perform pulse output data transfer and PPG output trigger cycle
updating. Repeat mode transfer to the PPG’s NDR is performed in the first half of the chain
transfer, and normal mode transfer to the TPU’s TGR in the second half. This is because clearing
of the activation source and interrupt generation at the end of the specified number of transfers are
restricted to the second half of the chain transfer (transfer when CHNE = 0).
[1] Perform settings for transfer to the PPG’s NDR. Set MRA to source address incrementing
(SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), repeat mode (MD1 = 0,
MD0 = 1), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the source side as a repeat area (DTS = 1). Set MRB to
chain mode (CHNE = 1, DISEL = 0). Set the data table start address in SAR, the NDRH
address in DAR, and the data table size in CRAH and CRAL. CRB can be set to any value.
[2] Perform settings for transfer to the TPU’s TGR. Set MRA to source address incrementing
(SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 =
MD0 = 0), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the data table start address in SAR, the TGRA address
in DAR, and the data table size in CRA. CRB can be set to any value.
[3] Locate the TPU transfer register information consecutively after the NDR transfer register
information.
[4] Set the start address of the NDR transfer register information to the DTC vector address.
[5] Set the bit corresponding to TGIA in DTCER to 1.
[6] Set TGRA as an output compare register (output disabled) with TIOR, and enable the TGIA
interrupt with TIER.
[7] Set the initial output value in PODR, and the next output value in NDR. Set bits in DDR and
NDER for which output is to be performed to 1. Using PCR, select the TPU compare match
to be used as the output trigger.
[8] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1, and start the TCNT count operation.
[9] Each time a TGRA compare match occurs, the next output value is transferred to NDR and
the set value of the next output trigger period is transferred to TGRA. The activation source
TGFA flag is cleared.
[10] When the specified number of transfers are completed (the TPU transfer CRA value is 0), the
TGFA flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and a TGIA interrupt request is sent to
the CPU. Termination processing should be performed in the interrupt handling routine.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 211 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
(3) Software Activation
An example is shown in which the DTC is used to transfer a block of 128 bytes of data by means
of software activation. The transfer source address is H'1000 and the destination address is
H'2000. The vector number is H'60, so the vector address is H'04C0.
[1] Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), incrementing destination
address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), block transfer mode (MD1 = 1, MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz =
0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one block transfer by one interrupt (CHNE =
0). Set the transfer source address (H'1000) in SAR, the destination address (H'2000) in DAR,
and 128 (H'8080) in CRA. Set 1 (H'0001) in CRB.
[2] Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address (H'04C0).
[3] Check that the SWDTE bit in DTVECR is 0. Check that there is currently no transfer activated
by software.
[4] Write 1 to the SWDTE bit and the vector number (H'60) to DTVECR. The write data is H'E0.
[5] Read DTVECR again and check that it is set to the vector number (H'60). If it is not, this
indicates that the write failed. This is presumably because an interrupt occurred between steps
3 and 4 and led to a different software activation. To activate this transfer, go back to step 3.
[6] If the write was successful, the DTC is activated and a block of 128 bytes of data is transferred.
[7] After the transfer, an SWDTEND interrupt occurs. The interrupt handling routine should clear
the SWDTE bit to 0 and perform other wrap-up processing.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 212 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.4
Interrupts
An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC finishes the specified number of data
transfers, or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt activation,
the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are subject to
CPU mask level and interrupt controller priority level control.
In the case of activation by software, a software activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND)
is generated.
When the DISEL bit is 1 and one data transfer has ended, or the specified number of transfers
have ended, after data transfer ends, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and an SWDTEND interrupt is
generated. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0.
When the DTC is activated by software, an SWDTEND interrupt is not generated during a data
transfer wait or during data transfer even if the SWDTE bit is set to 1.
8.5
Usage Notes
Module Stop: When the MSTPA6 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, the DTC clock stops, and the
DTC enters the module stop state. However, 1 cannot be written in the MSTPA6 bit while the
DTC is operating.
On-Chip RAM: The MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers are all located in on-chip
RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must not be cleared to 0.
DTCE Bit Setting: For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and
BCLR. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time by writing
data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 213 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 214 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have seven I/O ports (ports 1 and A to F), and two
input-only ports (ports 4 and 9).
Table 9.1 summarizes the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions.
Each I/O port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output, a data register
(DR) that stores output data, and a port register (PORT) used to read the pin states. The input-only
ports do not have a DR or DDR register.
Ports A to E have a built-in pull-up MOS function, and in addition to DR and DDR, have a MOS
input pull-up control register (PCR) to control the on/off state of MOS input pull-up.
Ports A to C include an open-drain control register (ODR) that controls the on/off state of the
output buffer PMOS.
Ports 10 to 13, A0 to A3, and B to E can drive a single TTL load and 50 pF capacitive load when
used as expansion bus control signal output pins. In other cases these ports, together with ports 14
to 17 and 3, can drive a single TTL load and 30 pF capacitive load. All the I/O ports can drive a
Darlington transistor when in output mode. Ports 1, A, B, and C can drive an LED (10 mA sink
current).
See appendix C, I/O Port Block Diagrams, for a block diagram of each port.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 215 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.1
Port
Port Functions
Description
Port 1 • 8-bit I/O
port
• Schmitttriggered
input (P16
and P14)
Pins
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/
TCLKA/A22
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/A21
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/A20
Port 4 • 8-bit input
port
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD 8-bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1 pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD,
TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0,
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, TIOCB2), PPG
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0 output pins (PO15 to PO8), interrupt input
pins (IRQ0, IRQ1), and address outputs
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/
(A20 to A23)
TCLKB/A23
P47/AN7
P46/AN6
Mode 7
8-bit I/O port
also functioning as TPU
I/O pins
(TCLKA,
TCLKB,
TCLKC,
TCLKD,
TIOCA0,
TIOCB0,
TIOCC0,
TIOCD0,
TIOCA1,
TIOCB1,
TIOCA2,
TIOCB2),
PPG output
pins (PO15 to
PO8), and
interrupt input
pins (IRQ0,
IRQ1)
8-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog
inputs (AN7 to AN0)
P45/AN5
P44/AN4
P43/AN3
P42/AN2
P41/AN1
P40/AN0
Port 9 • 8-bit input
port
P97/AN15/DA3*1
P96/AN14/DA2*1
P95/AN13
P94/AN12
P93/AN11
P92/AN10
P91/AN9
P90/AN8
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 216 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
8-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog
inputs (AN15 to AN8) and D/A converter analog outputs
(DA3, DA2)
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port
Description
Port A • 6-bit I/O
*2
port
• Built-in
MOS input
pull-up
Pins
PA5
PA4
PA3/A19/SCK2
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
6-bit I/O port
also functioning as SCI
(channel 2)
I/O pins
(TxD2, RxD2,
SCK2)
8-bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O
pins (TIOCB5, TIOCA5, TIOCB4, TIOCA4,
TIOCD3, TIOCC3, TIOCB3, TIOCA3) and
address outputs (A15 to A8)
8-bit I/O port
also functioning as TPU
I/O pins
(TIOCB5,
TIOCA5,
TIOCB4,
TIOCA4,
TIOCD3,
TIOCC3,
TIOCB3,
TIOCA3)
Address output (A7 to A0)
8-bit I/O port
also functioning as SCI
(channel 0, 1)
I/O pins
(TxD0, RxD0,
SCK0, TxD1,
RxD1, SCK1)
and interrupt
input pins
(IRQ4, IRQ5)
PA2/A18/RxD2
• Open-drain PA1/A17/TxD2
PA0/A16
output
capability
Port B • 8-bit I/O
port
• Built-in
MOS input
pull-up
PB7/A15/TIOCB5
PB6/A14/TIOCA5
PB5/A13/TIOCB4
PB4/A12/TIOCA4
• Open-drain PB3/A11/TIOCD3
PB2/A10/TIOCC3
output
capability
PB1/A9/TIOCB3
PB0/A8/TIOCA3
Port C • 8-bit I/O
port
• Built-in
MOS input
pull-up
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5/SCK1/IRQ5
PC4/A4/RxD1
• Open-drain PC3/A3/TxD1
PC2/A2/SCK0/IRQ4
output
capability
PC1/A1/RxD0
PC0/A0/TxD0
Port D • 8-bit I/O
port
• Built-in
MOS input
pull-up
PD7/D15
Mode 7
6-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI
(channel 2) I/O pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2),
and address outputs (A19 to A16)
Data bus input/output
8-bit I/O port
also functioning as SCI
(channel 0, 1)
I/O pins
(TxD0, RxD0,
SCK0, TxD1,
RxD1, SCK1),
interrupt input
pins (IRQ4,
IRQ5), and
address
outputs (A7 to
A0)
I/O port
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
PD0/D8
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 217 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port
Description
Port E • 8-bit I/O
port
• Built-in
MOS input
pull-up
Pins
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
PE7/D7
In 8-bit bus mode: I/O port
PE6/D6
In 16-bit bus mode: data bus input/output
Mode 7
I/O port
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
Port F • 8-bit I/O
port
PF7/φ
When DDR = 0: input port
When DDR = 1 (after reset): φ output
When DDR =
0 (after reset):
input port
When DDR =
1: φ output
PF6/AS
AS, RD, HWR, LWR output
I/O port
PF5/RD
ADTRG, IRQ3 input
ADTRG,
IRQ3 input
When WAITE = 0 and BREQOE = 0 (after
reset): I/O port
I/O port
PF4/HWR
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
When WAITE = 1 and BREQOE = 0:
WAIT input
When WAITE = 0 and BREQOE = 1:
BREQO input
PF1/BACK/BUZZ*3
PF0/BREQ/IRQ2
When BRLE = 0 (after reset): I/O port
I/O port,
When BRLE = 1: BREQ input, BACK output, BUZZ output,
BUZZ output, IRQ2 input
IRQ2 input
Notes: 1. DA3 and DA2 are outputs in the H8S/2626 Group only.
2. In the H8S/2626 Group, PA5 and PA4 are OSC2 and OSC1, respectively.
3. BUZZ output pin in the H8S/2626 Group only.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 218 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2
Port 1
9.2.1
Overview
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 1 pins also function as PPG output pins (PO15 to PO8), TPU I/O
pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1,
TIOCB1, TIOCA2, and TIOCB2), external interrupt pins (IRQ0 and IRQ1), and address bus
output pins (A23 to A20). Port 1 pin functions change according to the operating mode.
Figure 9.1 shows the port 1 pin configuration.
Port 1 pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
P17 (I/O) / PO15 (output) / TIOCB2 (I/O) / TCLKD (input)
P16 (I/O) / PO14 (output) / TIOCA2 (I/O) / IRQ1 (input)
P15 (I/O) / PO13 (output) / TIOCB1 (I/O) / TCLKC (input)
Port 1
P14 (I/O) / PO12 (output) / TIOCA1 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input)
P13 (I/O) / PO11 (output) / TIOCD0 (I/O) / TCLKB (input) / A23 (output)
P12 (I/O) / PO10 (output) / TIOCC0 (I/O) / TCLKA (input) / A22 (output)
P11 (I/O) / PO9 (output) / TIOCB0 (I/O) / A21 (output)
P10 (I/O) / PO8 (output) / TIOCA0 (I/O) / A20 (output)
Pin functions in mode 7
P17 (I/O) / PO15 (output) / TIOCB2 (I/O) / TCLKD (input)
P16 (I/O) / PO14 (output) / TIOCA2 (I/O) / IRQ1 (input)
P15 (I/O) / PO13 (output) / TIOCB1 (I/O) / TCLKC (input)
P14 (I/O) / PO12 (output) / TIOCA1 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input)
P13 (I/O) / PO11 (output) / TIOCD0 (I/O) / TCLKB (input)
P12 (I/O) / PO10 (output) / TIOCC0 (I/O) / TCLKA (input)
P11 (I/O) / PO9 (output) / TIOCB0 (I/O)
P10 (I/O) / PO8 (output) / TIOCA0 (I/O)
Figure 9.1 Port 1 Pin Functions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 219 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.2
Register Configuration
Table 9.2 shows the port 1 register configuration.
Table 9.2
Port 1 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port 1 data direction register
P1DDR
W
H'00
H'FE30
Port 1 data register
P1DR
R/W
H'00
H'FF00
Port 1 register
PORT1
R
Undefined
H'FFB0
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port 1. P1DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Setting a P1DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit
to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
P1DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 220 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DR
P16DR
P15DR
P14DR
P13DR
P12DR
P11DR
P10DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10).
P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port 1 Register (PORT1)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Determined by state of pins P17 to P10.
PORT1 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10) must always be performed on P1DR.
If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are set to 1, the P1DR values are read. If a port 1
read is performed while P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORT1 contents are determined by the pin states, as
P1DDR and P1DR are initialized. PORT1 retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 221 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.3
Pin Functions
Port 1 pins also function as PPG output pins (PO15 to PO8), TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB,
TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, and
TIOCB2), external interrupt input pins (IRQ0 and IRQ1), and address bus output pins (A23 to
A20). Port 1 pin functions are shown in table 9.3.
Table 9.3
Port 1 Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P17/PO15/
TIOCB2/TCLKD
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the TPU channel 2 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR2, bits IOB3 to IOB0
in TIOR2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR2), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in
TCR0 and TCR5, bit NDER15 in NDERH, and bit P17DDR.
TPU Channel
2 Setting
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P17DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER15
—
—
0
1
Pin function
TIOCB2 output
P17
P17
PO15
input
output
output
1
TIOCB2 input *
2
TCLKD input *
Notes: 1. TIOCB2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3 =
1.
2. TCLKD input when the setting for either TCR0 or TCR5 is: TPSC2
to TPSC0 = B'111.
TCLKD input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting
mode.
TPU Channel
2 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOB3 to IOB0
CCLR1,
CCLR0
Output
function
(2)
(1)
(2)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'0010
B'0000 B'0001 to
—
B'0011
B'0100
B'1xxx B'0101 to
B'0111
—
—
—
—
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 222 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Output
compare
output
—
(2)
B'xx00
—
—
(1)
(2)
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
Other
B'10
than B'10
PWM
—
mode 2
output
x: Don’t care
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P16/PO14/
TIOCA2/IRQ1
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the TPU channel 2 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR2, bits IOA3 to IOA0
in TIOR2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR2), bit NDER14 in NDERH, and
bit P16DDR.
TPU Channel
2 Setting
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P16DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER14
—
—
0
1
TIOCA2 output
P16
input
P16
output
Pin function
PO14
output
1
TIOCA2 input *
IRQ1 input
TPU Channel
2 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
CCLR1,
CCLR0
Output
function
(2)
(1)
(2)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'001x
B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00
B'0100 B'0011
B'1xxx B'0101 to
B'0111
—
—
—
—
Output
compare
output
—
(1)
(1)
(2)
B'0010
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
—
Other
B'01
than B'01
PWM
PWM
—
mode 1 mode 2
2
output
output *
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCA2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 =
1.
2. TIOCB2 output is disabled.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 223 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P15/PO13/
TIOCB1/TCLKC
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the TPU channel 1 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR1, bits IOB3 to IOB0
in TIOR1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in
TCR0, TCR2, TCR4, and TCR5, bit NDER13 in NDERH, and bit P15DDR.
TPU Channel
1 Setting
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P15DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER13
—
—
0
1
TIOCB1 output
P15
input
P15
output
Pin function
TCLKC input *
PO13
output
1
TIOCB1 input *
2
Notes: 1. TIOCB1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3
to IOB0 = B'10xx.
2. TCLKC input when the setting for either TCR0 or TCR2 is: TPSC2
to TPSC0 = B'110; or when the setting for either TCR4 or TCR5 is
TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'101.
TCLKC input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting
mode.
TPU Channel
1 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOB3 to IOB0
CCLR1,
CCLR0
Output
function
(2)
(1)
(2)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'0010
B'0000 B'0001 to
—
B'0100 B'0011
B'1xxx B'0101 to
B'0111
—
—
—
—
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 224 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Output
compare
output
—
(2)
B'xx00
—
—
(1)
(2)
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
Other
B'10
than
B'10
PWM
—
mode 2
output
x: Don’t care
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P14/PO12/
TIOCA1/IRQ0
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the TPU channel 1 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR1, bits IOA3 to IOA0
in TIOR1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1), bit NDER12 in NDERH, and
bit P14DDR.
TPU Channel
1 Setting
Table Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P14DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER12
—
—
0
1
TIOCA1 output
P14
input
P14
output
Pin function
PO12
output
1
TIOCA1 input *
IRQ0 input
TPU Channel
1 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
CCLR1,
CCLR0
Output
function
(2)
(1)
(2)
B'0000, B'01xx
B'001x
B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00
B'0100 B'0011
B'1xxx B'0101 to
B'0111
—
—
—
—
Output
compare
output
—
(1)
B'0010
Other
than
B'xx00
(1)
(2)
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
—
Other
B'01
than B'01
PWM
PWM
—
mode 1 mode 2
2
output
output*
x: Don't care
Notes: 1. TIOCA1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 to
IOA0 = B'10xx.
2. TIOCB1 output is disabled.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 225 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P13/PO11/
TIOCD0/TCLKB/
A23
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR0, bits IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR0L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0),
bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 to TCR2, bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit
NDER11 in NDERH, and bit P13DDR.
Operating
mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
P13DDR
NDER11
Pin function
B'0000 to B'1110
Table
Below (1)
—
B'1111
Table Below (2)
0
1
1
—
—
—
0
1
—
TIOCD0
output
P13 input
P13 output
PO11
output
A23 output
TIOCD0 input *
2
TCLKB input *
Operating
mode
1
Mode 7
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
—
—
Table
Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P13DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER11
—
—
0
1
TIOCD0
output
P13 input
P13 output
PO11 output
Pin function
TIOCD0 input *
2
TCLKB input *
1
Notes: 1. TIOCD0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOD3 to IOD0 =
B'10xx.
2. TCLKB input when the setting for TCR0 to TCR2 is: TPSC2 to
TPSC0 = B'101.
TCLKB input when channels 1 and 5 are set to phase counting
mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 226 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
P13/PO11/
TIOCD0/TCLKB/
A23 (cont)
Selection Method and Pin Functions
TPU Channel
0 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOD3 to IOD0
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
Output
function
(2)
(2)
B'0000
B'0010
B'0000 B'0001 to
—
B'0100 B'0011
B'1xxx B'0101 to
B'0111
—
—
—
—
(1)
Output
compare
output
—
(2)
B'xx00
—
—
(1)
(2)
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
Other
B'110
than
B'110
PWM
—
mode 2
output
x: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 227 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P12/PO10/
TIOCC0/TCLKA/
A22
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR0, bits IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR0L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0),
bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 to TCR5, bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit
NDER10 in NDERH, and bit P12DDR.
Operating
mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
P12DDR
NDER10
Pin function
B'0000 to B'1110
Table
Below (1)
—
B'1111
Table Below (2)
0
1
1
—
—
—
0
1
—
TIOCC0
output
P12
input
P12
output
PO10
output
A22 output
TIOCC0 input *
2
TCLKA input *
Operating
mode
1
Mode 7
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
—
—
Table
Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P12DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER10
—
—
0
1
TIOCC0
output
P12 input
P12 output
PO10 output
Pin function
TIOCC0 input*
2
TCLKA input*
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 228 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
1
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
P12/PO10/
TIOCC0/TCLKA/
A22 (cont)
Selection Method and Pin Functions
TPU Channel
0 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOC3 to IOC0
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
Output
function
(2)
(2)
B'0000
B'001x
B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00
B'0100 B'0011
B'1xxx B'0101 to
B'0111
—
—
—
—
(1)
Output
compare
output
—
(1)
(1)
(2)
B'0010
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
—
PWM
mode 1
3
output*
Other
B'101
than
B'101
PWM
—
mode 2
output
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCC0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOC3 to IOC0 =
B'10xx.
2. TCLKA input when the setting for TCR0 to TCR5 is: TPSC2 to
TPSC0 = B'100.
TCLKA input when channels 1 and 5 are set to phase counting
mode.
3. TIOCD0 output is disabled.
When BFA = 1 or BFB = 1 in TMDR0, output is disabled and
setting (2) applies.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 229 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
A21
the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR0, and bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR0H, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in
TCR0, bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit NDER9 in NDERH, and bit P11DDR.
Operating
mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
P11DDR
B'0000 to B'1101
Table
Below (1)
—
NDER9
Pin function
B'1110 to
B'1111
Table Below (2)
0
—
1
1
1
—
—
0
TIOCB0
output
P11
input
P11
output
PO9
output
TIOCB0 input*
Operating
mode
—
—
A21 output
Mode 7
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
—
Table
Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P11DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER9
—
—
0
1
TIOCB0
output
P11 input
P11 output
PO9 output
Pin function
TIOCB0 input*
Note:
*
TIOCB0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOB3 to IOB0 =
B'10xx.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 230 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/
TPU Channel
A21 (cont)
0 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOB3 to IOB0
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
Output
function
(2)
(2)
B'0000
B'0010
B'0000 B'0001 to
—
B'0100 B'0011
B'1xxx B'0101 to
B'0111
—
—
—
—
(1)
Output
compare
output
—
(2)
B'xx00
—
—
(1)
(2)
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
Other
B'010
than
B'010
PWM
—
mode 2
output
x: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 231 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
A20
the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR0, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR0H, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0),
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit NDER8 in NDERH, and bit P10DDR.
Operating
mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
P10DDR
NDER8
Pin function
B'0000 to B'1110
Table
Below (1)
—
Table Below (2)
0
—
1
1
1
—
—
0
TIOCA0
output
P10
input
P10
output
—
—
PO8
output
1
TIOCA0 input*
Operating
mode
A20 output
Mode 7
AE3 to AE0
TPU Channel
0 Setting
B'1101 to
B'1111
—
Table
Below (1)
Table Below (2)
P10DDR
—
0
1
1
NDER8
—
—
0
1
TIOCA0
output
P10 input
P10 output
PO8 output
Pin function
TIOCA0 input*
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 232 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
1
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/
TPU Channel
A20 (cont)
0 Setting
MD3 to MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
Output
function
(2)
(2)
B'0000
B'001x
B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00
B'0100 B'0011
B'1xxx B'0101 to
B'0111
—
—
—
—
(1)
Output
compare
output
—
(1)
(1)
(2)
B'0010
B'0011
Other than B'xx00
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
Other
B'001
than
B'001
PWM
—
mode 2
output
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCA0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOA3 to IOA0 =
B'10xx.
2. TIOCB0 output is disabled.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 233 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3
Port 4
9.3.1
Overview
Port 4 is an 8-bit input-only port. Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins
(AN0 to AN7). Port 4 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 9.2 shows the port
4 pin configuration.
Port 4 pins
P47 (input) / AN7 (input)
P46 (input) / AN6 (input)
P45 (input) / AN5 (input)
Port 4
P44 (input) / AN4 (input)
P43 (input) / AN3 (input)
P42 (input) / AN2 (input)
P41 (input) / AN1 (input)
P40 (input) / AN0 (input)
Figure 9.2 Port 4 Pin Functions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 234 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.2
Register Configuration
Table 9.4 shows the port 4 register configuration. Port 4 is an input-only port, and does not have a
data direction register or data register.
Table 9.4
Port 4 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port 4 register
PORT4
R
Undefined
H'FFB3
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 4 Register (PORT4): The pin states are always read when a port 4 read is performed.
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
9.3.3
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Determined by state of pins P47 to P40.
Pin Functions
Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 235 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4
Port 9
9.4.1
Overview
Port 9 is an 8-bit input-only port. Port 9 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins
(AN8 to AN15) and D/A converter analog output pins (DA3, DA2). Port 9 pin functions are the
same in all operating modes. Figure 9.3 shows the port 9 pin configuration.
Port 9 pins
P97 (input) / AN15 (input) / DA3 (output)*
P96 (input) / AN14 (input) / DA2 (output)*
P95 (input) / AN13 (input)
Port 9
P94 (input) / AN12 (input)
P93 (input) / AN11 (input)
P92 (input) / AN10 (input)
P91 (input) / AN9 (input)
P90 (input) / AN8 (input)
Note: * DA3 and DA2 are outputs in the H8S/2626 Group only.
Figure 9.3 Port 9 Pin Functions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 236 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.2
Register Configuration
Table 9.5 shows the port 9 register configuration. Port 9 is an input-only port, and does not have a
data direction register or data register.
Table 9.5
Port 9 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port 9 register
PORT9
R
Undefined
H'FFB8
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 9 Register (PORT9): The pin states are always read when a port 9 read is performed.
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
9.4.3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P97
P96
P95
P94
P93
P92
P91
P90
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
:
*
Determined by state of pins P97 to P90.
Pin Functions
Port 9 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN8 to AN15) and D/A converter
analog output pins (DA3, DA2).
9.5
Port A
9.5.1
Overview
Port A is a 6-bit I/O port. Port A pins also function as address bus outputs and SCI2 I/O pins
(SCK2, RxD2, and TxD2). The pin functions change according to the operating mode.
Port A has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9.4 shows the port A pin configuration.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 237 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port A
Port A pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PA5*
PA5 (I/O)
PA4*
PA4 (I/O)
PA3/A19/SCK2
PA3 (I/O) / A19 (output) / SCK2 (I/O)
PA2/A18/RxD2
PA2 (I/O) / A18 (output) / RxD2 (input)
PA1/A17/TxD2
PA1 (I/O) / A17 (output) / TxD2 (output)
PA0/A16
PA0 (I/O) / A16 (output)
Pin functions in mode 7
PA5 (I/O)
PA4 (I/O)
PA3 (I/O) / SCK2 (output)
PA2 (I/O) / RxD2 (input)
PA1 (I/O) / TxD2 (output)
PA0 (I/O)
Note: * In the H8S/2626 Series, PA5 and PA4 are OSC2 and OSC1, respectively.
Figure 9.4 Port A Pin Functions
9.5.2
Register Configuration
Table 9.6 shows the port A register configuration.
Table 9.6
Port A Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value*
Port A data direction register
PADDR
W
H'0
H'FE39
Port A data register
PADR
R/W
H'0
H'FF09
2
Address*
1
Port A register
PORTA
R
Undefined
H'FFB9
Port A MOS pull-up control register
PAPCR
R/W
H'0
H'FE40
Port A open-drain control register
PAODR
R/W
H'0
H'FE47
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Value of bits 3 to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 238 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)
Bit
:
7
—
6
—
5
4
3
PA5DDR* PA4DDR* PA3DDR
2
1
0
PA2DDR
PA1DDR
PA0DDR
Initial value : Undefined Undefined
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Note:
:
*
—
—
In the H8S/2626 Group bits 5 and 4 are reserved, and will return an undefined value if
read.
PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port A. PADDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read.
PADDR is initialized to H'0 (bits 5 to 0) by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its
prior state in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address
output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to
software standby mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
The corresponding port A pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, irrespective of the value of bits PA5DDR to PA0DDR. When pins are
not used as address outputs, setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an
output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
• Mode 7
Setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an output port, while clearing
the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Port A Data Register (PADR)
Bit
:
7
6
—
—
Initial value : Undefined Undefined
R/W
Note:
:
*
—
—
5
4
PA5DR* PA4DR*
3
2
1
0
PA3DR
PA2DR
PA1DR
PA0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
In the H8S/2626 Group bits 5 and 4 are reserved, and will return an undefined value if
read.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 239 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port A pins (PA5 to
PA0).
Bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified.
PADR is initialized to H'0 (bits 5 to 0) by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its
prior state in software standby mode.
Port A Register (PORTA)
Bit
:
7
6
5
—
—
PA5*
1
—*
Initial value : Undefined Undefined
R/W
:
—
—
4
2
PA4*
1
—*
R
R
2
3
2
1
0
PA3
1
—*
PA2
1
—*
PA1
1
—*
PA0
1
—*
R
R
R
R
Notes: 1. Determined by state of pins PA5 to PA0.
2. In the H8S/2626 Group bits 5 and 4 are reserved, and will return an undefined value if
read.
PORTA is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port A pins (PA5 to PA0) must always be performed on PADR.
Bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified.
If a port A read is performed while PADDR bits are set to 1, the PADR values are read. If a port A
read is performed while PADDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTA contents are determined by the pin states, as
PADDR and PADR are initialized. PORTA retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Port A MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PAPCR)
Bit
:
7
—
6
—
Initial value : Undefined Undefined
R/W
Note:
:
*
—
—
5
4
3
PA5PCR* PA4PCR* PA3PCR
2
1
0
PA2PCR
PA1PCR
PA0PCR
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
In the H8S/2626 Group bits 5 and 4 are reserved, and will return an undefined value if
read.
PAPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port A on an individual bit basis.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 240 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. In
modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the SCI’s
SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS
input pull-up for that pin.
In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR,
and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up
for that pin.
PAPCR is initialized to H'0 (bits 5 to 0) by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its
prior state in software standby mode.
Port A Open Drain Control Register (PAODR)
Bit
:
7
6
—
—
Initial value : Undefined Undefined
R/W
Note:
:
*
—
—
5
4
3
PA5ODR* PA4ODR* PA3ODR
2
1
0
PA2ODR
PA1ODR
PA0ODR
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
In the H8S/2626 Group bits 5 and 4 are reserved, and will return an undefined value if
read.
PAODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls whether PMOS is on or off for each
port A pin (PA5 to PA0).
Bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified.
When pins are not address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR,
setting a PAODR bit makes the corresponding port A pin an NMOS open-drain output, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output.
PAODR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its
prior state in software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 241 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5.3
Pin Functions
Port A pins also function as SCI input/output pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2) and address bus output
pins (A19 to A16). Port A pin functions are shown in table 9.7.
Table 9.7
Port A Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PA5*
The pin function is switched as shown below according to bit PA5DDR.
PA5DDR
Pin function
Note:
PA4*
*
0
1
PA5 input
PA5 output
In the H8S/2626 Group, PA5 is OSC2.
The pin function is switched as shown below according to bit PA4DDR.
PA4DDR
Pin function
Note:
PA3/A19/SCK2
*
0
1
PA4 input
PA4 output
In the H8S/2626 Group, PA4 is OSC1.
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit C/A in SMR and bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR of
SCI2, and bit PA3DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
B'0000 to B'1011
CKE1
C/A
Pin function
1
—
1
—
—
1
—
—
—
0
CKE0
PA3DDR
0
0
1
—
—
—
—
PA3
input
PA3
output
SCK2
output
SCK2
output
SCK2
input
A19 output
Operating mode
Mode 7
CKE1
0
C/A
Pin function
1
0
CKE0
PA3DDR
B'1100 to B'1111
0
0
1
—
1
—
—
0
1
—
—
—
PA3
input
PA3
output
SCK2
output
SCK2
output
SCK2
input
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 242 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PA2/A18/RxD2
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit RE in SCR of SCI2, and bit PA2DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
B'0000 to B'1011
RE
0
PA2DDR
Pin function
—
1
—
—
PA2 input
PA2 output
RxD2 input
A18 output
Mode 7
RE
0
PA2DDR
PA1/A17/TxD2
1
0
Operating mode
Pin function
B'1011 to B'1111
1
0
1
—
PA2 input
PA2 output
RxD2 input
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit TE in SCR of SCI2, and bit PA1DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
B'0000 to B'1001
TE
PA1DDR
Pin function
1
—
0
0
1
—
—
PA1 input
PA1 output
TxD2 output
A17 output
Operating mode
Mode 7
TE
PA1DDR
Pin function
B'1010 to B'1111
0
1
0
1
—
PA1 input
PA1 output
TxD2 output
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 243 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PA0/A16
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, and bit PA0DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
B'0000 to B'1000
PA0DDR
Pin function
B'1001 to B'1111
0
1
—
PA0 input
PA0 output
A16 output
Operating mode
PA0DDR
Pin function
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 244 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Mode 7
0
1
PA0 input
PA0 output
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5.4
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port A has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. MOS input
pull-up can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis.
In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the SCI’s
SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS
input pull-up for that pin.
In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR,
and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up
for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained in software standby mode.
Table 9.8 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9.8
MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port A)
Pin States
Address output or
SCI output
Other than above
Power-On
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Legend:
OFF
: MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF : On when PADDR = 0 and PAPCR = 1; otherwise off.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 245 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6
Port B
9.6.1
Overview
Port B is an 8-bit I/O port. Port B pins also function as TPU I/O pins (TIOCA3, TIOCB3,
TIOCC3, TIOCD3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA5, TIOCB5) and as address outputs; the pin
functions change according to the operating mode.
Port B has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9.5 shows the port B pin configuration.
Port B
Port B pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PB7 / A15/TIOCB5
PB7 (I/O) / A15 (output) / TIOCB5 (I/O)
PB6 / A14/TIOCA5
PB6 (I/O) / A14 (output) / TIOCA5 (I/O)
PB5 / A13/TIOCB4
PB5 (I/O) / A13 (output) / TIOCB4 (I/O)
PB4 / A12/TIOCA4
PB4 (I/O) / A12 (output) / TIOCA4 (I/O)
PB3 / A11/TIOCD3
PB3 (I/O) / A11 (output) / TIOCD3 (I/O)
PB2 / A10/TIOCC3
PB2 (I/O) / A10 (output) / TIOCC3 (I/O)
PB1 / A9 /TIODB3
PB1 (I/O) / A9 (output) / TIOCB3 (I/O)
PB0 / A8 /TIOCA3
PB0 (I/O) / A8 (output) / TIOCA3 (I/O)
Pin functions in mode 7
PB7 (I/O) / TIOCB5 (I/O)
PB6 (I/O) / TIOCA5 (I/O)
PB5 (I/O) / TIOCB4 (I/O)
PB4 (I/O) / TIOCA4 (I/O)
PB3 (I/O) / TIOCD3 (I/O)
PB2 (I/O) / TIOCC3 (I/O)
PB1 (I/O) / TIOCB3 (I/O)
PB0 (I/O) / TIOCA3 (I/O)
Figure 9.5 Port B Pin Functions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 246 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.2
Register Configuration
Table 9.9 shows the port B register configuration.
Table 9.9
Port B Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port B data direction register
PBDDR
W
H'00
H'FE3A
Port B data register
PBDR
R/W
H'00
H'FF0A
Port B register
PORTB
R
Undefined
H'FFBA
Port B MOS pull-up control register
PBPCR
R/W
H'00
H'FE41
Port B open-drain control register
PBODR
R/W
H'00
H'FE48
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port B. PBDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PBDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins
retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby
mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
The corresponding port B pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, irrespective of the value of the PBDDR bits. When pins are not used as
address outputs, setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port,
while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
• Mode 7
Setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port, while clearing
the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 247 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port B Data Register (PBDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7DR
PB6DR
PB5DR
PB4DR
PB3DR
PB2DR
PB1DR
PB0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port B pins (PB7 to
PB0). PBDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior
state in software standby mode.
Port B Register (PORTB)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Determined by state of pins PB7 to PB0.
PORTB is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port B pins (PB7 to PB0) must always be performed on PBDR.
If a port B read is performed while PBDDR bits are set to 1, the PBDR values are read. If a port B
read is performed while PBDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTB contents are determined by the pin states, as
PBDDR and PBDR are initialized. PORTB retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Port B MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PBPCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7PCR PB6PCR PB5PCR PB4PCR PB3PCR PB2PCR PB1PCR PB0PCR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PBPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port B on an individual bit basis.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 248 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the TPU’s
TIOR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for
that pin.
In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the TPU’s TIOR and in
DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin.
PBPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port B Open Drain Control Register (PBODR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7ODR PB6ODR PB5ODR PB4ODR PB3ODR PB2ODR PB1ODR PB0ODR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PBODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the PMOS on/off state for each port B
pin (PB7 to PB0).
When pins are not address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR,
setting a PBODR bit makes the corresponding port B pin an NMOS open-drain output, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output.
PBODR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
9.6.3
Pin Functions
Port B pins also function as TPU input/output pins (TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCC3, TIOCD3,
TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA5, TIOCB5) and address bus output pins (A15 to A8). Port B pin
functions are shown in table 9.10.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 249 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.10 Port B Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB7/A15/
TIOCB5
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, the TPU channel 5 settings by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR5, bits
IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR5, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR5, and bit PB7DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU channel 5
settings
B'0000 to B'0111
(1) in table
below
PB7DDR
Pin function
B'1000 to B'1111
(2) in table
below
—
0
TIOCB5 output
PB7 input
—
1
—
PB7 output
A15 output
TIOCB5 input*
Operating mode
TPU channel 5
settings
Mode 7
(1) in table below
PB7DDR
(2) in table below
—
0
Pin function
TIOCB5 output
PB7 input
TPU channel 5
settings
(2)
MD3 to MD0
B'0000, B'01xx
IOB3 to IOB0
(1)
1
PB7 output
TIOCB5 input*
(2)
(2)
B'0010
(1)
(2)
B'0011
B'0000,
B'0100,
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
—
B'xx00
Not B'xx00
CCLR1, CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Not B'10
B'10
Output function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Note:
*
TIOCB5 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3 = 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 250 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB6/A14/
TIOCA5
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, the TPU channel 5 settings by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR5, bits
IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR5, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR5, and bit PB6DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU channel 5
settings
B'0000 to B'0110
(1) in table
below
PB6DDR
Pin function
(2) in table
below
—
0
TIOCA5 output
PB6 input
—
1
A14 output
Mode 7
(1) in table below
PB6DDR
(2) in table below
—
0
Pin function
TIOCA5 output
PB6 input
TPU channel 5
settings
(2)
MD3 to MD0
B'0000, B'01xx
IOA3 to IOA0
—
PB6 output
1
TIOCA5 input*
Operating mode
TPU channel 5
settings
B'0111 to B'1111
(1)
1
PB6 output
1
TIOCA5 input*
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
B'001x
B'0010
B'0011
Not B'xx00
B'0000,
B'0100,
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
B'xx00
Not
B'xx00
CCLR1, CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Not B'01
B'01
Output function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCA5 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 = 1.
2. TIOCB5 is disabled for output.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 251 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB5/A13/
TIOCB4
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, the TPU channel 4 settings by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR4, bits
IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR4, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR4, and bit PB5DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU channel 4
settings
B'0000 to B'0101
(1) in table
below
PB5DDR
Pin function
(2) in table
below
—
0
TIOCB4 output
PB5 input
—
1
A13 output
Mode 7
(1) in table below
PB5DDR
(2) in table below
—
0
Pin function
TIOCB4 output
PB5 input
TPU channel 5
settings
(2)
MD3 to MD0
B'0000, B'01xx
IOB3 to IOB0
—
PB5 output
TIOCB4 input*
Operating mode
TPU channel 4
settings
B'0110 to B'1111
(1)
1
PB5 output
TIOCB4 input*
(2)
(2)
B'0010
(1)
(2)
B'0011
B'0000,
B'0100,
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
—
B'xx00
Not B'xx00
CCLR1, CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Not B'10
B'10
Output function
1
Output
compare
output
1
1
PWM
mode 2
output
1
x: Don’t care
Note:
*
TIOCB4 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3 to IOB0 =
B'10xx.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 252 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB4/A12/
TIOCA4
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, the TPU channel 5 settings by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR4, bits
IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR4, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR4, and bit PB4DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU channel 4
settings
B'0000 to B'0100
(1) in table
below
PB4DDR
Pin function
(2) in table
below
—
0
TIOCA4 output
PB4 input
—
1
A12 output
Mode 7
(1) in table below
PB4DDR
(2) in table below
—
0
Pin function
TIOCA4 output
PB4 input
TPU channel 4
settings
(2)
MD3 to MD0
B'0000, B'01xx
IOA3 to IOA0
—
PB4 output
1
TIOCA4 input*
Operating mode
TPU channel 4
settings
B'0101 to B'1111
(1)
1
PB4 output
1
TIOCA4 input*
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
B'001x
B'0010
B'0011
Not B'xx00
B'0000,
B'0100,
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
B'xx00
Not
B'xx00
CCLR1, CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Not B'01
B'01
Output function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCA4 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 to IOA0 =
B'10xx.
2. TIOCB4 is disabled for output.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 253 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB3/A11/
TIOCD3
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, the TPU channel 3 settings by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR3, bits
IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR3L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR3, and bit PB3DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU channel 3
settings
B'0000 to B'0011
(1) in table
below
PB3DDR
Pin function
(2) in table
below
—
0
TIOCD3 output
PB3 input
—
1
A11 output
Mode 7
(1) in table below
PB3DDR
(2) in table below
—
0
Pin function
TIOCD3 output
PB3 input
TPU channel 3
settings
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOD3 to IOD0
—
PB3 output
TIOCD3 input*
Operating mode
TPU channel 3
settings
B'0100 to B'1111
(1)
B'0000
1
PB3 output
TIOCD3 input*
(2)
(2)
B'0010
(1)
(2)
B'0011
B'0000,
B'0100,
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
—
B'xx00
Not B'xx00
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Not B'110
B'110
Output function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Note:
*
TIOCD3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOD3 to IOD0 =
B'10xx.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 254 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB2/A10/
TIOCC3
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, the TPU channel 3 settings by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR3, bits
IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR3L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR3, and bit PB2DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU channel 3
settings
B'0000 to B'0010
(1) in table
below
PB2DDR
Pin function
(2) in table
below
—
0
TIOCC3 output
PB2 input
—
1
A10 output
Mode 7
(1) in table below
PB2DDR
(2) in table below
—
0
Pin function
TIOCC3 output
PB2 input
TPU channel 3
settings
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOC3 to IOC0
—
PB2 output
1
TIOCC3 input*
Operating mode
TPU channel 3
settings
B'0011 to B'1111
(1)
B'0000
1
PB2 output
1
TIOCC3 input*
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
B'001x
B'0010
B'0011
Not B'xx00
B'0000,
B'0100,
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
B'xx00
Not
B'xx00
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Not B'101
B'101
Output function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCC3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOC3 to IOC0 = B'10xx.
2. TIOCD3 is disabled for output.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 255 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB1/A9/
TIOCB3
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, the TPU channel 3 settings by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR3, bits
IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR3H, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR3, and bit PB1DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU channel 3
settings
B'0000 to B'0001
(1) in table
below
PB1DDR
Pin function
(2) in table
below
—
0
TIOCB3 output
PB1 input
—
1
A9 output
Mode 7
(1) in table below
PB1DDR
(2) in table below
—
0
Pin function
TIOCB3 output
PB1 input
TPU channel 3
settings
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOB3 to IOB0
—
PB1 output
TIOCB3 input*
Operating mode
TPU channel 3
settings
B'0010 to B'1111
(1)
B'0000
1
PB1 output
TIOCB3 input*
(2)
(2)
B'0010
(1)
(2)
B'0011
B'0000,
B'0100,
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
—
B'xx00
Not B'xx00
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Not B'010
B'010
Output function
—
Output
compare
output
—
—
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Note:
*
TIOCB3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 256 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PB0/A8/
TIOCA3
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bits
AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, the TPU channel 3 settings by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR3, bits
IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR3H, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR3, and bit PB0DDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
AE3 to AE0
TPU channel 3
settings
B'0000
(1) in table
below
PB0DDR
Pin function
B'0001 to B'1111
(2) in table
below
—
0
TIOCA3 output
PB0 input
1
A8 output
Mode 7
(1) in table below
PB0DDR
(2) in table below
—
0
Pin function
TIOCA3 output
PB0 input
TPU channel 3
settings
(2)
MD3 to MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
—
PB0 output
1
TIOCA3 input*
Operating mode
TPU channel 3
settings
—
(1)
B'0000
1
PB0 output
1
TIOCA3 input*
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
B'001x
B'0010
B'0011
Not B'xx00
B'0000,
B'0100,
B'1xxx
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
B'xx00
Not
B'xx00
CCLR2 to
CCLR0
—
—
—
—
Not B'001
B'001
Output function
—
Output
compare
output
—
PWM
mode 1
2
output*
PWM
mode 2
output
—
x: Don’t care
Notes: 1. TIOCA3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOA3 to IOA0 = B'10xx.
2. TIOCB3 is disabled for output.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 257 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.4
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port B has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. MOS input
pull-up can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis.
In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the TPU’s
TIOR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for
that pin.
In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the TPU’s TIOR and in
DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained in software standby mode.
Table 9.11 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9.11 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port B)
Pin States
Address output or
TPU output
Power-On
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Other than above
Legend:
OFF
: MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF : On when PBDDR = 0 and PBPCR = 1; otherwise off.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 258 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7
Port C
9.7.1
Overview
Port C is an 8-bit I/O port. Port C has an address bus output function, SCI I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0,
SCK0, TxD1, RxD1 and SCK1), and external interrupt input pins (IRQ4 and IRQ5), and the pin
functions change according to the operating mode.
Port C has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9.6 shows the port C pin configuration.
Port C
Port C pins
Pin functions in modes 4 and 5
PC7/A7
A7 (output)
PC6/A6
A6 (output)
PC5/A5/SCK1/IRQ5
A5 (output)
PC4/A4/RxD1
A4 (output)
PC3/A3/TxD1
A3 (output)
PC2/A2/SCK0/IRQ4
A2 (output)
PC1/A1/RxD0
A1 (output)
PC0/A0/TxD0
A0 (output)
Pin functions in mode 6
Pin functions in mode 7
PC7 (input) / A7 (output)
PC7 (I/O)
PC6 (input) / A6 (output)
PC6 (I/O)
PC5 (input) / A5 (output) / SCK1 (I/O) / IRQ5 (input)
PC5 (I/O) / SCK1 (I/O) / IRQ5 (input)
PC4 (input) / A4 (output) / RxD1 (input)
PC4 (I/O) / RxD1 (input)
PC3 (input) / A3 (output) / TxD1 (output)
PC3 (I/O) / TxD1 (output)
PC2 (input) / A2 (output) / SCK0 (I/O) / IRQ4 (input)
PC2 (I/O) / SCK0 (I/O) / IRQ4 (input)
PC1 (input) / A1 (output) / RxD0 (input)
PC1 (I/O) / RxD0 (input)
PC0 (input) / A0 (output) / TxD0 (output)
PC0 (I/O) / TxD0 (output)
Figure 9.6 Port C Pin Functions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 259 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.2
Register Configuration
Table 9.12 shows the port C register configuration.
Table 9.12 Port C Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port C data direction register
PCDDR
W
H'00
H'FE3B
Port C data register
PCDR
R/W
H'00
H'FF0B
Port C register
PORTC
R
Undefined
H'FFBB
Port C MOS pull-up control register
PCPCR
R/W
H'00
H'FE42
Port C open-drain control register
PCODR
R/W
H'00
H'FE49
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PCDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port C. PCDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PCDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode. As the SCI is initialized, pin states are determined by the PCDDR and
PCDR specifications. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins
retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby
mode.
• Modes 4 and 5
The corresponding port C pins are address outputs irrespective of the value of the PCDDR bits.
• Mode 6
Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C pin an address output, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
• Mode 7
Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C pin an output port, while clearing
the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 260 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port C Data Register (PCDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7DR
PC6DR
PC5DR
PC4DR
PC3DR
PC2DR
PC1DR
PC0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PCDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port C pins (PC7 to
PC0).
PCDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port C Register (PORTC)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Determined by state of pins PC7 to PC0.
PORTC is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port C pins (PC7 to PC0) must always be performed on PCDR.
If a port C read is performed while PCDDR bits are set to 1, the PCDR values are read. If a port C
read is performed while PCDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTC contents are determined by the pin states, as
PCDDR and PCDR are initialized. PORTC retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 261 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port C MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PCPCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7PCR PC6PCR PC5PCR PC4PCR PC3PCR PC2PCR PC1PCR PC0PCR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PCPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port C on an individual bit basis.
In modes 6 and 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SMR
and SCR, and in PCDDR, setting the corresponding PCPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pullup for that pin.
PCPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port C Open Drain Control Register (PCODR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7ODR PC6ODR PC5ODR PC4ODR PC3ODR PC2ODR PC1ODR PC0ODR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PCODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the PMOS on/off status for each port C
pin (PC7 to PC0).
If the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR is other than address output, setting a PCODR bit to 1
makes the corresponding port C pin an NMOS open-drain output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes
the pin a CMOS output.
PCODR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state
after a manual reset, and in software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 262 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.3
Pin Functions
Port C pins also function as SCI I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, TxD1, RxD1, and SCK1),
interrupt input pins (IRQ4 and IRQ5), and address bus outputs. The pin functions differ between
modes 4 and 5, mode 6, and mode 7. Port C pin functions are shown in table 9.13.
Table 9.13 Port C Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PC7/A7
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode
and bit PC7DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4
and 5
PC7DDR
—
0
1
0
1
A7
output
PC7
input
A7
output
PC7
input
PC7
output
Pin function
PC6/A6
Mode 6
Mode 7
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode
and bit PC6DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4
and 5
PC6DDR
—
0
1
0
1
A6
output
PC6
input
A6
output
PC6
input
PC6
output
Pin function
Mode 6
Mode 7
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 263 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PC5/A5/SCK1/
IRQ5
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bit C/A in the SCI1’s SMR, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, and bit PC5DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4
and 5
PC5DDR
—
CKE1
—
C/A
—
CKE0
Pin function
Mode 6
0
1
0
0
1
1
—
—
—
—
0
1
—
—
—
A5
output
PC5
input
SCK1
output
SCK1
output
SCK1
input
A5
output
IRQ5 input
Operating
Mode
Mode 7
CKE1
0
C/A
0
CKE0
PC5DDR
Pin function
1
0
1
1
—
—
—
0
1
—
—
—
PC5
input
PC5
output
SCK1
output
SCK1
output
SCK1
input
IRQ5 input
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 264 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PC4/A4/RxD1
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bit RE in the SCI1’s SCR, and bit PC4DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4
and 5
PC4DDR
—
RE
—
0
1
—
A4 output
PC4 input
RxD1 input
A4 output
Pin function
Mode 6
0
Operating
Mode
Mode 7
RE
0
PC4DDR
Pin function
PC3/A3/TxD1
1
1
0
1
—
PC4 input
PC4 output
RxD1 input
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bit TE in the SCI1’s SCR, and bit PC3DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4
and 5
PC3DDR
—
TE
—
0
1
—
A3 output
PC3 input
TxD1 output
A3 output
Pin function
Mode 6
0
Operating
Mode
Mode 7
TE
PC3DDR
Pin function
1
0
1
0
1
—
PC3 input
PC3 output
TxD1 output
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 265 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PC2/A2/SCK0/
IRQ4
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bit C/A in the SCI0’s SMR, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, and bit PC2DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4
and 5
PC2DDR
—
CKE1
—
C/A
—
CKE0
Pin function
Mode 6
0
1
0
0
1
1
—
—
—
—
0
1
—
—
—
A2
output
PC2
input
SCK0
output
SCK0
output
SCK0
input
A2
output
IRQ4 input
Operating
Mode
Mode 7
CKE1
0
C/A
0
CKE0
PC2DDR
Pin function
1
0
1
1
—
—
—
0
1
—
—
—
PC2
input
PC2
output
SCK0
output
SCK0
output
SCK0
input
IRQ4 input
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 266 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PC1/A1/RxD0
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bit RE in the SCI0’s SCR, and bit PC1DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4
and 5
PC1DDR
—
RE
—
0
1
—
A1 output
PC1 input
RxD0 input
A1 output
Pin function
Mode 6
0
Operating
Mode
Mode 7
RE
0
PC1DDR
Pin function
PC0/A0/TxD0
1
1
0
1
—
PC1 input
PC1 output
RxD0 input
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
bit TE in the SCI0’s SCR, and bit PC0DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4
and 5
PC0DDR
—
TE
—
0
1
—
A0 output
PC0 input
TxD0 output
A0 output
Pin function
Mode 6
0
Operating
Mode
Mode 7
TE
PC0DDR
Pin function
1
0
1
0
1
—
PC0 input
PC0 output
TxD0 output
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 267 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.4
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port C has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS
input pull-up function can be used in modes 6 and 7, and can be specified as on or off on an
individual bit basis.
In modes 6 and 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SMR
and SCR, of pins IRQ4 and IRQ5, and in PCDDR, setting the corresponding PCPCR bit to 1 turns
on the MOS input pull-up for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained in software standby mode.
Table 9.14 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9.14 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port C)
Pin States
Power-On
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
Address output
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Other than above
Legend:
OFF
: MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF : On when PCDDR = 0 and PCPCR = 1; otherwise off.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 268 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8
Port D
9.8.1
Overview
Port D is an 8-bit I/O port. Port D has a data bus I/O function, and the pin functions change
according to the operating mode.
Port D has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9.7 shows the port D pin configuration.
Port D
Port D pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PD7/D15
D15 (I/O)
PD6/D14
D14 (I/O)
PD5/D13
D13 (I/O)
PD4/D12
D12 (I/O)
PD3/D11
D11 (I/O)
PD2/D10
D10 (I/O)
PD1/D9
D9
(I/O)
PD0/D8
D8
(I/O)
Pin functions in mode 7
PD7 (I/O)
PD6 (I/O)
PD5 (I/O)
PD4 (I/O)
PD3 (I/O)
PD2 (I/O)
PD1 (I/O)
PD0 (I/O)
Figure 9.7 Port D Pin Functions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 269 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8.2
Register Configuration
Table 9.15 shows the port D register configuration.
Table 9.15 Port D Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port D data direction register
PDDDR
W
H'00
H'FE3C
Port D data register
PDDR
R/W
H'00
H'FF0C
Port D register
PORTD
R
Undefined
H'FFBC
Port D MOS pull-up control register
PDPCR
R/W
H'00
H'FE43
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7DDR PD6DDR PD5DDR PD4DDR PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PDDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port D. PDDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PDDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
The input/output direction specification by PDDDR is ignored, and port D is automatically
designated for data I/O.
• Mode 7
Setting a PDDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port D pin an output port, while clearing
the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 270 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port D Data Register (PDDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7DR
PD6DR
PD5DR
PD4DR
PD3DR
PD2DR
PD1DR
PD0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port D pins (PD7 to
PD0).
PDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port D Register (PORTD)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Determined by state of pins PD7 to PD0.
PORTD is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port D pins (PD7 to PD0) must always be performed on PDDR.
If a port D read is performed while PDDDR bits are set to 1, the PDDR values are read. If a port D
read is performed while PDDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTD contents are determined by the pin states, as
PDDDR and PDDR are initialized. PORTD retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 271 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port D MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PDPCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7PCR PD6PCR PD5PCR PD4PCR PD3PCR PD2PCR PD1PCR PD0PCR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port D on an individual bit basis.
When a PDDDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) in mode 7, setting the corresponding
PDPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for the corresponding pin.
PDPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
9.8.3
Pin Functions
In modes 4 to 6, port D pins automatically function as data bus input/output pins (D15 to D8). In
mode 7, each pin in port D functions as an input/output port, and input or output can be specified
individually for each pin. Port D pin functions are shown in table 9.16.
Table 9.16 Port D Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PD7/D15,
PD6/D14,
PD5/D13,
PD4/D12,
PD3/D11,
PD2/D10,
PD1/D9,
PD0/D8
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and
PDDDR.
Operating mode
PDnDDR
Pin function
Modes 4 to 6
Mode 7
—
0
1
Data bus input/
output
(D15 to D8)
PDn input
PDn output
n = 7 to 0
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 272 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8.4
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port D has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS
input pull-up function can be used in mode 7, and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit
basis.
When a PDDDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 7, setting the corresponding PDPCR bit to 1 turns on
the MOS input pull-up for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained in software standby mode.
Table 9.17 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9.17 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port D)
Modes
Power-On
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
4 to 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
7
Legend:
OFF
: MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF : On when PDDDR = 0 and PDPCR = 1; otherwise off.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 273 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.9
Port E
9.9.1
Overview
Port E is an 8-bit I/O port. Port E has a data bus I/O function, and the pin functions change
according to the operating mode and whether 8-bit or 16-bit bus mode is selected.
Port E has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software.
Figure 9.8 shows the port E pin configuration.
Port E
Port E pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PE7/D7
PE7 (I/O) / D7 (I/O)
PE6/D6
PE6 (I/O) / D6 (I/O)
PE5/D5
PE5 (I/O) / D5 (I/O)
PE4/D4
PE4 (I/O) / D4 (I/O)
PE3/D3
PE3 (I/O) / D3 (I/O)
PE2/D2
PE2 (I/O) / D2 (I/O)
PE1/D1
PE1 (I/O) / D1 (I/O)
PE0/D0
PE0 (I/O) / D0 (I/O)
Pin functions in mode 7
PE7 (I/O)
PE6 (I/O)
PE5 (I/O)
PE4 (I/O)
PE3 (I/O)
PE2 (I/O)
PE1 (I/O)
PE0 (I/O)
Figure 9.8 Port E Pin Functions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 274 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.9.2
Register Configuration
Table 9.18 shows the port E register configuration.
Table 9.18 Port E Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Port E data direction register
PEDDR
W
H'00
H'FE3D
Port E data register
PEDR
R/W
H'00
H'FF0D
Port E register
PORTE
R
Undefined
H'FFBD
Port E MOS pull-up control register
PEPCR
R/W
H'00
H'FE44
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port E Data Direction Register (PEDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7DDR PE6DDR PE5DDR PE4DDR PE3DDR PE2DDR PE1DDR PE0DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
PEDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port E. PEDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PEDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
When 8-bit bus mode has been selected, port E pins function as I/O ports. Setting a PEDDR bit
to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the
pin an input port.
When 16-bit bus mode has been selected, the input/output direction specification by PEDDR is
ignored, and port E is designated for data I/O.
For details of 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes, see section 7, Bus Controller.
• Mode 7
Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the
bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 275 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port E Data Register (PEDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7DR
PE6DR
PE5DR
PE4DR
PE3DR
PE2DR
PE1DR
PE0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PEDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port E pins (PE7 to
PE0).
PEDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Port E Register (PORTE)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7
PE6
PE5
PE4
PE3
PE2
PE1
PE0
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Determined by state of pins PE7 to PE0.
PORTE is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port E pins (PE7 to PE0) must always be performed on PEDR.
If a port E read is performed while PEDDR bits are set to 1, the PEDR values are read. If a port E
read is performed while PEDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTE contents are determined by the pin states, as
PEDDR and PEDR are initialized. PORTE retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 276 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port E MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PEPCR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7PCR PE6PCR PE5PCR PE4PCR PE3PCR PE2PCR PE1PCR PE0PCR
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PEPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function
incorporated into port E on an individual bit basis.
When a PEDDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) with 8-bit bus mode selected in modes 4 to
6, or in mode 7, setting the corresponding PEPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for the
corresponding pin.
PEPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
9.9.3
Pin Functions
Port E pins also function as data bus input/output pins (D7 to D0). If at least one of areas 0 to 7 is
designated as 16-bit bus space in modes 4 to 6, port E pins automatically function as data bus
input/output pins. If all areas are designated as 8-bit bus space in modes 4 to 6, or in mode 7, each
pin in port E functions as an input/output port, and input or output can be specified individually
for each pin. Port E pin functions are shown in table 9.19.
Table 9.19 Port E Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PE7/D7,
PE6/D6,
PE5/D5,
PE4/D4,
PE3/D3,
PE2/D2,
PE1/D1,
PE0/D0
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
ABWCR in the bus controller, and PEDDR.
Operating mode
Modes 4 to 6
ABWCR
PEnDDR
Pin function
H'FF
Mode 7
Not H'FF
—
—
0
1
—
0
1
PEn input
PEn output
Data bus
input/output
(D7 to D0)
PEn input
PEn output
n = 7 to 0
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 277 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.9.4
MOS Input Pull-Up Function
Port E has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS
input pull-up function can be used in modes 4 to 6 when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 7,
and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis.
When a PEDDR bit is cleared to 0 in modes 4 to 6 when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 7,
setting the corresponding PEPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The prior state is retained in software standby mode.
Table 9.20 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states.
Table 9.20 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port E)
Modes
Power-On
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
In Other
Operations
7
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
4 to 6
8-bit bus
16-bit bus
Legend:
OFF
: MOS input pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF : On when PEDDR = 0 and PEPCR = 1; otherwise off.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 278 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10
Port F
9.10.1
Overview
Port F is an 8-bit I/O port. Port F pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ2 and
IRQ3), BUZZ output pin*, A/D trigger input pin (ADTRG), bus control signal input/output pins
(AS, RD, HWR, LWR, WAIT, BREQO, BREQ, and BACK) and the system clock (φ) output pin.
Note: * BUZZ output pin in the H8S/2626 Group only.
Figure 9.9 shows the port F pin configuration.
Port F
Port F pins
Pin functions in modes 4 to 6
PF7/φ
PF7 (input) / φ (output)
PF6/AS
AS (output)
PF5/RD
RD (output)
PF4/HWR
HWR (output)
PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF3 (I/O) / LWR (output) / ADTRG (input) / IRQ3 (input)
PF2/WAIT/BREQO
PF2 (I/O) / WAIT (input) / BREQO (output)
PF1/BACK/BUZZ*
PF1 (I/O) / BACK (output) / BUZZ (output)*
PF0/BREQ/IRQ2
PF0 (I/O) / BREQ (input) / IRQ2 (input)
Pin functions in mode 7
PF7 (input) / ø (output)
PF6 (I/O)
PF5 (I/O)
PF4 (I/O)
PF3 (I/O) / ADTRG (input) / IRQ3 (input)
PF2 (I/O)
PF1 (I/O) / BUZZ (output)*
PF0 (I/O) / IRQ2 (input)
Note: * BUZZ output pin in the H8S/2626 Group only.
Figure 9.9 Port F Pin Functions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 279 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10.2
Register Configuration
Table 9.21 shows the port F register configuration.
Table 9.21 Port F Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
1
Address*
Port F data direction register
PFDDR
W
H'80/H'00*
H'FE3E
Port F data register
PFDR
R/W
H'00
H'FF0E
Port F register
PORTF
R
Undefined
H'FFBE
2
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Initial value depends on the mode.
Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PF7DDR PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR PF2DDR PF1DDR PF0DDR
Modes 4 to 6
Initial value :
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
:
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Mode 7
:
PFDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port F. PFDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
PFDDR is initialized by a reset, and in hardware standby mode, to H'80 in modes 4 to 6, and to
H'00 in mode 7. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used
to select whether the bus control output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance
when a transition is made to software standby mode.
• Modes 4 to 6
Pin PF7 functions as the φ output pin when the corresponding PFDDR bit is set to 1, and as an
input port when the bit is cleared to 0.
The input/output direction specified by PFDDR is ignored for pins PF6 to PF3, which are
automatically designated as bus control outputs (AS, RD, HWR, and LWR).
Pins PF2 to PF0 are designated as bus control input/output pins (WAIT, BREQO, BACK,
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 280 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
BREQ) by means of bus controller settings. At other times, setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes
the corresponding port F pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input
port.
• Mode 7
Setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F pin PF6 to PF0 an output port, or in
the case of pin PF7, the φ output pin. Clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port.
Port F Data Register (PFDR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
PF6DR
PF5DR
PF4DR
PF3DR
PF2DR
PF1DR
PF0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PFDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port F pins (PF7 to PF0).
PFDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in
software standby mode.
Bit 7 in PFDR is reserved, and only 0 may be written to it.
Port F Register (PORTF)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PF7
PF6
PF5
PF4
PF3
PF2
PF1
PF0
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Determined by state of pins PF7 to PF0.
PORTF is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of
output data for the port F pins (PF7 to PF0) must always be performed on PFDR.
If a port F read is performed while PFDDR bits are set to 1, the PFDR values are read. If a port F
read is performed while PFDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
After a reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTF contents are determined by the pin states, as
PFDDR and PFDR are initialized. PORTF retains its prior state in software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 281 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10.3
Pin Functions
Port F pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ2 and IRQ3), BUZZ output pin*,
A/D trigger input pin (ADTRG), bus control signal input/output pins (AS, RD, HWR, LWR,
WAIT, BREQO, BREQ, and BACK) and the system clock (φ) output pin. The pin functions differ
between modes 4 to 6, and mode 7. Port F pin functions are shown in table 9.22.
Note: * BUZZ output pin in the H8S/2626 Group only.
Table 9.22 Port F Pin Functions
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PF7/φ
The pin function is switched as shown below according to bit PF7DDR.
PF7DDR
Pin function
PF6/AS
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
PF6DDR
—
0
1
AS output
PF6 input
PF6 output
Mode 7
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode
and bit PF5DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
PF5DDR
Pin function
PF4/HWR
1
φ output
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode
and bit PF6DDR.
Pin function
PF5/RD
0
PF7 input
Mode 7
—
0
1
RD output
PF5 input
PF5 output
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode
and bit PF4DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
PF4DDR
—
0
1
HWR output
PF4 input
PF4 output
Pin function
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 282 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Mode 7
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PF3/LWR/
ADTRG/IRQ3
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode,
the bus mode, A/D converter bits TRGS1 and TRGS0, and bit PF3DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
Bus mode
8-bit bus mode
16-bit bus
mode
PF3DDR
—
Pin function
Mode 7
0
LWR
output
—
1
0
1
PF3 input PF3 output PF3 input PF3 output
ADTRG input∗
1
IRQ3 input∗
Notes: 1. ADTRG input when TRGS0 = TRGS1 = 1.
2. When used as an external interrupt input pin, do not use as an I/O
pin for another function.
2
PF2/WAIT/
BREQO
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the operating mode, and bits BREQOE, WAITE, ABW5 to ABW2, and
PF2DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
BREQOE
0
WAITE
0
PF2DDR
Pin function
PF1/BACK/
BUZZ*
Mode 7
1
1
—
—
—
0
1
—
—
0
1
PF2
input
PF2
output
WAIT
input
BREQO
output
PF2
input
PF2
output
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the operating mode, and bits BRLE, BUZZE, and PF1DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
BRLE
0
BUZZE
0
PF1DDR
0
*
1
1
—
—
—
—
0
0
PF1
PF1
PF1 BUZZ* BACK
input output output output input
BUZZ output pin in the H8S/2626 Group only.
Pin function
Note:
1
Mode 7
1
1
—
PF1
output
BUZZ*
output
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 283 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 9 I/O Ports
Pin
Selection Method and Pin Functions
PF0/BREQ/IRQ2
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of
the operating mode, and bits BRLE and PF0DDR.
Operating
Mode
Modes 4 to 6
BRLE
PF0DDR
Pin function
0
Mode 7
1
—
0
1
—
0
1
PF0
input
PF0
output
BREQ
input
PF0
input
PF0
output
IRQ2 input
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 284 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) that
comprises six 16-bit timer channels.
10.1.1
Features
• Maximum 16-pulse input/output
 A total of 16 timer general registers (TGRs) are provided (four each for channels 0 and 3,
and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5), each of which can be set independently as an
output compare/input capture register
 TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be used as buffer registers
• Selection of 8 counter input clocks for each channel
• The following operations can be set for each channel:
 Waveform output at compare match: Selection of 0, 1, or toggle output
 Input capture function: Selection of rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection
 Counter clear operation: Counter clearing possible by compare match or input capture
 Synchronous operation:
Multiple timer counters (TCNT) can be written to simultaneously
Simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture possible
Register simultaneous input/output possible by counter synchronous operation
 PWM mode: Any PWM output duty can be set
 Maximum of 15-phase PWM output possible by combination with synchronous operation
• Buffer operation settable for channels 0 and 3
 Input capture register double-buffering possible
 Automatic rewriting of output compare register possible
• Phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1, 2, 4, and 5
 Two-phase encoder pulse up/down-count possible
• Cascaded operation
 Channel 2 (channel 5) input clock operates as 32-bit counter by setting channel 1 (channel
4) overflow/underflow
• Fast access via internal 16-bit bus
 Fast access is possible via a 16-bit bus interface
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 285 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• 26 interrupt sources
 For channels 0 and 3, four compare match/input capture dual-function interrupts and one
overflow interrupt can be requested independently
 For channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, two compare match/input capture dual-function interrupts, one
overflow interrupt, and one underflow interrupt can be requested independently
• Automatic transfer of register data
 Block transfer, 1-word data transfer, and 1-byte data transfer possible by data transfer
controller (DTC)
• Programmable pulse generator (PPG) output trigger can be generated
 Channel 0 to 3 compare match/input capture signals can be used as PPG output trigger
• A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated
 Channel 0 to 5 compare match A/input capture A signals can be used as A/D converter
conversion start trigger
• Module stop mode can be set
 As the initial setting, TPU operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module
stop mode.
Table 10.1 lists the functions of the TPU.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 286 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.1 TPU Functions
Item
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5
Count clock
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
TCLKA
TCLKB
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
φ/1024
φ/4096
TCLKA
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKC
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
TCLKA
TCLKC
TCLKD
General registers
TGR0A
TGR0B
TGR1A
TGR1B
TGR2A
TGR2B
TGR3A
TGR3B
TGR4A
TGR4B
TGR5A
TGR5B
General registers/
buffer registers
TGR0C
TGR0D
—
—
TGR3C
TGR3D
—
—
I/O pins
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
Counter clear
function
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
—
—
Compare 0 output
match
1 output
output
Toggle
output
Input capture
function
Synchronous
operation
PWM mode
Phase counting
mode
Buffer operation
—
—
—
—
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 287 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Item
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
DTC
TGR
activation compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
A/D
TGR0A
converter compare
trigger
match or
input capture
TGR1A
compare
match or
input capture
TGR2A
compare
match or
input capture
TGR3A
compare
match or
input capture
TGR4A
compare
match or
input capture
TGR5A
compare
match or
input capture
PPG
trigger
TGR0A/
TGR0B
compare
match or
input capture
TGR1A/
TGR1B
compare
match or
input capture
TGR2A/
TGR2B
compare
match or
input capture
TGR3A/
—
TGR3B
compare
match or
input capture
—
Interrupt
sources
5 sources
4 sources
4 sources
5 sources
4 sources
4 sources
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
match or
match or
match or
match or
match or
match or
input
input
input
input
input
input
capture 0A
capture 1A
capture 2A
capture 3A
capture 4A
capture 5A
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
• Compare
match or
match or
match or
match or
match or
match or
input
input
input
input
input
input
capture 0B
capture 1B
capture 2B
capture 3B
capture 4B
capture 5B
• Compare
• Overflow
match or
• Underflow
input
capture 0C
• Overflow
• Underflow
• Compare
• Overflow
match or
• Underflow
input
capture 3C
• Compare
match or
input
capture 0D
• Compare
match or
input
capture 3D
• Overflow
• Overflow
Legend:
: Possible
— : Not possible
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 288 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
• Overflow
• Underflow
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.1.2
Block Diagram
Legend:
TSTR: Timer start register
TSYR: Timer synchro register
TCR:
Timer control register
TMDR: Timer mode register
TGRD
TGRB
TGRC
TGRB
Interrupt request signals
Channel 3: TGI3A
TGI3B
TGI3C
TGI3D
TCI3V
Channel 4: TGI4A
TGI4B
TCI4V
TCI4U
Channel 5: TGI5A
TGI5B
TCI5V
TCI5U
Internal data bus
A/D converter convertion start signal
TGRD
PPG output trigger signal
TGRC
TGRB
TGRB
TGRB
TCNT
TCNT
TGRA
TCNT
TGRA
Bus interface
TGRB
TCNT
TCNT
TGRA
TCNT
Module data bus
TGRA
TSR
TSR
TGRA
TSR
TIER
TIER
TIER
TGRA
TSR
TIER
TIER
TSR
TIER
TSTR TSYR
TIOR
TIORH TIORL
TIOR
TIOR
TSR
TMDR
TIORH TIORL
TIOR
TCR
TMDR
Channel 4
TCR
TMDR
Channel 5
TCR
Common
Control logic
TMDR
Channel 0
TCR
TMDR
Channel 1
TCR
TMDR
Channel 2
TIOR (H, L):
TIER:
TSR:
TGR (A, B, C, D):
TCR
Input/output pins
Channel 0:
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
Channel 1:
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
Channel 2:
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
Control logic for channels 3 to 5
Clock input
Internal clock: φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
φ/1024
φ/4096
External clock: TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
Control logic for channels 0 to 2
Input/output pins
Channel 3:
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
Channel 4:
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
Channel 5:
TIOCB5
Channel 3
Figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of the TPU.
Interrupt request signals
Channel 0: TGI0A
TGI0B
TGI0C
TGI0D
TCI0V
Channel 1: TGI1A
TGI1B
TCI1V
TCI1U
Channel 2: TGI2A
TGI2B
TCI2V
TCI2U
Timer I/O control registers (H, L)
Timer interrupt enable register
Timer status register
Timer general registers (A, B, C, D)
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of TPU
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 289 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 10.2 summarizes the TPU pins.
Table 10.2 TPU Pins
Channel
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
All
Clock input A
TCLKA
Input
External clock A input pin
(Channels 1 and 5 phase counting mode A
phase input)
Clock input B
TCLKB
Input
External clock B input pin
(Channels 1 and 5 phase counting mode B
phase input)
Clock input C
TCLKC
Input
External clock C input pin
(Channels 2 and 4 phase counting mode A
phase input)
Clock input D
TCLKD
Input
External clock D input pin
(Channels 2 and 4 phase counting mode B
phase input)
Input capture/out TIOCA0
compare match A0
I/O
TGR0A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB0
compare match B0
I/O
TGR0B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCC0
compare match C0
I/O
TGR0C input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCD0
compare match D0
I/O
TGR0D input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCA1
compare match A1
I/O
TGR1A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB1
compare match B1
I/O
TGR1B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCA2
compare match A2
I/O
TGR2A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB2
compare match B2
I/O
TGR2B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
0
1
2
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 290 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
3
Input capture/out TIOCA3
compare match A3
I/O
TGR3A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB3
compare match B3
I/O
TGR3B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCC3
compare match C3
I/O
TGR3C input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCD3
compare match D3
I/O
TGR3D input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCA4
compare match A4
I/O
TGR4A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB4
compare match B4
I/O
TGR4B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCA5
compare match A5
I/O
TGR5A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input capture/out TIOCB5
compare match B5
I/O
TGR5B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
4
5
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 291 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 10.3 summarizes the TPU registers.
Table 10.3 TPU Registers
Channel Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
0
Timer control register 0
TCR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF10
Timer mode register 0
TMDR0
R/W
H'C0
H'FF11
Timer I/O control register 0H
TIOR0H
R/W
H'00
H'FF12
Timer I/O control register 0L
TIOR0L
R/W
H'00
H'FF13
H'40
2
*
R/(W)
H'C0
H'FF14
Timer interrupt enable register 0 TIER0
Timer status register 0
1
2
TSR0
R/W
1
H'FF15
Timer counter 0
TCNT0
R/W
H'0000
H'FF16
Timer general register 0A
TGR0A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF18
Timer general register 0B
TGR0B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF1A
Timer general register 0C
TGR0C
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF1C
Timer general register 0D
TGR0D
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF1E
Timer control register 1
TCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF20
Timer mode register 1
TMDR1
R/W
H'C0
H'FF21
Timer I/O control register 1
TIOR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF22
Timer interrupt enable register 1 TIER1
R/W
H'FF24
Timer status register 1
TSR1
H'40
2
*
R/(W)
H'C0
Timer counter 1
TCNT1
R/W
H'0000
H'FF26
Timer general register 1A
TGR1A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF28
Timer general register 1B
TGR1B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF2A
Timer control register 2
TCR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF30
Timer mode register 2
TMDR2
R/W
H'C0
H'FF31
Timer I/O control register 2
TIOR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF32
Timer interrupt enable register 2 TIER2
R/W
H'FF25
TSR2
H'40
2
R/(W)* H'C0
H'FF34
Timer status register 2
Timer counter 2
TCNT2
R/W
H'0000
H'FF36
Timer general register 2A
TGR2A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF38
Timer general register 2B
TGR2B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FF3A
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 292 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
H'FF35
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
3
Timer control register 3
TCR3
R/W
H'00
H'FE80
Timer mode register 3
TMDR3
R/W
H'C0
H'FE81
Timer I/O control register 3H
TIOR3H
R/W
H'00
H'FE82
Timer I/O control register 3L
TIOR3L
R/W
H'00
H'FE83
H'FE84
Timer interrupt enable register 3 TIER3
4
5
All
R/W
1
Timer status register 3
TSR3
H'40
2
*
R/(W)
H'C0
Timer counter 3
TCNT3
R/W
H'0000
H'FE86
Timer general register 3A
TGR3A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE88
Timer general register 3B
TGR3B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE8A
Timer general register 3C
TGR3C
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE8C
Timer general register 3D
TGR3D
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE8E
Timer control register 4
TCR4
R/W
H'00
H'FE90
Timer mode register 4
TMDR4
R/W
H'C0
H'FE91
Timer I/O control register 4
H'FE85
TIOR4
R/W
H'00
H'FE92
Timer interrupt enable register 4 TIER4
R/W
H'40
H'FE94
Timer status register 4
TSR4
2
R/(W)* H'C0
H'FE95
Timer counter 4
TCNT4
R/W
H'0000
H'FE96
Timer general register 4A
TGR4A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE98
Timer general register 4B
TGR4B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FE9A
Timer control register 5
TCR5
R/W
H'00
H'FEA0
Timer mode register 5
TMDR5
R/W
H'C0
H'FEA1
Timer I/O control register 5
TIOR5
R/W
H'00
H'FEA2
Timer interrupt enable register 5 TIER5
R/W
H'FEA4
Timer status register 5
TSR5
H'40
2
*
R/(W)
H'C0
Timer counter 5
TCNT5
R/W
H'0000
H'FEA6
Timer general register 5A
TGR5A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FEA8
Timer general register 5B
TGR5B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FEAA
Timer start register
TSTR
R/W
H'00
H'FEB0
Timer synchro register
TSYR
R/W
H'00
H'FEB1
Module stop control register A
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
H'FEA5
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 293 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2
Register Descriptions
10.2.1
Timer Control Register (TCR)
Channel 0: TCR0
Channel 3: TCR3
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CCLR2
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
Initial value :
R/W
:
Channel 1: TCR1
Channel 2: TCR2
Channel 4: TCR4
Channel 5: TCR5
Bit
:
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
The TCR registers are 8-bit registers that control the TCNT channels. The TPU has six TCR
registers, one for each of channels 0 to 5. The TCR registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset, and
in hardware standby mode.
TCR register settings should be made only when TCNT operation is stopped.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 294 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bits 7 to 5—Counter Clear 2 to 0 (CCLR2 to CCLR0): These bits select the TCNT counter
clearing source.
Channel
Bit 7
CCLR2
Bit 6
CCLR1
Bit 5
CCLR0
Description
0, 3
0
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input
capture
0
TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input
capture
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation*
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRC compare match/input
2
capture*
0
TCNT cleared by TGRD compare match/input
2
capture*
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation*
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Channel
Bit 7
Bit 6
3
Reserved* CCLR1
Bit 5
CCLR0
Description
1, 2, 4, 5
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input
capture
0
TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input
capture
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation*
0
1
(Initial value)
Notes: 1. Synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1.
2. When TGRC or TGRD is used as a buffer register, TCNT is not cleared because the
buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur.
3. Bit 7 is reserved in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. It is always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 295 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bits 4 and 3—Clock Edge 1 and 0 (CKEG1, CKEG0): These bits select the input clock edge.
When the input clock is counted using both edges, the input clock period is halved (e.g. φ/4 both
edges = φ/2 rising edge). If phase counting mode is used on channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, this setting is
ignored and the phase counting mode setting has priority.
Bit 4
CKEG1
Bit 3
CKEG0
Description
0
0
Count at rising edge
1
Count at falling edge
—
Count at both edges
1
(Initial value)
Note: Internal clock edge selection is valid when the input clock is φ/4 or slower. This setting is
ignored if the input clock is φ/1, or when overflow/underflow of another channel is selected.
Bits 2 to 0—Time Prescaler 2 to 0 (TPSC2 to TPSC0): These bits select the TCNT counter
clock. The clock source can be selected independently for each channel. Table 10.4 shows the
clock sources that can be set for each channel.
Table 10.4 TPU Clock Sources
Overflow/
Underflow
on Another
φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 φ/256 φ/1024 φ/4096 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD
Channel
Internal Clock
Channel
φ/1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Legend:
: Setting
Blank : No setting
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 296 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
External Clock
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
0
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
0
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
1
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
Counts on TCNT2 overflow/underflow
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode.
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
2
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
0
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 297 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
3
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4096
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
4
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
1
Counts on TCNT5 overflow/underflow
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode.
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
5
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
1
1
0
1
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 298 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2.2
Timer Mode Register (TMDR)
Channel 0: TMDR0
Channel 3: TMDR3
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
BFB
BFA
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Initial value :
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Initial value :
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
Channel 1: TMDR1
Channel 2: TMDR2
Channel 4: TMDR4
Channel 5: TMDR5
Bit
:
:
The TMDR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that are used to set the operating mode
for each channel. The TPU has six TMDR registers, one for each channel. The TMDR registers
are initialized to H'C0 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
TMDR register settings should be made only when TCNT operation is stopped.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 5—Buffer Operation B (BFB): Specifies whether TGRB is to operate in the normal way, or
TGRB and TGRD are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRD is used as a buffer
register, TGRD input capture/output compare is not generated.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRD, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and
cannot be modified.
Bit 5
BFB
Description
0
TGRB operates normally
1
TGRB and TGRD used together for buffer operation
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 299 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 4—Buffer Operation A (BFA): Specifies whether TGRA is to operate in the normal way, or
TGRA and TGRC are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRC is used as a buffer
register, TGRC input capture/output compare is not generated.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRC, bit 4 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot
be modified.
Bit 4
BFA
Description
0
TGRA operates normally
1
TGRA and TGRC used together for buffer operation
(Initial value)
Bits 3 to 0—Modes 3 to 0 (MD3 to MD0): These bits are used to set the timer operating mode.
Bit 3
1
MD3*
Bit 2
2
MD2*
Bit 1
MD1
Bit 0
MD0
Description
0
0
0
0
Normal operation
1
Reserved
0
PWM mode 1
1
PWM mode 2
0
Phase counting mode 1
1
Phase counting mode 2
1
0
Phase counting mode 3
1
Phase counting mode 4
*
*
—
1
1
1
*
0
(Initial value)
*: Don’t care
Notes: 1. MD3 is a reserved bit. In a write, it should always be written with 0.
2. Phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. In this case, 0 should always
be written to MD2.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 300 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2.3
Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)
Channel 0: TIOR0H
Channel 1: TIOR1
Channel 2: TIOR2
Channel 3: TIOR3H
Channel 4: TIOR4
Channel 5: TIOR5
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channel 0: TIOR0L
Channel 3: TIOR3L
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
Note: When TGRC or TGRD is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the
register operates as a buffer register.
The TIOR registers are 8-bit registers that control the TGR registers. The TPU has eight TIOR
registers, two each for channels 0 and 3, and one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. The TIOR
registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
Care is required since TIOR is affected by the TMDR setting. The initial output specified by
TIOR is valid when the counter is stopped (the CST bit in TSTR is cleared to 0). Note also that, in
PWM mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is cleared to 0 is specified.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 301 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bits 7 to 4— I/O Control B3 to B0 (IOB3 to IOB0)
I/O Control D3 to D0 (IOD3 to IOD0):
Bits IOB3 to IOB0 specify the function of TGRB.
Bits IOD3 to IOD0 specify the function of TGRD.
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR0B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR0B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB0 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at TCNT1
1
source is channel count-up/count-down*
1/count clock
*: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 302 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 Description
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR0D
Output disabled
is output Initial output is 0
compare output
2
register*
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
Capture input
TGR0D
source is
is input
TIOCD0 pin
capture
2
register*
Capture input
source is channel
1/count clock
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Input capture at TCNT1
1
count-up/count-down*
*: Don’t care
Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR1 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT1
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
2. When the BFB bit in TMDR0 is set to 1 and TGR0D is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 303 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR1B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR1B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB1 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at generation
source is TGR0C of TGR0C compare match/
compare match/ input capture
input capture
*: Don’t care
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR2B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
*
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR2B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB2 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
*: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 304 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR3B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR3B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at TCNT4
1
source is channel count-up/count-down*
4/count clock
*: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 305 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 Description
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR3D
Output disabled
is output Initial output is 0
compare output
2
register*
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
Capture input
TGR3D
source is
is input
TIOCD3 pin
capture
2
register*
Capture input
source is channel
4/count clock
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Input capture at TCNT4
1
count-up/count-down*
*: Don’t care
Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR4 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT4
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
2. When the BFB bit in TMDR3 is set to 1 and TGR3D is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 306 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
4
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR4B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR4B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB4 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at generation
source is TGR3C of TGR3C compare match/
compare match/ input capture
input capture
*: Don’t care
Channel
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR5B
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
*
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR5B
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCB5 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
*: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 307 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bits 3 to 0— I/O Control A3 to A0 (IOA3 to IOA0)
I/O Control C3 to C0 (IOC3 to IOC0):
IOA3 to IOA0 specify the function of TGRA.
IOC3 to IOC0 specify the function of TGRC.
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR0A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR0A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA0 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at TCNT1
source is channel count-up/count-down
1/count clock
*: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 308 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Description
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR0C
Output disabled
is output Initial output is 0
compare output
1
register*
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
Note:
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR0C
Capture input
is input
source is
capture
TIOCC0 pin
1
register*
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at TCNT1
source is channel count-up/count-down
1/count clock
*: Don’t care
1. When the BFA bit in TMDR0 is set to 1 and TGR0C is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 309 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR1A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR1A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA1 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
source is TGR0A
compare match/
input capture
Input capture at generation
of channel 0/TGR0A
compare match/input
capture
*: Don’t care
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR2A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
*
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
*
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR2A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA2 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
*: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 310 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR3A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR3A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at TCNT4
source is channel count-up/count-down
4/count clock
*: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 311 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Description
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR3C
Output disabled
is output Initial output is 0
compare output
1
register*
0
1
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
Note:
1
*
*
*
1 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
0 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
Capture input
TGR3C
source is
is input
TIOCC3 pin
capture
1
register*
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at TCNT4
source is channel count-up/count-down
4/count clock
*: Don’t care
1. When the BFA bit in TMDR3 is set to 1 and TGR3C is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 312 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
4
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR4A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
*
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
TGR4A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA4 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
Capture input
Input capture at generation
source is TGR3A of TGR3A compare match/
compare match/ input capture
input capture
*: Don’t care
Channel
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
TGR5A
is output
compare
register
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
output
1
1
0
1
*
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
output
0
0
1
1
*
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
1
1
(Initial value)
0 output at compare match
0 output at compare match
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare
match
TGR5A
is input
capture
register
Capture input
source is
TIOCA5 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture at falling edge
Input capture at both edges
*: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 313 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2.4
Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)
Channel 0: TIER0
Channel 3: TIER3
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TTGE
—
—
TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channel 1: TIER1
Channel 2: TIER2
Channel 4: TIER4
Channel 5: TIER5
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TTGE
—
TCIEU
TCIEV
—
—
TGIEB
TGIEA
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
The TIER registers are 8-bit registers that control enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for
each channel. The TPU has six TIER registers, one for each channel. The TIER registers are
initialized to H'40 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—A/D Conversion Start Request Enable (TTGE): Enables or disables generation of A/D
conversion start requests by TGRA input capture/compare match.
Bit 7
TTGE
Description
0
A/D conversion start request generation disabled
1
A/D conversion start request generation enabled
Bit 6—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 314 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 5—Underflow Interrupt Enable (TCIEU): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIU) by
the TCFU flag when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 5
TCIEU
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Overflow Interrupt Enable (TCIEV): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by
the TCFV flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1.
Bit 4
TCIEV
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 3—TGR Interrupt Enable D (TGIED): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGID) by the
TGFD bit when the TGFD bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3
TGIED
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 2—TGR Interrupt Enable C (TGIEC): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIC) by the
TGFC bit when the TGFC bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 2
TGIEC
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit enabled
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 315 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 1—TGR Interrupt Enable B (TGIEB): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the
TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1.
Bit 1
TGIEB
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 0—TGR Interrupt Enable A (TGIEA): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the
TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1.
Bit 0
TGIEA
Description
0
Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit disabled
1
Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit enabled
10.2.5
(Initial value)
Timer Status Register (TSR)
Channel 0: TSR0
Channel 3: TSR3
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
TGFA
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
—
—
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Channel 1: TSR1
Channel 2: TSR2
Channel 4: TSR4
Channel 5: TSR5
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCFD
—
TCFU
TCFV
—
—
TGFB
TGFA
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
—
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 316 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
—
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
The TSR registers are 8-bit registers that indicate the status of each channel. The TPU has six TSR
registers, one for each channel. The TSR registers are initialized to H'C0 by a reset, and in
hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—Count Direction Flag (TCFD): Status flag that shows the direction in which TCNT
counts in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 7 is reserved. It is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 7
TCFD
Description
0
TCNT counts down
1
TCNT counts up
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 5—Underflow Flag (TCFU): Status flag that indicates that TCNT underflow has occurred
when channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 are set to phase counting mode.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 5
TCFU
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to TCFU after reading TCFU = 1
1
[Setting condition]
When the TCNT value underflows (changes from H'0000 to H'FFFF)
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Overflow Flag (TCFV): Status flag that indicates that TCNT overflow has occurred.
Bit 4
TCFV
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written to TCFV after reading TCFV = 1
1
[Setting condition]
When the TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000 )
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 317 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 3—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D (TGFD): Status flag that indicates the
occurrence of TGRD input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3
TGFD
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When DTC is activated by TGID interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFD after reading TGFD = 1
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRD while TGRD is functioning as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRD by input capture signal while TGRD is
functioning as input capture register
Bit 2—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C (TGFC): Status flag that indicates the
occurrence of TGRC input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 2
TGFC
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When DTC is activated by TGIC interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFC after reading TGFC = 1
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRC while TGRC is functioning as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRC by input capture signal while TGRC is
functioning as input capture register
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 318 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit 1—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B (TGFB): Status flag that indicates the
occurrence of TGRB input capture or compare match.
Bit 1
TGFB
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When DTC is activated by TGIB interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFB after reading TGFB = 1
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRB while TGRB is functioning as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by input capture signal while TGRB is
functioning as input capture register
Bit 0—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A (TGFA): Status flag that indicates the
occurrence of TGRA input capture or compare match.
Bit 0
TGFA
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When DTC is activated by TGIA interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFA after reading TGFA = 1
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRA while TGRA is functioning as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by input capture signal while TGRA is
functioning as input capture register
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 319 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2.6
Timer Counter (TCNT)
Channel 0: TCNT0 (up-counter)
Channel 1: TCNT1 (up/down-counter*)
Channel 2: TCNT2 (up/down-counter*)
Channel 3: TCNT3 (up-counter)
Channel 4: TCNT4 (up/down-counter*)
Channel 5: TCNT5 (up/down-counter*)
Bit
:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
Note:
: R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
*
These counters can be used as up/down-counters only in phase counting mode or
when counting overflow/underflow on another channel. In other cases they function as
up-counters.
The TCNT registers are 16-bit counters. The TPU has six TCNT counters, one for each channel.
The TCNT counters are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The TCNT counters cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit
unit.
10.2.7
Bit
Timer General Register (TGR)
:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
: R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
The TGR registers are 16-bit registers with a dual function as output compare and input capture
registers. The TPU has 16 TGR registers, four each for channels 0 and 3 and two each for channels
1, 2, 4, and 5. TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be designated for operation as
buffer registers*. The TGR registers are initialized to H'FFFF by a reset, and in hardware standby
mode.
The TGR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit.
Note: * TGR buffer register combinations are TGRA—TGRC and TGRB—TGRD.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 320 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2.8
Bit
Timer Start Register (TSTR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
CST5
CST4
CST3
CST2
CST1
CST0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects operation/stoppage for channels 0 to 5.
TSTR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. When setting the operating
mode in TMDR or setting the count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT counter.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Should always be written with 0.
Bits 5 to 0—Counter Start 5 to 0 (CST5 to CST0): These bits select operation or stoppage for
TCNT.
Bit n
CSTn
Description
0
TCNTn count operation is stopped
1
TCNTn performs count operation
(Initial value)
n = 5 to 0
Note: If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the TIOC pin designated for output, the
counter stops but the TIOC pin output compare output level is retained. If TIOR is written to
when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the pin output level will be changed to the set initial output
value.
10.2.9
Bit
Timer Synchro Register (TSYR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
SYNC5
SYNC4
SYNC3
SYNC2
SYNC1
SYNC0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
TSYR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects independent operation or synchronous
operation for the channel 0 to 4 TCNT counters. A channel performs synchronous operation when
the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to 1.
TSYR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Should always be written with 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 321 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bits 5 to 0—Timer Synchro 5 to 0 (SYNC5 to SYNC0): These bits select whether operation is
independent of or synchronized with other channels.
When synchronous operation is selected, synchronous presetting of multiple channels* , and
2
synchronous clearing through counter clearing on another channel* are possible.
1
Notes: 1. To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at least two channels must be set to 1.
2. To set synchronous clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit , the TCNT clearing source
must also be set by means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR.
Bit n
SYNCn
Description
0
TCNTn operates independently (TCNT presetting/clearing is unrelated to
other channels)
(Initial value)
1
TCNTn performs synchronous operation
TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible
n = 5 to 0
10.2.10 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPA5 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, TPU operation stops at the end of the bus cycle
and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in module
stop mode. For details, see sections 21A.5, 21B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 5—Module Stop (MSTPA5): Specifies the TPU module stop mode.
Bit 5
MSTPA5
Description
0
TPU module stop mode cleared
1
TPU module stop mode set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 322 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3
Interface to Bus Master
10.3.1
16-Bit Registers
TCNT and TGR are 16-bit registers. As the data bus to the bus master is 16 bits wide, these
registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units.
These registers cannot be read or written to in 8-bit units; 16-bit access must always be used.
An example of 16-bit register access operation is shown in figure 10.2.
Internal data bus
H
Bus
master
L
Module
data bus
Bus interface
TCNTH
TCNTL
Figure 10.2 16-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCNT (16 Bits)]
10.3.2
8-Bit Registers
Registers other than TCNT and TGR are 8-bit. As the data bus to the CPU is 16 bits wide, these
registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units. They can also be read and written to in 8-bit
units.
Examples of 8-bit register access operation are shown in figures 10.3 to 10.5.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 323 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Internal data bus
H
Bus
master
L
Module
data bus
Bus interface
TCR
Figure 10.3 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR (Upper 8 Bits)]
Internal data bus
H
Bus
master
L
Module
data bus
Bus interface
TMDR
Figure 10.4 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TMDR (Lower 8 Bits)]
Internal data bus
H
Bus
master
L
Module
data bus
Bus interface
TCR
TMDR
Figure 10.5 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR and TMDR (16 Bits)]
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 324 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4
Operation
10.4.1
Overview
Operation in each mode is outlined below.
Normal Operation: Each channel has a TCNT and TGR register. TCNT performs up-counting,
and is also capable of free-running operation, synchronous counting, and external event counting.
Each TGR can be used as an input capture register or output compare register.
Synchronous Operation: When synchronous operation is designated for a channel, TCNT for
that channel performs synchronous presetting. That is, when TCNT for a channel designated for
synchronous operation is rewritten, the TCNT counters for the other channels are also rewritten at
the same time. Synchronous clearing of the TCNT counters is also possible by setting the timer
synchronization bits in TSYR for channels designated for synchronous operation.
Buffer Operation
• When TGR is an output compare register
When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the relevant channel is
transferred to TGR.
• When TGR is an input capture register
When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transfer to TGR and the value previously
held in TGR is transferred to the buffer register.
Cascaded Operation: The channel 1 counter (TCNT1), channel 2 counter (TCNT2), channel 4
counter (TCNT4), and channel 5 counter (TCNT5) can be connected together to operate as a 32bit counter.
PWM Mode: In this mode, a PWM waveform is output. The output level can be set by means of
TIOR. A PWM waveform with a duty of between 0% and 100% can be output, according to the
setting of each TGR register.
Phase Counting Mode: In this mode, TCNT is incremented or decremented by detecting the
phases of two clocks input from the external clock input pins in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. When
phase counting mode is set, the corresponding TCLK pin functions as the clock pin, and TCNT
performs up- or down-counting.
This can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 325 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.2
Basic Functions
Counter Operation: When one of bits CST0 to CST5 is set to 1 in TSTR, the TCNT counter for
the corresponding channel starts counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic
counter, and so on.
• Example of count operation setting procedure
Figure 10.6 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure.
[1] Select the counter
clock with bits
TPSC2 to TPSC0 in
TCR. At the same
time, select the
input clock edge
with bits CKEG1
and CKEG0 in TCR.
Operation selection
Select counter clock
[1]
Periodic counter
Select counter clearing source
[2]
Select output compare register
[3]
Set period
[4]
Start count operation
[5]
<Periodic counter>
[2] For periodic counter
operation, select the
TGR to be used as
the TCNT clearing
source with bits
CCLR2 to CCLR0 in
TCR.
Free-running counter
[3] Designate the TGR
selected in [2] as an
output compare
register by means of
TIOR.
[4] Set the periodic
counter cycle in the
TGR selected in [2].
Start count operation
<Free-running counter>
[5]
[5] Set the CST bit in
TSTR to 1 to start
the counter
operation.
Figure 10.6 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 326 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Free-running count operation and periodic count operation
Immediately after a reset, the TPU’s TCNT counters are all designated as free-running
counters. When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1 the corresponding TCNT counter starts upcount operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000),
the TCFV bit in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at
this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from
H'0000.
Figure 10.7 illustrates free-running counter operation.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'0000
Time
CST bit
TCFV
Figure 10.7 Free-Running Counter Operation
When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the
relevant channel performs periodic count operation. The TGR register for setting the period is
designated as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected
by means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts
up-count operation as periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When
the count value matches the value in TGR, the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared
to H'0000.
If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an
interrupt. After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 327 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10.8 illustrates periodic counter operation.
Counter cleared by TGR
compare match
TCNT value
TGR
H'0000
Time
CST bit
Flag cleared by software or
DTC activation
TGF
Figure 10.8 Periodic Counter Operation
Waveform Output by Compare Match: The TPU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the
corresponding output pin using compare match.
• Example of setting procedure for waveform output by compare match
Figure 10.9 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare match
Output selection
Select waveform output mode
[1]
[1] Select initial value 0 output or 1 output, and
compare match output value 0 output, 1 output,
or toggle output, by means of TIOR. The set
initial value is output at the TIOC pin until the
first compare match occurs.
[2] Set the timing for compare match generation in
TGR.
Set output timing
[2]
Start count operation
[3]
[3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Waveform output>
Figure 10.9 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 328 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Examples of waveform output operation
Figure 10.10 shows an example of 0 output/1 output.
In this example TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been
made so that 1 is output by compare match A, and 0 is output by compare match B. When the
set level and the pin level coincide, the pin level does not change.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
TGRA
TGRB
Time
H'0000
No change
No change
1 output
TIOCA
TIOCB
No change
No change
0 output
Figure 10.10 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation
Figure 10.11 shows an example of toggle output.
In this example TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing
performed by compare match B), and settings have been made so that output is toggled by both
compare match A and compare match B.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGRB compare match
H'FFFF
TGRB
TGRA
Time
H'0000
Toggle output
TIOCB
Toggle output
TIOCA
Figure 10.11 Example of Toggle Output Operation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 329 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC
pin input edge.
Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge. For channels 0, 1, 3,
and 4, it is also possible to specify another channel’s counter input clock or compare match signal
as the input capture source.
Note: When another channel’s counter input clock is used as the input capture input for channels
0 and 3, φ/1 should not be selected as the counter input clock used for input capture input.
Input capture will not be generated if φ/1 is selected.
• Example of input capture operation setting procedure
Figure 10.12 shows an example of the input capture operation setting procedure.
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register by
means of TIOR, and select rising edge, falling
edge, or both edges as the input capture source
and input signal edge.
Input selection
Select input capture input
[1]
Start count
[2]
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Input capture operation>
Figure 10.12 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 330 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Example of input capture operation
Figure 10.13 shows an example of input capture operation.
In this example both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input
capture input edge, falling edge has been selected as the TIOCB pin input capture input edge,
and counter clearing by TGRB input capture has been designated for TCNT.
Counter cleared by TIOCB
input (falling edge)
TCNT value
H'0180
H'0160
H'0010
H'0005
Time
H'0000
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0005
H'0160
H'0010
TIOCB
TGRB
H'0180
Figure 10.13 Example of Input Capture Operation
10.4.3
Synchronous Operation
In synchronous operation, the values in a number of TCNT counters can be rewritten
simultaneously (synchronous presetting). Also, a number of TCNT counters can be cleared
simultaneously by making the appropriate setting in TCR (synchronous clearing).
Synchronous operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base.
Channels 0 to 5 can all be designated for synchronous operation.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 331 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.14 shows an example of the
synchronous operation setting procedure.
Synchronous operation
selection
Set synchronous
operation
[1]
Synchronous presetting
Set TCNT
Synchronous clearing
[2]
Clearing
sourcegeneration
channel?
No
Yes
<Synchronous presetting>
Select counter
clearing source
[3]
Set synchronous
counter clearing
[4]
Start count
[5]
Start count
[5]
<Counter clearing>
<Synchronous clearing>
[1] Set to 1 the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous
operation.
[2] When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is
written to, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters.
[3] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare,
etc.
[4] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing
source.
[5] Set to 1 the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels, to start the count operation.
Figure 10.14 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 332 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of Synchronous Operation: Figure 10.15 shows an example of synchronous operation.
In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 0 to
2, TGR0B compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and synchronous
clearing has been set for the channel 1 and 2 counter clearing sources.
Three-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins TIOC0A, TIOC1A, and TIOC2A. At this
time, synchronous presetting, and synchronous clearing by TGR0B compare match, is performed
for channel 0 to 2 TCNT counters, and the data set in TGR0B is used as the PWM cycle.
For details of PWM modes, see section 10.4.6, PWM Modes.
Synchronous clearing by TGR0B compare match
TCNT0 to TCNT2 values
TGR0B
TGR1B
TGR0A
TGR2B
TGR1A
TGR2A
Time
H'0000
TIOC0A
TIOC1A
TIOC2A
Figure 10.15 Example of Synchronous Operation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 333 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.4
Buffer Operation
Buffer operation, provided for channels 0 and 3, enables TGRC and TGRD to be used as buffer
registers.
Buffer operation differs depending on whether TGR has been designated as an input capture
register or as a compare match register.
Table 10.5 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation.
Table 10.5 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation
Channel
Timer General Register
Buffer Register
0
TGR0A
TGR0C
TGR0B
TGR0D
TGR3A
TGR3C
TGR3B
TGR3D
3
• When TGR is an output compare register
When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is
transferred to the timer general register.
This operation is illustrated in figure 10.16.
Compare match signal
Buffer register
Timer general
register
Comparator
Figure 10.16 Compare Match Buffer Operation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 334 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
TCNT
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• When TGR is an input capture register
When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to TGR and the value previously
held in the timer general register is transferred to the buffer register.
This operation is illustrated in figure 10.17.
Input capture
signal
Timer general
register
Buffer register
TCNT
Figure 10.17 Input Capture Buffer Operation
Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.18 shows an example of the buffer
operation setting procedure.
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register or
output compare register by means of TIOR.
Buffer operation
[1]
[2] Designate TGR for buffer operation with bits
BFA and BFB in TMDR.
Set buffer operation
[2]
[3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
Start count
[3]
Select TGR function
<Buffer operation>
Figure 10.18 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 335 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Buffer Operation
• When TGR is an output compare register
Figure 10.19 shows an operation example in which PWM mode 1 has been designated for
channel 0, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. The settings used
in this example are TCNT clearing by compare match B, 1 output at compare match A, and 0
output at compare match B.
As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs the output changes and the
value in buffer register TGRC is simultaneously transferred to timer general register TGRA.
This operation is repeated each time compare match A occurs.
For details of PWM modes, see section 10.4.6, PWM Modes.
TCNT value
TGR0B
H'0520
H'0450
H'0200
TGR0A
Time
H'0000
TGR0C H'0200
H'0450
H'0520
Transfer
TGR0A
H'0200
H'0450
TIOCA
Figure 10.19 Example of Buffer Operation (1)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 336 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• When TGR is an input capture register
Figure 10.20 shows an operation example in which TGRA has been designated as an input
capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC.
Counter clearing by TGRA input capture has been set for TCNT, and both rising and falling
edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge.
As buffer operation has been set, when the TCNT value is stored in TGRA upon occurrence of
input capture A, the value previously stored in TGRA is simultaneously transferred to TGRC.
TCNT value
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
TGRA
TGRC
H'0532
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0F07
Figure 10.20 Example of Buffer Operation (2)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 337 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.5
Cascaded Operation
In cascaded operation, two 16-bit counters for different channels are used together as a 32-bit
counter.
This function works by counting the channel 1 (channel 4) counter clock upon overflow/underflow
of TCNT2 (TCNT5) as set in bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Underflow occurs only when the lower 16-bit TCNT is in phase-counting mode.
Table 10.6 shows the register combinations used in cascaded operation.
Note: When phase counting mode is set for channel 1 or 4, the counter clock setting is invalid
and the counter operates independently in phase counting mode.
Table 10.6 Cascaded Combinations
Combination
Upper 16 Bits
Lower 16 Bits
Channels 1 and 2
TCNT1
TCNT2
Channels 4 and 5
TCNT4
TCNT5
Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.21 shows an example of the
setting procedure for cascaded operation.
[1] Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in the channel 1
(channel 4) TCR to B’111 to select TCNT2
(TCNT5) overflow/underflow counting.
Cascaded operation
Set cascading
[1]
Start count
[2]
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR for the upper and lower
channel to 1 to start the count operation.
<Cascaded operation>
Figure 10.21 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 338 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Cascaded Operation: Figure 10.22 illustrates the operation when counting upon
TCNT2 overflow/underflow has been set for TCNT1, TGR1A and TGR2A have been designated
as input capture registers, and TIOC pin rising edge has been selected.
When a rising edge is input to the TIOCA1 and TIOCA2 pins simultaneously, the upper 16 bits of
the 32-bit data are transferred to TGR1A, and the lower 16 bits to TGR2A.
TCNT1
clock
TCNT1
H'03A1
H'03A2
TCNT2
clock
TCNT2
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'0001
TIOCA1,
TIOCA2
TGR1A
H'03A2
TGR2A
H'0000
Figure 10.22 Example of Cascaded Operation (1)
Figure 10.23 illustrates the operation when counting upon TCNT2 overflow/underflow has been
set for TCNT1, and phase counting mode has been designated for channel 2.
TCNT1 is incremented by TCNT2 overflow and decremented by TCNT2 underflow.
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCNT2
TCNT1
FFFD
FFFE
0000
FFFF
0000
0001
0002
0001
0001
0000
FFFF
0000
Figure 10.23 Example of Cascaded Operation (2)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 339 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.6
PWM Modes
In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. 0, 1, or toggle output can be
selected as the output level in response to compare match of each TGR.
Designating TGR compare match as the counter clearing source enables the period to be set in that
register. All channels can be designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is
also possible.
There are two PWM modes, as described below.
• PWM mode 1
PWM output is generated from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins by pairing TGRA with TGRB and
TGRC with TGRD. The output specified by bits IOA3 to IOA0 and IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR is
output from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins at compare matches A and C, and the output
specified by bits IOB3 to IOB0 and IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR is output at compare matches B
and D. The initial output value is the value set in TGRA or TGRC. If the set values of paired
TGRs are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs.
In PWM mode 1, a maximum 8-phase PWM output is possible.
• PWM mode 2
PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty registers.
The output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon counter
clearing by a synchronization register compare match, the output value of each pin is the initial
value set in TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty registers are identical, the output
value does not change when a compare match occurs.
In PWM mode 2, a maximum 15-phase PWM output is possible by combined use with
synchronous operation.
The correspondence between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 10.7.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 340 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.7 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins
Output Pins
Channel
Registers
PWM Mode 1
PWM Mode 2
0
TGR0A
TIOCA0
TIOCA0
TGR0B
TGR0C
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TGR0D
1
TGR1A
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
TGR1B
2
TGR2A
TGR3A
TIOCA2
TIOCA3
TGR4A
TIOCC3
TGR5A
TGR5B
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
TGR4B
5
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TGR3D
4
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
TGR3B
TGR3C
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
TGR2B
3
TIOCC0
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
Note: In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for the TGR register in which the period is set.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 341 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10.24 shows an example of the PWM mode
setting procedure.
PWM mode
Select counter clock
[1]
[1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to
TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the
input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in
TCR.
[2] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to select the
TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source.
Select counter clearing source
Select waveform output level
Set TGR
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3] Use TIOR to designate the TGR as an output
compare register, and select the initial value and
output value.
[4] Set the cycle in the TGR selected in [2], and set
the duty in the other the TGR.
[5] Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR.
Set PWM mode
[5]
Start count
[6]
[6] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<PWM mode>
Figure 10.24 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure
Examples of PWM Mode Operation: Figure 10.25 shows an example of PWM mode 1
operation.
In this example, TGRA compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA
initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value.
In this case, the value set in TGRA is used as the period, and the values set in TGRB registers as
the duty.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 342 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TCNT value
TGRA
Counter cleared by
TGRA compare match
TGRB
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
Figure 10.25 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1)
Figure 10.26 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation.
In this example, synchronous operation is designated for channels 0 and 1, TGR1B compare match
is set as the TCNT clearing source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the output
value of the other TGR registers (TGR0A to TGR0D, TGR1A), to output a 5-phase PWM
waveform.
In this case, the value set in TGR1B is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs as
the duty.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGR1B
compare match
TGR1B
TGR1A
TGR0D
TGR0C
TGR0B
TGR0A
H'0000
Time
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
Figure 10.26 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 343 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10.27 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in PWM
mode.
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB
TGRB
rewritten
TGRB rewritten
H'0000
Time
0% duty
TIOCA
Output does not change when cycle register and duty register
compare matches occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB rewritten
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
H'0000
Time
100% duty
TIOCA
Output does not change when cycle register and duty
register compare matches occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
TGRB rewritten
Time
H'0000
100% duty
TIOCA
0% duty
Figure 10.27 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 344 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.7
Phase Counting Mode
In phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and
TCNT is incremented/decremented accordingly. This mode can be set for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
When phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and
TCNT operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 and bits
CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. However, the functions of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR, and of
TIOR, TIER, and TGR are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be
used.
When overflow occurs while TCNT is counting up, the TCFV flag in TSR is set; when underflow
occurs while TCNT is counting down, the TCFU flag is set.
The TCFD bit in TSR is the count direction flag. Reading the TCFD flag provides an indication of
whether TCNT is counting up or down.
Table 10.8 shows the correspondence between external clock pins and channels.
Table 10.8 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins
External Clock Pins
Channels
A-Phase
B-Phase
When channel 1 or 5 is set to phase counting mode
TCLKA
TCLKB
When channel 2 or 4 is set to phase counting mode
TCLKC
TCLKD
Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10.28 shows an example of the
phase counting mode setting procedure.
[1] Select phase counting mode with bits MD3 to
MD0 in TMDR.
Phase counting mode
Select phase counting mode
[1]
Start count
[2]
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Phase counting mode>
Figure 10.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 345 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Phase Counting Mode Operation: In phase counting mode, TCNT counts up or
down according to the phase difference between two external clocks. There are four modes,
according to the count conditions.
• Phase counting mode 1
Figure 10.29 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 10.9
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10.29 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation
Table 10.9 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
High level
Up-count
Low level
Up-count
Low level
Up-count
High level
Up-count
High level
Down-count
Low level
Down-count
High level
Down-count
Low level
Down-count
Legend:
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 346 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Phase counting mode 2
Figure 10.30 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 10.10
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10.30 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation
Table 10.10 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Up-count
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Down-count
Legend:
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 347 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Phase counting mode 3
Figure 10.31 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 10.11
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10.31 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation
Table 10.11 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Up-count
High level
Down-count
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
Legend:
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 348 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Phase counting mode 4
Figure 10.32 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 10.12
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Down-count
Up-count
Time
Figure 10.32 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation
Table 10.12 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
High level
Up-count
Low level
Up-count
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Don’t care
High level
Down-count
Low level
Down-count
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
Legend:
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 349 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Phase Counting Mode Application Example: Figure 10.33 shows an example in which phase
counting mode is designated for channel 1, and channel 1 is coupled with channel 0 to input servo
motor 2-phase encoder pulses in order to detect the position or speed.
Channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse A-phase and B-phase are input
to TCLKA and TCLKB.
Channel 0 operates with TCNT counter clearing by TGR0C compare match; TGR0A and TGR0C
are used for the compare match function, and are set with the speed control period and position
control period. TGR0B is used for input capture, with TGR0B and TGR0D operating in buffer
mode. The channel 1 counter input clock is designated as the TGR0B input capture source, and
detection of the pulse width of 2-phase encoder 4-multiplication pulses is performed.
TGR1A and TGR1B for channel 1 are designated for input capture, channel 0 TGR0A and
TGR0C compare matches are selected as the input capture source, and store the up/down-counter
values for the control periods.
This procedure enables accurate position/speed detection to be achieved.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 350 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel 1
TCLKA
TCLKB
Edge
detection
circuit
TCNT1
TGR1A
(speed period capture)
TGR1B
(position period capture)
TCNT0
+
TGR0A (speed control period)
TGR0C
(position control period)
–
+
–
TGR0B (pulse width capture)
TGR0D (buffer operation)
Channel 0
Figure 10.33 Phase Counting Mode Application Example
10.5
Interrupts
10.5.1
Interrupt Sources and Priorities
There are three kinds of TPU interrupt source: TGR input capture/compare match, TCNT
overflow, and TCNT underflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disabled
bit, allowing generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually.
When an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the
corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The
interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0.
Relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller, but the priority order within
a channel is fixed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 351 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.13 lists the TPU interrupt sources.
Table 10.13 TPU Interrupts
Channel
Interrupt
Source
Description
DTC Activation
Priority
0
TGI0A
TGR0A input capture/compare match
Possible
High
TGI0B
TGR0B input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI0C
TGR0C input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI0D
TGR0D input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI0V
TCNT0 overflow
Not possible
TGI1A
TGR1A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI1B
TGR1B input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI1V
TCNT1 overflow
Not possible
TCI1U
TCNT1 underflow
Not possible
TGI2A
TGR2A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI2B
TGR2B input capture/compare match
Possible
1
2
3
4
5
TCI2V
TCNT2 overflow
Not possible
TCI2U
TCNT2 underflow
Not possible
TGI3A
TGR3A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI3B
TGR3B input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI3C
TGR3C input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI3D
TGR3D input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI3V
TCNT3 overflow
Not possible
TGI4A
TGR4A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI4B
TGR4B input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI4V
TCNT4 overflow
Not possible
TCI4U
TCNT4 underflow
Not possible
TGI5A
TGR5A input capture/compare match
Possible
TGI5B
TGR5B input capture/compare match
Possible
TCI5V
TCNT5 overflow
Not possible
TCI5U
TCNT5 underflow
Not possible
Low
Note: This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. The relative channel priorities
can be changed by the interrupt controller.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 352 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is
set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare
match on a particular channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The
TPU has 16 input capture/compare match interrupts, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each
for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Overflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the
TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt
request is cleared by clearing the TCFV flag to 0. The TPU has six overflow interrupts, one for
each channel.
Underflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEU bit in TIER is set to 1 when the
TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT underflow on a channel. The interrupt
request is cleared by clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The TPU has four underflow interrupts, one
each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
10.5.2
DTC Activation
The DTC can be activated by the TGR input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel. For
details, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
A total of 16 TPU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DTC activation sources,
four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
10.5.3
A/D Converter Activation
The A/D converter can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match for a channel.
If the TTGE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGFA flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a
TGRA input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to start A/D conversion is
sent to the A/D converter. If the TPU conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D
converter side at this time, A/D conversion is started.
In the TPU, a total of six TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as A/D
converter conversion start sources, one for each channel.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 353 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.6
Operation Timing
10.6.1
Input/Output Timing
TCNT Count Timing: Figure 10.34 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and
figure 10.35 shows TCNT count timing in external clock operation.
φ
Internal clock
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 10.34 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation
φ
External clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
Figure 10.35 Count Timing in External Clock Operation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 354 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
N+2
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Output Compare Output Timing: A compare match signal is generated in the final state in
which TCNT and TGR match (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated).
When a compare match signal is generated, the output value set in TIOR is output at the output
compare output pin. After a match between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not
generated until the TCNT input clock is generated.
Figure 10.36 shows output compare output timing.
φ
TCNT
input clock
N
TCNT
N+1
N
TGR
Compare
match signal
TIOC pin
Figure 10.36 Output Compare Output Timing
Input Capture Signal Timing: Figure 10.37 shows input capture signal timing.
φ
Input capture
input
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
N
N+1
N+2
N
N+2
Figure 10.37 Input Capture Input Signal Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 355 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture: Figure 10.38 shows the
timing when counter clearing by compare match occurrence is specified, and figure 10.39 shows
the timing when counter clearing by input capture occurrence is specified.
φ
Compare
match signal
Counter
clear signal
TCNT
N
TGR
N
H'0000
Figure 10.38 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match)
φ
Input capture
signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
N
TGR
Figure 10.39 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 356 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Buffer Operation Timing: Figures 10.40 and 10.41 show the timing in buffer operation.
φ
n
TCNT
n+1
Compare
match signal
TGRA,
TGRB
n
TGRC,
TGRD
N
N
Figure 10.40 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)
φ
Input capture
signal
TCNT
N
TGRA,
TGRB
n
TGRC,
TGRD
N+1
N
N+1
n
N
Figure 10.41 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 357 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.6.2
Interrupt Signal Timing
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match: Figure 10.42 shows the timing for
setting of the TGF flag in TSR by compare match occurrence, and TGI interrupt request signal
timing.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
TGR
N
N+1
Compare
match signal
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10.42 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 358 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture: Figure 10.43 shows the timing for setting
of the TGF flag in TSR by input capture occurrence, and TGI interrupt request signal timing.
φ
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
N
N
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10.43 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 359 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TCFV Flag/TCFU Flag Setting Timing: Figure 10.44 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV
flag in TSR by overflow occurrence, and TCIV interrupt request signal timing.
Figure 10.45 shows the timing for setting of the TCFU flag in TSR by underflow occurrence, and
TCIU interrupt request signal timing.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
(overflow)
H'FFFF
H'0000
Overflow
signal
TCFV flag
TCIV interrupt
Figure 10.44 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
(underflow)
H'0000
H'FFFF
Underflow signal
TCFU flag
TCIU interrupt
Figure 10.45 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 360 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Status Flag Clearing Timing: After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing
0 to it. When the DTC is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. Figure 10.46 shows the
timing for status flag clearing by the CPU, and figure 10.47 shows the timing for status flag
clearing by the DTC.
TSR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TSR address
Address
Write signal
Status flag
Interrupt
request
signal
Figure 10.46 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU
DTC
read cycle
T1
T2
DTC
write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
Source address
Destination
address
Status flag
Interrupt
request
signal
Figure 10.47 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC Activation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 361 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.7
Usage Notes
Note that the kinds of operation and contention described below occur during TPU operation.
Input Clock Restrictions: The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of
single-edge detection, and at least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The TPU will not
operate properly with a narrower pulse width.
In phase counting mode, the phase difference and overlap between the two input clocks must be at
least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. Figure 10.48 shows the input clock
conditions in phase counting mode.
Overlap
Phase
Phase
differdifference Overlap ence
Pulse width
Pulse width
TCLKA
(TCLKC)
TCLKB
(TCLKD)
Pulse width
Pulse width
Notes: Phase difference and overlap : 1.5 states or more
: 2.5 states or more
Pulse width
Figure 10.48 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode
Caution on Period Setting: When counter clearing by compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in
the final state in which it matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by
TCNT is updated). Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula:
f=
φ
(N + 1)
Where f: Counter frequency
φ: Operating frequency
N: TGR set value
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 362 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations: If the counter clear signal is
generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing takes precedence and the TCNT
write is not performed.
Figure 10.49 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
Figure 10.49 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 363 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations: If incrementing occurs in the T2
state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence and TCNT is not incremented.
Figure 10.50 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
TCNT input
clock
N
TCNT
M
TCNT write data
Figure 10.50 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 364 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T2
state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write takes precedence and the compare match signal is
inhibited. A compare match does not occur even if the same value as before is written.
Figure 10.51 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TGR address
Address
Write signal
Compare
match signal
Inhibited
TCNT
N
N+1
TGR
N
M
TGR write data
Figure 10.51 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 365 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in
the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the data transferred to TGR by the buffer operation will be the
data prior to the write.
Figure 10.52 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Buffer register
address
Address
Write signal
Compare
match signal
Buffer register write data
Buffer
register
TGR
N
M
N
Figure 10.52 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 366 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is generated in
the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, the data that is read will be the data after input capture transfer.
Figure 10.53 shows the timing in this case.
TGR read cycle
T1
T2
φ
TGR address
Address
Read signal
Input capture
signal
TGR
Internal
data bus
X
M
M
Figure 10.53 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 367 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is generated in
the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture operation takes precedence and the write to
TGR is not performed.
Figure 10.54 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TGR address
Address
Write signal
Input capture
signal
TCNT
M
M
TGR
Figure 10.54 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 368 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is
generated in the T2 state of a buffer write cycle, the buffer operation takes precedence and the
write to the buffer register is not performed.
Figure 10.55 shows the timing in this case.
Buffer register write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Buffer register
address
Address
Write signal
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
Buffer
register
N
M
N
M
Figure 10.55 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 369 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing: If overflow/underflow and
counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set and TCNT clearing
takes precedence.
Figure 10.56 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified as the clearing
source, and H'FFFF is set in TGR.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
H'FFFF
H'0000
Counter
clear signal
TGF
Disabled
TCFV
Figure 10.56 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 370 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow: If there is an up-count or downcount in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, and overflow/underflow occurs, the TCNT write
takes precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set.
Figure 10.57 shows the operation timing when there is contention between TCNT write and
overflow.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
TCNT
TCNT write data
H'FFFF
M
TCFV flag
Figure 10.57 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow
Multiplexing of I/O Pins: In the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group, the TCLKA input pin is
multiplexed with the TIOCC0 I/O pin, the TCLKB input pin with the TIOCD0 I/O pin, the
TCLKC input pin with the TIOCB1 I/O pin, and the TCLKD input pin with the TIOCB2 I/O pin.
When an external clock is input, compare match output should not be performed from a
multiplexed pin.
Interrupts and Module Stop Mode: If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been
requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC activation source.
Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 371 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 372 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have an on-chip programmable pulse generator (PPG)
that provides pulse outputs by using the 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) as a time base. The PPG
pulse outputs are divided into 4-bit groups (group 3 and group 2) that can operate both
simultaneously and independently.
11.1.1
Features
PPG features are listed below.
• 8-bit output data
 Maximum 8-bit data can be output, and output can be enabled on a bit-by-bit basis
• Two output groups
 Output trigger signals can be selected in 4-bit groups to provide up to two different 4-bit
outputs
• Selectable output trigger signals
 Output trigger signals can be selected for each group from the compare match signals of
four TPU channels
• Non-overlap mode
 A non-overlap margin can be provided between pulse outputs
• Can operate together with the data transfer controller (DTC)
 The compare match signals selected as output trigger signals can activate the DTC for
sequential output of data without CPU intervention
• Settable inverted output
 Inverted data can be output for each group
• Module stop mode can be set
 As the initial setting, PPG operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module
stop mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 373 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the PPG.
Compare match signals
Control logic
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
NDERH
NDERL
PMR
PCR
Pulse output
pins, group 3
PODRH
NDRH
PODRL
NDRL
Pulse output
pins, group 2
Pulse output
pins, group 1
Pulse output
pins, group 0
Legend:
PMR
PCR
NDERH
NDERL
NDRH
NDRL
PODRH
PODRL
: PPG output mode register
: PPG output control register
: Next data enable register H
: Next data enable register L
: Next data register H
: Next data register L
: Output data register H
: Output data register L
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of PPG
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 374 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Internal
data bus
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 11.1 summarizes the PPG pins.
Table 11.1 PPG Pins
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Pulse output 8
PO8
Output
Group 2 pulse output
Pulse output 9
PO9
Output
Pulse output 10
PO10
Output
Pulse output 11
PO11
Output
Pulse output 12
PO12
Output
Pulse output 13
PO13
Output
Pulse output 14
PO14
Output
Pulse output 15
PO15
Output
Group 3 pulse output
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 375 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.1.4
Registers
Table 11.2 summarizes the PPG registers.
Table 11.2 PPG Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
1
Address*
PPG output control register
PCR
R/W
H'FF
H'FE26
PPG output mode register
PMR
R/W
H'F0
H'FE27
Next data enable register H
4
Next data enable register L*
NDERH
R/W
H'00
H'FE28
NDERL
R/W
H'00
H'FE29
Output data register H
4
Output data register L*
PODRH
2
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FE2A
PODRL
2
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FE2B
Next data register H
NDRH
R/W
H'00
NDRL
R/W
H'00
3
H'FE2C*
H'FE2E
3
H'FE2D*
H'FE2F
Port 1 data direction register
P1DDR
W
H'00
H'FE30
Module stop control register A
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
Next data register L*
4
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Bits used for pulse output cannot be written to.
3. When the same output trigger is selected for pulse output groups 2 and 3 by the PCR
setting, the NDRH address is H'FE2C. When the output triggers are different, the
NDRH address is H'FE2E for group 2 and H'FE2C for group 3
Similarly, when the same output trigger is selected for pulse output groups 0 and 1 by
the PCR setting, the NDRL address is H'FE2D. When the output triggers are different,
the NDRL address is H'FE2F for group 0 and H'FE2D for group 1.
4. The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have no pins corresponding to PODRL
(pulse output groups 0 and 1).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 376 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.2
Register Descriptions
11.2.1
Next Data Enable Registers H and L (NDERH, NDERL)
NDERH
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9
Initial value :
R/W
0
NDER8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDER7
NDER6
NDER5
NDER4
NDER3
NDER2
NDER1
NDER0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
NDERL
Bit
Initial value :
R/W
:
NDERH and NDERL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that enable or disable pulse output on a
bit-by-bit basis.
If a bit is enabled for pulse output by NDERH or NDERL, the NDR value is automatically
transferred to the corresponding PODR bit when the TPU compare match event specified by PCR
occurs, updating the output value. If pulse output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from
NDR to PODR and the output value does not change.
NDERH and NDERL are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They
are not initialized in software standby mode.
NDERH Bits 7 to 0—Next Data Enable 15 to 8 (NDER15 to NDER8): These bits enable or
disable pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis.
Bits 7 to 0
NDER15 to NDER8
Description
0
Pulse outputs PO15 to PO8 are disabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are not
transferred to POD15 to POD8)
(Initial value)
1
Pulse outputs PO15 to PO8 are enabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are transferred
to POD15 to POD8)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 377 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
NDERL Bits 7 to 0—Next Data Enable 7 to 0 (NDER7 to NDER0): These bits enable or
disable pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis.
Bits 7 to 0
NDER7 to NDER0
Description
0
Pulse outputs PO7 to PO0 are disabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are not
transferred to POD7 to POD0)
(Initial value)
1
Pulse outputs PO7 to PO0 are enabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are transferred to
POD7 to POD0)
11.2.2
Output Data Registers H and L (PODRH, PODRL)
PODRH
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
POD15
POD14
POD13
POD12
POD11
POD10
POD9
POD8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
POD7
POD6
POD5
POD4
POD3
POD2
POD1
POD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
PODRL
Bit
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
A bit that has been set for pulse output by NDER is read-only.
PODRH and PODRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store output data for use in pulse
output. However, the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have no pins corresponding to
PODRL.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 378 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.2.3
Next Data Registers H and L (NDRH, NDRL)
NDRH and NDRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store the next data for pulse output.
During pulse output, the contents of NDRH and NDRL are transferred to the corresponding bits in
PODRH and PODRL when the TPU compare match event specified by PCR occurs. The NDRH
and NDRL addresses differ depending on whether pulse output groups have the same output
trigger or different output triggers. For details see section 11.2.4, Notes on NDR Access.
NDRH and NDRL are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are
not initialized in software standby mode.
11.2.4
Notes on NDR Access
The NDRH and NDRL addresses differ depending on whether pulse output groups have the same
output trigger or different output triggers.
Same Trigger for Pulse Output Groups: If pulse output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by the
same compare match event, the NDRH address is H'FE2C. The upper 4 bits belong to group 3
and the lower 4 bits to group 2. Address H'FE2E consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be
modified and are always read as 1.
• Address H'FE2C
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR15
NDR14
NDR13
NDR12
NDR11
NDR10
NDR9
NDR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value :
R/W
:
• Address H'FE2E
Bit
:
:
If pulse output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by the same compare match event, the NDRL address
is H'FE2D. The upper 4 bits belong to group 1 and the lower 4 bits to group 0. Address H'FE2F
consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. However, the
H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have no output pins corresponding to pulse output groups
0 and 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 379 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
• Address H'FE2D
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR7
NDR6
NDR5
NDR4
NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value :
R/W
:
• Address H'FE2F
Bit
:
:
Different Triggers for Pulse Output Groups: If pulse output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by
different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits in NDRH (group 3) is H'FE2C and
the address of the lower 4 bits (group 2) is H'FE2E. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FE2C and bits 7 to 4
of address H'FE2E are reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
• Address H'FE2C
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR15
NDR14
NDR13
NDR12
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
NDR11
NDR10
NDR9
NDR8
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value :
R/W
:
• Address H'FE2E
Bit
:
:
If pulse output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by different compare match event, the address of the
upper 4 bits in NDRL (group 1) is H'FE2D and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 0) is
H'FE2F. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FE2D and bits 7 to 4 of address H'FE2F are reserved bits that
cannot be modified and are always read as 1. However, the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group
have no output pins corresponding to pulse output groups 0 and 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 380 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
• Address H'FE2D
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR7
NDR6
NDR5
NDR4
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
R/W
:
• Address H'FE2F
Bit
11.2.5
Bit
:
:
PPG Output Control Register (PCR)
:
7
6
5
G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0
Initial value :
R/W
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals for PPG outputs on a
group-by-group basis.
PCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Group 3 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G3CMS1, G3CMS0): These bits
select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 3 (pins PO15 to PO12).
Description
Bit 7
G3CMS1
Bit 6
G3CMS0
0
0
Compare match in TPU channel 0
1
Compare match in TPU channel 1
0
Compare match in TPU channel 2
1
Compare match in TPU channel 3
1
Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 3
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 381 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Bits 5 and 4—Group 2 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G2CMS1, G2CMS0): These bits
select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 2 (pins PO11 to PO8).
Description
Bit 5
G2CMS1
Bit 4
G2CMS0
0
0
Compare match in TPU channel 0
1
Compare match in TPU channel 1
1
Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 2
0
Compare match in TPU channel 2
1
Compare match in TPU channel 3
(Initial value)
Bits 3 and 2—Group 1 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G1CMS1, G1CMS0): These bits
select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 1 (pins PO7 to PO4). However, the
H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have no output pins corresponding to pulse output group 1.
Description
Bit 3
G1CMS1
Bit 2
G1CMS0
0
0
Compare match in TPU channel 0
1
Compare match in TPU channel 1
0
Compare match in TPU channel 2
1
Compare match in TPU channel 3
1
Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 1
(Initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Group 0 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G0CMS1, G0CMS0): These bits
select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 0 (pins PO3 to PO0). However, the
H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have no output pins corresponding to pulse output group 0.
Description
Bit 1
G0CMS1
Bit 0
G0CMS0
0
0
Compare match in TPU channel 0
1
Compare match in TPU channel 1
0
Compare match in TPU channel 2
1
Compare match in TPU channel 3
1
Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 0
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 382 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.2.6
Bit
PPG Output Mode Register (PMR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
G3INV
G2INV
G1INV
G0INV
G3NOV
G2NOV
G1NOV
G0NOV
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects pulse output inversion and non-overlapping
operation for each group.
The output trigger period of a non-overlapping operation PPG output waveform is set in TGRB
and the non-overlap margin is set in TGRA. The output values change at compare match A and B.
For details, see section 11.3.4, Non-Overlapping Pulse Output.
PMR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—Group 3 Inversion (G3INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 3 (pins PO15 to PO12).
Bit 7
G3INV
Description
0
Inverted output for pulse output group 3 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH)
1
Direct output for pulse output group 3 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH)
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Group 2 Inversion (G2INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 2 (pins PO11 to PO8).
Bit 6
G2INV
Description
0
Inverted output for pulse output group 2 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH)
1
Direct output for pulse output group 2 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH)
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 383 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Bit 5—Group 1 Inversion (G1INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 1 (pins PO7 to PO4). However, the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have no pins
corresponding to pulse output group 1.
Bit 5
G1INV
Description
0
Inverted output for pulse output group 1 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL)
1
Direct output for pulse output group 1 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL)
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Group 0 Inversion (G0INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 0 (pins PO3 to PO0). However, the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have no pins
corresponding to pulse output group 0.
Bit 4
G0INV
Description
0
Inverted output for pulse output group 0 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL)
1
Direct output for pulse output group 0 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL)
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Group 3 Non-Overlap (G3NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 3 (pins PO15 to PO12).
Bit 3
G3NOV
Description
0
Normal operation in pulse output group 3 (output values updated at compare match A
in the selected TPU channel)
(Initial value)
1
Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 3 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
Bit 2—Group 2 Non-Overlap (G2NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 2 (pins PO11 to PO8).
Bit 2
G2NOV
Description
0
Normal operation in pulse output group 2 (output values updated at compare match A
in the selected TPU channel)
(Initial value)
1
Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 2 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 384 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Bit 1—Group 1 Non-Overlap (G1NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 1 (pins PO7 to PO4). However, the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have no
pins corresponding to pulse output group 1.
Bit 1
G1NOV
Description
0
Normal operation in pulse output group 1 (output values updated at compare match A
in the selected TPU channel)
(Initial value)
1
Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 1 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
Bit 0—Group 0 Non-Overlap (G0NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 0 (pins PO3 to PO0). However, the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have no
pins corresponding to pulse output group 0.
Bit 0
G0NOV
Description
0
Normal operation in pulse output group 0 (output values updated at compare match A
in the selected TPU channel)
(Initial value)
1
Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 0 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
11.2.7
Bit
Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
:
P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port 1.
Port 1 is multiplexed with pins PO15 to PO8. Bits corresponding to pins used for PPG output must
be set to 1. For further information about P1DDR, see section 9.2, Port 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 385 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.2.8
Bit
Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRA is a 16-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPA3 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, PPG operation stops at the end of the bus cycle
and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in module
stop mode. For details, see sections 21A.5, 21B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 3—Module Stop (MSTPA3): Specifies the PPG module stop mode.
Bit 3
MSTPA3
Description
0
PPG module stop mode cleared
1
PPG module stop mode set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 386 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3
Operation
11.3.1
Overview
PPG pulse output is enabled when the corresponding bits in P1DDR and NDER are set to 1. In
this state the corresponding PODR contents are output.
When the compare match event specified by PCR occurs, the corresponding NDR bit contents are
transferred to PODR to update the output values.
Figure 11.2 illustrates the PPG output operation and table 11.3 summarizes the PPG operating
conditions.
DDR
NDER
Q
Output trigger signal
C
Q PODR D
Q NDR D
Internal data bus
Pulse output pin
Normal output/inverted output
Figure 11.2 PPG Output Operation
Table 11.3 PPG Operating Conditions
NDER
DDR
Pin Function
0
0
Generic input port
1
Generic output port
0
Generic input port (but the PODR bit is a read-only bit, and when
compare match occurs, the NDR bit value is transferred to the PODR bit)
1
PPG pulse output
1
Sequential output of data of up to 16 bits is possible by writing new output data to NDR before
the next compare match. For details of non-overlapping operation, see section 11.3.4, NonOverlapping Pulse Output.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 387 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.2
Output Timing
If pulse output is enabled, NDR contents are transferred to PODR and output when the specified
compare match event occurs. Figure 11.3 shows the timing of these operations for the case of
normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match A.
φ
N
TCNT
TGRA
N+1
N
Compare match
A signal
n
NDRH
PODRH
m
PO8 to PO15
n
m
n
Figure 11.3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 388 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.3
Normal Pulse Output
Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output: Figure 11.4 shows a sample procedure for
setting up normal pulse output.
Normal PPG output
Select TGR functions
[1]
Set TGRA value
[2]
Set counting operation
[3]
Select interrupt request
[4]
Set initial output data
[5]
Enable pulse output
[6]
Select output trigger
[7]
[1] Set TIOR to make TGRA an output
compare register (with output
disabled)
[2] Set the PPG output trigger period
TPU setup
Port and
PPG setup
TPU setup
Set next pulse
output data
[8]
Start counter
[9]
Compare match?
No
[4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER.
The DTC can also be set up to
transfer data to NDR.
[5] Set the initial output values in
PODR.
[6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the
pins to be used for pulse output to
1.
[7] Select the TPU compare match
event to be used as the output
trigger in PCR.
[8] Set the next pulse output values in
NDR.
Yes
Set next pulse
output data
[3] Select the counter clock source
with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Select the counter clear source
with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0.
[10]
[9] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to
start the TCNT counter.
[10] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next
Figure 11.4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 389 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output): Figure 11.5 shows
an example in which pulse output is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output.
TCNT value
Compare match
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
Time
80
NDRH
PODRH
00
C0
80
40
C0
60
40
20
60
30
20
10
30
18
10
08
18
88
08
80
88
C0
80
40
C0
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
Figure 11.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output)
[1] Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel so that TGRA is an output
compare register and the counter will be cleared by compare match A. Set the trigger period in
TGRA and set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1 to enable the compare match A (TGIA) interrupt.
[2] Write H'F8 in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0
bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the
output trigger. Write output data H'80 in NDRH.
[3] The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When compare match A occurs, the NDRH
contents are transferred to PODRH and output. The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the
next output data (H'C0) in NDRH.
[4] Five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained
subsequently by writing H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30. H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88, ... at successive TGIA
interrupts. If the DTC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained
without imposing a load on the CPU.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 390 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.4
Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output: Figure 11.6 shows a sample
procedure for setting up non-overlapping pulse output.
[1] Set TIOR to make TGRA and
TGRB an output compare registers
(with output disabled)
Non-overlapping
PPG output
Select TGR functions
[1]
Set TGR values
[2]
Set counting operation
[3]
Select interrupt request
[4]
Set initial output data
[5]
TPU setup
PPG setup
TPU setup
Enable pulse output
[6]
Select output trigger
[7]
Set non-overlapping groups
[8]
Set next pulse
output data
[9]
Start counter
[10]
Compare match?
No
[3] Select the counter clock source
with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Select the counter clear source
with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0.
[4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER.
The DTC can also be set up to
transfer data to NDR.
[5] Set the initial output values in
PODR.
[6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the
pins to be used for pulse output to
1.
[7] Select the TPU compare match
event to be used as the pulse
output trigger in PCR.
[8] In PMR, select the groups that will
operate in non-overlap mode.
Yes
Set next pulse
output data
[2] Set the pulse output trigger period
in TGRB and the non-overlap
margin in TGRA.
[11]
[9] Set the next pulse output values in
NDR.
[10] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to
start the TCNT counter.
[11] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next
output values in NDR.
Figure 11.6 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 391 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary NonOverlapping Output): Figure 11.7 shows an example in which pulse output is used for fourphase complementary non-overlapping pulse output.
TCNT value
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
NDRH
PODRH
Time
95
00
65
95
59
05
65
56
41
59
95
50
56
65
14
95
05
65
Non-overlap margin
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
Figure 11.7 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 392 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
[1] Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel so that TGRA and TGRB are
output compare registers. Set the trigger period in TGRB and the non-overlap margin in
TGRA, and set the counter to be cleared by compare match B. Set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1
to enable the TGIA interrupt.
[2] Write H'FF in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0
bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the
output trigger. Set the G3NOV and G2NOV bits in PMR to 1 to select non-overlapping output.
Write output data H'95 in NDRH.
[3] The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When a compare match with TGRB occurs,
outputs change from 1 to 0. When a compare match with TGRA occurs, outputs change from 0
to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value set in TGRA). The TGIA interrupt
handling routine writes the next output data (H'65) in NDRH.
[4] Four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained subsequently by
writing H'59, H'56, H'95, ... at successive TGIA interrupts. If the DTC is set for activation by
this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without imposing a load on the CPU.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 393 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.5
Inverted Pulse Output
If the G3INV, G2INV, G1INV, and G0INV bits in PMR are cleared to 0, values that are the
inverse of the PODR contents can be output.
Figure 11.8 shows the outputs when G3INV and G2INV are cleared to 0, in addition to the
settings of figure 11.7.
TCNT value
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
NDRH
PODRL
Time
95
00
65
95
59
05
65
56
41
59
95
50
56
65
14
95
05
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
Figure 11.8 Inverted Pulse Output (Example)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 394 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
65
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.6
Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture
Pulse output can be triggered by TPU input capture as well as by compare match. If TGRA
functions as an input capture register in the TPU channel selected by PCR, pulse output will be
triggered by the input capture signal.
Figure 11.9 shows the timing of this output.
φ
TIOC pin
Input capture
signal
NDR
N
PODR
M
PO
M
N
N
Figure 11.9 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 395 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4
Usage Notes
Operation of Pulse Output Pins: Pins PO8 to PO15 are also used for other peripheral functions
such as the TPU. When output by another peripheral function is enabled, the corresponding pins
cannot be used for pulse output. Note, however, that data transfer from NDR bits to PODR bits
takes place, regardless of the usage of the pins.
Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not
occur.
Note on Non-Overlapping Output: During non-overlapping operation, the transfer of NDR bit
values to PODR bits takes place as follows.
• NDR bits are always transferred to PODR bits at compare match A.
• At compare match B, NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. Bits are not transferred
if their value is 1.
Figure 11.10 illustrates the non-overlapping pulse output operation.
DDR
NDER
Q
Compare match A
Compare match B
Pulse
output
pin
C
Q PODR D
Q NDR D
Internal data bus
Normal output/inverted output
Figure 11.10 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before
compare match A. The NDR contents should not be altered during the interval from compare
match B to compare match A (the non-overlap margin).
This can be accomplished by having the TGIA interrupt handling routine write the next data in
NDR, or by having the TGIA interrupt activate the DTC. Note, however, that the next data must
be written before the next compare match B occurs.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 396 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Figure 11.11 shows the timing of this operation.
Compare match A
Compare match B
Write to NDR
Write to NDR
NDR
PODR
0 output
0/1 output
Write to NDR
Do not write here
to NDR here
0 output 0/1 output
Write to NDR
Do not write here
to NDR here
Figure 11.11 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 397 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 398 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.1
Overview
A single on-chip watchdog timer channel (WDT0) is provided in the H8S/2623 Group, and two
watchdog timer channels (WDT0 and WDT1) in the H8S/2626 Group. The WDT outputs an
overflow signal (WDTOVF) if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter,
allowing it to overflow. At the same time, the WDT can also generate an internal reset signal for
the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval
timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows.
12.1.1
Features
WDT features are listed below.
• Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode
• WDTOVF output when in watchdog timer mode
If the counter overflows, the WDT outputs WDTOVF. It is possible to select whether the LSI
is internally reset or an NMI interrupt is generated at the same time.
• Interrupt generation when in interval timer mode
If the counter overflows, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt.
• WDT0 and WDT1 respectively allow eight and sixteen types of counter input clock to be
selected
The maximum interval of the WDT is given as a system clock cycle × 131072 × 256.
A subclock may be selected for the input counter of WDT1.
Where a subclock is selected, the maximum interval is given as a subclock cycle × 256 × 256.
• Selected clock can be output from the BUZZ output pin (WDT1)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 399 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.1.2
Block Diagram
Figures 12.1 (a) and 12.1 (b) show block diagrams of the WDT.
Overflow
WDTOVF
Internal reset signal*
Clock
Clock
select
Reset
control
RSTCSR
Internal clock
sources
TCNT
TSCR
Module bus
WDT
Legend:
: Timer control/status register
TCSR
: Timer counter
TCNT
RSTCSR : Reset control/status register
Note: * The type of internal reset signal depends on a register setting.
Figure 12.1 (a) Block Diagram of WDT0
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 400 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
φ/2
φ/64
φ/128
φ/512
φ/2048
φ/8192
φ/32768
φ/131072
Bus
interface
Internal bus
WOVI 0
(interrupt request
signal)
Interrupt
control
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Internal NMI
Interrupt request signal
Interrupt
control
Overflow
Clock
select
Clock
Reset
control
Internal reset signal*
φ/2
φ/64
φ/128
φ/512
φ/2048
φ/8192
φ/32768
φ/131072
Internal clock
BUZZ
TCNT
TCSR
Bus
interface
Module bus
φSUB/2
φSUB/4
φSUB/8
φSUB/16
φSUB/32
φSUB/64
φSUB/128
φSUB/256
Internal bus
WOVI1
(Interrupt request signal)
WDT
Legend:
TCSR : Timer control/status register
TCNT : Timer counter
Note: * An internal reset signal can be generated by setting the register.
Figure 12.1 (b) Block Diagram of WDT1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 401 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 12.1 describes the WDT output pin.
Table 12.1 WDT Pin
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Watchdog timer overflow
WDTOVF
Output
Outputs counter overflow signal in watchdog
timer mode
Buzzer output*
BUZZ
Output
Outputs clock selected by watchdog timer
(WDT1)
Note:
*
12.1.4
Cannot be used in the H8S/2623 Group.
Register Configuration
Table 12.2 summarizes the WDT register configuration. These registers control clock selection,
WDT mode switching, and the reset signal.
Table 12.2 WDT Registers
Address*
1
Channel Name
0
Timer control/status register 0 TCSR0
R/(W)*
Timer counter 0
TCNT0
RSTCSR
Reset control/status register
4
1*
All
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Initial Value Write*
Abbreviation R/W
Timer control/status register 1 TCSR1
3
2
Read
H'18
H'FF74 H'FF74
R/W
H'00
H'FF74 H'FF75
3
R/(W)*
H'1F
H'FF76 H'FF77
3
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FFA2 H'FFA2
Timer counter 1
TCNT1
R/W
H'00
H'FFA2 H'FFA3
Pin function control register
PFCR
R/W
H'0D/H'00
H'FDEB
Lower 16 bits of the address.
For details of write operations, see section 12.2.5, Notes on Register Access.
Only a write of 0 is permitted to bit 7, to clear the flag.
Cannot be used in the H8S/2623 Group.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 402 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2
Register Descriptions
12.2.1
Timer Counter (TCNT)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter.
When the TME bit is set to 1 in TCSR, TCNT starts counting pulses generated from the internal
clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR. When the count overflows (changes from
H'FF to H'00), either the watchdog timer overflow signal (WDTOVF) or an interval timer interrupt
(WOVI) is generated, depending on the mode selected by the WT/IT bit in TCSR.
TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, or when the TME bit is cleared
to 0. It is not initialized in software standby mode.
Note: * TCNT is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details
see section 12.2.5, Notes on Register Access.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 403 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2.2
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
• TCSR0
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Only a 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
• TCSR1*
1
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
PSS
RST/NMI
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Notes: 1. Cannot be used in the H8S/2623 Group.
2. Only a 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be
input to TCNT, and the timer mode.
TCSR0 (TCSR1) is initialized to H'18 (H'00) by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not
initialized in software standby mode.
Note: * TCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details
see section 12.2.5, Notes on Register Access.
Bit 7—Overflow Flag (OVF): Indicates that TCNT has overflowed from H'FF to H'00.
Bit 7
OVF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
Cleared when 0 is written to the TME bit (Only applies to WDT1)
•
Cleared by reading TCSR when OVF = 1, then writing 0 to OVF
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00)
When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is
cleared automatically by the internal reset.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 404 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
In interval timer mode, to clear OVF flag in WOVI handling routine, read TCSR when OVF = 1,
then write with 0 to OVF, as stated above.
When WOVI is masked and OVF flag is poling, if contention between OVF flag set and TCSR
read is occurred, OVF = 1 is read but OVF can not be cleared by writing with 0 to OVF.
In this case, reading TCSR when OVF = 1 two times meet the requirements of OVF clear
condition. Please read TCSR when OVF = 1 two times before writing with 0 to OVF.
Bit 6—Timer Mode Select (WT/IT
IT):
IT Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or
interval timer. When TCNT overflows, WDT0 generates the WDTOVF signal when in watchdog
timer mode, or a WOVI interrupt request to the CPU when in interval timer mode. WDT1
generates a reset or NMI interrupt request when in watchdog timer mode, or a WOVI interrupt
request to the CPU when in interval timer mode.
• WDT0 Mode Select
WDT0
WT/IT
IT
Description
0
Interval timer mode: WDT0 requests an interval timer interrupt (WOVI)
from the CPU when the TCNT overflows.
1
Watchdog timer mode: WDT0 outputs a WDTOVF signal when the TCNT overflows.*
Note:
*
(Initial value)
For details on a TCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode, see section 12.2.3, Reset
Control/Status Register (RSTCSR).
• WDT1 Mode Select*
WDT1
WT/IT
IT
Description
0
Interval timer mode: WDT1 requests an interval timer interrupt (WOVI)
from the CPU when the TCNT overflows.
1
Watchdog timer mode: WDT1 requests a reset or an NMI interrupt from
the CPU when the TCNT overflows.
Note:
*
(Initial value)
Cannot be used in the H8S/2623 Group.
Bit 5—Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether TCNT runs or is halted.
Bit 5
TME
Description
0
TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted
1
TCNT counts
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 405 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
WDT0 TCSR Bit 4—Reserved Bit: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
WDT1 TCSR Bit 4—Prescaler Select (PSS): This bit is used to select an input clock source for
the TCNT of WDT1.
See the descriptions of Clock Select 2 to 0 for details.
This bit cannot be used in the H8S/2623 Group.
WDT1 TCSR
Bit 4
PSS
Description
0
The TCNT counts frequency-division clock pulses of the φ based
prescaler (PSM).
1
The TCNT counts frequency-division clock pulses of the φ SUB-based prescaler
(PSS).
(Initial value)
WDT0 TCSR Bit 3—Reserved Bit: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
WDT1 TCSR Bit 3—Reset or NMI (RST/NMI
NMI):
NMI This bit is used to choose between an internal
reset request and an NMI request when the TCNT overflows during the watchdog timer mode.
This bit cannot be used in the H8S/2623 Group.
Bit 3
RTS/NMI
NMI
Description
0
NMI request.
1
Internal reset request.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 406 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Bits 2 to 0—Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select one of eight internal clock
sources, obtained by dividing the system clock (φ) or subclock (φ SUB), for input to TCNT.
• WDT0 Input Clock Select
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Note:
*
Description
Clock
Overflow Period* (where φ = 20 MHz)
0
φ/2 (Initial value)
25.6 µs
1
φ/64
819.2 µs
0
φ/128
1.6 ms
1
φ/512
6.6 ms
0
φ/2048
26.2 ms
1
φ/8192
104.9 ms
0
φ/32768
419.4 ms
1
φ/131072
1.68 s
An overflow period is the time interval between the start of counting up from H'00 on the
TCNT and the occurrence of a TCNT overflow.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 407 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
• WDT1 Input Clock Select*
2
Description
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
PSS
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
Clock
1
Overflow Period* (where φ = 20 MHz)
(where φ SUB = 32.768 kHz)
0
φ/2 (Initial value)
25.6 µs
1
φ/64
819.2 µs
0
φ/128
1.6 ms
1
φ/512
6.6 ms
0
0
φ/2048
26.2 ms
1
φ/8192
104.9 ms
1
0
φ/32768
419.4 ms
1
φ/131072
1.68 s
0
φSUB/2
15.6 ms
1
φSUB/4
31.3 ms
1
0
φSUB/8
62.5 ms
1
φSUB/16
125 ms
0
0
φSUB/32
250 ms
1
φSUB/64
500 ms
0
φSUB/128
1s
1
φSUB/256
2s
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
Notes: 1. An overflow period is the time interval between the start of counting up from H'00 on the
TCNT and the occurrence of a TCNT overflow.
2. Cannot be used in the H8S/2623 Group.
12.2.3
Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WOVF
RSTE
RSTS
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register that controls the generation of the internal reset
signal when TCNT overflows, and selects the type of internal reset signal.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 408 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
RSTCSR is initialized to H'1F by a reset signal from the RES pin, but not by the WDT internal
reset signal caused by overflows.
Note: * RSTCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For
details see section 12.2.5, Notes on Register Access.
Bit 7—Watchdog Overflow Flag (WOVF): Indicates that TCNT has overflowed (changed from
H'FF to H'00) during watchdog timer operation. This bit is not set in interval timer mode.
Bit 7
WOVF
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
(Initial value)
Cleared by reading TCSR when WOVF = 1, then writing 0 to WOVF
1
[Setting condition]
Set when TCNT overflows (changed from H'FF to H'00) during watchdog timer
operation
Bit 6—Reset Enable (RSTE): Specifies whether or not a reset signal is generated in the chip if
TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation.
Bit 6
RSTE
Description
0
Reset signal is not generated if TCNT overflows*
1
Reset signal is generated if TCNT overflows
Note:
*
(Initial value)
The modules within the chip are not reset, but TCNT and TCSR within the WDT are
reset.
Bit 5—Reset Select (RSTS): Selects the type of internal reset generated if TCNT overflows
during watchdog timer operation.
For details of the types of reset, see section 4, Exception Handling.
Bit 5
RSTS
Description
0
Power-on reset
1
Setting prohibited
(Initial value)
Bits 4 to 0—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 409 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2.4
Bit
Pin Function Control Register (PFCR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
BUZZE
—
AE3
AE2
AE1
AE0
0
0
0
0
1/0
1/0
0
1/0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PFCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs address output control in external
expanded mode.
Only bit 5 is described here. For details of the other bits, see section 7.2.6, Pin Function Control
Register (PFCR).
Bit 5—BUZZ Output Enable (BUZZE)*: Enables or disables BUZZ output from the PF1 pin.
The WDT1 input clock selected with bits PSS and CKS2 to CKS0 is output as the BUZZ signal.
Note: * In the H8S/2623 Group this bit is reserved, and must be written with 0.
Bit 5
BUZZE
Description
0
Functions as PF1 I/O pin
1
Functions as BUZZ output pin
12.2.5
(Initial value)
Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer’s TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being
more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given
below.
Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction.
They cannot be written to with byte instructions.
Figure 12.2 shows the format of data written to TCNT and TCSR. TCNT and TCSR both have the
same write address. For a write to TCNT, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'5A
and the lower byte must contain the write data. For a write to TCSR, the upper byte of the written
word must contain H'A5 and the lower byte must contain the write data. This transfers the write
data from the lower byte to TCNT or TCSR.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 410 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
TCNT write
15
8 7
H'5A
Address: H'FF74
0
Write data
TCSR write
15
8 7
H'A5
Address: H'FF74
0
Write data
Figure 12.2 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR
Writing to RSTCSR: RSTCSR must be written to by word transfer instruction to address
H'FF76. It cannot be written to with byte instructions.
Figure 12.3 shows the format of data written to RSTCSR. The method of writing 0 to the WOVF
bit differs from that for writing to the RSTE and RSTS bits.
To write 0 to the WOVF bit, the write data must have H'A5 in the upper byte and H'00 in the
lower byte. This clears the WOVF bit to 0, but has no effect on the RSTE and RSTS bits. To write
to the RSTE and RSTS bits, the upper byte must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the
write data. This writes the values in bits 6 and 5 of the lower byte into the RSTE and RSTS bits,
but has no effect on the WOVF bit.
Writing 0 to WOVF bit
15
8 7
0
H'A5
Address: H'FF76
H'00
Writing to RSTE and RSTS bits
15
Address: H'FF76
8 7
H'5A
0
Write data
Figure 12.3 Format of Data Written to RSTCSR
Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR (WDT0): These registers are read in the same way as
other registers. The read addresses are H'FF74 for TCSR, H'FF75 for TCNT, and H'FF77 for
RSTCSR.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 411 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.3
Operation
12.3.1
Watchdog Timer Operation
To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT bit in TCSR and TME bit to 1. Software
must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally be writing H'00) before
overflows occurs. This ensures that TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating
normally. If TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system crash or other error, in
the WDT0 the WDTOVF signal is output. This is shown in figure 12.4 (a). This WDTOVF signal
can be used to reset the system. The WDTOVF signal is output for 132 states when RSTE = 1, and
for 130 states when RSTE = 0.
If TCNT overflows when 1 is set in the RSTE bit in RSTCSR, a signal that resets the chip
internally is generated at the same time as the WDTOVF signal. This reset can be selected as a
power-on reset or a manual reset, depending on the setting of the RSTS bit in RSTCSR. The
internal reset signal is output for 518 states.
If a reset caused by a signal input to the RES pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a
WDT overflow, the RES pin reset has priority and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to 0.
In the case of WDT1, the chip is reset, or an NMI interrupt request is generated, for 516 system
clock periods (516φ) (515 or 516 states when the clock source is φSUB (PSS = 1)). This is
illustrated in figure 12.4 (b).
An NMI request from the watchdog timer and an interrupt request from the NMI pin are both
treated as having the same vector. So, avoid handling an NMI request from the watchdog timer
and an interrupt request from the NMI pin at the same time.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 412 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
TCNT count
Overflow
H'FF
Time
H'00
WT/IT=1
TME=1
H'00 written
to TCNT
WOVF=1
WDTOVF and
internal reset are
generated
WT/IT=1
TME=1
H'00 written
to TCNT
WDTOVF signal
132 states*2
Internal reset signal*1
518 states
Legend:
WT/IT : Timer mode select bit
TME : Timer enable bit
Notes: 1. The internal reset signal is generated only if the RSTE bit is set to 1.
2. 130 states when the RSTE bit is cleared to 0.
Figure 12.4 (a) WDT0 Watchdog Timer Operation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 413 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
TCNT value
Overflow
H'FF
Time
H'00
WT/IT= 1
TME= 1
Write H'00'
to TCNT
WOVF= 1*
WT/IT= 1 Write H'00'
TME= 1 to TCNT
Occurrence
of internal reset
Internal
reset signal
515/516 states
WT/IT : Timer Mode Select bit
TME : Timer Enable bit
Note: * The WOVF bit is set to 1 and then cleared to 0 by an internal reset.
Figure 12.4 (b) WDT1 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 414 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.3.2
Interval Timer Operation
To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear the WT/IT bit in TCSR to 0 and set the TME bit to 1.
An interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time TCNT overflows, provided that the
WDT is operating as an interval timer, as shown in figure 12.5. This function can be used to
generate interrupt requests at regular intervals.
TCNT count
Overflow
H'FF
Overflow
Overflow
Overflow
Time
H'00
WT/IT=0
TME=1
WOVI
WOVI
WOVI
WOVI
Legend:
WOVI: Interval timer interrupt request generation
Figure 12.5 Interval Timer Operation
12.3.3
Timing of Setting Overflow Flag (OVF)
The OVF flag is set to 1 if TCNT overflows during interval timer operation. At the same time, an
interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. This timing is shown in figure 12.6.
With WDT1, the OVF bit of the TCSR is set to 1 and a simultaneous NMI interrupt is requested
when the TCNT overflows if the NMI request has been chosen in the watchdog timer mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 415 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
φ
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
(internal signal)
OVF
Figure 12.6 Timing of Setting of OVF
12.3.4
Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF)
In the WDT0, the WOVF flag is set to 1 if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. At
the same time, the WDTOVF signal goes low. If TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit in RSTCSR
is set to 1, an internal reset signal is generated for the entire chip. Figure 12.7 shows the timing in
this case.
φ
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
(internal signal)
WOVF
132 states
WDTOVF signal
Internal reset
signal
518 states (WDT0)
515/516 states (WDT1)
Figure 12.7 Timing of Setting of WOVF
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 416 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.4
Interrupts
During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).
The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be
cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine.
If an NMI request has been chosen in the watchdog timer mode, an NMI request is generated
when a TCNT overflow occurs.
12.5
Usage Notes
12.5.1
Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment
If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write
takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 12.8 shows this operation.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 12.8 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 417 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.5.2
Changing Value of PSS and CKS2 to CKS0
If bits PSS and CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could
occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0)
before changing the value of bits PSS and CKS2 to CKS0.
12.5.3
Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, or vice versa, while the WDT is
operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by
clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode.
12.5.4
System Reset by WDTOVF Signal
If the WDTOVF output signal is input to the RES pin of the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group,
the chip will not be initialized correctly. Make sure that the WDTOVF signal is not input logically
to the RES pin. To reset the entire system by means of the WDTOVF signal, use the circuit shown
in figure 12.9.
H8S/2626 Group or
H8S/2623 Group
Reset input
Reset signal to entire system
RES
WDTOVF
Figure 12.9 Circuit for System Reset by WDTOVF Signal (Example)
12.5.5
Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode
The H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group is not reset internally if TCNT overflows while the
RSTE bit is cleared to 0 during watchdog timer operation, but TCNT and TCSR of the WDT are
reset.
TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR cannot be written to while the WDTOVF signal is low. Also note
that a read of the WOVF flag is not recognized during this period. To clear the WOVF falg,
therefore, read TCSR after the WDTOVF signal goes high, then write 0 to the WOVF flag.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 418 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.5.6
OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode
When the OVF flag setting conflicts with the OVF flag reading in interval timer mode, writing 0
to the OVF bit may not clear the flag even though the OVF bit has been read while it is 1. If there
is a possibility that the OVF flag setting and reading will conflict, such as when the OVF flag is
polled with the interval timer interrupt disabled, read the OVF bit while it is 1 at least twice before
writing 0 to the OVF bit to clear the flag.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 419 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 420 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have three independent serial communication
interface (SCI) channels. The SCI can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial
communication. A function is also provided for serial communication between processors
(multiprocessor communication function).
13.1.1
Features
SCI features are listed below.
• Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode
Asynchronous mode
 Serial data communication executed using asynchronous system in which synchronization
is achieved character by character
Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication
chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous
Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA)
 A multiprocessor communication function is provided that enables serial data
communication with a number of processors
 Choice of 12 serial data transfer formats
Data length
: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length
: 1 or 2 bits
Parity
: Even, odd, or none
Multiprocessor bit
: 1 or 0
 Receive error detection : Parity, overrun, and framing errors
 Break detection
: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in
case of a framing error
Clocked Synchronous mode
 Serial data communication synchronized with a clock
Serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a synchronous
communication function
 One serial data transfer format
Data length
: 8 bits
 Receive error detection : Overrun errors detected
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 421 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Full-duplex communication capability
 The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception
to be executed simultaneously
 Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous
transmission and continuous reception of serial data
• Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer
 Can be selected regardless of the communication mode* (except in the case of
asynchronous mode 7-bit data)
Note: * Descriptions in this section refer to LSB-first transfer.
• On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
• Choice of serial clock source: internal clock from baud rate generator or external clock from
SCK pin
• Four interrupt sources
 Four interrupt sources — transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive
error — that can issue requests independently
 The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive data full interrupts can activate the data
transfer controller (DTC) to execute data transfer
• Module stop mode can be set
 As the initial setting, SCI operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module
stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 422 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.1.2
Block Diagram
Bus interface
Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI.
Module data bus
RDR
RxD
TxD
RSR
TDR
SCMR
SSR
SCR
SMR
TSR
BRR
φ
Baud rate
generator
Transmission/
reception control
Parity generation
Parity check
SCK
Internal
data bus
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
Clock
External clock
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
Legend:
RSR : Receive shift register
RDR : Receive data register
TSR : Transmit shift register
TDR : Transmit data register
SMR : Serial mode register
SCR : Serial control register
SSR : Serial status register
SCMR : Smart card mode register
BRR : Bit rate register
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of SCI
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 423 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 13.1 shows the serial pins for each SCI channel.
Table 13.1 SCI Pins
Channel
Pin Name
Symbol*
I/O
Function
0
Serial clock pin 0
SCK0
I/O
SCI0 clock input/output
Receive data pin 0
RxD0
Input
SCI0 receive data input
Transmit data pin 0
TxD0
Output
SCI0 transmit data output
1
2
Note:
*
Serial clock pin 1
SCK1
I/O
SCI1 clock input/output
Receive data pin 1
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
Transmit data pin 1
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
Serial clock pin 2
SCK2
I/O
SCI2 clock input/output
Receive data pin 2
RxD2
Input
SCI2 receive data input
Transmit data pin 2
TxD2
Output
SCI2 transmit data output
Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the
channel designation.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 424 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.1.4
Register Configuration
The SCI has the internal registers shown in table 13.2. These registers are used to specify
asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode, the data format , and the bit rate, and to control
transmitter/receiver.
Table 13.2 SCI Registers
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
0
Serial mode register 0
SMR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF78
Bit rate register 0
BRR0
R/W
H'FF
H'FF79
Serial control register 0
SCR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF7A
Transmit data register 0
TDR0
R/W
H'FF
H'FF7B
Serial status register 0
SSR0
2
R/(W)*
H'84
H'FF7C
Receive data register 0
RDR0
R
H'00
H'FF7D
1
2
All
1
Smart card mode register 0
SCMR0
R/W
H'F2
H'FF7E
Serial mode register 1
SMR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF80
Bit rate register 1
BRR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FF81
Serial control register 1
SCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF82
Transmit data register 1
TDR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FF83
Serial status register 1
SSR1
2
R/(W)*
H'84
H'FF84
Receive data register 1
RDR1
R
H'00
H'FF85
Smart card mode register 1
SCMR1
R/W
H'F2
H'FF86
Serial mode register 2
SMR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF88
Bit rate register 2
BRR2
R/W
H'FF
H'FF89
Serial control register 2
SCR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF8A
Transmit data register 2
TDR2
R/W
Serial status register 2
SSR2
R/(W)*
H'FF
H'FF8B
H'84
H'FF8C
Receive data register 2
RDR2
R
H'00
H'FF8D
Smart card mode register 2
SCMR2
R/W
H'F2
H'FF8E
Module stop control register B
MSTPCRB
R/W
H'FF
H'FDE9
2
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 425 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2
Register Descriptions
13.2.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W
:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RSR is a register used to receive serial data.
The SCI sets serial data input from the RxD pin in RSR in the order received, starting with the
LSB (bit 0), and converts it to parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is
transferred to RDR automatically.
RSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU.
13.2.2
Bit
Receive Data Register (RDR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
:
RDR is a register that stores received serial data.
When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to
RDR where it is stored, and completes the receive operation. After this, RSR is receive-enabled.
Since RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, enables continuous receive
operations to be performed.
RDR is a read-only register, and cannot be written to by the CPU.
RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep
mode, or module stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 426 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2.3
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W
:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TSR is a register used to transmit serial data.
To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then
sends the data to the TxD pin starting with the LSB (bit 0).
When transmission of one byte is completed, the next transmit data is transferred from TDR to
TSR, and transmission started, automatically. However, data transfer from TDR to TSR is not
performed if the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1.
TSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU.
13.2.4
Bit
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission.
When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and
starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission can be carried out by writing the next
transmit data to TDR during serial transmission of the data in TSR.
TDR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep
mode, or module stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 427 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2.5
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SMR is an 8-bit register used to set the SCI’s serial transfer format and select the baud rate
generator clock source.
SMR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
SMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its previous state in
module stop mode, software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode.
Bit 7—Communication Mode (C/A
A): Selects asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode
as the SCI operating mode.
Bit 7
C/A
A
Description
0
Asynchronous mode
1
Clocked synchronous mode
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Character Length (CHR): Selects 7 or 8 bits as the data length in asynchronous mode. In
clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used regardless of the CHR setting.
Bit 6
CHR
Description
0
8-bit data
7-bit data*
1
Note:
*
(Initial value)
When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted, and it is not
possible to choose between LSB-first or MSB-first transfer.
Bit 5—Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, selects whether or not parity bit addition is
performed in transmission, and parity bit checking in reception. In clocked synchronous mode
with a multiprocessor format, parity bit addition and checking is not performed, regardless of the
PE bit setting.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 428 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 5
PE
Description
0
Parity bit addition and checking disabled
Parity bit addition and checking enabled*
1
Note:
*
(Initial value)
When the PE bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit is added to
transmit data before transmission. In reception, the parity bit is checked for the parity
(even or odd) specified by the O/E bit.
Bit 4—Parity Mode (O/E
E): Selects either even or odd parity for use in parity addition and
checking.
The O/E bit setting is only valid when the PE bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and
checking, in asynchronous mode. The O/E bit setting is invalid in clocked synchronous mode,
when parity addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode, and when a multiprocessor
format is used.
Bit 4
O/E
E
Description
0
Even parity*
2
Odd parity*
1
1
(Initial value)
Notes: 1. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total
number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is even.
In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive
character plus the parity bit is even.
2. When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total
number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is odd.
In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive
character plus the parity bit is odd.
Bit 3—Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects 1 or 2 bits as the stop bit length in asynchronous mode.
The STOP bits setting is only valid in asynchronous mode. If clocked synchronous mode is set the
STOP bit setting is invalid since stop bits are not added.
Bit 3
STOP
Description
0
1 stop bit: In transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end
of a transmit character before it is sent.
1
(Initial value)
2 stop bits: In transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end of a transmit
character before it is sent.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 429 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
In reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second
stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit; if it is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit
character.
Bit 2—Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects multiprocessor format. When multiprocessor format
is selected, the PE bit and O/E bit parity settings are invalid. The MP bit setting is only valid in
asynchronous mode; it is invalid in clocked synchronous mode.
For details of the multiprocessor communication function, see section 13.3.3, Multiprocessor
Communication Function.
Bit 2
MP
Description
0
Multiprocessor function disabled
1
Multiprocessor format selected
(Initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1, CKS0): These bits select the clock source for the
baud rate generator. The clock source can be selected from φ, φ/4, φ/16, and φ/64, according to the
setting of bits CKS1 and CKS0.
For the relation between the clock source, the bit rate register setting, and the baud rate, see
section 13.2.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR).
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS1
CKS0
Description
0
0
φ clock
1
φ/4 clock
0
φ/16 clock
1
φ/64 clock
1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 430 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2.6
Bit
Serial Control Register (SCR)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCR is a register that performs enabling or disabling of SCI transfer operations, serial clock output
in asynchronous mode, and interrupt requests, and selection of the serial clock source.
SCR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
SCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its previous state in
module stop mode, software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode.
Bit 7—Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables transmit data empty interrupt
(TXI) request generation when serial transmit data is transferred from TDR to TSR and the TDRE
flag in SSR is set to 1.
Bit 7
TIE
Description
0
Transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) requests disabled
1
Transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) requests enabled
(Initial value)
Note: TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then
clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 431 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 6—Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables receive data full interrupt (RXI)
request and receive error interrupt (ERI) request generation when serial receive data is transferred
from RSR to RDR and the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1.
Bit 6
RIE
Description
0
Receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and receive error interrupt (ERI) request
disabled*
(Initial value)
1
Receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and receive error interrupt (ERI) request
enabled
Note:
*
RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the
RDRF flag, or the FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the
RIE bit to 0.
Bit 5—Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the start of serial transmission by the SCI.
Bit 5
TE
Description
0
Transmission disabled*
2
Transmission enabled*
1
1
(Initial value)
Notes: 1. The TDRE flag in SSR is fixed at 1.
2. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and the
TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0.
SMR setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the TE bit
to 1.
Bit 4—Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the start of serial reception by the SCI.
Bit 4
RE
Description
0
1
Reception disabled*
2
Reception enabled*
1
(Initial value)
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which
retain their states.
2. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous
mode or serial clock input is detected in clocked synchronous mode.
SMR setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the RE bit
to 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 432 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 3—Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts.
The MPIE bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode when the MP bit in SMR is set to 1.
The MPIE bit setting is invalid in clocked synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3
MPIE
Description
0
Multiprocessor interrupts disabled (normal reception performed)
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
•
When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0
•
When MPB= 1 data is received
Multiprocessor interrupts enabled*
1
Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting
of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR are disabled until data with the
multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received.
Note:
*
When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR to
RDR, receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR ,
is not performed. When receive data including MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in SSR
is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI
interrupts (when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag
setting is enabled.
Bit 2—Transmit End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables transmit end interrupt
(TEI) request generation when there is no valid transmit data in TDR in MSB data transmission.
Bit 2
TEIE
Description
0
Transmit end interrupt (TEI) request disabled*
Transmit end interrupt (TEI) request enabled*
1
Note:
*
(Initial value)
TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then
clearing it to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 433 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0): These bits are used to select the SCI clock
source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. The combination of the CKE1 and
CKE0 bits determines whether the SCK pin functions as an I/O port, the serial clock output pin, or
the serial clock input pin.
The setting of the CKE0 bit, however, is only valid for internal clock operation (CKE1 = 0) in
asynchronous mode. The CKE0 bit setting is invalid in clocked synchronous mode, and in the case
of external clock operation (CKE1 = 1). Note that the SCI’s operating mode must be decided using
SMR before setting the CKE1 and CKE0 bits.
For details of clock source selection, see table 13.9.
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKE1
CKE0
Description
0
0
Asynchronous mode
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as I/O port*
Clocked synchronous
mode
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock
1
output*
Asynchronous mode
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as clock output*
Clocked synchronous
mode
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock
output
Asynchronous mode
External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input*
Clocked synchronous
mode
Asynchronous mode
External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock
input
3
External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input*
Clocked synchronous
mode
External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock
input
1
1
0
1
Notes: 1. Initial value
2. Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate.
3. Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 434 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
1
2
3
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2.7
Serial Status Register (SSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
SSR is an 8-bit register containing status flags that indicate the operating status of the SCI, and
multiprocessor bits.
SSR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. However, 1 cannot be written to flags
TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER. Also note that in order to clear these flags they must be
read as 1 beforehand. The TEND flag and MPB flag are read-only flags and cannot be modified.
SSR is initialized to H'84 by a reset, in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep
mode, or module stop mode.
Bit 7—Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that data has been transferred from
TDR to TSR and the next serial data can be written to TDR.
Bit 7
TDRE
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR
[Setting conditions]
(Initial value)
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data can be written to TDR
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 435 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 6—Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.
Bit 6
RDRF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and reads data from RDR
[Setting condition]
When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR
Note: RDR and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error is
detected during reception or when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.
If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1, an overrun
error will occur and the receive data will be lost.
Bit 5—Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception,
causing abnormal termination.
Bit 5
ORER
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
(Initial value)*
1
When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1
1
[Setting condition]
When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1*
2
Notes: 1. The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is
cleared to 0.
2. The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR, and the data received
subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the
ORER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be
continued, either.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 436 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 4—Framing Error (FER): Indicates that a framing error occurred during reception in
asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination.
Bit 4
FER
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
(Initial value)*
When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1
1
[Setting condition]
When the SCI checks whether the stop bit at the end of the receive data when
2
reception ends, and the stop bit is 0 *
Notes: 1. The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is
cleared to 0.
2. In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 0; the second stop bit
is not checked. If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the
RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the
FER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be
continued, either.
Bit 3—Parity Error (PER): Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity
addition in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination.
Bit 3
PER
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
(Initial value)*
1
When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1
1
[Setting condition]
When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does not
2
match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit in SMR*
Notes: 1. The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is
cleared to 0.
2. If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not
set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to
1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 437 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 2—Transmit End (TEND): Indicates that there is no valid data in TDR when the last bit of
the transmit character is sent, and transmission has been ended.
The TEND flag is read-only and cannot be modified.
Bit 2
TEND
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR
[Setting conditions]
(Initial value)
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character
Bit 1—Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): When reception is performed using multiprocessor format in
asynchronous mode, MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data.
MPB is a read-only bit, and cannot be modified.
Bit 1
MPB
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
[Setting condition]
(Initial value)*
When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received
Note:
*
Retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 with multiprocessor
format.
Bit 0—Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): When transmission is performed using
multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to
the transmit data.
The MPBT bit setting is invalid when multiprocessor format is not used, when not transmitting,
and in clocked synchronous mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 438 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 0
MPBT
Description
0
Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
1
Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
13.2.8
Bit
(Initial value)
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
BRR is an 8-bit register that sets the serial transfer bit rate in accordance with the baud rate
generator operating clock selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR.
BRR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
BRR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its previous state in
module stop mode, software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode.
As baud rate generator control is performed independently for each channel, different values can
be set for each channel.
Table 13.3 shows sample BRR settings in asynchronous mode, and table 13.4 shows sample BRR
settings in clocked synchronous mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 439 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode)
φ = 4 MHz
φ = 4.9152 MHz
φ = 5 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
70
0.03
2
86
0.31
2
88
–0.25
150
1
207
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
300
1
103
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
600
0
207
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
1200
0
103
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
2400
0
51
0.16
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
4800
0
25
0.16
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
9600
0
12
0.16
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
19200
—
—
—
0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
31250
0
3
0.00
0
4
–1.70
0
4
0.00
38400
—
—
—
0
3
0.00
0
3
1.73
φ = 6 MHz
φ = 6.144 MHz
φ = 7.3728 MHz
φ = 8 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
106
–0.44
2
108
0.08
2
130
–0.07
2
141
0.03
150
2
77
0.16
2
79
0.00
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
300
1
155
0.16
1
159
0.00
1
191
0.00
1
207
0.16
600
1
77
0.16
1
79
0.00
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.16
1200
0
155
0.16
0
159
0.00
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
2400
0
77
0.16
0
79
0.00
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
4800
0
38
0.16
0
39
0.00
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
9600
0
19
–2.34
0
19
0.00
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
19200
0
9
–2.34
0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
31250
0
5
0.00
0
5
2.40
—
—
—
0
7
0.00
38400
0
4
–2.34
0
4
0.00
0
5
0.00
—
—
—
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 440 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
φ = 9.8304 MHz
φ = 10 MHz
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
110
2
174
–0.26
2
177
–0.25
2
212
0.03
2
217
0.08
150
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
2
155
0.16
2
159
0.00
300
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
2
77
0.16
2
79
0.00
600
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
1
155
0.16
1
159
0.00
1200
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
1
77
0.16
1
79
0.00
2400
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
0
155
0.16
0
159
0.00
4800
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
0
77
0.16
0
79
0.00
9600
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
0
38
0.16
0
39
0.00
19200
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
0
19
–2.34
0
19
0.00
31250
0
9
–1.70
0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
0
11
2.40
38400
0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
0
9
–2.34
0
9
0.00
n
φ = 14.7456 MHz
N
Error
(%)
φ = 12.288 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
φ = 14 MHz
Error
(%)
φ = 12 MHz
n
φ = 16 MHz
N
Error
(%)
φ = 17.2032 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
248
–0.17
3
64
0.70
3
70
0.03
3
75
0.48
150
2
181
0.13
2
191
0.00
2
207
0.13
2
223
0.00
300
2
90
0.13
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.13
2
111
0.00
600
1
181
0.13
1
191
0.00
1
207
0.13
1
223
0.00
1200
1
90
0.13
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.13
1
111
0.00
2400
0
181
0.13
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.13
0
223
0.00
4800
0
90
0.13
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.13
0
111
0.00
9600
0
45
–0.93
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.13
0
55
0.00
19200
0
22
–0.93
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.13
0
27
0.00
31250
0
13
0.00
0
14
–1.70
0
15
0.00
0
13
1.20
38400
—
—
—
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.13
0
13
0.00
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 441 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
φ = 18 MHz
φ = 19.6608 MHz
φ = 20 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
110
3
79
–0.12
3
86
0.31
3
88
–0.25
150
2
233
0.16
2
255
0.00
3
64
0.16
300
2
116
0.16
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
600
1
233
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
1200
1
116
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
2400
0
233
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
4800
0
116
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
9600
0
58
–0.69
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
19200
0
28
1.02
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
31250
0
17
0.00
0
19
–1.70
0
19
0.00
38400
0
14
–2.34
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 442 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Error
(%)
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.4 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
φ = 4 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
110
—
—
250
2
500
φ = 8 MHz
φ = 10 MHz
φ = 16 MHz
φ = 20 MHz
n
N
n
N
n
N
249
3
124
—
—
3
249
2
124
2
249
—
—
3
124
1k
1
249
2
124
—
—
2
249
—
—
2.5 k
1
99
1
199
1
249
2
99
2
124
5k
0
199
1
99
1
124
1
199
1
249
10 k
0
99
0
199
0
249
1
99
1
124
25 k
0
39
0
79
0
99
0
159
0
199
50 k
0
19
0
39
0
49
0
79
0
99
100 k
0
9
0
19
0
24
0
39
0
49
250 k
0
3
0
7
0
9
0
15
0
19
500 k
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
7
0
9
0
0*
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
0*
0
1
0
0*
1M
2.5 M
5M
n
N
—
—
Legend:
Blank: Cannot be set.
—:
Can be set, but there will be a degree of error.
*:
Continuous transfer is not possible.
Note: As far as possible, the setting should be made so that the error is no more than 1%.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 443 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
The BRR setting is found from the following formulas.
Asynchronous mode:
N=
φ
64 × 2
× 10 – 1
6
2n–1
×B
Clocked synchronous mode:
N=
Where B:
N:
φ:
n:
φ
8×2
2n–1
× 10 – 1
6
×B
Bit rate (bit/s)
BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Operating frequency (MHz)
Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0 to 3)
(See the table below for the relation between n and the clock.)
SMR Setting
n
Clock
CKS1
CKS0
0
φ
0
0
1
φ/4
0
1
2
φ/16
1
0
3
φ/64
1
1
The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is found from the following formula:
Error (%) = {
φ × 10
6
(N + 1) × B × 64 × 2
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 444 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
2n–1
– 1} × 100
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.5 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. Tables 13.6
and 13.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input.
Table 13.5 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s)
n
N
4
125000
0
0
4.9152
153600
0
0
5
156250
0
0
6
187500
0
0
6.144
192000
0
0
7.3728
230400
0
0
8
250000
0
0
9.8304
307200
0
0
10
312500
0
0
12
375000
0
0
12.288
384000
0
0
14
437500
0
0
14.7456
460800
0
0
16
500000
0
0
17.2032
537600
0
0
18
562500
0
0
19.6608
614400
0
0
20
625000
0
0
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 445 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.6 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
External Input Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s)
4
1.0000
62500
4.9152
1.2288
76800
5
1.2500
78125
6
1.5000
93750
6.144
1.5360
96000
7.3728
1.8432
115200
8
2.0000
125000
9.8304
2.4576
153600
10
2.5000
156250
12
3.0000
187500
12.288
3.0720
192000
14
3.5000
218750
14.7456
3.6864
230400
16
4.0000
250000
17.2032
4.3008
268800
18
4.5000
281250
19.6608
4.9152
307200
20
5.0000
312500
Table 13.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
External Input Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s)
4
0.6667
666666.7
6
1.0000
1000000.0
8
1.3333
1333333.3
10
1.6667
1666666.7
12
2.0000
2000000.0
14
2.3333
2333333.3
16
2.6667
2666666.7
18
3.0000
3000000.0
20
3.3333
3333333.3
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 446 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.2.9
Bit
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
SDIR
SINV
—
SMIF
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
:
SCMR selects LSB-first or MSB-first by means of bit SDIR. Except in the case of asynchronous
mode 7-bit data, LSB-first or MSB-first can be selected regardless of the serial communication
mode. The descriptions in this chapter refer to LSB-first transfer.
For details of the other bits in SCMR, see 14.2.1, Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR).
SCMR is initialized to H'F2 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its previous state
in module stop mode, software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3—Smart Card Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion
format.
This bit is valid when 8-bit data is used as the transmit/receive format.
Bit 3
SDIR
Description
0
TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first
(Initial value)
Receive data is stored in RDR LSB-first
1
TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first
Receive data is stored in RDR MSB-first
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 447 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 2—Smart Card Data Invert (SINV): Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV
bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit(s): parity bit inversion requires inversion of the
O/E bit in SMR.
Bit 2
SINV
Description
0
TDR contents are transmitted without modification
Receive data is stored in RDR without modification
1
TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted
Receive data is stored in RDR in inverted form
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 0—Smart Card Interface Mode Select (SMIF): When the smart card interface operates as a
normal SCI, 0 should be written in this bit.
Bit 0
SMIF
Description
0
Operates as normal SCI (smart card interface function disabled)
1
Smart card interface function enabled
(Initial value)
13.2.10 Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB)
MSTPCRB
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4 MSTPB3 MSTPB2 MSTPB1 MSTPB0
Initial value :
R/W
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRB is 8-bit readable/writable registers that perform module stop mode control.
When one of bits MSTPB7 to MSTPB5 is set to 1, SCI0, SCI1, or SCI2, respectively, stops
operation at the end of the bus cycle, and enters module stop mode. For details, see sections
21A.5, 21B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRB is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not
initialized in software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 448 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit 7—Module Stop (MSTPB7): Specifies the SCI0 module stop mode.
Bit 7
MSTPB7
Description
0
SCI0 module stop mode is cleared
1
SCI0 module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Module Stop (MSTPB6): Specifies the SCI1 module stop mode.
Bit 6
MSTPB6
Description
0
SCI1 module stop mode is cleared
1
SCI1 module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Module Stop (MSTPB5): Specifies the SCI2 module stop mode.
Bit 5
MSTPB5
Description
0
SCI2 module stop mode is cleared
1
SCI2 module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 449 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3
Operation
13.3.1
Overview
The SCI can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which
synchronization is achieved character by character, and clocked synchronous mode in which
synchronization is achieved with clock pulses.
Selection of asynchronous or clocked synchronous mode and the transmission format is made
using SMR as shown in table 13.8. The SCI clock is determined by a combination of the C/A bit
in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR, as shown in table 13.9.
Asynchronous Mode
• Data length: Choice of 7 or 8 bits
• Choice of parity addition, multiprocessor bit addition, and addition of 1 or 2 stop bits (the
combination of these parameters determines the transfer format and character length)
• Detection of framing, parity, and overrun errors, and breaks, during reception
• Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source
 When internal clock is selected:
The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a clock with the same frequency as
the bit rate can be output
 When external clock is selected:
A clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate must be input (the on-chip baud rate
generator is not used)
Clocked Synchronous Mode
• Transfer format: Fixed 8-bit data
• Detection of overrun errors during reception
• Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source
 When internal clock is selected:
The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a serial clock is output off-chip
 When external clock is selected:
The on-chip baud rate generator is not used, and the SCI operates on the input serial clock
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 450 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.8 SMR Settings and Serial Transfer Format Selection
SMR Settings
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 2
SCI Transfer Format
Bit 5
C/A
A
CHR
MP
PE
STOP
Mode
0
0
0
0
0
Asynchronous
mode
1
1
Data
Length
Multi
Processor
Bit
Parity
Bit
Stop Bit
Length
8-bit data
No
No
1 bit
Bit 3
2 bits
0
Yes
1
1
0
2 bits
0
7-bit data
No
1
1
1
0
1
1
—
—
—
0
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
—
1 bit
2 bits
Yes
1
0
1 bit
1 bit
2 bits
Asynchronous
mode (multiprocessor format)
8-bit data
Yes
No
1 bit
2 bits
7-bit data
1 bit
2 bits
Clocked
8-bit data
synchronous mode
No
None
Table 13.9 SMR and SCR Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection
SMR
SCR Setting
SCI Transmit/Receive Clock
Bit 7
Bit 1
Bit 0
C/A
A
CKE1
CKE0
Mode
0
0
0
Asynchronous
mode
1
1
0
Clock
Source
SCK Pin Function
Internal
SCI does not use SCK pin
Outputs clock with same frequency as bit
rate
External
Inputs clock with frequency of 16 times
the bit rate
Internal
Outputs serial clock
External
Inputs serial clock
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
Clocked
synchronous
mode
1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 451 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.2
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, characters are sent or received, each preceded by a start bit indicating the
start of communication and stop bits indicating the end of communication. Serial communication
is thus carried out with synchronization established on a character-by-character basis.
Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex
communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so
that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data
transfer.
Figure 13.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication.
In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high
level). The SCI monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low level),
recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication.
One serial communication character consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSBfirst order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally stop bits (high level).
In asynchronous mode, the SCI performs synchronization at the falling edge of the start bit in
reception. The SCI samples the data on the 8th pulse of a clock with a frequency of 16 times the
length of one bit, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit.
Idle state
(mark state)
1
Serial
data
LSB
0
D0
1
MSB
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Start
bit
Transmit/receive data
1 bit
7 or 8 bits
D6
D7
0/1
Parity
bit
1 bit,
or none
1
1
Stop bit
1 or
2 bits
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 13.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 452 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Data Transfer Format
Table 13.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12
transfer formats can be selected according to the SMR setting.
Table 13.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
SMR Settings
Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length
CHR
PE
MP
STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0
0
0
0
S
8-bit data
STOP
0
0
0
1
S
8-bit data
STOP STOP
0
1
0
0
S
8-bit data
P STOP
0
1
0
1
S
8-bit data
P STOP STOP
1
0
0
0
S
7-bit data
STOP
1
0
0
1
S
7-bit data
STOP STOP
1
1
0
0
S
7-bit data
P
STOP
1
1
0
1
S
7-bit data
P
STOP STOP
0
—
1
0
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP
0
—
1
1
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
1
—
1
0
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP
1
—
1
1
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
Legend:
S
: Start bit
STOP : Stop bit
P
: Parity bit
MPB : Multiprocessor bit
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 453 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at
the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI’s serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in
SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. For details of SCI clock source selection, see table
13.9.
When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate
used.
When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The
frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the
rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 13.3.
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
1 frame
Figure 13.3 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode)
Data Transfer Operations
SCI initialization (asynchronous mode): Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first
clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below.
When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to
0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the
TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the
contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR.
When an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during operation, including
initialization, since operation is uncertain.
Figure 13.4 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 454 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR.
Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE,
TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and
RE, to 0.
Start initialization
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE, RE bits 0)
[1]
Set data transfer format in
SMR and SCMR
[2]
Set value in BRR
[3]
When the clock is selected in
asynchronous mode, it is output
immediately after SCR settings are
made.
[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR
and SCMR.
[3] Write a value corresponding to the
bit rate to BRR. Not necessary if an
external clock is used.
Wait
No
1-bit interval elapsed?
Yes
Set TE and RE bits in
SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits
[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then
set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.
Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables
the TxD and RxD pins to be used.
[4]
<Transfer completion>
Figure 13.4 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Serial data transmission (asynchronous mode): Figure 13.5 shows a sample flowchart for serial
transmission.
The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 455 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[1]
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
[2] SCI status check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR and clear the
TDRE flag to 0.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR
and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted?
Yes
[3]
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
No
Break output?
Yes
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data
output pin.
After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame
of 1s is output, and transmission is
enabled.
[4]
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible,
then write data to TDR, and then
clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking
and clearing of the TDRE flag is
automatic when the DTC is
activated by a transmit data empty
interrupt (TXI) request, and date is
written to TDR.
[4] Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial
transmission, set DDR for the port
corresponding to the TxD pin to 1,
clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit
in SCR to 0.
Clear DR to 0 and
set DDR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.5 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 456 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to
TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
[2] After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission.
If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order.
[a] Start bit:
One 0-bit is output.
[b] Transmit data:
8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order.
[c] Parity bit or multiprocessor bit:
One parity bit (even or odd parity), or one multiprocessor bit is output.
A format in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be
selected.
[d] Stop bit(s):
One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output.
[e] Mark state:
1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent.
[3] The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent,
and then serial transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the
“mark state” is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at
this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 457 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 13.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode.
1
Start
bit
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
1
Idle state
(mark state)
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
Data written to TDR and
request generated TDRE flag cleared to 0 in
TXI interrupt service routine
TXI interrupt
request generated
TEI interrupt
request generated
1 frame
Figure 13.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Serial data reception (asynchronous mode): Figure 13.7 shows a sample flowchart for serial
reception.
The following procedure should be used for serial data reception.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 458 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1]
Start reception
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data
input pin.
[2] [3] Receive error processing and
break detection:
Read ORER, PER, and
If a receive error occurs, read the
[2]
FER flags in SSR
ORER, PER, and FER flags in
SSR to identify the error. After
performing the appropriate error
Yes
processing, ensure that the
PER ∨ FER ∨ ORER = 1
ORER, PER, and FER flags are
[3]
all cleared to 0. Reception cannot
No
Error processing
be resumed if any of these flags
(Continued on next page) are set to 1. In the case of a
framing error, a break can be
detected by reading the value of
[4]
Read RDRF flag in SSR
the input port corresponding to
the RxD pin.
No
RDRF = 1
[4] SCI status check and receive
data read :
Read SSR and check that RDRF
= 1, then read the receive data in
RDR and clear the RDRF flag to
0. Transition of the RDRF flag
from 0 to 1 can also be identified
by an RXI interrupt.
Yes
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
[5]
[5] Serial reception continuation
procedure:
To continue serial reception,
before the stop bit for the current
frame is received, read the
RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear
the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF
flag is cleared automatically
when DTC is activated by an RXI
interrupt and the RDR value is
read.
Figure 13.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 459 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[3]
Error processing
No
ORER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
Framing error processing
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
No
PER = 1
Yes
Parity error processing
Clear ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (cont)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 460 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI monitors the transmission line, and if a 0 stop bit is detected, performs internal
synchronization and starts reception.
[2] The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order.
[3] The parity bit and stop bit are received.
After receiving these bits, the SCI carries out the following checks.
[a] Parity check:
The SCI checks whether the number of 1 bits in the receive data agrees with the parity
(even or odd) set in the O/E bit in SMR.
[b] Stop bit check:
The SCI checks whether the stop bit is 1.
If there are two stop bits, only the first is checked.
[c] Status check:
The SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0, indicating that the receive data can be
transferred from RSR to RDR.
If all the above checks are passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in
RDR.
If a receive error* is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 13.11.
Note: * Subsequent receive operations cannot be performed when a receive error has occurred.
Also note that the RDRF flag is not set to 1 in reception, and so the error flags must be
cleared to 0.
[4] If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive data full interrupt
(RXI) request is generated.
Also, if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the ORER, PER, or FER flag changes to 1, a
receive error interrupt (ERI) request is generated.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 461 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.11 Receive Errors and Conditions for Occurrence
Receive Error
Abbreviation
Occurrence Condition
Data Transfer
Overrun error
ORER
When the next data reception
is completed while the RDRF
flag in SSR is set to 1
Receive data is not
transferred from RSR to
RDR.
Framing error
FER
When the stop bit is 0
Receive data is transferred
from RSR to RDR.
Parity error
PER
When the received data differs
from the parity (even or odd)
set in SMR
Receive data is transferred
from RSR to RDR.
Figure 13.8 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode.
1
Start
bit
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
0
1
Idle state
(mark state)
RDRF
FER
RXI interrupt
request
generated
RDR data read and RDRF
flag cleared to 0 in RXI
interrupt service routine
ERI interrupt request
generated by framing
error
1 frame
Figure 13.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 462 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.3
Multiprocessor Communication Function
The multiprocessor communication function performs serial communication using the
multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data, in asynchronous
mode. Use of this function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors
sharing transmission lines.
When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a
unique ID code.
The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle
which specifies the receiving station , and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used
to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle.
The transmitting station first sends the ID of the receiving station with which it wants to perform
serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data
with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.
The receiving station skips the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent.
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its
own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does
not match continue to skip the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. In this
way, data communication is carried out among a number of processors.
Figure 13.9 shows an example of inter-processor communication using the multiprocessor format.
Data Transfer Format
There are four data transfer formats.
When the multiprocessor format is specified, the parity bit specification is invalid.
For details, see table 13.10.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 463 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Clock
See the section on asynchronous mode.
Transmitting
station
Serial transmission line
Receiving
station A
Receiving
station B
Receiving
station C
Receiving
station D
(ID= 01)
(ID= 02)
(ID= 03)
(ID= 04)
Serial
data
H'AA
H'01
(MPB= 1)
ID transmission cycle =
receiving station
specification
(MPB= 0)
Data transmission cycle =
Data transmission to
receiving station specified by ID
Legend:
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Figure 13.9 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)
Data Transfer Operations
Multiprocessor serial data transmission: Figure 13.10 shows a sample flowchart for
multiprocessor serial data transmission.
The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data transmission.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 464 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[1] [1] SCI initialization:
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
set MPBT bit in SSR
Clear TDRE flag to 0
No
All data transmitted?
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
No
Break output?
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data
output pin.
After the TE bit is set to 1, a
frame of 1s is output, and
transmission is enabled.
[2] SCI status check and transmit
data write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR. Set the
MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1.
Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0.
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission,
be sure to read 1 from the TDRE
flag to confirm that writing is
[3]
possible, then write data to TDR,
and then clear the TDRE flag to
0. Checking and clearing of the
TDRE flag is automatic when the
DTC is activated by a transmit
data empty interrupt (TXI)
request, and data is written to
TDR.
[4] Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial
transmission, set the port DDR to
[4]
1, clear DR to 0, then clear the
TE bit in SCR to 0.
Yes
Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.10 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 465 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to
TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
[2] After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission.
If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order.
[a] Start bit:
One 0-bit is output.
[b] Transmit data:
8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order.
[c] Multiprocessor bit
One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output.
[d] Stop bit(s):
One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output.
[e] Mark state:
1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent.
[3] The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and
then serial transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the
mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this
time, a transmission end interrupt (TEI) request is generated.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 466 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 13.11 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission using the multiprocessor
format.
1
Start
bit
0
Multiprocessor Stop
bit
bit
Data
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
Start
bit
0
Multiproces- Stop
1
sor bit bit
Data
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
Idle state
(mark state)
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
request generated
Data written to TDR
and TDRE flag cleared to
0 in TXI interrupt service
routine
TXI interrupt
request generated
TEI interrupt
request generated
1 frame
Figure 13.11 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Multiprocessor serial data reception: Figure 13.12 shows a sample flowchart for
multiprocessor serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data reception.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 467 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1]
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data
input pin.
[2]
[2] ID reception cycle:
Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1.
Start reception
Read MPIE bit in SCR
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
FER ∨ ORER = 1
[3] SCI status check, ID reception
and comparison:
Read SSR and check that the
RDRF flag is set to 1, then read
the receive data in RDR and
compare it with this station’s ID.
If the data is not this station’s ID,
set the MPIE bit to 1 again, and
clear the RDRF flag to 0.
If the data is this station’s ID,
clear the RDRF flag to 0.
Yes
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[3]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
[4] SCI status check and data
reception:
Read SSR and check that the
RDRF flag is set to 1, then read
the data in RDR.
Read receive data in RDR
No
This station’s ID?
Yes
[5] Receive error processing and
break detection:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER and FER flags in SSR to
identify the error. After
performing the appropriate error
processing, ensure that the
ORER and FER flags are all
cleared to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if
either of these flags is set to 1.
In the case of a framing error, a
break can be detected by reading
the RxD pin value.
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
FER ∨ ORER = 1
Yes
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[4]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
No
All data received?
[5]
Error processing
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
(Continued on
next page)
<End>
Figure 13.12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 468 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[5]
Error processing
No
ORER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
Framing error processing
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
Clear ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (cont)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 469 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 13.13 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception.
1
Start
bit
0
Data (ID1)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
1
Stop
bit
Start
bit
1
0
Data (Data1)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
0
Stop
bit
1
1 Idle state
(mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
RXI interrupt
request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
generated
MPIE = 0
RDR data read
and RDRF flag
cleared to 0 in
RXI interrupt
service routine
If not this station’s ID, RXI interrupt request is
MPIE bit is set to 1
not generated, and RDR
again
retains its state
(a) Data does not match station’s ID
1
Start
bit
0
Data (ID2)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
1
Stop
bit
Start
bit
1
0
Data (Data2)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
0
Stop
bit
1
1 Idle state
(mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID2
ID1
MPIE = 0
RXI interrupt
request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
generated
RDR data read and
RDRF flag cleared
to 0 in RXI interrupt
service routine
Matches this station’s ID,
so reception continues, and
data is received in RXI
interrupt service routine
(b) Data matches station’s ID
Figure 13.13 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 470 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Data2
MPIE bit set to 1
again
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.3.4
Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode
In clocked synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock
pulses, making it suitable for high-speed serial communication.
Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex
communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a
double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception,
enabling continuous data transfer.
Figure 13.14 shows the general format for clocked synchronous serial communication.
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
*
*
Serial
clock
LSB
Serial
data
Bit 0
MSB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Don’t care
Don’t care
Note: * High except in continuous transfer
Figure 13.14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication
In clocked synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one
falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data confirmation is guaranteed at the rising edge of
the serial clock.
In clocked serial communication, one character consists of data output starting with the LSB and
ending with the MSB. After the MSB is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state.
In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the
serial clock.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 471 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Data Transfer Format
A fixed 8-bit data format is used.
No parity or multiprocessor bits are added.
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external serial clock
input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1
and CKE0 bits in SCR. For details of SCI clock source selection, see table 13.9.
When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin.
Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is
performed the clock is fixed high. When only receive operations are performed, however, the
serial clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared to 0. If you want to
perform receive operations in units of one character, you should select an external clock as the
clock source.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 472 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Data Transfer Operations
SCI initialization (clocked synchronous mode): Before transmitting and receiving data, you
should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below.
When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to
0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the
TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the
contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR.
Figure 13.15 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart.
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure
to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE,
TE and RE, to 0.
Start initialization
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR
and SCMR.
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE, RE bits 0)
[1]
Set data transfer format in
SMR and SCMR
[2]
Set value in BRR
[3]
Wait
No
[3] Write a value corresponding to the bit
rate to BRR. Not necessary if an
external clock is used.
[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set
the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.
Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE
bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables the
TxD and RxD pins to be used.
1-bit interval elapsed?
Yes
Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and
set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits
[4]
<Transfer start>
Note: In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared
to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously.
Figure 13.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 473 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Serial data transmission (clocked synchronous mode): Figure 13.16 shows a sample flowchart
for serial transmission.
The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission.
[1]
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted?
[3]
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data output
pin.
[2] SCI status check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, then write transmit data
to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission, be
sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible, then
write data to TDR, and then clear the
TDRE flag to 0.
Checking and clearing of the TDRE
flag is automatic when the DTC is
activated by a transmit data empty
interrupt (TXI) request and data is
written to TDR.
No
TEND = 1
Yes
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.16 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 474 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to
TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
[2] After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt
(TXI) is generated.
When clock output mode has been set, the SCI outputs 8 serial clock pulses. When use of an
external clock has been specified, data is output synchronized with the input clock.
The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin starting with the LSB (bit 0) and ending with
the MSB (bit 7).
[3] The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission
of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the MSB (bit 7) is sent, and the
TxD pin maintains its state.
If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated.
[4] After completion of serial transmission, the SCK pin is fixed high.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 475 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 13.17 shows an example of SCI operation in transmission.
Transfer direction
Serial clock
Serial data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
request generated
Data written to TDR
TXI interrupt
and TDRE flag
request generated
cleared to 0 in TXI
interrupt service routine
TEI interrupt
request generated
1 frame
Figure 13.17 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission
Serial data reception (clocked synchronous mode): Figure 13.18 shows a sample flowchart for
serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for serial data reception.
When changing the operating mode from asynchronous to clocked synchronous, be sure to check
that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0.
The RDRF flag will not be set if the FER or PER flag is set to 1, and neither transmit nor receive
operations will be possible.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 476 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[1]
Initialization
Start reception
[2]
Read ORER flag in SSR
Yes
[3]
ORER = 1
No
Error processing
(Continued below)
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[4]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
[5]
[1]
SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data
input pin.
[2] [3] Receive error processing:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER flag in SSR , and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the ORER flag
to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed
if the ORER flag is set to 1.
[4] SCI status check and receive
data read:
Read SSR and check that the
RDRF flag is set to 1, then read
the receive data in RDR and
clear the RDRF flag to 0.
Transition of the RDRF flag from
0 to 1 can also be identified by
an RXI interrupt.
[5] Serial reception continuation
procedure:
To continue serial reception,
before the MSB (bit 7) of the
current frame is received, finish
reading the RDRF flag, reading
RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag
to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared
automatically when the DTC is
activated by a receive data full
interrupt (RXI) request and the
RDR value is read.
<End>
[3]
Error processing
Overrun error processing
Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.18 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 477 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below.
[1] The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with serial clock input or output.
[2] The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order.
After reception, the SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0 and the receive data can be
transferred from RSR to RDR.
If this check is passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR. If a
receive error is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 13.11.
Neither transmit nor receive operations can be performed subsequently when a receive error
has been found in the error check.
[3] If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive data full interrupt
(RXI) request is generated.
Also, if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the ORER flag changes to 1, a receive error
interrupt (ERI) request is generated.
Figure 13.19 shows an example of SCI operation in reception.
Serial
clock
Serial
data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
RDRF
ORER
RXI interrupt request
generated
RDR data read and
RDRF flag cleared to 0
in RXI interrupt service
routine
RXI interrupt request
generated
ERI interrupt request
generated by overrun
error
1 frame
Figure 13.19 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
Simultaneous serial data transmission and reception (clocked synchronous mode): Figure
13.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations.
The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive
operations.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 478 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1] SCI initialization:
[1]
The TxD pin is designated as the
transmit data output pin, and the
RxD pin is designated as the
receive data input pin, enabling
simultaneous transmit and receive
operations.
Start transmission/reception
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
[2] SCI status check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR and clear the
TDRE flag to 0.
Transition of the TDRE flag from 0
to 1 can also be identified by a TXI
interrupt.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
[3] Receive error processing:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER flag in SSR , and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the ORER flag to
0. Transmission/reception cannot be
resumed if the ORER flag is set to
1.
Read ORER flag in SSR
ORER = 1
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
Yes
[3]
Error processing
[4] SCI status check and receive data
read:
Read SSR and check that the
RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the
receive data in RDR and clear the
RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the
RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be
identified by an RXI interrupt.
[4]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
[5] Serial transmission/reception
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
[5]
Yes
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
<End>
Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation to simultaneous
transmit and receive operations, first clear the TE bit and RE bit to
0, then set both these bits to 1 simultaneously.
continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission/
reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of
the current frame is received, finish
reading the RDRF flag, reading
RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to
0. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of
the current frame is transmitted,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible.
Then write data to TDR and clear
the TDRE flag to 0.
Checking and clearing of the TDRE
flag is automatic when the DTC is
activated by a transmit data empty
interrupt (TXI) request and data is
written to TDR. Also, the RDRF flag
is cleared automatically when the
DTC is activated by a receive data
full interrupt (RXI) request and the
RDR value is read.
Figure 13.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 479 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.4
SCI Interrupts
The SCI has four interrupt sources: the transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request, receive-error interrupt
(ERI) request, receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request, and transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI)
request. Table 13.12 shows the interrupt sources and their relative priorities. Individual interrupt
sources can be enabled or disabled with the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in the SCR. Each kind of
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller independently.
When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag
in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt can activate the DTC to
perform data transfer. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is
performed by the DTC. The DTC cannot be activated by a TEI interrupt request.
When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER,
PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt can
activate the DTC to perform data transfer. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data
transfer is performed by the DTC. The DTC cannot be activated by an ERI interrupt request.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 480 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 13.12 SCI Interrupt Sources
Channel
Interrupt
Source
0
ERI
1
2
Note:
*
DTC
Activation
Priority*
Interrupt due to receive error (ORER, FER,
or PER)
Not possible
High
RXI
Interrupt due to receive data full state (RDRF)
Possible
TXI
Interrupt due to transmit data empty state
(TDRE)
Possible
TEI
Interrupt due to transmission end (TEND)
Not possible
ERI
Interrupt due to receive error (ORER, FER,
or PER)
Not possible
RXI
Interrupt due to receive data full state (RDRF)
Possible
TXI
Interrupt due to transmit data empty state
(TDRE)
Possible
Description
TEI
Interrupt due to transmission end (TEND)
Not possible
ERI
Interrupt due to receive error (ORER, FER,
or PER)
Not possible
RXI
Interrupt due to receive data full state (RDRF)
Possible
TXI
Interrupt due to transmit data empty state
(TDRE)
Possible
TEI
Interrupt due to transmission end (TEND)
Not possible
Low
This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. Relative priorities among
channels can be changed by means of the interrupt controller.
A TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. The
TEND flag is cleared at the same time as the TDRE flag. Consequently, if a TEI interrupt and a
TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt may have priority for acceptance,
with the result that the TDRE and TEND flags are cleared. Note that the TEI interrupt will not be
accepted in this case.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 481 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
13.5
Usage Notes
The following points should be noted when using the SCI.
Relation between Writes to TDR and the TDRE Flag
The TDRE flag in SSR is a status flag that indicates that transmit data has been transferred from
TDR to TSR. When the SCI transfers data from TDR to TSR, the TDRE flag is set to 1.
Data can be written to TDR regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. However, if new data is
written to TDR when the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in TDR will be lost since it has
not yet been transferred to TSR. It is therefore essential to check that the TDRE flag is set to 1
before writing transmit data to TDR.
Operation when Multiple Receive Errors Occur Simultaneously
If a number of receive errors occur at the same time, the state of the status flags in SSR is as
shown in table 13.13. If there is an overrun error, data is not transferred from RSR to RDR, and
the receive data is lost.
Table 13.13 State of SSR Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data
SSR Status Flags
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
Receive Data Transfer
RSR to RDR
Receive Error Status
1
1
0
0
X
Overrun error
0
0
1
0
Framing error
0
0
0
1
Parity error
1
1
1
0
X
X
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes:
Overrun error + framing error
Overrun error + parity error
Framing error + parity error
X
: Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR.
X: Receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 482 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Overrun error + framing error +
parity error
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Break Detection and Processing (Asynchronous Mode Only): When framing error (FER)
detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value directly. In a break,
the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is set, and the parity error flag
(PER) may also be set.
Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the FER
flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
Sending a Break (Asynchronous Mode Only): The TxD pin has a dual function as an I/O port
whose direction (input or output) is determined by DR and DDR. This can be used to send a break.
Between serial transmission initialization and setting of the TE bit to 1, the mark state is replaced
by the value of DR (the pin does not function as the TxD pin until the TE bit is set to 1).
Consequently, DDR and DR for the port corresponding to the TxD pin are first set to 1.
To send a break during serial transmission, first clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0.
When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission
state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the TxD pin.
Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only):
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if
the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting
transmission.
Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0.
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode:
In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer
rate.
In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs
internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the
basic clock. This is illustrated in figure 13.21.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 483 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
16 clocks
8 clocks
0
7
15 0
7
15 0
Internal basic
clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Start bit
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 13.21 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below.
1
M = | (0.5 –
Where M:
N:
D:
L:
F:
2N
) – (L – 0.5) F –
| D – 0.5 |
N
(1 + F) | × 100%
... Formula (1)
Reception margin (%)
Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16)
Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0)
Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
Absolute value of clock rate deviation
Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in formula (1), a reception margin of 46.875% is given by
formula (2) below.
When D = 0.5 and F = 0,
M = (0.5 –
1
2 × 16
) × 100%
= 46.875%
... Formula (2)
However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in
system design.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 484 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Restrictions on Use of DTC
• When an external clock source is used as the serial clock, the transmit clock should not be
input until at least 5 φ clock cycles after TDR is updated by the DTC. Misoperation may occur
if the transmit clock is input within 4 φ clocks after TDR is updated. (Figure 13.22)
• When RDR is read by the DTC, be sure to set the activation source to the relevant SCI
reception end interrupt (RXI).
SCK
t
TDRE
LSB
Serial data
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Note: When operating on an external clock, set t >4 clocks.
Figure 13.22 Example of Clocked Synchronous Transmission by DTC
Operation in Case of Mode Transition
• Transmission
Operation should be stopped (by clearing TE, TIE, and TEIE to 0) before making a module
stop mode, software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition.
TSR, TDR, and SSR are reset. The output pin states in module stop mode, software standby
mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode depend on the port settings, and
becomes high-level output after the relevant mode is cleared. If a transition is made during
transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined. When transmitting without
changing the transmit mode after the relevant mode is cleared, transmission can be started by
setting TE to 1 again, and performing the following sequence: SSR read -> TDR write ->
TDRE clearance. To transmit with a different transmit mode after clearing the relevant mode,
the procedure must be started again from initialization. Figure 13.23 shows a sample flowchart
for mode transition during transmission. Port pin states are shown in figures 13.24 and 13.25.
Operation should also be stopped (by clearing TE, TIE, and TEIE to 0) before making a
transition from transmission by DTC transfer to module stop mode, software standby mode,
watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition. To perform transmission with the
DTC after the relevant mode is cleared, setting TE and TIE to 1 will set the TXI flag and start
DTC transmission.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 485 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Reception
Receive operation should be stopped (by clearing RE to 0) before making a module stop mode,
software standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition. RSR,
RDR, and SSR are reset. If a transition is made without stopping operation, the data being
received will be invalid.
To continue receiving without changing the reception mode after the relevant mode is cleared,
set RE to 1 before starting reception. To receive with a different receive mode, the procedure
must be started again from initialization.
Figure 13.26 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception.
<Transmission>
No
All data
transmitted?
[1]
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
TE = 0
[1] Data being transmitted is interrupted.
After exiting software standby mode,
etc., normal CPU transmission is
possible by setting TE to 1, reading
SSR, writing TDR, and clearing
TDRE to 0, but note that if the DTC
has been activated, the remaining
data in DTCRAM will be transmitted
when TE and TIE are set to 1.
[2] If TIE and TEIE are set to 1, clear
them to 0 in the same way.
[2]
Transition to software
standby mode, etc.
[3]
[3] Includes module stop mode, watch
mode, subactive mode, and subsleep
mode.
Exit from software
standby mode, etc.
Change
operating mode?
No
Yes
Initialization
TE = 1
<Start of transmission>
Figure 13.23 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 486 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
End of
transmission
Start of transmission
Transition
to software
standby
Exit from
software
standby
TE bit
Port input/output
SCK output pin
TxD output pin
Port input/output
High output
Port
Start
Stop
Port input/output
Port
SCI TxD output
High output
SCI TxD
output
Figure 13.24 Asynchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock
Start of transmission
End of
transmission
Transition
to software
standby
Exit from
software
standby
TE bit
Port input/output
SCK output pin
TxD output pin
Port input/output
Last TxD bit held
Marking output
Port
SCI TxD output
Port input/output
Port
High output*
SCI TxD
output
Note: * Initialized by software standby.
Figure 13.25 Synchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 487 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
<Reception>
Read RDRF flag in SSR
RDRF = 1
No
[1]
[1] Receive data being received
becomes invalid.
[2]
[2] Includes module stop mode,
watch mode, subactive mode,
and subsleep mode.
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
RE = 0
Transition to software
standby mode, etc.
Exit from software
standby mode, etc.
Change
operating mode?
No
Yes
Initialization
RE = 1
<Start of reception>
Figure 13.26 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 488 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function:
• Problem in Operation: When switching the SCK pin function to the output port function (highlevel output) by making the following settings while DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0,
CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1 (synchronous mode), low-level output occurs for one half-cycle.
1. End of serial data transmission
2. TE bit = 0
3. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output
4. Occurrence of low-level output (see figure 13.27)
Half-cycle low-level output
SCK/port
1. End of transmission
Data
TE
C/A
Bit 6
4. Low-level output
Bit 7
2. TE = 0
3. C/A = 0
CKE1
CKE0
Figure 13.27 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 489 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Sample Procedure for Avoiding Low-Level Output: As this sample procedure temporarily
places the SCK pin in the input state, the SCK/port pin should be pulled up beforehand with an
external circuit.
With DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1, make the following
settings in the order shown.
1. End of serial data transmission
2. TE bit = 0
3. CKE1 bit = 1
4. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output
5. CKE1 bit = 0
High-level output
SCK/port
1. End of transmission
Data
TE
Bit 6
Bit 7
2. TE = 0
4. C/A = 0
C/A
3. CKE1 = 1
CKE1
5. CKE1 = 0
CKE0
Figure 13.28 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function
(Example of Preventing Low-Level Output)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 490 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.1
Overview
The SCI supports an IC card (Smart Card) interface conforming to ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification
Card) as a serial communication interface extension function.
Switching between the normal serial communication interface and the Smart Card interface is
carried out by means of a register setting.
14.1.1
Features
Features of the Smart Card interface supported by the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group are
as follows.
• Asynchronous mode
 Data length: 8 bits
 Parity bit generation and checking
 Transmission of error signal (parity error) in receive mode
 Error signal detection and automatic data retransmission in transmit mode
 Direct convention and inverse convention both supported
• On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
• Three interrupt sources
 Three interrupt sources (transmit data empty, receive data full, and transmit/receive error)
that can issue requests independently
 The transmit data empty interrupt and receive data full interrupt can activate the data
transfer controller (DTC) to execute data transfer
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 491 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.1.2
Block Diagram
Bus interface
Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the Smart Card interface.
Module data bus
RDR
RxD
TxD
RSR
TDR
SCMR
SSR
SCR
SMR
TSR
BRR
φ
Baud rate
generator
Transmission/
reception control
Parity generation
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
Clock
Parity check
SCK
Legend:
SCMR : Smart Card mode register
RSR : Receive shift register
RDR : Receive data register
TSR : Transmit shift register
TDR : Transmit data register
SMR : Serial mode register
SCR : Serial control register
SSR : Serial status register
BRR : Bit rate register
TXI
RXI
ERI
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of Smart Card Interface
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 492 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Internal
data bus
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 14.1 shows the Smart Card interface pin configuration.
Table 14.1 Smart Card Interface Pins
Channel
Pin Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
0
Serial clock pin 0
SCK0
I/O
SCI0 clock input/output
Receive data pin 0
RxD0
Input
SCI0 receive data input
Transmit data pin 0
TxD0
Output
SCI0 transmit data output
Serial clock pin 1
SCK1
I/O
SCI1 clock input/output
Receive data pin 1
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
Transmit data pin 1
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
1
2
Serial clock pin 2
SCK2
I/O
SCI2 clock input/output
Receive data pin 2
RxD2
Input
SCI2 receive data input
Transmit data pin 2
TxD2
Output
SCI2 transmit data output
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 493 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 14.2 shows the registers used by the Smart Card interface. Details of SMR, BRR, SCR,
TDR, RDR, and MSTPCR are the same as for the normal SCI function: see the register
descriptions in section 13, Serial Communication Interface (SCI).
Table 14.2 Smart Card Interface Registers
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
0
Serial mode register 0
SMR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF78
Bit rate register 0
BRR0
R/W
H'FF
H'FF79
Serial control register 0
SCR0
R/W
H'00
H'FF7A
1
2
Transmit data register 0
TDR0
R/W
Serial status register 0
SSR0
R/(W)*
Receive data register 0
RDR0
Smart card mode register 0
H'FF
H'FF7B
H'84
H'FF7C
R
H'00
H'FF7D
SCMR0
R/W
H'F2
H'FF7E
Serial mode register 1
SMR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF80
Bit rate register 1
BRR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FF81
2
Serial control register 1
SCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF82
Transmit data register 1
TDR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FF83
Serial status register 1
SSR1
R/(W)*
H'84
H'FF84
Receive data register 1
RDR1
R
H'00
H'FF85
Smart card mode register 1
SCMR1
R/W
H'F2
H'FF86
2
Serial mode register 2
SMR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF88
Bit rate register 2
BRR2
R/W
H'FF
H'FF89
Serial control register 2
SCR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF8A
Transmit data register 2
TDR2
R/W
H'FF
H'FF8B
SSR2
2
R/(W)*
H'84
H'FF8C
Serial status register 2
All
1
Receive data register 2
RDR2
R
H'00
H'FF8D
Smart card mode register 2
SCMR2
R/W
H'F2
H'FF8E
Module stop control
register B
MSTPCRB
R/W
H'FF
H'FDE9
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 494 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.2
Register Descriptions
Registers added with the Smart Card interface and bits for which the function changes are
described here.
14.2.1
Bit
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
SDIR
SINV
—
SMIF
Initial value :
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
:
SCMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the Smart Card interface function.
SCMR is initialized to H'F2 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3—Smart Card Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion
format.
Bit 3
SDIR
Description
0
TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first
(Initial value)
Receive data is stored in RDR LSB-first
1
TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first
Receive data is stored in RDR MSB-first
Bit 2—Smart Card Data Invert (SINV): Specifies inversion of the data logic level. This
function is used together with the SDIR bit for communication with an inverse convention card.
The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. For parity-related setting procedures,
see section 14.3.4, Register Settings.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 495 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Bit 2
SINV
Description
0
TDR contents are transmitted as they are
(Initial value)
Receive data is stored as it is in RDR
1
TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted
Receive data is stored in inverted form in RDR
Bit 1—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bit 0—Smart Card Interface Mode Select (SMIF): Enables or disables the Smart Card interface
function.
Bit 0
SMIF
Description
0
Smart Card interface function is disabled
1
Smart Card interface function is enabled
14.2.2
Serial Status Register (SSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
(Initial value)
:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
ERS
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Bit 4 of SSR has a different function in Smart Card interface mode. Coupled with this, the setting
conditions for bit 2, TEND, are also different.
Bits 7 to 5—Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI. For details, see section 13.2.7, Serial
Status Register (SSR).
Bit 4—Error Signal Status (ERS): In Smart Card interface mode, bit 4 indicates the status of the
error signal sent back from the receiving end in transmission. Framing errors are not detected in
Smart Card interface mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 496 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Bit 4
ERS
Description
0
Normal reception, with no error signal
[Clearing conditions]
1
(Initial value)
•
Upon reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode
•
When 0 is written to ERS after reading ERS = 1
Error signal sent from receiver indicating detection of parity error
[Setting condition]
When the low level of the error signal is sampled
Note: Clearing the TE bit in SCR to 0 does not affect the ERS flag, which retains its previous
state.
Bits 3 to 0—Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI. For details, see section 13.2.7, Serial
Status Register (SSR).
However, the setting conditions for the TEND bit, are as shown below.
Bit 2
TEND
Description
0
Transmission is in progress
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and write data to TDR
Transmission has ended
(Initial value)
[Setting conditions]
•
Upon reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0 and the ERS bit is also 0
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 0 and BLK = 0
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 1.5 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 0 and BLK = 1
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 1.0 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 1 and BLK = 0
•
When TDRE = 1 and ERS = 0 (normal transmission) 1.0 etu after transmission of a
1-byte serial character when GM = 1 and BLK = 1
Note: etu: Elementary Time Unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 497 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.2.3
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GM
BLK
PE
O/E
BCP1
BCP0
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: When the smart card interface is used, be sure to make the 1 setting shown for bit 5.
The function of bits 7, 6, 3, and 2 of SMR changes in Smart Card interface mode.
Bit 7—GSM Mode (GM): Sets the smart card interface function to GSM mode.
This bit is cleared to 0 when the normal smart card interface is used. In GSM mode, this bit is set
to 1, the timing of setting of the TEND flag that indicates transmission completion is advanced
and clock output control mode addition is performed. The contents of the clock output control
mode addition are specified by bits 1 and 0 of the serial control register (SCR).
Bit 7
GM
Description
0
Normal smart card interface mode operation
1
(Initial value)
•
TEND flag generation 12.5 etu (11.5 etu in block transfer mode) after beginning of
start bit
•
Clock output ON/OFF control only
GSM mode smart card interface mode operation
•
TEND flag generation 11.0 etu after beginning of start bit
•
High/low fixing control possible in addition to clock output ON/OFF control (set by
SCR)
Note: etu: Elementary time unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 498 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Bit 6—Block Transfer Mode (BLK): Selects block transfer mode.
Bit 6
BLK
Description
0
Normal Smart Card interface mode operation
1
•
Error signal transmission/detection and automatic data retransmission performed
•
TXI interrupt generated by TEND flag
•
TEND flag set 12.5 etu after start of transmission (11.0 etu in GSM mode)
Block transfer mode operation
•
Error signal transmission/detection and automatic data retransmission not
performed
•
TXI interrupt generated by TDRE flag
•
TEND flag set 11.5 etu after start of transmission (11.0 etu in GSM mode)
Note: etu: Elementary Time Unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
Bits 3 and 2—Basic Clock Pulse 1 and 2 (BCP1, BCP0): These bits specify the number of basic
clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval on the Smart Card interface.
Bit 3
Bit 2
BCP1
BCP0
Description
0
1
32 clock periods
0
64 clock periods
1
372 clock periods
0
256 clock periods
1
(Initial value)
Bits 5, 4, 1, and 0: Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI. For details, see section 13.2.5,
Serial Mode Register (SMR).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 499 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.2.4
Bit
Serial Control Register (SCR)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value :
R/W
:
In smart card interface mode, the function of bits 1 and 0 of SCR changes when bit 7 of the serial
mode register (SMR) is set to 1.
Bits 7 to 2—Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI.
For details, see section 13.2.6, Serial Control Register (SCR).
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0): These bits are used to select the SCI clock
source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin.
In smart card interface mode, in addition to the normal switching between clock output enabling
and disabling, the clock output can be specified as to be fixed high or low.
SCMR
SMR
SMIF
C/A
A, GM
SCR Setting
CKE1
SCK Pin Function
CKE0
0
See the SCI
1
0
0
0
Operates as port I/O pin
1
0
0
1
Outputs clock as SCK output pin
1
1
0
0
Operates as SCK output pin, with output fixed
low
1
1
0
1
Outputs clock as SCK output pin
1
1
1
0
Operates as SCK output pin, with output fixed
high
1
1
1
1
Outputs clock as SCK output pin
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 500 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3
Operation
14.3.1
Overview
The main functions of the Smart Card interface are as follows.
• One frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit.
• In transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (Elementary Time Unit: the time for transfer of 1
bit) is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame.
• If a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for one etu
period, 10.5 etu after the start bit.
• If the error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is transmitted automatically
after the elapse of 2 etu or longer. (except in block transfer mode)
• Only asynchronous communication is supported; there is no clocked synchronous
communication function.
14.3.2
Pin Connections
Figure 14.2 shows a schematic diagram of Smart Card interface related pin connections.
In communication with an IC card, since both transmission and reception are carried out on a
single data transmission line, the TxD pin and RxD pin should be connected with the LSI pin. The
data transmission line should be pulled up to the VCC power supply with a resistor.
When the clock generated on the Smart Card interface is used by an IC card, the SCK pin output is
input to the CLK pin of the IC card. No connection is needed if the IC card uses an internal clock.
LSI port output is used as the reset signal.
Other pins must normally be connected to the power supply or ground.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 501 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
VCC
TxD
I/O
RxD
SCK
Rx (port)
H8S/2626 Group or
H8S/2623 Group
Data line
Clock line
Reset line
CLK
RST
IC card
Connected equipment
Figure 14.2 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections
Note: If an IC card is not connected, and the TE and RE bits are both set to 1, closed
transmission/reception is possible, enabling self-diagnosis to be carried out.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 502 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3.3
Data Format
(1) Normal Transfer Mode
Figure 14.3 shows the normal Smart Card interface data format. In reception in this mode, a parity
check is carried out on each frame, and if an error is detected an error signal is sent back to the
transmitting end, and retransmission of the data is requested. If an error signal is sampled during
transmission, the same data is retransmitted.
When there is no parity error
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
D7
Dp
Transmitting station output
When a parity error occurs
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
DE
Transmitting station output
Legend:
Ds
D0 to D7
Dp
DE
Receiving station
output
: Start bit
: Data bits
: Parity bit
: Error signal
Figure 14.3 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 503 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
The operation sequence is as follows.
[1] When the data line is not in use it is in the high-impedance state, and is fixed high with a pullup resistor.
[2] The transmitting station starts transfer of one frame of data. The data frame starts with a start
bit (Ds, low-level), followed by 8 data bits (D0 to D7) and a parity bit (Dp).
[3] With the Smart Card interface, the data line then returns to the high-impedance state. The data
line is pulled high with a pull-up resistor.
[4] The receiving station carries out a parity check.
If there is no parity error and the data is received normally, the receiving station waits for
reception of the next data.
If a parity error occurs, however, the receiving station outputs an error signal (DE, low-level)
to request retransmission of the data. After outputting the error signal for the prescribed length
of time, the receiving station places the signal line in the high-impedance state again. The
signal line is pulled high again by a pull-up resistor.
[5] If the transmitting station does not receive an error signal, it proceeds to transmit the next data
frame.
If it does receive an error signal, however, it returns to step [2] and retransmits the erroneous
data.
(2) Block Transfer Mode
The operation sequence in block transfer mode is as follows.
[1] When the data line in not in use it is in the high-impedance state, and is fixed high with a pullup resistor.
[2] The transmitting station starts transfer of one frame of data. The data frame starts with a start
bit (Ds, low-level), followed by 8 data bits (D0 to D7) and a parity bit (Dp).
[3] With the Smart Card interface, the data line then returns to the high-impedance state. The data
line is pulled high with a pull-up resistor.
[4] After reception, a parity error check is carried out, but an error signal is not output even if an
error has occurred. When an error occurs reception cannot be continued, so the error flag
should be cleared to 0 before the parity bit of the next frame is received.
[5] The transmitting station proceeds to transmit the next data frame.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 504 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3.4
Register Settings
Table 14.3 shows a bit map of the registers used by the smart card interface.
Bits indicated as 0 or 1 must be set to the value shown. The setting of other bits is described
below.
Table 14.3 Smart Card Interface Register Settings
Bit
Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SMR
GM
BLK
1
O/E
BCP1
BCP0
CKS1
CKS0
BRR
BRR7
BRR6
BRR5
BRR4
BRR3
BRR2
BRR0
SCR
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
0
0
BRR1
CKE1*
TDR
TDR7
TDR6
TDR5
TDR4
TDR3
TDR2
TDR1
TDR0
SSR
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
ERS
PER
TEND
0
0
RDR
RDR7
RDR6
RDR5
RDR4
RDR3
RDR2
RDR1
RDR0
SCMR
—
—
—
—
SDIR
SINV
—
SMIF
CKE0
Notes: — : Unused bit.
*: The CKE1 bit must be cleared to 0 when the GM bit in SMR is cleared to 0.
SMR Setting: The GM bit is cleared to 0 in normal smart card interface mode, and set to 1 in
GSM mode. The O/E bit is cleared to 0 if the IC card is of the direct convention type, and set to 1
if of the inverse convention type.
Bits CKS1 and CKS0 select the clock source of the on-chip baud rate generator. Bits BCP1 and
BCP0 select the number of basic clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval. For details, see section
14.3.5, Clock.
The BLK bit is cleared to 0 in normal smart card interface mode, and set to 1 in block transfer
mode.
BRR Setting: BRR is used to set the bit rate. See section 14.3.5, Clock, for the method of
calculating the value to be set.
SCR Setting: The function of the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits is the same as for the normal SCI.
For details, see section 13, Serial Communication Interface (SCI).
Bits CKE1 and CKE0 specify the clock output. When the GM bit in SMR is cleared to 0, set these
bits to B'00 if a clock is not to be output, or to B'01 if a clock is to be output. When the GM bit in
SMR is set to 1, clock output is performed. The clock output can also be fixed high or low.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 505 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR) Setting: The SDIR bit is cleared to 0 if the IC card is of the
direct convention type, and set to 1 if of the inverse convention type.
The SINV bit is cleared to 0 if the IC card is of the direct convention type, and set to 1 if of the
inverse convention type.
The SMIF bit is set to 1 in the case of the Smart Card interface.
Examples of register settings and the waveform of the start character are shown below for the two
types of IC card (direct convention and inverse convention).
• Direct convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0)
(Z)
A
Z
Z
A
Z
Z
Z
A
A
Z
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
(Z)
State
With the direct convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state Z and the logic 0 level to
state A, and transfer is performed in LSB-first order. The start character data above is H'3B.
The parity bit is 1 since even parity is stipulated for the Smart Card.
• Inverse convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1)
(Z)
A
Z
Z
A
A
A
A
A
A
Z
Ds
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Dp
(Z)
State
With the inverse convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state A and the logic 0 level
to state Z, and transfer is performed in MSB-first order. The start character data above is H'3F.
The parity bit is 0, corresponding to state Z, since even parity is stipulated for the Smart Card.
With the H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group, inversion specified by the SINV bit applies
only to the data bits, D7 to D0. For parity bit inversion, the O/E bit in SMR is set to odd parity
mode (the same applies to both transmission and reception).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 506 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3.5
Clock
Only an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can be used as the
transmit/receive clock for the smart card interface. The bit rate is set with BRR and the CKS1,
CKS0, BCP1 and BCP0 bits in SMR. The formula for calculating the bit rate is as shown below.
Table 14.5 shows some sample bit rates.
If clock output is selected by setting CKE0 to 1, a clock is output from the SCK pin. The clock
frequency is determined by the bit rate and the setting of bits BCP1 and BCP0.
B=
φ
S×2
2n+1
× 10
6
× (N + 1)
Where: N = Value set in BRR (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
B = Bit rate (bit/s)
φ = Operating frequency (MHz)
n = See table 14.4
S = Number of internal clocks in 1-bit period, set by BCP1 and BCP0
Table 14.4 Correspondence between n and CKS1, CKS0
n
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
1
2
1
1
0
3
1
Table 14.5 Examples of Bit Rate B (bit/s) for Various BRR Settings
(When n = 0 and S = 372)
φ (MHz)
N
10.00
10.714
13.00
14.285
16.00
18.00
20.00
0
13441
14400
17473
19200
21505
24194
26882
1
6720
7200
8737
9600
10753
12097
13441
2
4480
4800
5824
6400
7168
8065
8961
Note: Bit rates are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 507 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
The method of calculating the value to be set in the bit rate register (BRR) from the operating
frequency and bit rate, on the other hand, is shown below. N is an integer, 0 ≤ N ≤ 255, and the
smaller error is specified.
N=
φ
S×2
2n+1
× 10 – 1
6
×B
Table 14.6 Examples of BRR Settings for Bit Rate B (bit/s) (When n = 0 and S = 372)
φ (MHz)
bit/s
9600
7.1424
10.00
10.7136
13.00
14.2848
16.00
18.00
20.00
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
N
Error
0
0.00
1
30
1
25
1
8.99
1
0.00
1
12.01
2
15.99
2
6.60
Table 14.7 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode)
(when S = 372)
φ (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s)
N
n
7.1424
9600
0
0
10.00
13441
0
0
10.7136
14400
0
0
13.00
17473
0
0
14.2848
19200
0
0
16.00
21505
0
0
18.00
24194
0
0
20.00
26882
0
0
The bit rate error is given by the following formula:
Error (%) = (
φ
S×2
2n+1
× B × (N + 1)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 508 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
× 10 – 1) × 100
6
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.3.6
Data Transfer Operations
Initialization: Before transmitting and receiving data, initialize the SCI as described below.
Initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa.
[1] Clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0.
[2] Clear the error flags ERS, PER, and ORER in SSR to 0.
[3] Set the GM, BLK, O/E, BCP1, BCP0, CKS1, CKS0 bits in SMR. Set the PE bit to 1.
[4] Set the SMIF, SDIR, and SINV bits in SCMR.
When the SMIF bit is set to 1, the TxD and RxD pins are both switched from ports to SCI pins,
and are placed in the high-impedance state.
[5] Set the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR.
[6] Set the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. Clear the TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, and TEIE bits to 0.
If the CKE0 bit is set to 1, the clock is output from the SCK pin.
[7] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits in SCR. Do not set the TE
bit and RE bit at the same time, except for self-diagnosis.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 509 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Serial Data Transmission: As data transmission in smart card mode involves error signal
sampling and retransmission processing, the processing procedure is different from that for the
normal SCI. Figure 14.4 shows a flowchart for transmitting, and figure 14.5 shows the relation
between a transmit operation and the internal registers.
[1] Perform Smart Card interface mode initialization as described above in Initialization.
[2] Check that the ERS error flag in SSR is cleared to 0.
[3] Repeat steps [2] and [3] until it can be confirmed that the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1.
[4] Write the transmit data to TDR, clear the TDRE flag to 0, and perform the transmit operation.
The TEND flag is cleared to 0.
[5] When transmitting data continuously, go back to step [2].
[6] To end transmission, clear the TE bit to 0.
With the above processing, interrupt servicing or data transfer by the DTC is possible.
If transmission ends and the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TIE bit is set to 1 and interrupt
requests are enabled, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request will be generated. If an error
occurs in transmission and the ERS flag is set to 1 while the RIE bit is set to 1 and interrupt
requests are enabled, a transfer error interrupt (ERI) request will be generated.
The timing for setting the TEND flag depends on the value of the GM bit in SMR. The TEND
flag set timing is shown in figure 14.6.
If the DTC is activated by a TXI request, the number of bytes set in the DTC can be transmitted
automatically, including automatic retransmission.
For details, see Interrupt Operation (Except Block Transfer Mode) and Data Transfer Operation by
DTC below.
Note: For block transfer mode, see section 13.3.2, Operation in Asynchronous Mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 510 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Start
Initialization
Start transmission
ERS = 0?
No
Yes
Error processing
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
Write data to TDR,
and clear TDRE flag
in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted?
Yes
No
ERS = 0?
Yes
Error processing
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
Clear TE bit to 0
End
Figure 14.4 Example of Transmission Processing Flow
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 511 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
TDR
(1) Data write
Data 1
(2) Transfer from
TDR to TSR
Data 1
(3) Serial data output
Data 1
TSR
(shift register)
Data 1
; Data remains in TDR
Data 1
I/O signal line output
In case of normal transmission: TEND flag is set
In case of transmit error:
ERS flag is set
Steps (2) and (3) above are repeated until the TEND flag is set
Note: When the ERS flag is set, it should be cleared until transfer of the last bit (D7 in LSB-first
transmission, D0 in MSB-first transmission) of the next transfer data to be transmitted has
been completed.
Figure 14.5 Relation between Transmit Operation and Internal Registers
I/O data
Ds
D0
D1
D2
TXI
(TEND interrupt)
When GM = 0
When GM = 1
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
DE
Guard
time
12.5etu
11.0etu
Legend:
Ds
: Start bit
D0 to D7 : Data bits
Dp
: Parity bit
DE
: Error signal
etu: Elementary Time Unit (time for transfer of 1 bit)
Figure 14.6 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 512 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Serial Data Reception (Except Block Transfer Mode): Data reception in Smart Card mode uses
the same processing procedure as for the normal SCI. Figure 14.7 shows an example of the
transmission processing flow.
[1] Perform Smart Card interface mode initialization as described above in Initialization.
[2] Check that the ORER flag and PER flag in SSR are cleared to 0. If either is set, perform the
appropriate receive error processing, then clear both the ORER and the PER flag to 0.
[3] Repeat steps [2] and [3] until it can be confirmed that the RDRF flag is set to 1.
[4] Read the receive data from RDR.
[5] When receiving data continuously, clear the RDRF flag to 0 and go back to step [2].
[6] To end reception, clear the RE bit to 0.
Start
Initialization
Start reception
ORER = 0 and
PER = 0
No
Yes
Error processing
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read RDR and clear
RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit to 0
Figure 14.7 Example of Reception Processing Flow
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 513 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
With the above processing, interrupt servicing or data transfer by the DTC is possible.
If reception ends and the RDRF flag is set to 1 while the RIE bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests
are enabled, a receive data full interrupt (RXI) request will be generated. If an error occurs in
reception and either the ORER flag or the PER flag is set to 1, a transfer error interrupt (ERI)
request will be generated.
If the DTC is activated by an RXI request, the receive data in which the error occurred is skipped,
and only the number of bytes of receive data set in the DTC are transferred.
For details, see Interrupt Operation (Except Block Transfer Mode) and Data Transfer Operation by
DTC below.
If a parity error occurs during reception and the PER is set to 1, the received data is still
transferred to RDR, and therefore this data can be read.
Note: For block transfer mode, see section 13.3.2, Operation in Asynchronous Mode.
Mode Switching Operation: When switching from receive mode to transmit mode, first confirm
that the receive operation has been completed, then start from initialization, clearing RE bit to 0
and setting TE bit to 1. The RDRF flag or the PER and ORER flags can be used to check that the
receive operation has been completed.
When switching from transmit mode to receive mode, first confirm that the transmit operation has
been completed, then start from initialization, clearing TE bit to 0 and setting RE bit to 1. The
TEND flag can be used to check that the transmit operation has been completed.
Fixing Clock Output Level: When the GM bit in SMR is set to 1, the clock output level can be
fixed with bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR. At this time, the minimum clock pulse width can be
made the specified width.
Figure 14.8 shows the timing for fixing the clock output level. In this example, GSM is set to 1,
CKE1 is cleared to 0, and the CKE0 bit is controlled.
Specified pulse width
Specified pulse width
SCK
SCR write
(CKE0 = 0)
SCR write
(CKE0 = 1)
Figure 14.8 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 514 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Interrupt Operation (Except Block Transfer Mode): There are three interrupt sources in smart
card interface mode: transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) requests, transfer error interrupt (ERI)
requests, and receive data full interrupt (RXI) requests. The transmit end interrupt (TEI) request is
not used in this mode.
When the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated.
When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated.
When any of flags ORER, PER, and ERS in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated.
The relationship between the operating states and interrupt sources is shown in table 14.8.
Note: For block transfer mode, see section 13.4, SCI Interrupts.
Table 14.8 Smart Card Mode Operating States and Interrupt Sources
Operating State
Flag
Enable Bit
Interrupt Source
DTC Activation
Transmit
Mode
Normal
operation
TEND
TIE
TXI
Possible
Error
ERS
RIE
ERI
Not possible
Normal
operation
RDRF
RIE
RXI
Possible
Error
PER, ORER
RIE
ERI
Not possible
Receive
Mode
Data Transfer Operation by DTC: In smart card mode, as with the normal SCI, transfer can be
carried out using the DTC. In a transmit operation, the TDRE flag is also set to 1 at the same time
as the TEND flag in SSR, and a TXI interrupt is generated. If the TXI request is designated
beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be activated by the TXI request, and transfer
of the transmit data will be carried out. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically cleared to 0
when data transfer is performed by the DTC. In the event of an error, the SCI retransmits the same
data automatically. During this period, TEND remains cleared to 0 and the DTC is not activated.
Therefore, the SCI and DTC will automatically transmit the specified number of bytes, including
retransmission in the event of an error. However, the ERS flag is not cleared automatically when
an error occurs, and so the RIE bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an ERI request will be
generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will be cleared.
When performing transfer using the DTC, it is essential to set and enable the DTC before carrying
out SCI setting. For details of the DTC setting procedures, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller
(DTC).
In a receive operation, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to
1. If the RXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 515 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
activated by the RXI request, and transfer of the receive data will be carried out. The RDRF flag is
cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC. If an error occurs, an error
flag is set but the RDRF flag is not. Consequently, the DTC is not activated, but instead, an ERI
interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Therefore, the error flag should be cleared.
Note: For block transfer mode, see section 13.4, SCI Interrupts.
14.3.7
Operation in GSM Mode
Switching the Mode: When switching between smart card interface mode and software standby
mode, the following switching procedure should be followed in order to maintain the clock duty.
• When changing from smart card interface mode to software standby mode
[1] Set the data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) corresponding to the SCK pin to
the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode.
[2] Write 0 to the TE bit and RE bit in the serial control register (SCR) to halt transmit/receive
operation. At the same time, set the CKE1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in
software standby mode.
[3] Write 0 to the CKE0 bit in SCR to halt the clock.
[4] Wait for one serial clock period.
During this interval, clock output is fixed at the specified level, with the duty preserved.
[5] Make the transition to the software standby state.
• When returning to smart card interface mode from software standby mode
[6] Exit the software standby state.
[7] Write 1 to the CKE0 bit in SCR and output the clock. Signal generation is started with the
normal duty.
Software
standby
Normal operation
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5]
Normal operation
[6] [7]
Figure 14.9 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 516 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Powering On: To secure the clock duty from power-on, the following switching procedure should
be followed.
[1] The initial state is port input and high impedance. Use a pull-up resistor or pull-down resistor
to fix the potential.
[2] Fix the SCK pin to the specified output level with the CKE1 bit in SCR.
[3] Set SMR and SCMR, and switch to smart card mode operation.
[4] Set the CKE0 bit in SCR to 1 to start clock output.
14.3.8
Operation in Block Transfer Mode
Operation in block transfer mode is the same as in SCI asynchronous mode, except for the
following points. For details, see section 13.3.2, Operation in Asynchronous Mode.
(1) Data Format
The data format is 8 bits with parity. There is no stop bit, but there is a 2-bit (1-bit or more in
reception) error guard time.
Also, except during transmission (with start bit, data bits, and parity bit), the transmission pins go
to the high-impedance state, so the signal lines must be fixed high with a pull-up resistor.
(2) Transmit/Receive Clock
Only an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can be used as the
transmit/receive clock. The number of basic clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval can be set to
32, 64, 372, or 256 with bits BCP1 and BCP0. For details, see section 14.3.5, Clock.
(3) ERS (FER) Flag
As with the normal Smart Card interface, the ERS flag indicates the error signal status, but since
error signal transmission and reception is not performed, this flag is always cleared to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 517 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.4
Usage Notes
The following points should be noted when using the SCI as a Smart Card interface.
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Smart Card Interface Mode: In
Smart Card interface mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 32, 64, 372, or
256 times the transfer rate (as determined by bits BCP1 and BCP0).
In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs
internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 16th, 32nd,
186th, or 128th pulse of the basic clock. Figure 14.10 shows the receive data sampling timing
when using a clock of 372 times the transfer rate.
372 clocks
186 clocks
0
185
185
371 0
371 0
Internal
basic
clock
Receive
data (RxD)
Start bit
D0
Synchronization
sampling
timing
Data
sampling
timing
Figure 14.10 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode
(Using Clock of 372 Times the Transfer Rate)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 518 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
D1
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by the following formula.
Formula for reception margin in smart card interface mode
M = (0.5 –
Where M:
N:
D:
L:
F:
1
2N
) – (L – 0.5) F –
 D – 0.5
N
(1 + F) × 100%
Reception margin (%)
Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 32, 64, 372, and 256)
Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0)
Frame length (L = 10)
Absolute value of clock frequency deviation
Assuming values of F = 0, D = 0.5 and N = 372 in the above formula, the reception margin
formula is as follows.
When D = 0.5 and F = 0,
M = (0.5 – 1/2 × 372) × 100%
= 49.866%
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 519 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Retransfer Operations (Except Block Transfer Mode): Retransfer operations are performed by
the SCI in receive mode and transmit mode as described below.
• Retransfer operation when SCI is in receive mode
Figure 14.11 illustrates the retransfer operation when the SCI is in receive mode.
[1] If an error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is
automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an ERI interrupt request is
generated. The PER bit in SSR should be kept cleared to 0 until the next parity bit is sampled.
[2] The RDRF bit in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error has occurred.
[3] If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is not set to 1.
[4] If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the receive operation is judged to
have been completed normally, and the RDRF flag in SSR is automatically set to 1. If the RIE
bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated.
If DTC data transfer by an RXI source is enabled, the contents of RDR can be read
automatically. When the RDR data is read by the DTC, the RDRF flag is automatically cleared
to 0.
[5] When a normal frame is received, the pin retains the high-impedance state at the timing for
error signal transmission.
nth transfer frame
Transfer
frame n+1
Retransferred frame
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
(DE)
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
RDRF
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
PER
Figure 14.11 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 520 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
• Retransfer operation when SCI is in transmit mode
Figure 14.12 illustrates the retransfer operation when the SCI is in transmit mode.
[6] If an error signal is sent back from the receiving end after transmission of one frame is
completed, the ERS bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an ERI
interrupt request is generated. The ERS bit in SSR should be kept cleared to 0 until the next
parity bit is sampled.
[7] The TEND bit in SSR is not set for a frame for which an error signal indicating an abnormality
is received.
[8] If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, the ERS bit in SSR is not set.
[9] If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, transmission of one frame, including
a retransfer, is judged to have been completed, and the TEND bit in SSR is set to 1. If the TIE
bit in SCR is enabled at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated.
If data transfer by the DTC by means of the TXI source is enabled, the next data can be written
to TDR automatically. When data is written to TDR by the DTC, the TDRE bit is
automatically cleared to 0.
nth transfer frame
Transfer
frame n+1
Retransferred frame
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
(DE)
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
TDRE
Transfer to TSR
from TDR
Transfer to TSR from TDR
Transfer to TSR from TDR
TEND
[7]
[9]
FER/ERS
[6]
[8]
Figure 14.12 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 521 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 522 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.1
Overview
The HCAN is a module for controlling a controller area network (CAN) for realtime
communication in vehicular and industrial equipment systems, etc. The H8S/2626 Group and
H8S/2623 Group have a single-channel on-chip HCAN module.
Reference: BOSCH CAN Specification Version 2.0 1991, Robert Bosch GmbH
15.1.1
Features
• CAN version: Bosch 2.0B active compatible
 Communication systems:
NRZ (Non-Return to Zero) system (with bit-stuffing function)
Broadcast communication system
 Transmission path: Bidirectional 2-wire serial communication
 Communication speed: Max. 1 Mbps
 Data length: 0 to 8 bytes
• Number of channels: 1
• Data buffers: 16 (one receive-only buffer and 15 buffers settable for transmission/reception)
• Data transmission: Choice of two methods:
 Mailbox (buffer) number order (low-to-high)
 Message priority (identifier) high-to-low order
• Data reception: Two methods:
 Message identifier match (transmit/receive-setting buffers)
 Reception with message identifier masked (receive-only)
• CPU interrupts: Five interrupt vectors:
 Error interrupt
 Reset processing interrupt
 Message reception interrupt (mailboxes 1 to 15)
 Message reception interrupt (mailbox 0)
 Message transmission interrupt
• HCAN operating modes: Support for various modes:
 Hardware reset
 Software reset
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 523 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
 Normal status (error-active, error-passive)
 Bus off status
 HCAN configuration mode
 HCAN sleep mode
 HCAN halt mode
• Other features: DTC can be activated by message reception mailbox (HCAN mailbox 0 only)
15.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the HCAN.
MBI
Message buffer
Peripheral data bus
Peripheral address bus
HCAN
Mailboxes
Message control
Message data
MC0–MC15, MD0–MD15
LAFM
(CDLC)
CAN
Data Link Controller
Bosch CAN 2.0B active
Tx buffer
MPI
Microprocessor interface
Rx buffer
HTxD
HRxD
CPU interface
Control register
Status register
Figure 15.1 HCAN Block Diagram
Message Buffer Interface (MBI): The MBI, consisting of mailboxes and a local acceptance filter
mask (LAFM), stores CAN transmit/receive messages (identifiers, data, etc.) Transmit messages
are written by the CPU. For receive messages, the data received by the CDLC is stored
automatically.
Microprocessor Interface (MPI): The MPI, consisting of a bus interface, control register, status
register, etc., controls HCAN internal data, statuses, and so forth.
CAN Data Link Controller (CDLC): The CDLC performs transmission and reception of
messages conforming to the Bosch CAN Ver. 2.0B active standard (data frames, remote frames,
error frames, overload frames, inter-frame spacing), as well as CRC checking, bus arbitration, and
other functions.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 524 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 15.1 shows the HCAN’s pins.
When using HCAN pins, settings must be made in the HCAN configuration mode (during
initialization: MCR0 = 1 and GSR3 = 1).
Table 15.1 HCAN Pins
Name
Abbreviation
Input/Output
Function
HCAN transmit data pin
HTxD
Output
CAN bus transmission pin
HCAN receive data pin
HRxD
Input
CAN bus reception pin
A bus driver is necessary between the pins and the CAN bus. A Philips PCA82C250 compatible
model is recommended.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 525 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 15.2 lists the HCAN’s registers.
Table 15.2 HCAN Registers
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial Value Address*
Access Size
Master control register
MCR
R/W
H'01
H'F800
8 bits 16 bits
General status register
GSR
R/W
H'0C
H'F801
8 bits
Bit configuration register
BCR
R/W
H'0000
H'F802
8/16 bits
Mailbox configuration register
MBCR
R/W
H'0100
H'F804
8/16 bits
Transmit wait register
TXPR
R/W
H'0000
H'F806
8/16 bits
Transmit wait cancel register
TXCR
R/W
H'0000
H'F808
8/16 bits
Transmit acknowledge register
TXACK
R/W
H'0000
H'F80A
8/16 bits
Abort acknowledge register
ABACK
R/W
H'0000
H'F80C
8/16 bits
Receive complete register
RXPR
R/W
H'0000
H'F80E
8/16 bits
Remote request register
RFPR
R/W
H'0000
H'F810
8/16 bits
Interrupt register
IRR
R/W
H'0100
H'F812
8/16 bits
Mailbox interrupt mask register
MBIMR
R/W
H'FFFF
H'F814
8/16 bits
Interrupt mask register
IMR
R/W
H'FEFF
H'F816
8/16 bits
Receive error counter
REC
R
H'00
H'F818
8 bits 16 bits
Transmit error counter
TEC
R
H'00
H'F819
8 bits
Unread message status register
UMSR
R/W
H'0000
H'F81A
8/16 bits
Local acceptance filter mask L
LAFML
R/W
H'0000
H'F81C
8/16 bits
Local acceptance filter mask H
LAFMH
R/W
H'0000
H'F81E
8/16 bits
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 526 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial Value Address*
Access Size
Message control 0 [1:8]
MC0 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F820
8/16 bits
Message control 1 [1:8]
MC1 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F828
8/16 bits
Message control 2 [1:8]
MC2 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F830
8/16 bits
Message control 3 [1:8]
MC3 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F838
8/16 bits
Message control 4 [1:8]
MC4 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F840
8/16 bits
Message control 5 [1:8]
MC5 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F848
8/16 bits
Message control 6 [1:8]
MC6 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F850
8/16 bits
Message control 7 [1:8]
MC7 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F858
8/16 bits
Message control 8 [1:8]
MC8 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F860
8/16 bits
Message control 9 [1:8]
MC9 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F868
8/16 bits
Message control 10 [1:8]
MC10 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F870
8/16 bits
Message control 11 [1:8]
MC11 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F878
8/16 bits
Message control 12 [1:8]
MC12 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F880
8/16 bits
Message control 13 [1:8]
MC13 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F888
8/16 bits
Message control 14 [1:8]
MC14 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F890
8/16 bits
Message control 15 [1:8]
MC15 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F898
8/16 bits
Message data 0 [1:8]
MD0 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8B0
8/16 bits
Message data 1 [1:8]
MD1 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8B8
8/16 bits
Message data 2 [1:8]
MD2 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8C0
8/16 bits
Message data 3 [1:8]
MD3 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8C8
8/16 bits
Message data 4 [1:8]
MD4 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8D0
8/16 bits
Message data 5 [1:8]
MD5 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8D8
8/16 bits
Message data 6 [1:8]
MD6 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8E0
8/16 bits
Message data 7 [1:8]
MD7 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8E8
8/16 bits
Message data 8 [1:8]
MD8 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8F0
8/16 bits
Message data 9 [1:8]
MD9 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F8F8
8/16 bits
Message data 10 [1:8]
MD10 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F900
8/16 bits
Message data 11 [1:8]
MD11 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F908
8/16 bits
Message data 12 [1:8]
MD12 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F910
8/16 bits
Message data 13 [1:8]
MD13 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F918
8/16 bits
Message data 14 [1:8]
MD14 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F920
8/16 bits
Message data 15 [1:8]
MD15 [1:8]
R/W
Undefined
H'F928
8/16 bits
Module stop control
register C
MSTPCRC
R/W
H'FF
H'FDEA
8/16 bits
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 527 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2
Register Descriptions
15.2.1
Master Control Register (MCR)
The master control register (MCR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the CAN
interface.
MCR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MCR7
—
MCR5
—
—
MCR2
MCR1
MCR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit 7—HCAN Sleep Mode Release (MCR7): Enables or disables HCAN sleep mode release by
bus operation.
Bit 7
MCR7
Description
0
HCAN sleep mode release by CAN bus operation disabled
1
HCAN sleep mode release by CAN bus operation enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
Bit 5—HCAN Sleep Mode (MCR5): Enables or disables HCAN sleep mode transition.
Bit 5
MCR5
Description
0
HCAN sleep mode released
1
Transition to HCAN sleep mode enabled
(Initial value)
Bits 4 and 3—Reserved: These bits always read 0. The write value should always be 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 528 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 2—Message Transmission Method (MCR2): Selects the transmission method for transmit
messages.
Bit 2
MCR2
Description
0
Transmission order determined by message identifier priority
1
Transmission order determined by mailbox (buffer) number priority
(TXPR1 > TXPR15)
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Halt Request (MCR1): Controls halting of the HCAN module.
Bit 1
MCR1
Description
0
HCAN normal operating mode
1
HCAN halt mode transition request
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Reset Request (MCR0): Controls resetting of the HCAN module.
Bit 0
MCR0
Description
0
Normal operating mode (MCR0 = 0 and GSR3 = 0)
[Setting condition]
When 0 is written after an HCAN reset
1
HCAN reset mode transition request
(Initial value)
In order for GSR3 to change from 1 to 0 after 0 is written to MCR0, time is required before the
HCAN is internally reset. There is consequently a delay before GSR3 is cleared to 0 after MCR0
is cleared to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 529 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.2
General Status Register (GSR)
The general status register (GSR) is an 8-bit readable register that indicates the status of the CAN
bus.
GSR
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
GSR3
GSR2
GSR1
GSR0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits always read 0.
Bit 3—Reset Status Bit (GSR3): Indicates whether the HCAN module is in the normal operating
state or the reset state. Writes are invalid.
Bit 3
GSR3
Description
0
Normal operating state
[Setting condition]
After an HCAN internal reset
1
Configuration mode
[Reset condition]
MCR0 reset mode and sleep mode
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Message Transmission Status Flag (GSR2): Flag that indicates whether the module is
currently in the message transmission period. The “message transmission period” is the period
from the start of message transmission (SOF) until the end of a 3-bit intermission interval after
EOF (End of Frame). Writes are invalid.
Bit 2
GSR2
Description
0
Message transmission period
1
[Reset Condition]
Idle period
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 530 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 1—Transmit/Receive Warning Flag (GSR1): Flag that indicates an error warning. Writes
are invalid.
Bit 1
GSR1
Description
0
[Reset condition]
When TEC < 96 and REC < 96 or TEC ≥ 256
(Initial value)
When TEC ≥ 96 or REC ≥ 96
1
Bit 0—Bus Off Flag (GSR0): Flag that indicates the bus off state. Writes are invalid.
Bit 0
GSR0
Description
0
[Reset condition]
Recovery from bus off state
15.2.3
(Initial value)
When TEC ≥ 256 (bus off state)
1
Bit Configuration Register (BCR)
The bit configuration register (BCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to set CAN
bit timing parameters and the baud rate prescaler.
BCR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BCR7
BCR6
BCR5
BCR4
BCR3
BCR2
BCR1
BCR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BCR15
BCR14
BCR13
BCR12
BCR11
BCR10
BCR9
BCR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 531 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bits 15 and 14—Resynchronization Jump Width (SJW): These bits set the bit synchronization
range.
Bit 15
Bit 14
BCR7
BCR6
Description
0
0
Bit synchronization width = 1 time quantum
1
Bit synchronization width = 2 time quanta
1
0
Bit synchronization width = 3 time quanta
1
Bit synchronization width = 4 time quanta
(Initial value)
Bits 13 to 8—Baud Rate Prescaler (BRP): These bits are used to set the CAN bus baud rate.
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
BCR5
BCR4
BCR3
BCR2
BCR1
BCR0
Description
0
0
0
0
0
0
2 × system clock
0
0
0
0
0
1
4 × system clock
0
0
0
0
1
0
6 × system clock
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
1
1
1
1
1
1
(Initial value)
⋅
⋅
⋅
128 × system clock
Bit 7—Bit Sample Point (BSP): Sets the point at which data is sampled.
Bit 7
BCR15
Description
0
Bit sampling at one point (end of time segment 1 (TSEG1))
1
Bit sampling at three points (end of TSEG1 and preceding and following time
quantum)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 532 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bits 6 to 4—Time Segment 2 (TSEG2): These bits are used to set the segment for correcting 1bit time error. A value from 2 to 8 can be set.
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
BCR14
BCR13
BCR12
Description
0
0
0
Setting prohibited
1
TSEG2 = 2 time quanta
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
0
TSEG2 = 3 time quanta
1
TSEG2 = 4 time quanta
0
TSEG2 = 5 time quanta
1
TSEG2 = 6 time quanta
0
TSEG2 = 7 time quanta
1
TSEG2 = 8 time quanta
Bits 3 to 0—Time Segment 1 (TSEG1): These bits are used to set the segment for absorbing
output buffer, CAN bus, and input buffer delay. A value from 1 to 16 can be set.
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
BCR11
BCR10
BCR9
BCR8
Description
0
0
0
0
Setting prohibited
0
0
0
1
Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
Setting prohibited
0
0
1
1
TSEG1 = 4 time quanta
0
1
0
0
TSEG1 = 5 time quanta
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
1
1
1
1
(Initial value)
⋅
⋅
⋅
TSEG1 = 16 time quanta
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 533 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.4
Mailbox Configuration Register (MBCR)
The mailbox configuration register (MBCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to
set mailbox (buffer) transmission/reception.
MBCR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
MBCR7
MBCR6
MBCR5
MBCR4
MBCR3
MBCR2
MBCR1
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MBCR9
MBCR8
MBCR15 MBCR14 MBCR13 MBCR12 MBCR11 MBCR10
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Mailbox Setting Register (MBCR7 to MBCR1, MBCR15 to
MBCR8): These bits set the polarity of the corresponding mailboxes.
Bit x
MBCRx
Description
0
Corresponding mailbox is set for transmission
1
Corresponding mailbox is set for reception
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 1. The write value should always be 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 534 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.5
Transmit Wait Register (TXPR)
The transmit wait register (TXPR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to set a
transmit wait after a transmit message is stored in a mailbox (buffer) (CAN bus arbitration wait).
TXPR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXPR7
TXPR6
TXPR5
TXPR4
TXPR3
TXPR2
TXPR1
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXPR15 TXPR14 TXPR13 TXPR12 TXPR11 TXPR10 TXPR9
Initial value:
R/W:
TXPR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Transmit Wait Register (TXPR7 to TXPR1, TXPR15 to TXPR8):
These bits set a transmit wait for the corresponding mailboxes.
Bit x
TXPRx
Description
0
Transmit message idle state in corresponding mailbox
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
Message transmission completion and cancellation completion
1
Transmit message transmit wait in corresponding mailbox (CAN bus arbitration)
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 535 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.6
Transmit Wait Cancel Register (TXCR)
The transmit wait cancel register (TXCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that controls
cancellation of transmit wait messages in mailboxes (buffers).
TXCR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXCR7
TXCR6
TXCR5
TXCR4
TXCR3
TXCR2
TXCR1
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXCR15 TXCR14 TXCR13 TXCR12 TXCR11 TXCR10 TXCR9
Initial value:
R/W:
TXCR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Transmit Wait Cancel Register (TXCR7 to TXCR1, TXCR15 to
TXCR8): These bits control cancellation of transmit wait messages in the corresponding HCAN
mailboxes.
Bit x
TXCRx
Description
0
Transmit message cancellation idle state in corresponding mailbox
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
Completion of TXPR clearing (when transmit message is canceled normally)
1
TXPR cleared for corresponding mailbox (transmit message cancellation)
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 536 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.7
Transmit Acknowledge Register (TXACK)
The transmit acknowledge register (TXACK) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing
status flags that indicate normal transmission of mailbox (buffer) transmit messages.
TXACK
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TXACK7
TXACK6
TXACK5
TXACK4
TXACK3
TXACK2
TXACK1
—
0
R/(W)*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit:
TXACK15 TXACK14 TXACK13 TXACK12 TXACK11 TXACK10 TXACK9
Initial value:
R/W:
Note:
*
TXACK8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Can only be written with 1 for flag clearing.
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Transmit Acknowledge Register (TXACK7 to TXACK1, TXACK15
to TXACK8): These bits indicate that a transmit message in the corresponding HCAN mailbox
has been transmitted normally.
Bit x
TXACKx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
(Initial value)
Completion of message transmission for corresponding mailbox
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 537 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.8
Abort Acknowledge Register (ABACK)
The abort acknowledge register (ABACK) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status
flags that indicate normal cancellation (aborting) of a mailbox (buffer) transmit messages.
ABACK
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ABACK7 ABACK6 ABACK5 ABACK4 ABACK3 ABACK2 ABACK1
—
0
R/(W)*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit:
ABACK15 ABACK14 ABACK13 ABACK12 ABACK11 ABACK10 ABACK9 ABACK8
Initial value:
R/W:
Note:
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Can only be written with 1 for flag clearing.
Bits 15 to 9 and 7 to 0—Abort Acknowledge Register (ABACK7 to ABACK1, ABACK15 to
ABACK8): These bits indicate that a transmit message in the corresponding mailbox has been
canceled (aborted) normally.
Bit x
ABACKx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
Completion of transmit message cancellation for corresponding mailbox
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 538 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.9
Receive Complete Register (RXPR)
The receive complete register (RXPR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status flags
that indicate normal reception of messages (data frame or remote frame) in mailboxes (buffers).
In the case of remote frame reception, the corresponding remote request register (RFPR) is also set
simultaneously.
RXPR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
RXPR7
RXPR6
RXPR5
RXPR4
RXPR3
RXPR2
RXPR1
RXPR0
0
R/(W)*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit:
RXPR15 RXPR14 RXPR13 RXPR12 RXPR11 RXPR10 RXPR9
Initial value:
R/W:
Note:
*
RXPR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Can only be written with 1 for flag clearing.
Bits 15 to 0—Receive Complete Register (RXPR7 to RXPR0, RXPR15 to RXPR8): These bits
indicate that a receive message has been received normally in the corresponding mailbox.
Bit x
RXPRx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
(Initial value)
Completion of message (data frame or remote frame) reception in corresponding
mailbox
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 539 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.10 Remote Request Register (RFPR)
The remote request register (RFPR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status flags
that indicate normal reception of remote frames in mailboxes (buffers). When a bit in this register
is set, the corresponding reception complete bit is set simultaneously.
RFPR
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
RFPR7
RFPR6
RFPR5
RFPR4
RFPR3
RFPR2
RFPR1
RFPR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
RFPR15 RFPR14 RFPR13 RFPR12 RFPR11 RFPR10 RFPR9
Initial value:
R/W:
Note:
*
RFPR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Can only be written with 1 for flag clearing.
Bits 15 to 0—Remote Request Register (RFPR7 to PFPR0, RFPR15 to PFDR8): These bits
indicate that a remote frame has been received normally in the corresponding mailbox.
Bit x
RFPRx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
Completion of remote frame reception in corresponding mailbox
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 540 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.11 Interrupt Register (IRR)
The interrupt register (IRR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status flags for the
various interrupt sources.
IRR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
IRR7
IRR6
IRR5
IRR4
IRR3
IRR2
IRR1
IRR0
0
R/(W)*
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/(W)*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
IRR12
—
—
IRR9
IRR8
Bit:
Note:
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
—
—
—
R/(W)*
—
—
R
R/(W)*
*
Can only be written with 1 for flag clearing.
Bit 15—Overload Frame/Bus Off Recovery Interrupt Flag (IRR7): Status flag indicating that
the HCAN has transmitted an overload frame or recovered from the bus off state.
Bit 15
IRR7
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
(Initial value)
Overload frame transmission or recovery from bus off state
[Setting conditions]
Error active/passive state
•
When overload frame is transmitted
Bus off state
•
When 11 recessive bits is received 128 times (REC ≥ 128)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 541 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 14—Bus Off Interrupt Flag (IRR6): Status flag indicating the bus off state caused by the
transmit error counter.
Bit 14
IRR6
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
1
Bus off state caused by transmit error
Writing 1
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When TEC ≥ 256
Bit 13—Error Passive Interrupt Flag (IRR5): Status flag indicating the error passive state
caused by the transmit/receive error counter.
Bit 13
IRR5
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
(Initial value)
Error passive state caused by transmit/receive error
[Setting condition]
When TEC ≥ 128 or REC ≥ 128
Bit 12—Receive Overload Warning Interrupt Flag (IRR4): Status flag indicating the error
warning state caused by the receive error counter.
Bit 12
IRR4
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
Error warning state caused by receive error
[Setting condition]
When REC ≥ 96
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 542 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 11—Transmit Overload Warning Interrupt Flag (IRR3): Status flag indicating the error
warning state caused by the transmit error counter.
Bit 11
IRR3
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
(Initial value)
Error warning state caused by transmit error
[Setting condition]
When TEC ≥ 96
Bit 10—Remote Frame Request Interrupt Flag (IRR2): Status flag indicating that a remote
frame has been received in a mailbox (buffer).
Bit 10
IRR2
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Clearing of all bits in RFPR (remote request register) of mailbox for which receive
interrupt requests are enabled by MBIMR
(Initial value)
1
Remote frame received and stored in mailbox
[Setting conditions]
When remote frame reception is completed, when corresponding
MBIMR = 0
Bit 9—Receive Message Interrupt Flag (IRR1): Status flag indicating that a mailbox (buffer)
receive message has been received normally.
Bit 9
IRR1
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Clearing of all bits in RXPR (receive complete register) of mailbox for which receive
interrupt requests are enabled by MBIMR
(Initial value)
1
Data frame or remote frame received and stored in mailbox
[Setting conditions]
When data frame or remote frame reception is completed, when corresponding
MBIMR = 0
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 543 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 8—Reset Interrupt Flag (IRR0): Status flag indicating that the HCAN module has been
reset. This bit cannot be masked in the interrupt mask register (IMR). If this bit is not cleared after
reset input or recovery from software standby mode, interrupt handling will be performed as soon
as interrupts are enabled by the interrupt controller.
Bit 8
IRR0
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
Hardware reset (HCAN module stop*, software standby)
1
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When reset processing is completed after a hardware reset (HCAN module stop*,
software standby)
Note:
*
After reset or hardware standby release, the module stop bit is initialized to 1, and so
the HCAN enters the module stop state.
Bits 7 to 5, 3, and 2—Reserved: These bits always read 0. The write value should always be 0.
Bit 4—Bus Operation Interrupt Flag (IRR12): Status flag indicating detection of a dominant bit
due to bus operation when the HCAN module is in HCAN sleep mode.
Bit 4
IRR12
Description
0
CAN bus idle state
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
CAN bus operation in HCAN sleep mode
[Setting condition]
Bus operation (dominant bit detection) in HCAN sleep mode
Bit 1—Unread Interrupt Flag (IRR9): Status flag indicating that a receive message has been
overwritten while still unread.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 544 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 1
IRR9
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Clearing of all bits in UMSR (unread message status register)
1
(Initial value)
Unread message overwrite
[Setting condition]
When UMSR (unread message status register) is set
Bit 0—Mailbox Empty Interrupt Flag (IRR8): Status flag indicating that the next transmit
message can be stored in the mailbox.
Bit 0
IRR8
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
(Initial value)
Transmit message has been transmitted or aborted, and new message can be stored
[Setting condition]
When TXPR (transmit wait register) is cleared by completion of transmission or
completion of transmission abort
15.2.12 Mailbox Interrupt Mask Register (MBIMR)
The mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing
flags that enable or disable individual mailbox (buffer) interrupt requests.
MBIMR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
MBIMR7
MBIMR6
MBIMR5
MBIMR4
MBIMR3
MBIMR2
MBIMR1
MBIMR0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MBIMR15 MBIMR14 MBIMR13 MBIMR12 MBIMR11 MBIMR10 MBIMR9
Initial value:
R/W:
MBIMR8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 545 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bits 15 to 0—Mailbox Interrupt Mask (MBIMRx) (MBIMR7 to MBIMR0, MBIMR15 to
MBIMR8): Flags that enable or disable individual mailbox interrupt requests.
Bit x
MBIMRx
Description
0
[Transmitting]
Interrupt request to CPU due to TXPR clearing
[Receiving]
Interrupt request to CPU due to RXPR setting
1
Interrupt requests to CPU disabled
(Initial value)
15.2.13 Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
The interrupt mask register (IMR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing flags that
enable or disable requests by individual interrupt sources.
IMR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
IMR7
IMR6
IMR5
IMR4
IMR3
IMR2
IMR1
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
IMR12
—
—
IMR9
IMR8
Initial value:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W:
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
Bit 15—Overload Frame/Bus Off Recovery Interrupt Mask (IMR7): Enables or disables
overload frame/bus off recovery interrupt requests.
Bit 15
IMR7
Description
0
Overload frame/bus off recovery interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR7 enabled
1
Overload frame/bus off recovery interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR7 disabled
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 546 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 14—Bus Off Interrupt Mask (IMR6): Enables or disables bus off interrupt requests caused
by the transmit error counter.
Bit 14
IMR6
Description
0
Bus off interrupt request (ERS0) to CPU by IRR6 enabled
1
Bus off interrupt request (ERS0) to CPU by IRR6 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 13—Error Passive Interrupt Mask (IMR5): Enables or disables error passive interrupt
requests caused by the transmit/receive error counter.
Bit 13
IMR5
Description
0
Error passive interrupt request (ERS0) to CPU by IRR5 enabled
1
Error passive interrupt request (ERS0) to CPU by IRR5 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 12—Receive Overload Warning Interrupt Mask (IMR4): Enables or disables error warning
interrupt requests caused by the receive error counter.
Bit 12
IMR4
Description
0
REC error warning interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR4 enabled
1
REC error warning interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR4 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 11—Transmit Overload Warning Interrupt Mask (IMR3): Enables or disables error
warning interrupt requests caused by the transmit error counter.
Bit 11
IMR3
Description
0
TEC error warning interrupt request (OVR0) to by IRR3 CPU enabled
1
TEC error warning interrupt request (OVR0) to by IRR3 CPU disabled
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 547 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 10—Remote Frame Request Interrupt Mask (IMR2): Enables or disables remote frame
reception interrupt requests.
Bit 10
IMR2
Description
0
Remote frame reception interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR2 enabled
1
Remote frame reception interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR2 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 9—Receive Message Interrupt Mask (IMR1): Enables or disables message reception
interrupt requests.
Bit 9
IMR1
Description
0
Message reception interrupt request (RM1) to CPU by IRR1 enabled
1
Message reception interrupt request (RM1) to CPU by IRR1 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 8—Reserved: This bit always reads 0. The write value should always be 0.
Bits 7 to 5, 3, and 2—Reserved: These bits always read 1. The write value should always be 1.
Bit 4—Bus Operation Interrupt Mask (IMR12): Enables or disables interrupt requests due to
bus operation in sleep mode.
Bit 4
IMR12
Description
0
Bus operation interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR12 enabled
1
Bus operation interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR12 disabled
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Unread Interrupt Mask (IMR9): Enables or disables unread receive message overwrite
interrupt requests.
Bit 1
IMR9
Description
0
Unread message overwrite interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR9 enabled
1
Unread message overwrite interrupt request (OVR0) to CPU by IRR9 disabled
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 548 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Bit 0—Mailbox Empty Interrupt Mask (IMR8): Enables or disables mailbox empty interrupt
requests.
Bit 0
IMR8
Description
0
Mailbox empty interrupt request (SLE0) to CPU by IRR8 enabled
1
Mailbox empty interrupt request (SLE0) to CPU by IRR8 disabled
(Initial value)
15.2.14 Receive Error Counter (REC)
The receive error counter (REC) is an 8-bit read-only register that functions as a counter indicating
the number of receive message errors on the CAN bus. The count value is stipulated in the CAN
protocol.
REC
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
15.2.15 Transmit Error Counter (TEC)
The transmit error counter (TEC) is an 8-bit read-only register that functions as a counter
indicating the number of transmit message errors on the CAN bus. The count value is stipulated in
the CAN protocol.
TEC
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 549 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.16 Unread Message Status Register (UMSR)
The unread message status register (UMSR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register containing status
flags that indicate, for individual mailboxes (buffers), that a received message has been
overwritten by a new receive message before being read. When a message is overwritten by a new
receive message, the old data is lost.
UMSR
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Note:
*
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
UMSR7
UMSR6
UMSR5
UMSR4
UMSR3
UMSR2
UMSR1
UMSR0
0
R/(W)*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UMSR15 UMSR14 UMSR13 UMSR12 UMSR11 UMSR10
UMSR9
UMSR8
0
R/(W)*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Can only be written with 1 for flag clearing.
Bits 15 to 0—Unread Message Status Flags (UMSR7 to UMSR0, UMSR15 to UMSR8):
Status flags indicating that an unread receive message has been overwritten.
Bit x
UMSRx
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
Writing 1
1
(Initial value)
Unread receive message is overwritten by a new message
[Setting condition]
When a new message is received before RXPR is cleared
x = 0 to 15
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 550 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.17 Local Acceptance Filter Masks (LAFML, LAFMH)
The local acceptance filter masks (LAFML, LAFMH) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that
filter receive messages to be stored in the receive-only mailbox (MC0, MD0) according to the
identifier. In these registers, consist of LAFMH15 (MSB) to LAFMH5 (LSB) are 11
standard/extended identifier bits, and LAFMH1 (MSB) to LAFML0 (LSB) are 18 extended
identifier bits.
LAFML
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
LAFML7
LAFML6
LAFML5
LAFML4
LAFML3
LAFML2
LAFML1
LAFML0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
LAFML15 LAFML14 LAFML13 LAFML12 LAFML11 LAFML10 LAFML9
Initial value:
R/W:
0
LAFML8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
LAFMH
Bit:
LAFMH7 LAFMH6 LAFMH5
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
LAFMH1 LAFMH0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LAFMH15 LAFMH14 LAFMH13 LAFMH12 LAFMH11 LAFMH10 LAFMH9 LAFMH8
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 551 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
LAFMH Bits 7 to 0 and 15 to 13—11-Bit Identifier Filter (LAFMH7 to LAFMH5,
LAFMH15 to LAFMH8): Filter mask bits for the first 11 bits of the receive message identifier
(for both standard and extended identifiers).
Bit x
LAFMHx
Description
0
Stored in MC0, MD0 (receive-only mailbox) depending on bit match between MC0
message identifier and receive message identifier
(Initial value)
1
Stored in MC0, MD0 (receive-only mailbox) regardless of bit match between MC0
message identifier and receive message identifier
LAFMH Bits 12 to 10—Reserved: These bits always read 0. The write value should always be 0.
LAFMH Bits 9 and 8, LAFML Bits 15 to 0—18-Bit Identifier Filter (LAFMH1, LAFMH0,
LAFML7 to LAFML0, LAFML15 to LAFML8): Filter mask bits for the 18 bits of the receive
message identifier (extended).
Bit x
LAFMHx
LAFMLx
Description
0
Stored in MC0 (receive-only mailbox) depending on bit match between MC0 message
identifier and receive message identifier
(Initial value)
1
Stored in MC0 (receive-only mailbox) regardless of bit match between MC0 message
identifier and receive message identifier
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 552 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.18 Message Control (MC0 to MC15)
The message control register sets (MC0 to MC15) consist of eight 8-bit readable/writable registers
(MCx[1] to MCx[8]). The HCAN has 16 sets of these registers (MC0 to MC15).
The initial value of these registers is undefined, so they must be initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MCx [1]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
DLC3
DLC2
DLC1
DLC0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MCx [2]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
MCx [3]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MCx [4]
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 553 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MCx [5]
Bit:
7
6
5
R/W:
3
2
1
0
RTR
IDE
—
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
STD_ID2 STD_ID1 STD_ID0
Initial value:
4
EXD_ID17 EXD_ID16
MCx [6]
Bit:
STD_ID10 STD_ID9 STD_ID8 STD_ID7 STD_ID6 STD_ID5 STD_ID4 STD_ID3
Initial value:
R/W:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MCx [7]
Bit:
EXD_ID7 EXD_ID6 EXD_ID5 EXD_ID4 EXD_ID3 EXD_ID2 EXD_ID1 EXD_ID0
Initial value:
R/W:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MCx [8]
Bit:
EXD_ID15 EXD_ID14 EXD_ID13 EXD_ID12 EXD_ID11 EXD_ID10 EXD_ID9 EXD_ID8
Initial value:
R/W:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
*: Undefined
x = 0 to 15
MCx[1] Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: The initial value of these bits is undefined; they must be
initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 554 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MCx[1] Bits 3 to 0—Data Length Code (DLC): These bits indicate the required length of data
frames and remote frames.
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
DLC3
DLC2
DLC1
DLC0
Description
0
0
0
0
Data length = 0 bytes
1
Data length = 1 byte
0
Data length = 2 bytes
1
Data length = 3 bytes
0
Data length = 4 bytes
1
Data length = 5 bytes
0
Data length = 6 bytes
1
Data length = 7 bytes
0/1
Data length = 8 bytes
1
1
0
1
1
0/1
0/1
MCx[2] Bits 7 to 0—Reserved: The initial value of these bits is undefined; they must be
initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MCx[3] Bits 7 to 0—Reserved: The initial value of these bits is undefined; they must be
initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MCx[4] Bits 7 to 0—Reserved: The initial value of these bits is undefined; they must be
initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MCx[6] Bits 7 to 0—Standard Identifier (STD_ID10 to STD_ID3):
MCx[5] Bits 7 to 5—Standard Identifier (STD_ID2 to STD_ID0):
These bits set the identifier (standard identifier) of data frames and remote frames.
Standard identifier
SOF ID10
ID9
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
ID0
RTR
SRR
IDE
STD_IDxx
Figure 15.2 Standard Identifier
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 555 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MCx[5] Bit 4—Remote Transmission Request (RTR): Used to distinguish between data frames
and remote frames.
Bit 4
RTR
Description
0
Data frame
1
Remote frame
MCx[5] Bit 3—Identifier Extension (IDE): Used to distinguish between the standard format and
extended format of data frames and remote frames.
Bit 3
IDE
Description
0
Standard format
1
Extended format
MCx[5] Bit 2—Reserved: The initial value of this bit is undefined; it must be initialized (by
writing 0 or 1).
MCx[5] Bits 1 and 0—Extended Identifier (EXD_ID17, EXD_ID16):
MCx[8] Bits 7 to 0—Extended Identifier (EXD_ID15 to EXD_ID8):
MCx[7] Bits 7 to 0—Extended Identifier (EXD_ID7 to EXD_ID0):
These bits set the identifier (extended identifier) of data frames and remote frames.
Extended Identifier
IDE
ID17 ID16 ID15 ID14
ID13 ID12 ID11 ID10
ID9
ID8
EXD_IDxx
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
ID0
RTR
EXD_IDxx
Figure 15.3 Extended Identifier
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 556 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
R1
ID7
ID6
ID5
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.19 Message Data (MD0 to MD15)
The message data register sets (MD0 to MD15) consist of eight 8-bit readable/writable registers
(MDx[1] to MDx[8]). The HCAN has 16 sets of these registers (MD0 to MD15).
The initial value of these registers is undefined, so they must be initialized (by writing 0 or 1).
MDx [1]
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W:
MDx [2]
R/W:
MDx [3]
Bit:
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W:
MDx [4]
R/W:
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 557 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MDx [5]
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W:
MDx [6]
R/W:
MDx [7]
Bit:
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W:
MDx [8]
R/W:
*: Undefined
x = 0 to 15
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 558 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.2.20 Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC)
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0
Initial value:
R/W:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPC3 bit is set to 1, HCAN operation is stopped at the end of the bus cycle, and
module stop mode is entered. Register read/write accesses are not possible in module stop mode.
For details, see sections 21A.5, 21B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRC is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 3—Module Stop (MSTPC3): Specifies the HCAN module stop mode.
Bit 3
MSTPC3
Description
0
HCAN module stop mode is cleared
1
HCAN module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 559 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.3
Operation
15.3.1
Hardware and Software Resets
The HCAN can be reset by a hardware reset or software reset.
Hardware Reset (HCAN Module Stop, Reset*, Hardware*/Software Standby): Initialization
is performed by automatic setting of the MCR reset request bit (MCR0) in MCR and the reset state
bit (GSR3) in GSR within the HCAN (hardware reset). At the same time, all internal registers are
initialized. However mailbox contents are retained. A flowchart of this reset is shown in figure
15.4.
Note: * In a reset and in hardware standby mode, the module stop bit is initialized to 1 and the
HCAN enters the module stop state.
Software Reset (Write to MCR0): In normal operation initialization is performed by setting the
MCR reset request bit (MCR0) in MCR (Software reset). With this kind of reset, if the CAN
controller is performing a communication operation (transmission or reception), the initialization
state is not entered until the message has been completed. During initialization, the reset state bit
(GSR3) in GSR is set. In this kind of initialization, the error counters (TEC and REC) are
initialized but other registers and RAM (mailboxes) are not. A flowchart of this reset is shown in
figure 15.5.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 560 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Hardware reset
MCR0 = 1 (automatic)
IRR0 = 1 (automatic)*1
GSR3 = 1 (automatic)
Initialization of HCAN module
Bit configuration mode
Period in which BCR, MBCR, etc.,
are initialized
Clear IRR0
BCR setting
MBCR setting
Mailbox (RAM) initialization
Message transmission method initialization
MCR0 = 0
GSR3 = 0?
No
Yes
IMR setting (interrupt mask setting)
MBIMR setting (interrupt mask setting)
MC[x] setting (receive identifier setting)
LAFM setting (receive identifier mask setting)
GSR3 = 0 & 11
recessive bits received?
Yes
CAN bus communication enabled
No
: Settings by user
: Processing by hardware
Notes: 1. When IRR0 is set to 1 (automatically) due to a hardware reset*2, a "hardware reset
initiated reset processing" interrupt is generated.
2. In a reset and in hardware standby mode, the module stop bit is initialized to 1 and
the HCAN enters the module stop state.
Figure 15.4 Hardware Reset Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 561 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MCR0 = 1
Bus idle?
No
Yes
GSR3 = 1 (automatic)
Initialization of REC and TEC only
BCR setting
MBCR setting
Mailbox (RAM) initialization
Message transmission method
initialization
OK?
Correction
No
Yes
MCR0 = 0
GSR3 = 0?
No
Yes
IMR setting
MBIMR setting
MC[x] setting
LAFM setting
OK?
Correction
No
Yes
GSR3 = 0 & 11
recessive bits received?
Yes
CAN bus communication enabled
No
: Settings by user
: Processing by hardware
Figure 15.5 Software Reset Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 562 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.3.2
Initialization after Hardware Reset
After a hardware reset, the following initialization processing should be carried out:
• Clearing of IRR0 bit in interrupt register (IRR)
• Bit rate setting
• Mailbox transmit/receive settings
• Mailbox (RAM) initialization
• Message transmission method setting
These initial settings must be made while the HCAN is in bit configuration mode. Configuration
mode is a state in which the reset request bit (MCR0) in the master control register (MCR) is 1 and
the reset status bit in the general status register (GSR) is also 1 (GSR3 = 1). Configuration mode is
exited by clearing the reset request bit in MCR to 0; when MCR0 is cleared to 0, the HCAN
automatically clears the reset state bit (GSR3) in the general status register (GSR). The power-up
sequence then begins, and communication with the CAN bus is possible as soon as the sequence
ends. The power-up sequence consists of the detection of 11 consecutive recessive bits.
IRR0 Clearing: The reset interrupt flag (IRR0) is always set after a reset or recovery from
software standby mode. As an HCAN interrupt is initiated immediately when interrupts are
enabled, IRR0 should be cleared.
Bit Rate and Bit Timing Settings: As bit rate settings, a baud rate setting and bit timing setting
must be made each time a CAN node begins communication. The baud rate and bit timing settings
are made in the bit configuration register (BCR).
a. Note
BCR can be written to at all times, but should only be modified in configuration mode.
Settings should be made so that all CAN controllers connected to the CAN bus have the same
baud rate and bit width.
Refer to table 15.3 for the range of values that can be used as settings (TSEG1, TSEG2, BRP,
sample point, and SJW) for BCR.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 563 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Table 15.3 BCR Register Value Setting Ranges
Name
Abbreviation
Min. Value
Max. Value
Time segment 1
TSEG1
B'0000
B'1111
Time segment 2
TSEG2
B'000
B'111
Baud rate prescaler
BRP
B'000000
B'111111
Sample point
SAM
B'0
B'1
Re-synchronization jump width
SJW
B'00
B'11
b. Value Setting Ranges
• The bit width consists of the total of the settable Time Quanta (TQ). TQ (number of system
clocks) is determined by the baud rate prescaler (BRP).
TQ =
2 × (BRP + 1)
fCLK
• The value of SJW is stipulated in the CAN specifications.
3 ≥ SJW ≥ 0
• The minimum value of TSEG1 is stipulated in the CAN specifications.
TSEG1 > TSEG2
• The minimum value of TSEG2 is stipulated in the CAN specifications.
TSEG2 ≥ SJW
The following formula is used to calculate the baud rate.
Bit rate [b/s] =
fCLK
2 × (BRP + 1) × (3 + TSEG1 + TSEG2)
Note: fCLK = φ (system clock)
The BCR values are used for BRP, TSEG1, and TSEG2.
Example: With a 1 Mb/s baud rate and a 20 MHz input clock:
1 Mb/s =
20 MHz
2 × (0 + 1) × (3 + 4 + 3)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 564 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Item
Set Values
Actual Values
fCLK
20 MHz
—
BRP
0 (B'000000)
System clock × 2
TSEG1
4 (B'0100)
5TQ
TSEG2
3 (B'011)
4TQ
1-bit time
1-bit time (8–25 time quanta)
SYNC_SEG
PRSEG
PHSEG1
TSEG1 (time segment 1)*
2 to 16
1
PHSEG2
TSEG2 (time segment 2)*
Quantum
2 to 8
Legend:
SYNC_SEG: Segment for establishing synchronization of nodes on the CAN bus. (Normal
bit edge transitions occur in this segment.)
PRSEG:
Segment for compensating for physical delay between networks.
PHSEG1:
Buffer segment for correcting phase drift (positive). (This segment is extended
when synchronization (resynchronization) is established.)
PHSEG2:
Buffer segment for correcting phase drift (negative). (This segment is
shortened when synchronization (resynchronization) is established.)
Note: * The Time Quanta value for TSEG1 and TSEG2 is the TSEG value + 1.
Figure 15.6 Detailed Description of One Bit
HCAN bit rate calculation:
Bit rate =
fCLK
2 × (BRP + 1) × (3 + TSEG1 + TSEG2)
Note: fCLK = φ (system clock)
The BCR values are used for BRP, TSEG1, and TSEG2.
BCR Setting Constraints
TSEG1 > TSEG2 ≥ SJW
(SJW = 0 to 3)
TSEG2 > B'001 (BRP = B'000000)
TSEG2 > B'000 (BRP > B'000000)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 565 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
These constraints allow the setting range shown in table 15.4 for TSEG1 and TSEG2 in BCR.
Table 15.4 Setting Range for TSEG1 and TSEG2 in BCR
TSEG2 (BCR [14:12])
TSEG1
(BCR [11:8])
0011
0100
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
No
Yes*
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
0110
Yes*
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
0111
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1000
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1001
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1010
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1011
Yes*
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1100
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1101
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1110
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1111
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0101
Notes: The time quanta value for TSEG1 and TSEG2 is the TSEG value + 1.
* Setting is enabled except when BRP [13:8] = B'000000.
Mailbox Transmit/Receive Settings: HCAN0, 1 each have 16 mailboxes. Mailbox 0 is receiveonly, while mailboxes 1 to 15 can be set for transmission or reception. Mailboxes that can be set
for transmission or reception must be designated either for transmission use or for reception use
before communication begins. The Initial status of mailboxes 1 to 15 is for transmission (while
mailbox 0 is for reception only). Mailbox transmit/receive settings are not initialized by a software
reset.
• Setting for transmission
Transmit mailbox setting (mailboxes 1 to 15)
Clearing a bit to 0 in the mailbox configuration register (MBCR) designates the corresponding
mailbox for transmission use. After a reset, mailboxes are initialized for transmission use, so
this setting is not necessary.
• Setting for reception
Transmit/receive mailbox setting (mailboxes 1 to 15)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 566 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Setting a bit to 1 in the mailbox configuration register (MBCR) designates the corresponding
mailbox for reception use. When setting mailboxes for reception, to improve message
transmission efficiency, high-priority messages should be set in low-to-high mailbox order
(priority order: mailbox 1 (MCx[1]) > mailbox 15 (MCx[15]).
• Receive-only mailbox (mailbox 0)
No setting is necessary, as this mailbox is always used for reception.
Mailbox (Message Control/Data (MCx[x], MDx[x]) Initial Settings: After power is supplied,
all registers and RAM (message control/data, control registers, status registers, etc.) are initialized.
Message control/data (MCx[x], MDx[x]) only are in RAM, and so their values are undefined.
Initial values must therefore be set in all the mailboxes (by writing 0s or 1s).
Setting the Message Transmission Method: Either of the following message transmission
methods can be selected with the message transmission method bit (MCR2) in the master control
register (MCR):
a. Transmission order determined by message identifier priority
b. Transmission order determined by mailbox number priority
When a is selected, if a number of messages are designated as waiting for transmission (TXPR =
1), the message with the highest priority set in the message identifier (MCx[5]–MCx[8]) is stored
in the transmit buffer. CAN bus arbitration is then carried out for the message in the transmit
buffer, and message transmission is performed when the transmission right is acquired. When the
TXPR bit is set, internal arbitration is performed again, and the highest-priority message is found
and stored in the transmit buffer.
When b is selected, if a number of messages are designated as waiting for transmission (TXPR =
1), messages are stored in the transmit buffer in low-to-high mailbox order (priority order:
mailbox 1 > mailbox 15). CAN bus arbitration is then carried out for the messages in the transmit
buffer, and message transmission is performed when the bus is acquired.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 567 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.3.3
Transmit Mode
Message transmission is performed using mailboxes 1 to 15. The transmission procedure is
described below, and a transmission flowchart is shown in figure 15.7.
Initialization (after hardware reset only)
a. Clearing of IRR0 bit in interrupt register (IRR)
b. Bit rate settings
c. Mailbox transmit/receive settings
d. Mailbox initialization
e. Message transmission method setting
Interrupt and transmit data settings
a. CPU interrupt source setting
b. Arbitration field setting
c. Control field setting
d. Data field setting
Message transmission and interrupts
a. Message transmission wait
b. Message transmission completion and interrupt
c. Message transmission abort
d. Message retransmission
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 568 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Initialization (After Hardware Reset Only): These settings should be made while the HCAN is
in bit configuration mode.
• IRR0 clearing
The reset interrupt flag (IRR0) is always set after a reset or recovery from software standby
mode. As an HCAN interrupt is initiated immediately when interrupts are enabled, IRR0
should be cleared.
• Bit rate settings
Set values relating to the CAN bus communication speed and resynchronization. Refer to Bit
Rate and Bit Timing Settings in 15.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
• Mailbox transmit/receive settings
Mailbox transmit/receive settings should be made in advance. A total of 15 mailboxes can be
set for transmission or reception (mailboxes 1 to 15). To set a mailbox for transmission, clear
the corresponding bit to 0 in the mailbox configuration register (MBCR). Refer to Mailbox
Transmit/Receive Settings in 15.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
• Mailbox initialization
As message control/data registers (MCx[x], MDx[x]) are configured in RAM, their initial
values after powering on are undefined, and so bit initialization is necessary. Write 0s or 1s to
the mailboxes. See Mailbox (Message Control/Data (MCx[x], MDx[x]) Initial Settings in
15.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
• Message transmission method setting
Set the transmission method for mailboxes designated for transmission. The following two
transmission methods can be used. Refer to Setting the Message Transmission Method in
15.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
a. Transmission order determined by message identifier priority
b. Transmission order determined by mailbox number priority
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 569 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Initialization (after hardware reset only)
IRR0 clearing
BCR setting
MBCR setting
Mailbox initialization
Message transmission method setting
Interrupt settings
Transmit data setting
Arbitration field setting
Control field setting
Data field setting
Message transmission wait
TXPR setting
Bus idle?
No
Yes
Message transmission
GSR2 = 0 (during transmission only)
Transmission completed?
No
Yes
TXACK = 1
IRR8 = 1
IMR8 = 1?
Yes
No
Interrupt to CPU
Clear TXACK
Clear IRR8
: Settings by user
End of transmission
Figure 15.7 Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 570 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
: Processing by hardware
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Interrupt and Transmit Data Settings: When mailbox initialization is finished, CPU interrupt
source settings and data settings must be made. Interrupt source settings are made in the mailbox
interrupt register (MBIMR) and interrupt mask register (IMR), while transmit data settings are
made by writing the necessary data from the arbitration field, control field, and data field,
described below, in the corresponding message control (MCx[1]–MCx[8]) and message data
(MDx[1]–MDx[8]).
• CPU interrupt source settings
Transmission acknowledge and transmission abort acknowledge interrupts can be masked for
individual mailboxes in the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR). Interrupt register (IRR)
interrupts can be masked in the interrupt mask register (IMR).
• Arbitration field setting
In the arbitration field, the 11-bit identifier (STD_ID0–STD_ID10) and RTR bit (standard
format) or 29-bit identifier (STD_ID0–STD_ID10, EXT_ID0–EXT_ID17) and IDE.RTR bit
(extended format) are set. The registers to be set are MCx[5]–MCx[8].
• Control field setting
In the control field, the byte length of the data to be transmitted is set in DLC0–DLC3. The
register to be set is MCx[1].
• Data field setting
In the data field, the data to be transmitted is set in byte units in the range of 0 to 8 bytes. The
registers to be set are MDx[1]–MDx[8].
The number of bytes in the data actually transmitted depends on the data length code (DLC) in the
control field. If a value exceeding the value set in DLC is set in the data field, only the number of
bytes set in DLC will actually be transmitted.
Message Transmission and Interrupts:
• Message transmission wait
If message transmission is to be performed after completion of the message control (MCx[1]–
MCx[8]) and message data (MDx[1]–MDx[8]) settings, transmission is started by setting the
corresponding mailbox transmit wait bit (TXPR1–TXPR15) to 1 in the transmit wait register
(TXPR). The following two transmission methods can be used:
a. Transmission order determined by message identifier priority
b. Transmission order determined by mailbox number priority
When a is selected, if a number of messages are designated as waiting for transmission (TXPR
= 1), messages are stored in the transmit buffer in low-to-high mailbox order (priority order:
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 571 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
mailbox 1 > mailbox 15). CAN bus arbitration is then carried out for the messages in the
transmit buffer, and message transmission is performed when the bus is acquired.
When b is selected, if a number of messages are designated as waiting for transmission (TXPR
= 1), the message with the highest priority set in the message identifier (MCx[5]–MCx[8]) is
stored in the transmit buffer. CAN bus arbitration is then carried out for the message in the
transmit buffer, and message transmission is performed when the transmission right is
acquired. When the TXPR bit is set, internal arbitration is performed again, the highest-priority
message is found and stored in the transmit buffer, CAN bus arbitration is carried out in the
same way, and message transmission is performed when the transmission right is acquired.
• Message transmission completion and interrupt
When a message is transmitted error-free using the above procedure, the corresponding
acknowledge bit (TXACK1–TXACK15) in the transmit acknowledge register (TXACK) and
transmit wait bit (TXPR1–TXPR15) in the transmit wait register (TXPR) are automatically
initialized. Also, if the corresponding bit (MBIMR1–MBIMR15) in the mailbox interrupt mask
register (MBIMR) and the mailbox empty interrupt bit (IRR8) in the interrupt mask register
(IMR) are set to the interrupt enable state at the same time, an interrupt can be sent to the CPU.
• Message transmission cancellation
Transmission cancellation can be specified for a message stored in a mailbox as a transmit wait
message. A transmit wait message is canceled by setting the bit for the corresponding mailbox
(TXCR1–TXCR15) to 1 in the transmit cancel register (TXCR). When cancellation is
executed, the transmit wait register (TXPR) is automatically reset, and the corresponding bit is
set to 1 in the abort acknowledge register (ABACK). An interrupt to the CPU can be requested.
Also, if the mailbox empty interrupt (IRR8) is enabled for the bits (MBIMR1–MBIMR15)
corresponding to the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR) and interrupt mask register
(IMR), interrupts may be sent to the CPU.
However, a transmit wait message cannot be canceled at the following times:
a. During internal arbitration or CAN bus arbitration
b. During data frame or remote frame transmission
Also, transmission cannot be canceled by clearing the transmit wait register (TXPR). Figure
15.8 shows a flowchart of transmit message cancellation.
• Message retransmission
If transmission of a transmit message is aborted in the following cases, the message is
retransmitted automatically:
a.
CAN bus arbitration failure (failure to acquire the bus)
b.
Error during transmission (bit error, stuff error, CRC error, frame error, ACK error)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 572 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Message transmit wait TXPR setting
Set TXCR bit corresponding to message
to be canceled
Cancellation possible?
No
Yes
Message not sent
Clear TXCR, TXPR
ABACK = 1
IRR8 = 1
IMR8 = 1?
Completion of message transmission
TXACK = 1
Clear TXCR, TXPR
IRR8 = 1
Yes
No
Interrupt to CPU
Clear TXACK
Clear ABACK
Clear IRR8
: Settings by user
End of transmission/transmission
cancellation
: Processing by hardware
Figure 15.8 Transmit Message Cancellation Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 573 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.3.4
Receive Mode
Message reception is performed using mailboxes 0 and 1 to 15. The reception procedure is
described below, and a reception flowchart is shown in figure 15.9.
Initialization (after hardware reset only)
a. Clearing of IRR0 bit in interrupt register (IRR)
b. Bit rate settings
c. Mailbox transmit/receive settings
d. Mailbox (RAM) initialization
Interrupt and receive message settings
a. CPU interrupt source setting
b. Arbitration field setting
c. Local acceptance filter mask (LAFM) settings
Message reception and interrupts
a. Message reception CRC check
b. Data frame reception
c. Remote frame reception
d. Unread message reception
Initialization (After Hardware Reset Only): These settings should be made while the HCAN is
in bit configuration mode.
• IRR0 clearing
The reset interrupt flag (IRR0) is always set after a reset or recovery from software standby
mode. As an HCAN interrupt is initiated immediately when interrupts are enabled, IRR0
should be cleared.
• Bit rate settings
Set values relating to the CAN bus communication speed and resynchronization. Refer to Bit
Rate and Bit Timing Setting in 15.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
• Mailbox transmit/receive settings
Each channel has one receive-only mailbox (mailbox 0) plus 15 mailboxes that can be set for
reception. Thus a total of 16 mailboxes can be used for reception. To set a mailbox for
reception, set the corresponding bit to 1 in the mailbox configuration register (MBCR). The
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 574 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
initial setting for mailboxes is 0, designating transmission use. Refer to Mailbox
transmit/receive settings in 15.3.2, Initialization after Hardware Reset, for details.
• Mailbox (RAM) initialization
As message control/data registers (MCx[x], MDx[x]) are configured in RAM, their initial
values after powering on are undefined, and so bit initialization is necessary. Write 0s or 1s to
the mailboxes. See Mailbox (Message Control/Data (MCx[x], MDx[x]) Initial Settings in
15.3.2, Initialization after a Hardware Reset, for details.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 575 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
: Settings by user
Initialization
IRR0 clearing
BCR setting
MBCR setting
Mailbox (RAM) initialization
: Processing by hardware
Interrupt settings
Receive data setting
Arbitration field setting
Local acceptance filter settings
Message reception
(Match of identifier
in mailbox?)
No
Yes
Same RXPR = 1?
Yes
No
Unread message
No
Data frame?
Yes
RXPR
IRR1 = 1
RXPR, RFPR = 1
IRR2 = 1, IRR1 = 1
Yes
IMR1 = 1?
IMR2 = 1?
No
No
Interrupt to CPU
Interrupt to CPU
Message control read
Message data read
Message control read
Message data read
Clear all RXPRn bits of mailbox for which
receive interrupt requests are enabled
by MBIMR
Clear all RXPRn bits of mailbox for which
receive interrupt requests are enabled
by MBIMR
IRR1 = 0
IRR2 = 0, IRR1 = 0
Transmission of data frame corresponding
to remote frame
End of reception
Figure 15.9 Reception Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 576 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Yes
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Interrupt and Receive Message Settings: When mailbox initialization is finished, CPU interrupt
source settings and receive message specifications must be made. Interrupt source settings are
made in the mailbox interrupt register (MBIMR) and interrupt mask register (IMR). To receive a
message, the identifier must be set in advance in the message control (MCx[1]–MCx[8]) for the
receiving mailbox. When a message is received, all the bits in the receive message identifier are
compared, and if a 100% match is found, the message is stored in the matching mailbox. Mailbox
0 (MC0[x], MD0[x]) has a local acceptance filter mask (LAFM) that allows Don’t care settings to
be made.
• CPU interrupt source settings
When transmitting, transmission acknowledge and transmission abort acknowledge interrupts
can be masked for individual mailboxes in the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR).
When receiving, data frame and remote frame receive wait interrupts can be masked. Interrupt
register (IRR) interrupts can be masked in the interrupt mask register (IMR).
• Arbitration field setting
In the arbitration field, the identifier (STD_ID0–STD_ID10, EXT_ID0–EXT_ID17) of the
message to be received is set. If all the bits in the set identifier do not match, the message is not
stored in a mailbox.
Example: Mailbox 1
010_1010_1010 (standard identifier)
Only one kind of message identifier can be received by MB1
Identifier 1:
010_1010_1010
• Local acceptance filter mask (LAFM) setting
The local acceptance filter mask is provided for mailbox 0 (MC0[x], MD0[x]) only, enabling a
Don’t care specification to be made for all bits in the received identifier. This allows various
kinds of messages to be received.
Example: Mailbox 0
LAFM
010_1010_1010 (standard identifier)
000_0000_0011 (0: Care, 1: Don’t care)
A total of four kinds of message identifiers can be received by MB0
Identifier 1:
010_1010_1000
Identifier 2:
010_1010_1001
Identifier 3:
010_1010_1010
Identifier 4:
010_1010_1011
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 577 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Message Reception and Interrupts:
• Message reception CRC check
When a message is received, a CRC check is performed automatically (by hardware). If the
result of the CRC check is normal, ACK is transmitted in the ACK field irrespective of
whether or not the message can be received.
• Data frame reception
If the received message is confirmed to be error-free by the CRC check, etc., the identifier in
the mailbox (and also LAFM in the case of mailbox 0 only) and the identifier of the receive
message are compared, and if a complete match is found, the message is stored in the mailbox.
The message identifier comparison is carried out on each mailbox in turn, starting with
mailbox 0 and ending with mailbox 15. If a complete match is found, the comparison ends at
that point, the message is stored in the matching mailbox, and the corresponding receive
complete bit (RXPR0–RXPR15) is set in the receive complete register (RXPR). However,
when a mailbox 0 LAFM comparison is carried out, even if the identifier matches, the mailbox
comparison sequence does not end at that point, but continues with mailbox 1 and then the
remaining mailboxes. It is therefore possible for a message matching mailbox 0 to be received
by another mailbox (however, the same message cannot be stored in more than one of
mailboxes 1 to 15). If the corresponding bit (MBIMR0–MBIMR15) in the mailbox interrupt
mask register (MBIMR) and the receive message interrupt mask (IMR1) in the interrupt mask
register (IMR) are set to the interrupt enable value at this time, an interrupt can be sent to the
CPU.
• Remote frame reception
Two kinds of messages—data frames and remote frames—can be stored in mailboxes. A
remote frame differs from a data frame in that the remote reception request bit (RTR) in the
message control register (MC[x]5) and the data field are 0 bytes. The data length to be returned
in a data frame must be stored in the data length code (DLC) in the control field.
When a remote frame (RTR = recessive) is received, the corresponding bit is set in the remote
request wait register (RFPR). If the corresponding bit (MBIMR0–MBIMR15) in the mailbox
interrupt mask register (MBIMR) and the remote frame request interrupt mask (IRR2) in the
interrupt mask register (IMR) are set to the interrupt enable value at this time, an interrupt can
be sent to the CPU.
• Unread message reception
When the identifier in a mailbox matches a receive message, the message is stored in the
mailbox. If a message overwrite occurs before the CPU reads the message, the corresponding
bit (UMSR0–UMSR15) is set in the unread message register (UMSR). In overwriting of an
unread message, when a new message is received before the corresponding bit in the receive
complete register (RXPR) has been cleared, the unread message register (UMSR) is set. If the
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 578 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
unread interrupt flag (IRR9) in the interrupt mask register (IMR) is set to the interrupt enable
value at this time, an interrupt can be sent to the CPU. Figure 15.10 shows a flowchart of
unread message overwriting.
Unread message overwrite
UMSR = 1
IRR9 = 1
IMR9 = 1?
Yes
No
Interrupt to CPU
Clear IRR9
Message control/message data read
: Settings by user
End
: Processing by hardware
Figure 15.10 Unread Message Overwrite Flowchart
15.3.5
HCAN Sleep Mode
The HCAN is provided with an HCAN sleep mode that places the HCAN module in the sleep
state to reduce current dissipation. Figure 15.11 shows a flowchart of the HCAN sleep mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 579 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
MCR5 = 1
Bus idle?
No
Yes
Initialize TEC and REC
Bus operation?
No
Yes
IRR12 = 1
IMR12 = 1?
No
CPU interrupt
Yes
Sleep mode clearing method
MCR7 = 0?
No (automatic)
Yes (manual)
MCR5 = 0
Clear sleep mode?
No
Yes
MCR5=0
11 recessive bits?
Yes
CAN bus communication possible
No
: Settings by user
: Processing by hardware
Figure 15.11 HCAN Sleep Mode Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 580 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
HCAN sleep mode is entered by setting the HCAN sleep mode bit (MCR5) to 1 in the master
control register (MCR). If the CAN bus is operating, the transition to HCAN sleep mode is
delayed until the bus becomes idle.
Either of the following methods of clearing HCAN sleep mode can be selected by making a setting
in the MCR7 bit.
1. Clearing by software
2. Clearing by CAN bus operation
Eleven recessive bits must be received after HCAN sleep mode is cleared before CAN bus
communication is enabled again.
Clearing by software: HCAN sleep mode is cleared by writing a 0 to MCR5 from the CPU.
Clearing by CAN bus operation: Clearing by CAN bus operation occurs automatically when the
CAN bus performs an operation and this change is detected. In this case, the first message is not
received in the mailbox, and normal reception starts from the next message. When a change is
detected on the CAN bus in HCAN sleep mode, the bus operation interrupt flag (IRR12) is set in
the interrupt register (IRR). If the bus interrupt mask (IMR12) in the interrupt mask register (IMR)
is set to the interrupt enable value at this time, an interrupt can be sent to the CPU.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 581 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.3.6
HCAN Halt Mode
The HCAN halt mode is provided to enable mailbox settings to be changed without performing an
HCAN hardware or software reset. Figure 15.12 shows a flowchart of the HCAN halt mode.
MCR1 = 1
Bus idle?
No
Yes
MBCR setting
MCR1 = 0
: Settings by user
CAN bus communication possible
: Processing by hardware
Figure 15.12 HCAN Halt Mode Flowchart
HCAN halt mode is entered by setting the halt request bit (MCR1) to 1 in the master control
register (MCR). If the CAN bus is operating, the transition to HCAN halt mode is delayed until
the bus becomes idle.
HCAN halt mode is cleared by clearing MCR1 to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 582 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.3.7
Interrupt Interface
There are 12 HCAN interrupt sources, to which five independent interrupt vectors are assigned.
Table 15.5 lists the HCAN interrupt sources.
With the exception of the reset processing vector (IRR0), these sources can be masked. Masking is
implemented using the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR) and interrupt mask register
(IMR).
Table 15.5 HCAN Interrupt Sources
IPR Bits
Vector
Vector
Number
IRR Bit
Description
IPRM (6–4)
ERS0
104
IRR5
Error passive interrupt (TEC ≥ 128 or REC ≥
128)
IRR6
Bus off interrupt (TEC ≥ 256)
OVR0
105
IRR0
Hardware reset processing interrupt
IRR2
Remote frame reception interrupt
IRR3
Error warning interrupt (TEC ≥ 96)
IRR4
Error warning interrupt (REC ≥ 96)
IRR7
Overload frame transmission interrupt/bus off
recovery interrupt (11 recessive bits × 128 times)
IRR9
Unread message overwrite interrupt
IRR12
HCAN sleep mode CAN bus operation interrupt
IPRM (2–0)
RM0
106
IRR1
Mailbox 0 message reception interrupt
RM1
107
IRR1
Mailbox 1–15 message reception interrupt
SLE0
108
IRR8
Message transmission/cancellation interrupt
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 583 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.3.8
DTC Interface
The DTC can be activated by reception of a message in the HCAN’s mailbox 0. When DTC
transfer ends after DTC activation has been set, the RXPR0 and RFPR0 flags are acknowledge
signal automatically. An interrupt request due to a receive interrupt from the HCAN cannot be sent
to the CPU in this case. Figure 15.13 shows a DTC transfer flowchart.
DTC initialization
DTC enable register setting
DTC register information setting
Message reception in HCAN’s
mailbox 0
DTC activation
End of DTC transfer?
No
Yes
RXPR and RFPR clearing
Transfer counter = 0
or DISEL = 1?
No
Yes
Interrupt to CPU
: Settings by user
End
Figure 15.13 DTC Transfer Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 584 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
: Processing by hardware
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
15.4
CAN Bus Interface
A bus transceiver IC is necessary to connect the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group chip to a
CAN bus. A Philips PCA82C250 transceiver IC, or compatible device, is recommended. Figure
15.14 shows a sample connection diagram.
H8S/2626 Group or
H8S/2623 Group
124 Ω
Vcc
PCA82C250
RS
Vcc
HRxD
RxD CANH
HTxD
TxD CANL
Vref
CAN bus
GND
No connection
124 Ω
Figure 15.14 High-Speed Interface Using PCA82C250
15.5
Usage Notes
1. Reset
The HCAN is reset by a reset, and in hardware standby mode and software standby mode. All
the registers are initialized in a reset, but mailboxes (message control (MCx[x])/message data
(MDx[x]) are not. However, after powering on, mailboxes (message control
(MCx[x])/message data (MDx[x]) are initialized, and their values are undefined. Therefore,
mailbox initialization must always be carried out after a reset or a transition to hardware
standby mode or software standby mode. Also, the reset interrupt flag (IRR0) is always set
after reset input or recovery from software standby mode. As this bit cannot be masked in the
interrupt mask register (IMR), if HCAN interrupts are set as enabled by the interrupt controller
without this flag having been cleared, an HCAN interrupt will be initiated immediately. IRR0
must therefore be cleared during initialization.
2. HCAN sleep mode
The bus operation interrupt flag (IRR12) in the interrupt register (IRR) is set by bus operation
in HCAN sleep mode. Therefore, this flag is not used by the HCAN to indicate sleep mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 585 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
release. Also note that the reset status bit (GSR3) in the general status register (GSR) is set in
sleep mode.
3. Interrupts
When the mailbox interrupt mask register (MBIMR) is set, the interrupt register (IRR8.2.1) is
not set by reception completion, transmission completion, or transmission cancellation for the
set mailboxes.
4. Error counters
In the case of error active and error passive, REC and TEC normally count up and down. In the
bus off state, 11-bit recessive sequences are counted (REC + 1) using REC. If REC reaches 96
during the count, IRR4 and GSR1 are set, and if REC reaches 128, IRR7 is set.
5. Register access
Byte or word access can be used on all HCAN registers. Longword access cannot be used.
6. HCAN medium-speed mode
HCAN registers cannot be read or written to in medium-speed mode.
7. Register retention during standby
All HCAN registers are initialized in hardware standby mode and software standby mode.
8. Using bit operation instructions
Start flags in HCAN are cleared by writing 1 to them; there is no need to use bit operation
instructions to clear them. To clear a flag, use the MOV instruction to write a 1 to the bit to be
cleared.
9. HTxD pin output in error passive state
If the HRxD pin becomes fixed at 1 during message transmission or reception when the HCAN
is in the error active state, the HTxD pin will output 0 continuously while in the error passive
state. To stop continuous 0 output to the CAN bus, disable the HCAN by means of an error
warning interrupt or by setting the HCAN module stop mode through detection of a fixed 1
state by the HxRD pin monitor.
10. Transition to HCAN sleep mode
The HCAN stops (transmission/reception stops) when MCR0 is cleared to 0 immediately after
an HCAN sleep mode transition effected by setting TXPR of the HCAN to 1 and setting
MCR5 to 1. When a transition is made to the HCAN sleep mode by means of the above steps,
a 10-cycle wait should be inserted after the TxPR setting. After an HCAN sleep mode
transition, release the HCAN sleep mode by clearing MCR5 to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 586 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
11. Message transmission cancellation (TxCR)
If all the following conditions are met when cancellation of a transmission message is
performed by means of TxCR of the HCAN, the TxCR or TxPR bit indicating cancellation is
not cleared even though internal transmission is canceled.
When canceling a message using TxCR, 1 should be written continuously until TxCR or TxPR
becomes 0.
12. TxCR in the bus off state
If TxPR is set before the HCAN goes to the bus off state, and a transition is made to the bus off
state with transmission incomplete, cancellation will be performed even if TxCR is set during
the bus off period, and the message will be transmitted after a transition to the error active
state.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 587 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 15 Controller Area Network (HCAN)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 588 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group include a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D
converter that allows up to sixteen analog input channels to be selected.
16.1.1
Features
A/D converter features are listed below.
• 10-bit resolution
• Sixteen input channels
• Settable analog conversion voltage range
 Conversion of analog voltages with the reference voltage pin (Vref) as the analog reference
voltage
• High-speed conversion
 Minimum conversion time: 13.3 µs per channel (at 20-MHz operation)
• Choice of single mode or scan mode
 Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion
 Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels
• Four data registers
 Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel
• Sample and hold function
• Three kinds of conversion start
 Choice of software or timer conversion start trigger (TPU), or ADTRG pin
• A/D conversion end interrupt generation
 A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request can be generated at the end of A/D conversion
• Module stop mode can be set
 As the initial setting, A/D converter operation is halted. Register access is enabled by
exiting module stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 589 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter.
Module data bus
Vref
10-bit D/A
AVSS
A
D
D
R
A
A
D
D
R
B
A
D
D
R
C
A
D
D
R
D
A
D
C
S
R
A
D
C
R
φ/2
+
–
Multiplexer
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
AN8
AN9
AN10
AN11
AN12
AN13
AN14
AN15
Bus interface
Successive approximations
register
AVCC
Internal data bus
Comparator
φ/4
Control circuit
φ/8
Sample-andhold circuit
φ/16
ADI
interrupt
ADTRG
Conversion start
trigger from TPU
ADCR : A/D control register
ADCSR : A/D control/status register
ADDRA : A/D data register A
ADDRB : A/D data register B
ADDRC : A/D data register C
ADDRD : A/D data register D
Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 590 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 16.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter.
The AVCC and AVSS pins are the power supply pins for the analog block in the A/D converter.
The Vref pin is the A/D conversion reference voltage pin.
The 16 analog input pins are divided into two channel sets and two groups, with analog input pins
0 to 7 (AN0 to AN7) comprising channel set 0, analog input pins 8 to 15 (AN8 to AN15)
comprising channel set 1, analog input pins 0 to 3 and 8 to 11 (AN0 to AN3, AN8 to AN11)
comprising group 0, and analog input pins 4 to 7 and 12 to 15 (AN4 to AN7, AN12 to AN15)
comprising group 1.
Table 16.1 A/D Converter Pins
Pin Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Analog power supply pin
AVCC
Input
Analog block power supply
Analog ground pin
AVSS
Input
Analog block ground and reference voltage
Reference voltage pin
Vref
Input
A/D conversion reference voltage
Analog input pin 0
AN0
Input
Channel set 0 (CH3 = 0) group 0 analog inputs
Analog input pin 1
AN1
Input
Analog input pin 2
AN2
Input
Analog input pin 3
AN3
Input
Analog input pin 4
AN4
Input
Analog input pin 5
AN5
Input
Analog input pin 6
AN6
Input
Analog input pin 7
AN7
Input
Analog input pin 8
AN8
Input
Analog input pin 9
AN9
Input
Analog input pin 10
AN10
Input
Analog input pin 11
AN11
Input
Analog input pin 12
AN12
Input
Analog input pin 13
AN13
Input
Analog input pin 14
AN14
Input
Analog input pin 15
AN15
Input
A/D external trigger input
pin
ADTRG
Input
Channel set 0 (CH3 = 0) group 1 analog inputs
Channel set 1 (CH3 = 1) group 0 analog inputs
Channel set 1 (CH3 = 1) group 1 analog inputs
External trigger input for starting A/D conversion
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 591 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 16.2 summarizes the registers of the A/D converter.
Table 16.2 A/D Converter Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
1
Address*
A/D data register AH
ADDRAH
R
H'00
H'FF90
A/D data register AL
ADDRAL
R
H'00
H'FF91
A/D data register BH
ADDRBH
R
H'00
H'FF92
A/D data register BL
ADDRBL
R
H'00
H'FF93
A/D data register CH
ADDRCH
R
H'00
H'FF94
A/D data register CL
ADDRCL
R
H'00
H'FF95
A/D data register DH
ADDRDH
R
H'00
H'FF96
A/D data register DL
ADDRDL
R
H'00
H'FF97
ADCSR
2
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FF98
A/D control register
ADCR
R/W
H'33
H'FF99
Module stop control register A
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
A/D control/status register
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Bit 7 can only be written with 0 for flag clearing.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 592 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.2
Register Descriptions
16.2.1
A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)
Bit
:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 —
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
:
There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers, ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of
A/D conversion.
The 10-bit data resulting from A/D conversion is transferred to the ADDR register for the selected
channel and stored there. The upper 8 bits of the converted data are transferred to the upper byte
(bits 15 to 8) of ADDR, and the lower 2 bits are transferred to the lower byte (bits 7 and 6) and
stored. Bits 5 to 0 are always read as 0.
The correspondence between the analog input channels and ADDR registers is shown in
table 16.3.
ADDR can always be read by the CPU. The upper byte can be read directly, but for the lower
byte, data transfer is performed via a temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 16.3,
Interface to Bus Master.
The ADDR registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop
mode.
Table 16.3 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers
Analog Input Channel
Channel Set 0 (CH3 = 0)
Channel Set 1 (CH3 = 1)
Group 0
Group 1
Group 0
Group 1
A/D Data Register
AN0
AN4
AN8
AN12
ADDRA
AN1
AN5
AN9
AN13
ADDRB
AN2
AN6
AN10
AN14
ADDRC
AN3
AN7
AN11
AN15
ADDRD
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 593 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.2.2
A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to bit 7, to clear this flag.
ADCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls A/D conversion operations.
ADCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode or module stop mode.
Bit 7—A/D End Flag (ADF): Status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion.
Bit 7
ADF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
When 0 is written to the ADF flag after reading ADF = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by an ADI interrupt and ADDR is read
(Initial value)
[Setting conditions]
•
Single mode: When A/D conversion ends
•
Scan mode: When A/D conversion ends on all specified channels
Bit 6—A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Selects enabling or disabling of interrupt (ADI) requests
at the end of A/D conversion.
Bit 6
ADIE
Description
0
A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request disabled
1
A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request enabled
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 594 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 16 A/D Converter
Bit 5—A/D Start (ADST): Selects starting or stopping on A/D conversion. Holds a value of 1
during A/D conversion.
The ADST bit can be set to 1 by software, a timer conversion start trigger, or the A/D external
trigger input pin (ADTRG).
Bit 5
ADST
Description
0
•
A/D conversion stopped
1
•
Single mode: A/D conversion is started. Cleared to 0 automatically when
conversion on the specified channel ends
•
Scan mode: A/D conversion is started. Conversion continues sequentially on the
selected channels until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or
a transition to standby mode or module stop mode.
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D conversion operating
mode. See section 16.4, Operation, for single mode and scan mode operation. Only set the SCAN
bit while conversion is stopped (ADST = 0).
Bit 4
SCAN
Description
0
Single mode
1
Scan mode
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Channel Select 3 (CH3): Switches the analog input pins assigned to group 0 or group 1.
Setting CH3 to 1 enables AN8 to AN15 to be used instead of AN0 to AN7.
Bit 3
CH3
Description
0
AN8 to AN11 are group 0 analog input pins, AN12 to AN15 are group 1 analog input
pins
1
AN0 to AN3 are group 0 analog input pins, AN4 to AN7 are group 1 analog input pins
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 595 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
Bits 2 to 0—Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): Together with the SCAN bit, these bits select
the analog input channels.
Only set the input channel while conversion is stopped (ADST = 0).
Channel Selection
Description
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
Single Mode
(SCAN = 0)
Scan Mode
(SCAN = 1)
0
0
0
0
AN0
AN0
1
AN1
AN0, AN1
0
AN2
AN0 to AN2
1
AN3
AN0 to AN3
0
AN4
AN4
1
AN5
AN4, AN5
0
AN6
AN4 to AN6
1
AN7
AN4 to AN7
0
AN8
AN8
1
AN9
AN8, AN9
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
0
AN10
AN8 to AN10
1
AN11
AN8 to AN11
0
AN12
AN12
1
AN13
AN12, AN13
0
AN14
AN12 to AN14
1
AN15
AN12 to AN15
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 596 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.2.3
A/D Control Register (ADCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TRGS1
TRGS0
—
—
CKS1
CKS0
—
—
:
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
Initial value :
R/W
:
ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables external triggering of A/D
conversion operations and sets the A/D conversion time.
ADCR is initialized to H'33 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Timer Trigger Select 1 and 0 (TRGS1, TRGS0): Select enabling or disabling of
the start of A/D conversion by a trigger signal. Only set bits TRGS1 and TRGS0 while conversion
is stopped (ADST = 0).
Bit 7
Bit 6
TRGS1
TRGS0
Description
0
0
A/D conversion start by software is enabled
1
A/D conversion start by TPU conversion start trigger is enabled
1
(Initial value)
0
Setting prohibited
1
A/D conversion start by external trigger pin (ADTRG) is enabled
Bits 5, 4, 1, and 0—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bits 3 and 2—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1, CKS0): These bits select the A/D conversion time.
The conversion time should be changed only when ADST = 0. Make a setting that gives a value
not lower than that shown in table 22-8.
Bit 3
Bit 2
CKS1
CKS0
Description
0
0
Conversion time = 530 states (max.)
1
Conversion time = 266 states (max.)
0
Conversion time = 134 states (max.)
1
Conversion time = 68 states (max.)
1
(Initial value)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 597 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.2.4
Bit
Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
1
MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCR is a 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPA1 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, A/D converter operation stops at the end of the bus
cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in
module stop mode. For details, see sections 21A.5, 21B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 1—Module Stop (MSTPA1): Specifies the A/D converter module stop mode.
Bit 1
MSTPA1
Description
0
A/D converter module stop mode cleared
1
A/D converter module stop mode set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 598 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.3
Interface to Bus Master
ADDRA to ADDRD are 16-bit registers, and the data bus to the bus master is 8 bits wide.
Therefore, in accesses by the bus master, the upper byte is accessed directly, but the lower byte is
accessed via a temporary register (TEMP).
A data read from ADDR is performed as follows. When the upper byte is read, the upper byte
value is transferred to the CPU and the lower byte value is transferred to TEMP. Next, when the
lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU.
When reading ADDR. always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible to read only
the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained.
Figure 16.2 shows the data flow for ADDR access.
Upper byte read
Bus master
(H'AA)
Module data bus
Bus interface
TEMP
(H'40)
ADDRnH
(H'AA)
ADDRnL
(H'40)
(n = A to D)
Lower byte read
Bus master
(H'40)
Module data bus
Bus interface
TEMP
(H'40)
ADDRnH
(H'AA)
ADDRnL
(H'40)
(n = A to D)
Figure 16.2 ADDR Access Operation (Reading H'AA40)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 599 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.4
Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two
operating modes: single mode and scan mode.
16.4.1
Single Mode (SCAN = 0)
Single mode is selected when A/D conversion is to be performed on a single channel only. A/D
conversion is started when the ADST bit is set to 1, according to the software or external trigger
input. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0
when conversion ends.
On completion of conversion, the ADF flag is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an
ADI interrupt request is generated. The ADF flag is cleared by writing 0 after reading ADCSR.
When the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to
prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After
making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST
bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel is changed.
Typical operations when channel 1 (AN1) is selected in single mode are described next. Figure
16.3 shows a timing diagram for this example.
[1] Single mode is selected (SCAN = 0), input channel AN1 is selected (CH3 = 0, CH2 = 0,
CH1 = 0, CH0 = 1), the A/D interrupt is enabled (ADIE = 1), and A/D conversion is started
(ADST = 1).
[2] When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to ADDRB. At the same time the
ADF flag is set to 1, the ADST bit is cleared to 0, and the A/D converter becomes idle.
[3] Since ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, an ADI interrupt is requested.
[4] The A/D interrupt handling routine starts.
[5] The routine reads ADCSR, then writes 0 to the ADF flag.
[6] The routine reads and processes the connection result (ADDRB).
[7] Execution of the A/D interrupt handling routine ends. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1,
A/D conversion starts again and steps [2] to [7] are repeated.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 600 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
Set*
ADIE
ADST
A/D
conversion
starts
Set*
Set*
Clear*
Clear*
ADF
State of channel 0 (AN0)
Idle
State of channel 1 (AN1)
Idle
State of channel 2 (AN2)
Idle
State of channel 3 (AN3)
Idle
A/D conversion 1
Idle
A/D conversion 2
Idle
ADDRA
ADDRB
Read conversion result
A/D conversion result 1
Read conversion result
A/D conversion result 2
ADDRC
ADDRD
Note: * Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.
Figure 16.3 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 601 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.4.2
Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)
Scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. When the
ADST bit is set to 1 by a software, timer or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the
first channel in the group (AN0). When two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the
first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts immediately. A/D conversion
continues cyclically on the selected channels until the ADST bit is cleared to 0. The conversion
results are transferred for storage into the ADDR registers corresponding to the channels.
When the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to
prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After
making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again from the first
channel (AN0). The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel
is changed.
Typical operations when three channels (AN0 to AN2) are selected in scan mode are described
next. Figure 16.4 shows a timing diagram for this example.
[1] Scan mode is selected (SCAN = 1), channel set 0 is selected (CH3 = 0), scan group 0 is
selected (CH2 = 0), analog input channels AN0 to AN2 are selected (CH1 = 1, CH0 = 0), and
A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1)
[2] When A/D conversion of the first channel (AN0) is completed, the result is transferred to
ADDRA. Next, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts automatically.
[3] Conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (AN2).
[4] When conversion of all the selected channels (AN0 to AN2) is completed, the ADF flag is set
to 1 and conversion of the first channel (AN0) starts again. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this
time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion ends.
[5] Steps [2] to [4] are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is
cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion
starts again from the first channel (AN0).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 602 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
Continuous A/D conversion execution
Clear*1
Set*1
ADST
Clear*1
ADF
A/D conversion time
State of channel 0 (AN0)
State of channel 1 (AN1)
State of channel 2 (AN2)
Idle
Idle
A/D conversion 1
Idle
Idle
A/D conversion 2
Idle
Idle
A/D conversion 4
A/D conversion 5 *2
Idle
A/D conversion 3
State of channel 3 (AN3)
Idle
Idle
Transfer
ADDRA
A/D conversion result 4
A/D conversion result 1
ADDRB
A/D conversion result 2
ADDRC
A/D conversion result 3
ADDRD
Notes: 1. Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.
2. Data currently being converted is ignored.
Figure 16.4 Example of A/D Converter Operation
(Scan Mode, 3 Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 603 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.4.3
Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog
input at a time tD after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 16.5 shows the A/D
conversion timing. Table 16.4 indicates the A/D conversion time.
As indicated in figure 16.5, the A/D conversion time includes tD and the input sampling time. The
length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion
time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 16.4.
In scan mode, the values given in table 16.4 apply to the first conversion time. The values given
in table 16.5 apply to the second and subsequent conversions. In both cases, set bits CKS1 and
CKS0 in ADCR to give a value not lower than that shown in table 22-8.
(1)
φ
(2)
Address
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
tD
t SPL
t CONV
Legend:
(1)
:
(2)
:
tD
:
tSPL
:
tCONV :
ADCSR write cycle
ADCSR address
A/D conversion start delay
Input sampling time
A/D conversion time
Figure 16.5 A/D Conversion Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 604 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
Table 16.4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS1 = 0
Item
Symbol
CKS0 = 0
Min
CKS1 = 0
CKS0 = 1
Typ Max Min
CKS0 = 0
Typ Max Min
CKS0 = 1
Typ Max Min
Typ Max
A/D conversion start
delay
tD
18
—
33
10
—
17
6
—
9
4
—
5
Input sampling time
tSPL
—
127
—
—
63
—
—
31
—
—
15
—
A/D conversion time
tCONV
515
—
530
259
—
266
131
—
134
67
—
68
Note: Values in the table are the number of states.
Table 16.5 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode)
CKS1
CKS0
Conversion Time (State)
0
0
512 (Fixed)
1
256 (Fixed)
0
128 (Fixed)
1
64 (Fixed)
1
16.4.4
External Trigger Input Timing
A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits are set to 11 in
ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG pin sets
the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan
modes, are the same as if the ADST bit has been set to 1 by software. Figure 16.6 shows the
timing.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 605 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
φ
ADTRG
Internal trigger signal
ADST
A/D conversion
Figure 16.6 External Trigger Input Timing
16.5
Interrupts
The A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion.
ADI interrupt requests can be enabled or disabled by means of the ADIE bit in ADCSR.
The DTC can be activated by an ADI interrupt. Having the converted data read by the DTC in
response to an ADI interrupt enables continuous conversion to be achieved without imposing a
load on software.
The A/D converter interrupt source is shown in table 16.6.
Table 16.6 A/D Converter Interrupt Source
Interrupt Source
Description
DTC Activation
ADI
Interrupt due to end of conversion
Possible
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 606 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.6
Usage Notes
The following points should be noted when using the A/D converter.
Setting Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pins:
(1) Analog input voltage range
The voltage applied to analog input pin ANn during A/D conversion should be in the range
AVSS ≤ ANn ≤ Vref.
(2) Relation between AVCC, AVSS and VCC, VSS
As the relationship between AVCC, AVSS and VCC, VSS, set AVSS = VSS. If the A/D
converter is not used, the AVCC and AVSS pins must on no account be left open.
(3) Vref input range
The analog reference voltage input at the Vref pin set in the range Vref ≤ AVCC.
If conditions (1), (2), and (3) above are not met, the reliability of the device may be adversely
affected.
Notes on Board Design: In board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as
mutually isolated as possible, and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit
signal lines cross or are in close proximity should be avoided as far as possible. Failure to do so
may result in incorrect operation of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting A/D
conversion values.
Also, digital circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (AN0 to AN15), analog
reference power supply (Vref), and analog power supply (AVCC) by the analog ground (AVSS).
Also, the analog ground (AVSS) should be connected at one point to a stable digital ground (VSS)
on the board.
Notes on Noise Countermeasures: A protection circuit connected to prevent damage due to an
abnormal voltage such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN15) and analog
reference power supply (Vref) should be connected between AVCC and AVSS as shown in figure
16.7.
Also, the bypass capacitors connected to AVCC and Vref and the filter capacitor connected to
AN0 to AN15 must be connected to AVSS.
If a filter capacitor is connected as shown in figure 16.7, the input currents at the analog input pins
(AN0 to AN15) are averaged, and so an error may arise. Also, when A/D conversion is performed
frequently, as in scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 607 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
sample-and-hold circuit in the A/D converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance
(Rin), an error will arise in the analog input pin voltage. Careful consideration is therefore required
when deciding the circuit constants.
AVCC
Vref
100 Ω
Rin* 2
*1
AN0 to AN15
*1
0.1 µF
AVSS
Notes:
Values are reference values.
1.
10 µF
0.01 µF
2. Rin: Input impedance
Figure 16.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit
Table 16.7 Analog Pin Specifications
Item
Min
Max
Unit
Analog input capacitance
—
20
pF
Permissible signal source impedance
—
5
kΩ
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 608 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
10 kΩ
AN0 to AN15
To A/D converter
20 pF
Note: Values are reference values.
Figure 16.8 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit
A/D Conversion Precision Definitions: H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group A/D conversion
precision definitions are given below.
• Resolution
The number of A/D converter digital output codes
• Offset error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'00) to
B'0000000001 (H'01) (see figure 16.10).
• Full-scale error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3E) to B'1111111111 (H'3F) (see
figure 16.10).
• Quantization error
The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 16.9).
• Nonlinearity error
The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristic between the zero voltage and
the full-scale voltage. Does not include the offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error.
• Absolute precision
The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes the offset error,
full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 609 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
111
110
101
100
011
Quantization error
010
001
000
1
2
1024 1024
1022 1023
1024 1024
FS
Analog
input voltage
Figure 16.9 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (1)
Full-scale error
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
Nonlinearity
error
Actual A/D conversion
characteristic
FS
Offset error
Analog
input voltage
Figure 16.10 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (2)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 610 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
Permissible Signal Source Impedance: H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group analog input is
designed so that conversion precision is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source
impedance is 10 kΩ or less. This specification is provided to enable the A/D converter’s sampleand-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output
impedance exceeds 10 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee
the A/D conversion precision.
However, if a large capacitance is provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise
only the internal input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored.
However, since a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an
analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/µs or greater).
When converting a high-speed analog signal, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted.
Influences on Absolute Precision: Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and
therefore noise in GND may adversely affect absolute precision. Be sure to make the connection
to an electrically stable GND such as AVSS.
Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the
mounting board, so acting as antennas.
H8S/2626 Group or
H8S/2623 Group
Sensor output
impedance
to 5 kΩ
A/D converter
equivalent circuit
10 kΩ
Sensor input
Low-pass
filter C
to 0.1 µF
Cin =
15 pF
20 pF
Figure 16.11 Example of Analog Input Circuit
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 611 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 16 A/D Converter
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 612 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 17 D/A Converter [Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only]
Section 17 D/A Converter
[Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only]
17.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group has an on-chip two-channel D/A converter.
17.1.1
Features
The D/A converter has the following features.
• 8-bit resolution
• Two output channels
• Conversion time: maximum 10 µs (with 20 pF capacitive load)
• Output voltage: 0 V to Vref
• D/A output retention in software standby mode
• Module stop mode setting possible
 The initial setting is for D/A converter operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by
clearing module stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 613 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 17 D/A Converter [Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only]
17.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 17.1 shows a block diagram of the D/A converter.
Internal data bus
Bus interface
Module data bus
8-bit D/A
DA2
DACR23
DA3
DADR3
AVCC
DADR2
Vref
AVSS
Control circuit
Legend:
DACR23:
D/A control register 23
DADR2, DADR3: D/A data registers 2 and 3
Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of D/A Converter
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 614 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 17 D/A Converter [Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only]
17.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 17.1 summarizes the input and output pins used by the D/A converter.
Table 17.1 D/A Converter Pins
Pin Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Analog power supply pin
AVCC
Input
Analog power supply
Analog ground pin
AVSS
Input
Analog ground and reference voltage
Analog output pin 2
DA2
Output
Channel 2 analog output
Analog output pin 3
DA3
Output
Channel 3 analog output
Reference voltage pin
Vref
Input
Analog reference voltage
17.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 17.2 summarizes the registers of the D/A converter.
Table 17.2 D/A Converter Registers
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
2, 3
D/A data register 2
DADR2
R/W
H'00
H'FDAC
All
Note:
*
D/A data register 3
DADR3
R/W
H'00
H'FDAD
D/A control register 23
DACR23
R/W
H'1F
H'FDAE
Module stop control register C
MSTPCRC
R/W
H'FF
H'FDEA
Lower 16 bits of the address
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 615 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 17 D/A Converter [Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only]
17.2
Register Descriptions
17.2.1
D/A Data Registers 2 and 3 (DADR2, DADR3)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DADR2 and DADR3 are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store the data to be converted.
When analog output is enabled, the values in DADR2 and DADR3 are constantly converted and
output at the analog output pins.
The D/A data registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
17.2.2
Bit
D/A Control Register 23 (DACR23)
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DAOE1
DAOE0
DAE
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
DACR23 is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of the D/A converter.
DACR23 is initialized to H'1F by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—D/A Output Enable 1 (DAOE1): Controls D/A conversion and analog output.
Bit 7
DAOE1
Description
0
DA3 analog output is disabled
1
Channel 3 D/A conversion and DA3 analog output are enabled
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 616 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 17 D/A Converter [Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only]
Bit 6—D/A Output Enable 0 (DAOE0): Controls D/A conversion and analog output.
Bit 6
DAOE0
Description
0
DA2 analog output is disabled
1
Channel 2 D/A conversion and DA2 analog output are enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 5—D/A Enable (DAE): Controls D/A conversion, together with bits DAOE0 and DAOE1.
When the DAE bit is cleared to 0, D/A conversion is controlled independently in channels 2 and 3.
When the DAE bit is set to 1, D/A conversion is controlled together in channels 2 and 3.
Output of the conversion result is always controlled independently by bits DAOE0 and DAOE1.
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
DAOE1
DAOE0
DAE
Description
0
0
*
D/A conversion is disabled in channels 2 and 3 (Initial value)
1
0
D/A conversion is enabled in channel 2
D/A conversion is disabled in channel 3
0
0
1
D/A conversion is enabled in channels 2 and 3
0
D/A conversion is disabled in channel 2
D/A conversion is enabled in channel 3
1
1
D/A conversion is enabled in channels 2 and 3
*
D/A conversion is enabled in channels 2 and 3
*: Don’t care
If the chip enters software standby mode while D/A conversion is enabled, the D/A output is
retained and the analog power supply current is the same as the analog power supply current
during D/A conversion. If it is necessary to reduce the analog power supply current in software
standby mode, D/A output should be disabled by clearing both the DAOE0 bit and the DAOE1 bit
to 0.
Bits 4 to 0—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 617 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 17 D/A Converter [Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only]
17.2.3
Bit
Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC)
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0
Initial value :
R/W
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCRC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTPC5 bit is set to 1, D/A converter operation is stopped at the end of the bus cycle,
and module stop mode is entered. Register read/write accesses are not possible in module stop
mode. For details, see section 21B.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCRC is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 5—Module Stop (MSTPC5): Specifies module stop mode for the D/A converter (channels 2
and 3).
Bit 5
MSTPC5
Description
0
D/A converter (channels 2 and 3) module stop mode is cleared
1
D/A converter (channels 2 and 3) module stop mode is set
17.3
(Initial value)
Operation
The D/A converter has two built-in D/A conversion circuits that can perform conversion
independently.
D/A conversion is performed constantly while enabled in DACR23. If the DADR2 or DADR3
value is modified, conversion of the new data begins immediately. The conversion results are
output when bits DAOE0 and DAOE1 are set to 1.
An example of D/A conversion on channel 2 is given below. The timing is shown in figure 17.2.
1. Data to be converted is written in DADR2.
2. Bit DAOE0 is set to 1 in DACR23. D/A conversion starts and DA2 becomes an output pin.
The conversion result is output after the conversion time. The output value is (DADR2
contents/256) × Vref. Output of this conversion result continues until the value in DADR2 is
modified or the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 618 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 17 D/A Converter [Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only]
3. If the DADR2 value is modified, conversion starts immediately, and the result is output after
the conversion time.
4. When the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0, DA2 becomes an input pin.
DADR2
write cycle
DADR2
write cycle
DACR23
write cycle
DACR23
write cycle
φ
Address
DADR2
Conversion data 1
Conversion data 2
DAOE0
DA2
Conversion
result 2
Conversion
result 1
High-impedance state
tDCONV
tDCONV
Legend:
tDCONV: D/A conversion time
Figure 17.2 Example of D/A Converter Operation
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 619 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 17 D/A Converter [Provided in the H8S/2626 Group only]
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 620 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 18 RAM
Section 18 RAM
18.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 and H8S/2623 have 12 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static RAM, the H8S/2625
and H8S/2622 have 8 kbytes, and the H8S/2624 and H8S/2621 have 4 kbytes. The RAM is
connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling one-state access by the CPU to both byte data
and word data. This makes it possible to perform fast word data transfer.
The on-chip RAM can be enabled or disabled by means of the RAM enable bit (RAME) in the
system control register (SYSCR).
18.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'FFC000
H'FFC001
H'FFC002
H'FFC003
H'FFC004
H'FFC005
H'FFEFBE
H'FFEFBF
H'FFFFC0
H'FFFFC1
H'FFFFFE
H'FFFFFF
Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of RAM (H8S/2623)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 621 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 18 RAM
18.1.2
Register Configuration
The on-chip RAM is controlled by SYSCR. Table 18.1 shows the address and initial value of
SYSCR.
Table 18.1 RAM Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'01
H'FDE5
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
18.2
Register Descriptions
18.2.1
System Control Register (SYSCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MACS
—
INTM1
INTM0
NMIEG
—
—
RAME
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
The on-chip RAM is enabled or disabled by the RAME bit in SYSCR. For details of other bits in
SYSCR, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR).
Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is
initialized when the reset state is released. It is not initialized in software standby mode.
Note: When the DTC is used, the RAME bit must be set to 1.
Bit 0
RAME
Description
0
On-chip RAM is disabled
1
On-chip RAM is enabled
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 622 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 18 RAM
18.3
Operation
When the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to addresses H'FFC000 to H'FFEFBF and H'FFFFC0 to
H'FFFFFF in the H8S/2626 and H8S/2623, to addresses H'FFD000 to H'FFEFBF and H'FFFFC0
to H'FFFFFF in the H8S/2625 and H8S/2622, and to addresses H'FFE000 to H'FFEFBF and
H'FFFFC0 to H'FFFFFF in the H8S/2624 and H8S/2621, are directed to the on-chip RAM. When
the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the off-chip address space is accessed.
Since the on-chip RAM is connected to the CPU by an internal 16-bit data bus, it can be written to
and read in byte or word units. Each type of access can be performed in one state.
Even addresses use the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses use the lower 8 bits. Word data must start
at an even address.
18.4
Usage Notes
When Using the DTC: DTC register information can be located in addresses H'FFEBC0 to
H'FFEFBF. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit must not be cleared to 0.
Reserved Areas: Addresses H'FFB000 to H'FFBFFF in the H8S/2626 and H8S/2623, H'FFB000
to H'FFCFFF in the H8S/2625 and H8S/2622, and H'FFB000 to H'FFDFFF in the H8S/2624 and
H8S/2621, are reserved areas that cannot be read or written to. When the RAME bit is cleared to
0, external address space is accessed.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 623 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 18 RAM
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 624 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.1
Features
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have 256 kbytes of on-chip flash memory. The
features of the flash memory are summarized below.
• Four flash memory operating modes
 Program mode
 Erase mode
 Program-verify mode
 Erase-verify mode
• Programming/erase methods
The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Block erase (in single-block units) can
be performed. To erase the entire flash memory, each block must be erased in turn. Block
erasing can be performed as required on 4-kbyte, 32-kbyte, and 64-kbyte blocks.
• Programming/erase times
The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 128-byte programming,
equivalent to 78 µs (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.).
• Reprogramming capability
The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times.
• On-board programming modes
There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board:
 Boot mode
 User program mode
• Automatic bit rate adjustment
With data transfer in boot mode, the LSI’s bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match the
transfer bit rate of the host.
• Flash memory emulation in RAM
Flash memory programming can be emulated in real time by overlapping a part of RAM onto
flash memory.
• Protect modes
There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protection which allow protected
status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 625 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
• Programmer mode
Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer,
as well as in on-board programming mode.
19.2
Overview
19.2.1
Block Diagram
Internal address bus
Module bus
Internal data bus (16 bits)
FLMCR1
FLMCR2
EBR1
Bus interface/controller
Operating
mode
EBR2
RAMER
FLPWCR
Flash memory
(256 kbytes)
Legend:
FLMCR1:
FLMCR2:
EBR1:
EBR2:
RAMER:
FLPWCR:
Flash memory control register 1
Flash memory control register 2
Erase block register 1
Erase block register 2
RAM emulation register
Flash memory power control register
Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 626 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
FWE pin
Mode pin
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.2.2
Mode Transitions
When the mode pins and the FWE pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, the
microcomputer enters an operating mode as shown in figure 19.2. In user mode, flash memory can
be read but not programmed or erased.
The boot, user program and programmer modes are provided as modes to write and erase the flash
memory.
MD1 = 1,
MD2 = 1,
FWE = 0
*1
RES = 0
User mode
(on-chip ROM
enabled)
FWE = 1
Reset state
RES = 0
MD1 = 1,
MD2 = 1,
FWE = 1
RES = 0
FWE = 0
User
program mode
*2
MD1 = 1,
MD2 = 0,
FWE = 1
RES = 0
Programmer
mode
*1
Boot mode
On-board programming mode
Notes: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is
not accessing the flash memory.
1. RAM emulation possible
2. MD0 = 0, MD1 = 0, MD2 = 0, P14 = 0, P16 = 0, PF0 = 1
Figure 19.2 Flash Memory State Transitions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 627 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.2.3
On-Board Programming Modes
Boot Mode
1. Initial state
The old program version or data remains written
in the flash memory. The user should prepare the
programming control program and new
application program beforehand in the host.
2. Programming control program transfer
When boot mode is entered, the boot program
in the H8S/2626 or H8S/2623 (originally
incorporated in the chip) is started and the
programming control program in the host is
transferred to RAM via SCI communication. The
boot program required for flash memory erasing
is automatically transferred to the RAM boot
program area.
Host
Host
Programming control
program
New application
program
New application
program
LSI
LSI
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
SCI
Boot program
RAM
RAM
Flash memory
Boot program area
Application program
(old version)
Application program
(old version)
3. Flash memory initialization
The erase program in the boot program area (in
RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is
initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, total flash
memory erasure is performed, without regard to
blocks.
Programming control
program
4. Writing new application program
The programming control program transferred
from the host to RAM is executed, and the new
application program in the host is written into the
flash memory.
Host
Host
New application
program
LSI
LSI
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
Flash memory
Boot program area
Flash memory
preprogramming
erase
Programming control
program
SCI
Boot program
RAM
Boot program area
New application
program
Programming control
program
Program execution state
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 628 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
User Program Mode
1. Initial state
The FWE assessment program that confirms that
user program mode has been entered, and the
program that will transfer the programming/erase
control program from flash memory to on-chip
RAM should be written into the flash memory by
the user beforehand. The programming/erase
control program should be prepared in the host or
in the flash memory.
2. Programming/erase control program transfer
When user program mode is entered, user
software confirms this fact, executes transfer
program in the flash memory, and transfers the
programming/erase control program to RAM.
Host
Host
Programming/
erase control program
New application
program
New application
program
LSI
LSI
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
SCI
Boot program
RAM
RAM
Flash memory
FWE assessment
program
FWE assessment
program
Transfer program
Transfer program
Programming/
erase control program
Application program
(old version)
Application program
(old version)
3. Flash memory initialization
The programming/erase program in RAM is
executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to
H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units,
but not in byte units.
4. Writing new application program
Next, the new application program in the host is
written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do
not write to unerased blocks.
Host
Host
New application
program
LSI
LSI
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
FWE assessment
program
Flash memory
RAM
FWE assessment
program
Transfer program
Transfer program
Programming/
erase control program
Flash memory
erase
SCI
Boot program
Programming/
erase control program
New application
program
Program execution state
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 629 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.2.4
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
Emulation should be performed in user mode or user program mode. When the emulation block
set in RAMER is accessed while the emulation function is being executed, data written in the
overlap RAM is read.
SCI
Flash memory
RAM
Emulation block
Overlap RAM
(emulation is performed
on data written in RAM)
Application program
Execution state
Figure 19.3 Reading Overlap RAM Data in User Mode or User Program Mode
When overlap RAM data is confirmed, the RAMS bit is cleared, RAM overlap is released, and
writes should actually be performed to the flash memory.
When the programming control program is transferred to RAM, ensure that the transfer destination
and the overlap RAM do not overlap, as this will cause data in the overlap RAM to be rewritten.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 630 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
SCI
RAM
Flash memory
Programming data
Overlap RAM
(programming data)
Application program
Programming control
program execution state
Figure 19.4 Writing Overlap RAM Data in User Program Mode
19.2.5
Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Table 19.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Boot Mode
User Program Mode
Yes
Yes
Block erase
No
Yes
Programming control program*
Program/program-verify
Erase/erase-verify
Total erase
Program/program-verify
Emulation
Note:
*
To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 631 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.2.6
Block Configuration
The flash memory is divided into three 64-kbyte blocks, one 32-kbyte block, and eight 4-kbyte
blocks.
Address H'00000
4 kbytes × 8
32 kbytes
64 kbytes
256 kbytes
64 kbytes
64 kbytes
Address H'3FFFF
Figure 19.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration
19.3
Pin Configuration
The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 19.2.
Table 19.2 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation I/O
Function
Reset
RES
Reset
Input
Flash write enable FWE
Input
Flash memory program/erase protection by hardware
Mode 2
MD2
Input
Sets MCU operating mode
Mode 1
MD1
Input
Sets MCU operating mode
Mode 0
MD0
Input
Sets MCU operating mode
Port F0
PF0
Input
Sets MCU operating mode in programmer mode
Port 16
P16
Input
Sets MCU operating mode in programmer mode
Port 14
P14
Input
Sets MCU operating mode in programmer mode
Transmit data
TxD2
Output
Serial transmit data output
Receive data
RxD2
Input
Serial receive data input
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 632 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.4
Register Configuration
The registers used to control the on-chip flash memory when enabled are shown in table 19.3.
In order to access these registers, the FLSHE bit in SCRX must be set to 1 (except for RAMER,
SCRX).
Table 19.3 Register Configuration
Initial Value
Address*
H'00*
3
H'FFA8
R/W*
2
R/W*
H'00*
4
H'00*
H'FFAA
R/W
H'00
H'FEDB
6
Flash memory power control register*
5
RAMER*
5
FLPWCR*
2
R/W*
4
H'00*
H'FFAC
Serial control register X
SCRX
R/W
H'00
H'FDB4
Register Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR1*
5
FLMCR2*
R/W*
2
R*
EBR1*
5
EBR2*
Flash memory control register 2
Erase block register 1
Erase block register 2
RAM emulation register
5
5
2
H'00
2
1
H'FFA9
4
H'FFAB
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. To access these registers, set the FLSHE bit to 1 in serial control register X. Even if
FLSHE is set to 1, if the chip is in a mode in which the on-chip flash memory is
disabled, a read will return H'00 and writes are invalid. Writes are also invalid when the
FWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set to 1.
3. When a high level is input to the FWE pin, the initial value is H'80.
4. When a low level is input to the FWE pin, or if a high level is input and the SWE1 bit in
FLMCR1 is not set, these registers are initialized to H'00.
5. FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, EBR2, RAMER, and FLPWCR are 8-bit registers.
Use byte access on these registers.
6. An invalid register in the H8S/2623.
19.5
Register Descriptions
19.5.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify mode
or erase-verify mode for addresses H'00000 to H'3FFFF is entered by setting SWE1 bit to 1 when
FWE = 1, then setting the PV1 or EV1 bit. Program mode for addresses H'00000 to H'3FFFF is
entered by setting SWE1 bit to 1 when FWE = 1, then setting the PSU1 bit, and finally setting the
P1 bit. Erase mode for addresses H'00000 to H'3FFFF is entered by setting SWE1 bit to 1 when
FWE = 1, then setting the ESU1 bit, and finally setting the E1 bit. FLMCR1 is initialized by a
reset, and in hardware standby mode and software standby mode. Its initial value is H'80 when a
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 633 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
high level is input to the FWE pin, and H'00 when a low level is input. When on-chip flash
memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid.
Writes are enabled only in the following cases: Writes to bit SWE1 of FLMCR1 enabled when
FWE = 1, to bits ESU1, PSU1, EV1, and PV1 when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1, to bit E1 when
FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1 and ESU1 = 1, and to bit P1 when FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and PSU1 = 1.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Note:
*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FWE
SWE1
ESU1
PSU1
EV1
PV1
E1
P1
—*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Determined by the state of the FWE pin.
Bit 7—Flash Write Enable Bit (FWE): Sets hardware protection against flash memory
programming/erasing.
Bit 7
FWE
Description
0
When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware-protected state)
1
When a high level is input to the FWE pin
Bit 6—Software Write Enable Bit 1 (SWE1): This bit selects write and erase valid/invalid of the
flash memory. Set it when setting bits 5 to 0, bits 7 to 0 of EBR1, and bits 3 to 0 of EBR2.
Bit 6
SWE1
Description
0
Writes disabled
1
Writes enabled
[Setting condition]
When FWE = 1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 634 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Bit 5—Erase Setup Bit 1 (ESU1): Prepares for a transition to erase mode. Set this bit to 1 before
setting the E1 bit in FLMCR1 to 1. Do not set the SWE1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the
same time.
Bit 5
ESU1
Description
0
Erase setup cleared
1
Erase setup
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1
Bit 4—Program Setup Bit 1 (PSU1): Prepares for a transition to program mode. Set this bit to 1
before setting the P1 bit in FLMCR1 to 1. Do not set the SWE1, ESU1, EV1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit
at the same time.
Bit 4
PSU1
Description
0
Program setup cleared
1
Program setup
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1
Bit 3—Erase-Verify 1 (EV1): Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the
SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 3
EV1
Description
0
Erase-verify mode cleared
1
Transition to erase-verify mode
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 635 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Bit 2—Program-Verify 1 (PV1): Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set
the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 2
PV1
Description
0
Program-verify mode cleared
1
Transition to program-verify mode
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1
Bit 1—Erase 1 (E1): Selects erase mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE1, ESU1,
PSU1, EV1, PV1, or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 1
E1
Description
0
Erase mode cleared
1
Transition to erase mode
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and ESU1 = 1
Bit 0—Program 1 (P1): Selects program mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE1,
PSU1, ESU1, EV1, PV1, or E1 bit at the same time.
Bit 0
P1
Description
0
Program mode cleared
1
Transition to program mode
[Setting condition]
When FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and PSU1 = 1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 636 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.5.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. FLMCR2 is
initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode and software standby mode. When
on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FLER
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Note: FLMCR2 is a read-only register, and should not be written to.
Bit 7—Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on
flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the errorprotection state.
Bit 7
FLER
Description
0
Flash memory is operating normally
(Initial value)
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled
[Clearing condition]
Reset or hardware standby mode
1
An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled
[Setting condition]
See section 19.8.3, Error Protection
Bits 6 to 0—Reserved: These bits always read 0.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 637 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.5.3
Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
EBR1 is an 8-bit register that specifies the flash memory erase area block by block. EBR1 is
initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode and software standby mode, when a low
level is input to the FWE pin, and when a high level is input to the FWE pin and the SWE1 bit in
FLMCR1 is not set. When a bit in EBR1 is set to 1, the corresponding block can be erased. Other
blocks are erase-protected. Only one of the bits of EBR1 and EBR2 combined can be set. Do not
set more than one bit, as this will cause all the bits in both EBR1 and EBR2 to be automatically
cleared to 0. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are
invalid.
The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 19.4.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
19.5.4
7
EB7
0
R/W
6
EB6
0
R/W
5
EB5
0
R/W
4
EB4
0
R/W
3
EB3
0
R/W
2
EB2
0
R/W
1
EB1
0
R/W
0
EB0
0
R/W
Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)
EBR2 is an 8-bit register that specifies the flash memory erase area block by block. EBR2 is
initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode and software standby mode, when a low
level is input to the FWE pin. Bit 0 will be initialized to 0 if bit SWE1 of FLMCR1 is not set, even
though a high level is input to pin FWE. When a bit in EBR2 is set to 1, the corresponding block
can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected. Only one of the bits of EBR1 and EBR2
combined can be set. Do not set more than one bit, as this will cause all the bits in both EBR1 and
EBR2 to be automatically cleared to 0. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved and must only be written with 0.
When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid.
The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 19.4.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
EB11
EB10
EB9
EB8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 638 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Table 19.4 Flash Memory Erase Blocks
Block (Size)
Addresses
EB0 (4 kbytes)
H'000000–H'000FFF
EB1 (4 kbytes)
H'001000–H'001FFF
EB2 (4 kbytes)
H'002000–H'002FFF
EB3 (4 kbytes)
H'003000–H'003FFF
EB4 (4 kbytes)
H'004000–H'004FFF
EB5 (4 kbytes)
H'005000–H'005FFF
EB6 (4 kbytes)
H'006000–H'006FFF
EB7 (4 kbytes)
H'007000–H'007FFF
EB8 (32 kbytes)
H'008000–H'00FFFF
EB9 (64 kbytes)
H'010000–H'01FFFF
EB10 (64 kbytes)
H'020000–H'02FFFF
EB11 (64 kbytes)
H'030000–H'03FFFF
19.5.5
RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)
RAMER specifies the area of flash memory to be overlapped with part of RAM when emulating
real-time flash memory programming. RAMER initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware
standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. RAMER settings should be made in
user mode or user program mode.
Flash memory area divisions are shown in table 19.5. To ensure correct operation of the emulation
function, the ROM for which RAM emulation is performed should not be accessed immediately
after this register has been modified. Normal execution of an access immediately after register
modification is not guaranteed.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
RAMS
RAM2
RAM1
RAM0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits always read 0.
Bits 5 and 4—Reserved: Only 0 may be written to these bits.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 639 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Bit 3—RAM Select (RAMS): Specifies selection or non-selection of flash memory emulation in
RAM. When RAMS = 1, all flash memory block are program/erase-protected.
Bit 3
RAMS
Description
0
Emulation not selected
(Initial value)
Program/erase-protection of all flash memory blocks is disabled
1
Emulation selected
Program/erase-protection of all flash memory blocks is enabled
Bits 2 to 0—Flash Memory Area Selection: These bits are used together with bit 3 to select the
flash memory area to be overlapped with RAM. (See table 19.5.)
Table 19.5 Flash Memory Area Divisions
Addresses
Block Name
RAMS
RAM2
RAM1
RAM0
H'FFD000–H'FFDFFF
RAM area 4 kbytes
0
*
*
*
H'000000–H'000FFF
EB0 (4 kbytes)
1
0
0
0
H'001000–H'001FFF
EB1 (4 kbytes)
1
0
0
1
H'002000–H'002FFF
EB2 (4 kbytes)
1
0
1
0
H'003000–H'003FFF
EB3 (4 kbytes)
1
0
1
1
H'004000–H'004FFF
EB4 (4 kbytes)
1
1
0
0
H'005000–H'005FFF
EB5 (4 kbytes)
1
1
0
1
H'006000–H'006FFF
EB6 (4 kbytes)
1
1
1
0
H'007000–H'007FFF
EB7 (4 kbytes)
1
1
1
1
*: Don't care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 640 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR)*
19.5.6
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PDWND
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
FLPWCR enables or disables a transition to the flash memory power-down mode when the LSI
switches to subactive mode.
Note: * An invalid register in the H8S/2623.
Bit 7—Power-Down Disable (PDWND): Enables or disables a transition to the flash memory
power-down mode when the LSI switches to subactive mode.
Bit 7
PDWND
Description
0
Transition to flash memory power-down mode enabled
1
Transition to flash memory power-down mode disabled
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 0—Reserved: These bits always read 0.
19.5.7
Serial Control Register X (SCRX)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
FLSHE
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCRX is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls on-chip flash memory.
SCRX is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: Only 0 may be written to these bits.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 641 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Bit 3—Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Controls CPU access to the flash
memory control registers (FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2). Setting the FLSHE bit to 1
enables read/write access to the flash memory control registers. If FLSHE is cleared to 0, the flash
memory control registers are deselected. In this case, the flash memory control register contents
are retained.
Bit 3
FLSHE
Description
0
Flash control registers deselected in area H'FFFFA8 to H'FFFFAC
1
Flash control registers selected in area H'FFFFA8 to H'FFFFAC
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: Only 0 may be written to these bits.
19.6
On-Board Programming Modes
When pins are set to on-board programming mode and a reset-start is executed, a transition is
made to the on-board programming state in which program/erase/verify operations can be
performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode
and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table
19.6. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 19.2.
Table 19.6 Setting On-Board Programming Modes
Mode
Boot mode
Expanded mode
FWE
MD2
MD1
MD0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
Single-chip mode
User program mode
Expanded mode
Single-chip mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 642 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
1
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.6.1
Boot Mode
When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the
host beforehand. The SCI channel to be used is set to asynchronous mode.
When a reset-start is executed after the H8S/2626 or H8S/2623 pins have been set to boot mode,
the boot program built into the LSI is started and the programming control program prepared in
the host is serially transmitted to the LSI via the SCI. In the H8S/2626 and H8S/2623, the
programming control program received via the SCI is written into the programming control
program area in on-chip RAM. After the transfer is completed, control branches to the start
address of the programming control program area and the programming control program execution
state is entered (flash memory programming is performed).
The transferred programming control program must therefore include coding that follows the
programming algorithm given later.
The system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 19.6, and the boot mode execution
procedure in figure 19.7.
H8S/2626 or H8S/2623
Flash memory
Host
Write data reception
Verify data transmission
RxD2
SCI2
On-chip RAM
TxD2
Figure 19.6 System Configuration in Boot Mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 643 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Start
Set pins to boot mode
and execute reset-start
Host transfers data (H'00)
continuously at prescribed bit rate
LSI measures low period
of H'00 data transmitted by host
LSI calculates bit rate and
sets value in bit rate register
After bit rate adjustment, LSI
transmits one H'00 data byte to
host to indicate end of adjustment
Host confirms normal reception
of bit rate adjustment end
indication (H'00), and transmits
one H'55 data byte
After receiving H'55,
LSI transmits one H'AA
data byte to host
Host transmits number
of programming control program
bytes (N), upper byte followed
by lower byte
LSI transmits received
number of bytes to host as verify
data (echo-back)
n=1
Host transmits programming control
program sequentially in byte units
LSI transmits received
programming control program to
host as verify data (echo-back)
n+1→n
Transfer received programming
control program to on-chip RAM
No
n = N?
Yes
End of transmission
Check flash memory data, and
if data has already been written,
erase all blocks
After confirming that all flash
memory data has been erased,
LSI transmits one H'AA data
byte to host
Execute programming control
program transferred to on-chip RAM
Note: If a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one H'FF byte is
transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and subsequent operations
are halted.
Figure 19.7 Boot Mode Execution Procedure
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 644 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment
Start
bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data)
D7
Stop
bit
High period
(1 or more bits)
When boot mode is initiated, the LSI measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI
communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The SCI transmit/receive
format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. The LSI calculates the bit rate of
the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to the
host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end
indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the LSI. If reception
cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations.
Depending on the host’s transmission bit rate and the LSI’s system clock frequency, there will be
a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the LSI. Set the host transfer bit rate at 2,400,
4,800, 9,600 or 19,200 bps to operate the SCI properly.
Table 19.7 shows host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic
adjustment of the LSI bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this system
clock range.
Table 19.7 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is
Possible
Host Bit Rate
System Clock Frequency for Which Automatic Adjustment
of LSI Bit Rate is Possible
2,400 bps
2 to 8 MHz
4,800 bps
4 to 16 MHz
9,600 bps
8 to 20 MHz
19,200 bps
16 to 20 MHz
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 645 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the RAM area is divided into an
area used by the boot program and an area to which the programming control program is
transferred via the SCI, as shown in figure 19.8. The boot program area cannot be used until the
execution state in boot mode switches to the programming control program transferred from the
host.
H'FFC000
Programming
control program area
(8 kbytes)
H'FFDFFF
H'FFE000
Boot program area
(4 kbytes)
H'FFEFBF
Note: The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for
the programming control program transferred to RAM. Note also that the boot program
remains in this area of the on-chip RAM even after control branches to the programming
control program.
Figure 19.8 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
Notes on Use of Boot Mode:
• When the chip comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low-level period of the input at
the SCI’s RxD2 pin. The reset should end with RxD2 high. After the reset ends, it takes
approximately 100 states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period of the RxD2
pin.
• In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not 1), all
flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user program mode is unavailable,
such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program activated in user
program mode is accidentally erased.
• Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased.
• The RxD2 and TxD2 pins should be pulled up on the board.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 646 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
• Before branching to the programming control program (RAM area H'FFC000), the chip
terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (channel 2) (by clearing the RE
and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. The transmit data
output pin, TxD2, goes to the high-level output state (PA1DDR = 1, PA1DR = 1).
The contents of the CPU’s internal general registers are undefined at this time, so these
registers must be initialized immediately after branching to the programming control program.
In particular, since the stack pointer (SP) is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc., a stack area
must be specified for use by the programming control program.
The initial values of other on-chip registers are not changed.
• Boot mode can be entered by making the pin settings shown in table 19.6 and executing a
reset-start.
Boot mode can be cleared by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, then setting
1
the FWE pin and mode pins, and executing reset release* . Boot mode can also be cleared by a
WDT overflow reset.
Do not change the mode pin input levels in boot mode, and do not drive the FWE pin low
while the boot program is being executed or while flash memory is being programmed or
2
erased* .
• If the mode pin input levels are changed (for example, from low to high) during a reset, the
state of ports with multiplexed address functions and bus control output pins (AS, RD, HWR)
3
will change according to the change in the microcomputer’s operating mode* .
Therefore, care must be taken to make pin settings to prevent these pins from becoming output
signal pins during a reset, or to prevent collision with signals outside the microcomputer.
Notes: 1. Mode pin and FWE pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 4
states) with respect to the reset release timing.
2. For further information on FWE application and disconnection, see section 19.13,
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
3. See appendix D, Pin States.
19.6.2
User Program Mode
When set to user program mode, the chip can program and erase its flash memory by executing a
user program/erase control program. Therefore, on-board reprogramming of the on-chip flash
memory can be carried out by providing on-board means of FWE control and supply of
programming data, and storing a program/erase control program in part of the program area as
necessary.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 647 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
To select user program mode, select a mode that enables the on-chip flash memory (mode 6 or 7),
and apply a high level to the FWE pin. In this mode, on-chip supporting modules other than flash
memory operate as they normally would in modes 6 and 7.
The flash memory itself cannot be read while the SWE1 bit is set to 1 to perform programming or
erasing, so the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip
RAM or external memory. If the program is to be located in external memory, the instruction for
writing to flash memory, and the following instruction, should be placed in on-chip RAM.
Figure 19.9 shows the procedure for executing the program/erase control program when
transferred to on-chip RAM.
Write the FWE assessment program and
transfer program (and the program/erase
control program if necessary) beforehand
MD2, MD1, MD0 = 110, 111
Reset-start
Transfer program/erase control
program to RAM
Branch to program/erase control
program in RAM area
FWE = high*
Execute program/erase control
program (flash memory rewriting)
Clear FWE*
Branch to flash memory application
program
Notes: Do not apply a constant high level to the FWE pin. Apply a high level to the FWE pin
only when the flash memory is programmed or erased. Also, while a high level is
applied to the FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to prevent
overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc.
* For further information on FWE application and disconnection, see section 19.13,
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
Figure 19.9 User Program Mode Execution Procedure
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 648 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.7
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing
A software method, using the CPU, is employed to program and erase flash memory in the onboard programming modes. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase
mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. Transitions to these modes for addresses
H'000000 to H'03FFFF are made by setting the PSU1, ESU1, P1, E1, PV1, and EV1 bits in
FLMCR1.
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program
(user program) that controls flash memory programming/erasing should be located and executed in
on-chip RAM or external memory. If the program is to be located in external memory, the
instruction for writing to flash memory, and the following instruction, should be placed in on-chip
RAM. Also ensure that the DTC is not activated before or after execution of the flash memory
write instruction.
In the following operation descriptions, wait times after setting or clearing individual bits in
FLMCR1 are given as parameters; for details of the wait times, see section 22.6, Flash Memory
Characteristics.
Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1,
E1, and P1 bits in FLMCR1 is executed by a program in flash memory.
2. When programming or erasing, set FWE to 1 (programming/erasing will not be
executed if FWE = 0).
3. Programming must be executed in the erased state. Do not perform additional
programming on addresses that have already been programmed.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 649 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
*3
E1 = 1
Erase setup
state
Erase mode
E1 = 0
Normal mode
FWE = 1
ESU1 = 1
ESU1 = 0
*1
FWE = 0
EV1 = 1
*2
On-board
SWE1 = 1
Software
programming mode
programming
Software programming
enable
disable state
SWE1 = 0
state
Erase-verify
mode
EV1 = 0
PSU1 = 1
*4
P1 = 1
PSU1 = 0
Program
setup state
Program mode
P1 = 0
PV1 = 1
PV1 = 0
Program-verify
mode
Notes: In order to perform a normal read of flash memory, SWE1 must be cleared to 0. Also note that verify-reads
can be performed during the programming/erasing process.
1.
: Normal mode
: On-board programming mode
2. Do not make a state transition by setting or clearing multiple bits simultaneously.
3. After a transition from erase mode to the erase setup state, do not enter erase mode without passing
through the software programming enable state.
4. After a transition from program mode to the program setup state, do not enter program mode without
passing through the software programming enable state.
Figure 19.10 FLMCR1 Bit Settings and State Transitions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 650 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.7.1
Program Mode
When writing data or programs to flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown in
figure 19.11 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart
will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to
voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes
at a time.
The wait times after bits are set or cleared in the flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) and
the maximum number of programming operations (N) are shown in table 22.10.
Following the elapse of (×0) µs or more after the SWE1 bit is set to 1 in FLMCR1, 128-byte
program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data area, and the 128-byte data in
the program data area in RAM is written consecutively to the program address (the lower 8 bits of
the first address written to must be H'00 or H'80). 128 consecutive byte data transfers are
performed. The program address and program data are latched in the flash memory. A 128-byte
data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must
be written to the extra addresses.
Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway, etc.
Set 6.6 ms as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for program mode (program setup)
is carried out by setting the PSU1 bit in FLMCR1, and after the elapse of (y) µs or more, the
operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the P1 bit in FLMCR1. The time during
which the P1 bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Refer to the table in figure 19.11
for the programming time.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 651 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.7.2
Program-Verify Mode
In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been
correctly written in the flash memory.
After the elapse of the given programming time, clear the P1 bit in FLMCR1, then wait for at least
(α) µs before clearing the PSU1 bit to exit program mode. After the elapse of at least (β) µs, the
watchdog timer is cleared and the operating mode is switched to program-verify mode by setting
the PV1 bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data
should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse
of (γ) µs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units),
the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least (ε) µs after the dummy write before performing
this read operation. Next, the originally written data is compared with the verify data, and
reprogram data is computed (see figure 19.11) and transferred to RAM. After verification of 128
bytes of data has been completed, exit program-verify mode, wait for at least (η) µs, then clear the
SWE1 bit in FLMCR1. If reprogramming is necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the
program/program-verify sequence as before. The maximum number of repetitions of the
program/program-verify sequence is indicated by the maximum programming count (N).
However, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times on
the same bits.
Notes on Program/Program-Verify Procedure
1. In order to perform 128-byte-unit programming, the lower 8 bits of the write start address must
be H'00 or H'80.
2. When performing continuous writing of 128-byte data to flash memory, byte-unit transfer
should be used.
128-byte data transfer is necessary even when writing fewer than 128 bytes of data. Write
H'FF data to the extra addresses.
3. Verify data is read in word units.
4. The write pulse is applied and a flash memory write executed while the P1 bit in FLMCR1 is
set. In the H8S/2626 and H8S/2623, write pulses should be applied as follows in the
program/program-verify procedure to prevent voltage stress on the device and loss of write
data reliability.
a. After write pulse application, perform a verify-read in program-verify mode and apply a
write pulse again for any bits read as 1 (reprogramming processing). When all the 0-write
bits in the 128-byte write data are read as 0 in the verify-read operation, the
program/program-verify procedure is completed. In the H8S/2626 and H8S/2623, the
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 652 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
number of loops in reprogramming processing is guaranteed not to exceed the maximum
value of the maximum programming count (N).
b. After write pulse application, a verify-read is performed in program-verify mode, and
programming is judged to have been completed for bits read as 0.
c. If programming of other bits is incomplete in the 128 bytes, reprogramming processing
should be executed. If a bit for which programming has been judged to be completed is
read as 1 in a subsequent verify-read, a write pulse should again be applied to that bit.
5. The period for which the P1 bit in FLMCR1 is set (the write pulse width) should be changed
according to the degree of progress through the program/program-verify procedure. For
detailed wait time specifications, see section 22.6, Flash Memory Characteristics.
6. The program/program-verify flowchart for the H8S/2626 and H8S/2623 is shown in figure
19.11.
To cover the points noted above, bits on which reprogramming processing is to be executed,
and bits on which additional programming is to be executed, must be determined as shown
below.
Since reprogram data and additional-programming data vary according to the progress of the
programming procedure, it is recommended that the following data storage areas (128 bytes
each) be provided in RAM.
Reprogram Data Computation Table
(D)
Result of Verify-Read
after Write Pulse
(X)
Application (V)
Result of Operation
0
0
1
Programming completed: reprogramming
processing not to be executed
1
0
Programming incomplete: reprogramming
processing to be executed
0
1

1
1
Comments
Still in erased state: no action
Legend:
(D): Source data of bits on which programming is executed
(X): Source data of bits on which reprogramming is executed
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 653 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Additional-Programming Data Computation Table
Result of Verify-Read
after Write Pulse
(Y)
(X') Application (V)
Result of Operation
0
1
Comments
0
0
Programming by write pulse application
judged to be completed: additional
programming processing to be executed
1
1
Programming by write pulse application
incomplete: additional programming
processing not to be executed
0
Programming already completed: additional
programming processing not to be executed
1
Still in erased state: no action
Legend:
(Y): Data of bits on which additional programming is executed
(X'): Data of bits on which reprogramming is executed in a certain reprogramming loop
7. It is necessary to execute additional programming processing during the course of the
H8S/2626 or H8S/2623 program/program-verify procedure. However, once 128-byte-unit
programming is finished, additional programming should not be carried out on the same
address area. When executing reprogramming, an erase must be executed first. Note that
normal operation of reads, etc., is not guaranteed if additional programming is performed on
addresses for which a program/program-verify operation has finished.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 654 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
*5
Start of programming
Write pulse application subroutine
Set SWE1 bit in FLMCR1
Enable WDT
tsswe:
Set PSU1 bit in FLMCR1
Wait (× 0) µs
Store 128 bytes of program data in program
data area and reprogram data area
Wait (y) µs
tspsu:
Programming must be executed in the erased state.
Do not perform additional programming on addresses
that have already been programmed.
START
Sub-Routine Write Pulse
Set P1 bit in FLMCR1
n=1
tsp10 or tsp30 or tsp200:
Wait (z0) µs or (z1) µs or (z2) µs
m=0
Clear P1 bit in FLMCR1
Successively write 128-byte reprogram
data to flash memory
Wait (α) µs
tcp:
*4
*1
Sub-Routine-Call
Write pulse application subroutine
*5
Clear PSU1 bit in FLMCR1
Set PV1 bit in FLMCR1
Wait (β) µs
tspv:
Wait (γ) µs
Disable WDT
H'FF dummy write to verify address
End Sub
tspur:
Wait (ε) µs
Note: 6. Programming Time
P1 Bit Set Time (µs)
Additional
Number of Writes Programming Programming
z0
1
z1
2
z0
z1
·
·
·
·
Read verify data
·
·
z0
z0
z2
z2
z2
z1
z1
—
—
—
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
N1+N2–2
N1+N2–1
N1+N2
z2
z2
z2
—
—
—
m=1
OK
·
·
n←n+1
NG
Program data =
verify data?
·
N1–1
N1
N1+1
N1+2
N1+3
*2
Increment address
N1 ≥ n ?
NG
OK
Additional-programming data computation
Transfer additional-programming data to
additional-programming data area
*4
Reprogram data computation
*3
Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area *4
NG
128-byte data
verification completed?
OK
Clear PV1 bit in FLMCR1
RAM
tcpv:
Program data storage
area (128 bytes)
Wait (η) µs
N1 ≥ n ?
Reprogram data storage
area (128 bytes)
NG
Successively write 128-byte data from additionalprogramming data area in RAM to flash memory
*1
Sub-Routine-Call
Additional programming subroutine
Additional-programming
data storage area (128 bytes)
m=0?
NG
n ≥ (N1 + N2) ?
NG
Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first
OK
OK
address written to must be H'00 or H'80. A 128-byte data transfer
Clear SWE1 bit in FLMCR1
Clear SWE1 bit in FLMCR1
must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case,
H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
tcswe:
tcswe:
tcswe:
Wait (×1) µs
Wait (×1) µs
2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
3. Even bits for which programming has been completed in the 128-byte programming
End of programming
Programming failure
loop will be subject to programming again if they fail the subsequent verify operation.
4. A 128-byte area for storing program data, a 128-byte area for storing reprogram data,
and a 128-byte area for storing additional-programming data must be provided in RAM.
The reprogram and additional-programming data contents are modified as programming proceeds.
5. A write pulse of 30 µs or 200 µs is applied according to the progress of the programming operation. See note *6 for details of the pulse widths.
When writing of additional-programming data is executed, a 10 µs write pulse should be applied. Reprogram data X' means reprogram data when the write pulse is applied.
Reprogram Data Computation Table
Additional-Programming Data Computation Table
Original Data Verify Data Reprogram Data
Comments
(D)
(V)
(X)
Programming complete
0
0
1
Programming is incomplete:
0
1
0
reprogramming should be performed
1
0
1
Left in the erased state
1
1
1
Reprogram Data Verify Data Additional-Programming
Comments
(V)
Data (X)
(X')
0
0
0
Additional programming should be performed
0
1
1
Additional programming should not be performed
1
0
1
Additional programming should not be performed
1
1
1
Additional programming should not be performed
Figure 19.11 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 655 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.7.3
Erase Mode
When erasing flash memory, the single-block erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 19.12
should be followed.
To erase flash memory contents, make a 1-bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased in
erase block register 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2) at least (x) µs after setting the SWE1 bit to 1 in
FLMCR1. Next, the watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program
runaway, etc. Set 6.6 ms as the WDT overflow period. Preparation for entering erase mode (erase
setup) is performed next by setting the ESU1 bit in FLMCR1. The operating mode is then
switched to erase mode by setting the E1 bit in FLMCR1 after the elapse of at least (y) µs. The
time during which the E1 bit is set is the flash memory erase time. Ensure that the erase time does
not exceed (z) ms.
Note: With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all memory data in the memory to
be erased to all 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure.
19.7.4
Erase-Verify Mode
In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been
correctly erased.
After the elapse of the fixed erase time, clear the E1 bit in FLMCR1, then wait for at least (α) µs
before clearing the ESU1 bit to exit erase mode. After exiting erase mode, the watchdog timer is
cleared after the elapse of (β) µs or more. The operating mode is then switched to erase-verify
mode by setting the EV1 bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of
H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after
the elapse of (γ) µs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least (ε) µs after the dummy write before
performing this read operation. If the read data has been erased (all 1), a dummy write is
performed to the next address, and erase-verify is performed. If the read data is unerased, set erase
mode again and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. The maximum number of
reoperations of the erase/erase-verify sequence is indicated by the maximum erase count (N).
However, ensure that the erase/erase-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times. When
verification is completed, exit erase-verify mode, and wait for at least (η) µs. If erasure has been
completed on all the erase blocks, clear the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1. If there are any unerased
blocks, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased, and repeat the erase/eraseverify sequence as before.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 656 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Start
*1
Set SWE1 bit in FLMCR1
tsswe: Wait (x) µs
n=1
Set EBR1 and 2
*3
Enable WDT
Set ESU1 bit in FLMCR1
tsesu: Wait (y) µs
Start erase
Set E1 bit in FLMCR1
tse: Wait (z) ms
Clear E1 bit in FLMCR1
Halt erase
tce: Wait (α) µs
Clear ESU1 bit in FLMCR1
tcesu: Wait (β) µs
Disable WDT
n←n+1
Set EV1 bit in FLMCR1
tsev: Wait (γ) µs
Set block start address to verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
tsevr: Wait (ε) µs
Read verify data
Increment
address
Verify data = all "1"?
*2
NG
OK
NG
NG
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Last address of block?
OK
Clear EV1 bit in FLMCR1
Clear EV1 bit in FLMCR1
tcev: Wait (η) µs
tcev: Wait (η) µs
*4
End of
erasing of all erase
blocks?
OK
n ≥ (N)?
Clear SWE1 bit in FLMCR1
OK
Clear SWE1 bit in FLMCR1
tcswe: Wait (× 1) µs
tcswe: Wait (× 1) µs
End of erasing
Erase failure
NG
Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all "0") is not necessary.
Verify data is read in 16-bit (W) units.
Set only one bit in EBR1 and 2. More than 2 bits cannot be set.
Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, each block must be erased in turn.
Figure 19.12 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 657 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.8
Protection
There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software
protection, and error protection.
19.8.1
Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly
disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control register 1
(FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), erase block register 1 (EBR1), and erase
block register 2 (EBR2). The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained in the
error-protected state. (See table 19.8.)
Table 19.8 Hardware Protection
Functions
Item
Description
Program
Erase
FWE pin protection
•
When a low level is input to the FWE pin,
FLMCR1, FLMCR2, (except bit FLER)
EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the
program/erase-protected state is entered.
Yes
Yes
Reset/standby
protection
•
In a reset (including a WDT reset) and in
standby mode, FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1,
and EBR2 are initialized, and the
program/erase-protected state is entered.
Yes
Yes
•
In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state
is not entered unless the RES pin is held
low until oscillation stabilizes after
powering on. In the case of a reset during
operation, hold the RES pin low for the
RES pulse width specified in the AC
Characteristics section.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 658 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.8.2
Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1, erase block register
1 (EBR1), erase block register 2 (EBR2), and the RAMS bit in the RAM emulation register
(RAMER). When software protection is in effect, setting the P1 or E1 bit in flash memory control
register 1 (FLMCR1), does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (See table
19.9.)
Table 19.9 Software Protection
Functions
Item
Description
Program
Erase
SWE bit protection
•
Setting bit SWE1 in FLMCR1 to 0 will
place area H'000000 to H'03FFFFF in the
program/erase-protected state. (Execute
the program in the on-chip RAM, external
memory)
Yes
Yes
Block specification
protection
•
Erase protection can be set for individual
blocks by settings in erase block register 1
(EBR1) and erase block register 2
(EBR2).
—
Yes
•
Setting EBR1 and EBR2 to H'00 places all
blocks in the erase-protected state.
Yes
Yes
Emulation protection •
Setting the RAMS bit to 1 in the RAM
emulation register (RAMER) places all
blocks in the program/erase-protected
state.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 659 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.8.3
Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when H8S/2626 or H8S/2623 runaway occurs during flash
memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the
program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase
operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.
If the H8S/2626 or H8S/2623 malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER
bit is set to 1 in FLMCR2 and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2,
EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at
which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P1
or E1 bit. However, PV1 and EV1 bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify
mode.
FLER bit setting conditions are as follows:
1. When the flash memory of the relevant address area is read during programming/erasing
(including vector read and instruction fetch)
2. When a SLEEP instruction (including software standby) is executed during
programming/erasing
Error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 660 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Figure 19.13 shows the flash memory state transition diagram.
Program mode
Erase mode
Reset or standby
(hardware protection)
RES = 0 or HSTBY = 0
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Error occurrence
(software standby)
RES = 0 or
HSTBY = 0
Error
occurrence
RES = 0 or
HSTBY = 0
Error protection mode
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
Software
standby mode
Software standby
mode release
FLMCR1, FLMCR2,
EBR1, EBR2
initialization state
Error protection mode
(software standby)
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, EBR2
initialization state
Legend:
RD: Memory read possible
VF: Verify-read possible
PR: Programming possible
ER: Erasing possible
RD:
VF:
PR:
ER:
Memory read not possible
Verify-read not possible
Programming not possible
Erasing not possible
Figure 19.13 Flash Memory State Transitions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 661 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.9
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
Making a setting in the RAM emulation register (RAMER) enables part of RAM to be overlapped
onto the flash memory area so that data to be written to flash memory can be emulated in RAM in
real time. After the RAMER setting has been made, accesses cannot be made from the flash
memory area or the RAM area overlapping flash memory. Emulation can be performed in user
mode and user program mode. Figure 19.14 shows an example of emulation of real-time flash
memory programming.
Start of emulation program
Set RAMER
Write tuning data to overlap
RAM
Execute application program
No
Tuning OK?
Yes
Clear RAMER
Write to flash memory emulation
block
End of emulation program
Figure 19.14 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 662 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
This area can be accessed
from both the RAM area
and flash memory area
H'00000
EB0
H'01000
EB1
H'02000
EB2
H'03000
EB3
H'04000
EB4
H'05000
EB5
H'06000
EB6
H'07000
EB7
H'08000
H'FFD000
H'FFDFFF
Flash memory
EB8 to EB11
On-chip RAM
H'FFEFBF
H'3FFFF
Figure 19.15 Example of RAM Overlap Operation
Example in which Flash Memory Block Area EB0 is Overlapped
1. Set bits RAMS, RAM2 to RAM0 in RAMER to 1, 0, 0, 0, to overlap part of RAM onto the
area (EB0) for which real-time programming is required.
2. Real-time programming is performed using the overlapping RAM.
3. After the program data has been confirmed, the RAMS bit is cleared, releasing RAM overlap.
4. The data written in the overlapping RAM is written into the flash memory space (EB0).
Notes: 1. When the RAMS bit is set to 1, program/erase protection is enabled for all blocks
regardless of the value of RAM2 to RAM0 (emulation protection). In this state, setting
the P1 or E1 bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), will not cause a
transition to program mode or erase mode. When actually programming or erasing a
flash memory area, the RAMS bit should be cleared to 0.
2. A RAM area cannot be erased by execution of software in accordance with the erase
algorithm while flash memory emulation in RAM is being used.
3. Block area EB0 contains the vector table. When performing RAM emulation, the
vector table is needed in the overlap RAM.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 663 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.10
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
All interrupts, including NMI interrupt is disabled when flash memory is being programmed or
erased (when the P1 or E1 bit is set in FLMCR1), and while the boot program is executing in boot
1
mode* , to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three reasons for this:
1. Interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or
erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured.
2. In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would
2
not be read correctly* , possibly resulting in MCU runaway.
3. If interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the
normal boot mode sequence.
For these reasons, in on-board programming mode alone there are conditions for disabling
interrupt, as an exception to the general rule. However, this provision does not guarantee normal
erasing and programming or MCU operation. All requests, including NMI interrupt, must
therefore be restricted inside and outside the MCU when programming or erasing flash memory.
NMI interrupt is also disabled in the error-protection state while the P1 or E1 bit remains set in
FLMCR1.
Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the MCU until the programming
control program has completed programming.
2. The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons:
19.11
•
If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P1 or E1 bit
is set in FLMCR1), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will
be returned).
•
If the interrupt entry in the vector table has not been programmed yet, interrupt
exception handling will not be executed correctly.
Flash Memory Programmer Mode
Programs and data can be written and erased in programmer mode as well as in the on-board
programming modes. In programmer mode, flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, autoerase mode, and status read mode are supported. In auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and
status read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal
signals are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation.
In programmer mode, set the mode pins to programmer mode (see table 19.10) and input a 12
MHz input clock.
Table 19.10 shows the pin settings for programmer mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 664 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Table 19.10 Programmer Mode Pin Settings
Pin Names
Settings
Mode pins: MD2, MD1, MD0
Low level input to MD2, MD1, and MD0.
Mode setting pins: PF0, P16, P14
High level input to PF0, low level input to P16 and P14
FWE pin
High level input (in auto-program and auto-erase
modes)
RES pin
Reset circuit
XTAL, EXTAL, PLLVCC, PLLCAP,
PLLVSS pins
Oscillator circuit
19.11.1 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram
Connect the socket adapter to the chip as shown in figure 19.17. This will enable conversion to a
40-pin arrangement. The on-chip ROM memory map is shown in figure 19.16, and the socket
adapter pin correspondence diagram in figure 19.17.
Addresses in
MCU mode
Addresses in
programmer mode
H'000000
H'00000
On-chip ROM space
256 kbytes
H'03FFFF
H'3FFFF
Figure 19.16 On-Chip ROM Memory Map
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 665 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
H8S/2626 or H8S/2623
Socket Adapter
(Conversion to 40-Pin
Arrangement)
HN27C4096HG (40 Pins)
Pin No.
Pin Name
Pin No.
Pin Name
28
A0
21
A0
29
A1
22
A1
30
A2
23
A2
31
A3
24
A3
32
A4
25
A4
33
A5
26
A5
34
A6
27
A6
35
A7
28
A7
36
A8
29
A8
38
A9
31
A9
40
A10
32
A10
41
A11
33
A11
42
A12
34
A12
43
A13
35
A13
44
A14
36
A14
45
A15
37
A15
46
A16
38
A16
47
A17
39
A17
20
D8
19
I/O0
21
D9
18
I/O1
22
D10
17
I/O2
23
D11
16
I/O3
24
D12
15
I/O4
25
D13
14
I/O5
26
D14
13
I/O6
27
D15
12
I/O7
19
CE
2
CE
16
OE
20
OE
18
WE
3
WE
67
FWE
4
FWE
1, 40
VCC
11, 30
VSS
6, 9, 13, 17, 39, 52, 61, 62,
63, 75, 76, 77, 97
VCC
2, 4, 8, 14, 15, 37, 48, 49,
53, 54, 55, 56, 65, 94, 95, 98
VSS
60
RES
64
XTAL
66
EXTAL
59
PLL VCC
58
PLLCAP
57
PLL VSS
Other than the above
NC (OPEN)
Power-on
reset circuit
Oscillator circuit
PLL circuit
5, 6, 7
NC
8
A20
9
A19
10
A18
Legend:
FWE:
I/O7–I/O0:
A18–A0:
CE:
OE:
WE:
Flash write enable
Data input/output
Address input
Chip enable
Output enable
Write enable
Figure 19.17 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 666 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.11.2 Programmer Mode Operation
Table 19.11 shows how the different operating modes are set when using programmer mode, and
table 19.12 lists the commands used in programmer mode. Details of each mode are given below.
• Memory Read Mode
Memory read mode supports byte reads.
• Auto-Program Mode
Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to
confirm the end of auto-programming.
• Auto-Erase Mode
Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is used
to confirm the end of auto-programming.
• Status Read Mode
Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be
confirmed by reading the I/O6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an
error occurs.
Table 19.11 Settings for Various Operating Modes in Programmer Mode
Pin Names
Mode
FWE
CE
OE
WE
I/O7– I/O0
A18–A0
Read
H or L
L
L
H
Data output
Ain
Output disable
H or L
L
H
H
Hi-Z
X
Command write
1
Chip disable*
H or L*
L
H
L
Data input
Ain*
H
X
X
Hi-Z
X
H or L
3
2
Notes: 1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state.
2. Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode.
3. For command writes in auto-program and auto-erase modes, input a high level to the
FWE pin.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 667 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Table 19.12 Programmer Mode Commands
1st Cycle
2nd Cycle
Command Name
Number
of Cycles
Mode
Address Data
Mode
Address Data
Memory read mode
1+n
Write
X
H'00
Read
RA
Dout
Auto-program mode
129
Write
X
H'40
Write
WA
Din
Auto-erase mode
2
Write
X
H'20
Write
X
H'20
Status read mode
2
Write
X
H'71
Write
X
H'71
Notes: 1. In auto-program mode, 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous
128-byte write.
2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write
cycles (n).
19.11.3 Memory Read Mode
1. After completion of auto-program/auto-erase/status read operations, a transition is made to the
command wait state. When reading memory contents, a transition to memory read mode must
first be made with a command write, after which the memory contents are read.
2. In memory read mode, command writes can be performed in the same way as in the command
wait state.
3. Once memory read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed.
4. After powering on, memory read mode is entered.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 668 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Table 19.13 AC Characteristics in Transition to Memory Read Mode
Conditions: VCC = 3.3 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
tnxtc
20
—
µs
CE hold time
tceh
0
—
ns
CE setup time
tces
0
—
ns
Data hold time
tdh
50
—
ns
Data setup time
tds
50
—
ns
Write pulse width
twep
70
—
ns
WE rise time
tr
—
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
—
30
ns
Command write
Memory read mode
Address stable
A18–A0
tces
tceh
tnxtc
CE
OE
twep
tf
tr
WE
tds
tdh
I/O7–I/O0
Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of WE.
Figure 19.18 Timing Waveforms for Memory Read after Memory Write
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 669 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Table 19.14 AC Characteristics in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode
Conditions: VCC = 3.3 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
tnxtc
20
—
µs
CE hold time
tceh
0
—
ns
CE setup time
tces
0
—
ns
Data hold time
tdh
50
—
ns
Data setup time
tds
50
—
ns
Write pulse width
twep
70
—
ns
WE rise time
tr
—
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
—
30
ns
Memory read mode
A18–A0
Other mode command write
Address stable
tnxtc
tces
tceh
CE
OE
twep
tf
tr
WE
tds
tdh
I/O7–I/O0
Note: Do not enable WE and OE at the same time.
Figure 19.19 Timing Waveforms in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 670 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Table 19.15 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode
Conditions: VCC = 3.3 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Access time
tacc
—
20
µs
CE output delay time
tce
—
150
ns
OE output delay time
toe
—
150
ns
Output disable delay time
tdf
—
100
ns
Data output hold time
toh
5
—
ns
Address stable
A18–A0
CE
VIL
OE
VIL
WE
VIH
Address stable
tacc
tacc
toh
toh
I/O7–I/O0
Figure 19.20 CE and OE Enable State Read Timing Waveforms
Address stable
A18–A0
Address stable
tce
tce
CE
toe
toe
OE
WE
VIH
tacc
tacc
toh
tdf
toh
tdf
I/O7–I/O0
Figure 19.21 CE and OE Clock System Read Timing Waveforms
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 671 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.11.4 Auto-Program Mode
1. In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried out
by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers.
2. A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this
case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
3. The lower 7 bits of the transfer address must be low. If a value other than an effective address
is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be flagged.
4. Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 19.22). Do not perform
transfer after the third cycle.
5. Do not perform a command write during a programming operation.
6. Perform one auto-program operation for a 128-byte block for each address. Two or more
additional programming operations cannot be performed on a previously programmed address
block.
7. Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking I/O6. Alternatively, status read mode
can also be used for this purpose (I/O7 status polling uses the auto-program operation end
decision pin).
8. Status polling I/O6 and I/O7 pin information is retained until the next command write. As long
as the next command write has not been performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and
OE.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 672 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Table 19.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode
Conditions: VCC = 3.3 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
tnxtc
20
—
µs
CE hold time
tceh
0
—
ns
CE setup time
tces
0
—
ns
Data hold time
tdh
50
—
ns
Data setup time
tds
50
—
ns
Write pulse width
twep
70
—
ns
Status polling start time
twsts
1
—
ms
Status polling access time
tspa
—
150
ns
Address setup time
tas
0
—
ns
Address hold time
tah
60
—
ns
Memory write time
twrite
1
3000
ms
Write setup time
tpns
100
—
ns
Write end setup time
tpnh
100
—
ns
WE rise time
tr
—
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
—
30
ns
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 673 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
FWE
tpnh
Address
stable
A18–A0
tpns
tces
tceh
tnxtc
tnxtc
CE
OE
tf
twep
tr
tas
tah
twsts
tspa
WE
tds
tdh
Data transfer
1 to 128 bytes
twrite
I/O7
Write operation end decision signal
I/O6
Write normal end decision signal
I/O5–I/O0
H'40
H'00
Figure 19.22 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms
19.11.5 Auto-Erase Mode
1. Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing.
2. Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing.
3. Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking I/O6. Alternatively, status read mode can also
be used for this purpose (I/O7 status polling uses the auto-erase operation end decision pin).
4. Status polling I/O6 and I/O7 pin information is retained until the next command write. As long
as the next command write has not been performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and
OE.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 674 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Table 19.17 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode
Conditions: VCC = 3.3 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
tnxtc
20
—
µs
CE hold time
tceh
0
—
ns
CE setup time
tces
0
—
ns
Data hold time
tdh
50
—
ns
Data setup time
tds
50
—
ns
Write pulse width
twep
70
—
ns
Status polling start time
tests
1
—
ms
Status polling access time
tspa
—
150
ns
Memory erase time
terase
100
40000
ms
Erase setup time
tens
100
—
ns
Erase end setup time
tenh
100
—
ns
WE rise time
tr
—
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
—
30
ns
FWE
tpnh
A18–A0
tens
tces
tceh
tnxtc
tnxtc
CE
OE
tf
twep
tr
tests
tspa
WE
tds
terase
tdh
I/O7
Erase end
decision signal
I/O6
I/O5–I/O0
Erase normal
end
decision signal
H'20
H'20
H'00
Figure 19.23 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 675 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.11.6 Status Read Mode
1. Status read mode is provided to identify the kind of abnormal end. Use this mode when an
abnormal end occurs in auto-program mode or auto-erase mode.
2. The return code is retained until a command write other than a status read mode command
write is executed.
Table 19.18 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode
Conditions: VCC = 3.3 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Read time after command write
tnxtc
20
—
µs
CE hold time
tceh
0
—
ns
CE setup time
tces
0
—
ns
Data hold time
tdh
50
—
ns
Data setup time
tds
50
—
ns
Write pulse width
twep
70
—
ns
OE output delay time
toe
—
150
ns
Disable delay time
tdf
—
100
ns
CE output delay time
tce
—
150
ns
WE rise time
tr
—
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
—
30
ns
A18–A0
tces
tceh
tnxtc tces
tceh
tnxtc
tnxtc
CE
tce
OE
twep
tf
tr
twep
tf
tr
toe
WE
tds
I/O7–I/O0
tdh
H'71
tds
tdh
H'71
Note: I/O2 and I/O3 are undefined.
Figure 19.24 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 676 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
tdf
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Table 19.19 Status Read Mode Return Commands
Pin Name
I/O7
I/O6
I/O5
I/O4
I/O3
I/O2
I/O1
Attribute
Normal
end
decision
Command
error
Programming error
Erase
error
—
—
Programming Effective
or erase
address
count
error
exceeded
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Indications
Normal
end: 0
Command
error: 1
—
Count
exceeded: 1
Abnormal
end: 1
ProgramErasing
—
ming
error: 1
Otherwise: 0 error: 1
Otherwise: 0
Otherwise: 0
I/O0
0
Effective
address
Otherwise: 0 error: 1
Otherwise: 0
Note: I/O2 and I/O3 are undefined.
19.11.7 Status Polling
1. The I/O7 status polling flag indicates the operating status in auto-program/auto-erase mode.
2. The I/O6 status polling flag indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program/auto-erase
mode.
Table 19.20 Status Polling Output Truth Table
Pin Name
During Internal
Operation
Abnormal End
—
Normal End
I/O7
0
1
0
1
I/O6
0
0
1
1
I/O0–I/O5
0
0
0
0
19.11.8 Programmer Mode Transition Time
Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the programmer mode
setup period. After the programmer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode.
Table 19.21 Stipulated Transition Times to Command Wait State
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Standby release (oscillation
stabilization time)
tosc1
30
—
ms
Programmer mode setup time
tbmv
10
—
ms
VCC hold time
tdwn
0
—
ms
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 677 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
tosc1
tbmv
Memory read
mode
Command
Auto-program mode
wait state
Auto-erase mode
Command wait state
Normal/abnormal
end decision
tdwn
VCC
RES
FWE
Note:
When using other than the automatic write mode and automatic erase mode, drive the FWE
input pin low.
Figure 19.25 Oscillation Stabilization Time, Boot Program Transfer Time, and
Power-Down Sequence
19.11.9 Notes on Memory Programming
1. When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out autoerasing before auto-programming.
2. When performing programming using programmer mode on a chip that has been
programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before
carrying out auto-programming.
Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by Renesas.
For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that autoerasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level.
2. Auto-programming should be performed once only on the same address block.
Additional programming cannot be performed on previously programmed address
blocks.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 678 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.12
Flash Memory and Power-Down States
In addition to its normal operating state, the flash memory has power-down states in which power
consumption is reduced by halting part or all of the internal power supply circuitry.
There are three flash memory operating states:
(1) Normal operating mode: The flash memory can be read and written to.
(2) Power-down mode: Part of the power supply circuitry is halted, and the flash memory can be
read when the LSI is operating on the subclock.
(3) Standby mode: All flash memory circuits are halted, and the flash memory cannot be read or
written to.
States (2) and (3) are flash memory power-down states. Table 19.22 shows the correspondence
between the operating states of the LSI and the flash memory.
Table 19.22 Flash Memory Operating States
LSI Operating State
Flash Memory Operating State
High-speed mode
Normal mode (read/write)
Medium-speed mode
Sleep mode
Subactive mode
When PDWND = 0: Power-down mode (read-only)
Subsleep mode
When PDWND = 1: Normal mode (read-only)
Watch mode
Standby mode
Software standby mode
Hardware standby mode
19.12.1 Note on Power-Down States
When the flash memory is in a power-down state, part or all of the internal power supply circuitry
is halted. Therefore, a power supply circuit stabilization period must be provided when returning
to normal operation. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state from a powerdown state, bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR must be set to provide a wait time of at least 20 µs
(power supply stabilization time), even if an oscillation stabilization period is not necessary.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 679 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.13
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
Precautions concerning the use of on-board programming mode, the RAM emulation function, and
programmer mode are summarized below.
1. Use the specified voltages and timing for programming and erasing.
Applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. Use a PROM
programmer that supports the Renesas microcomputer device type with 256-kbyte on-chip
flash memory (FZTAT256V3A).
Do not select the HN27C4096 setting for the PROM programmer, and only use the specified
socket adapter. Failure to observe these points may result in damage to the device.
2. Powering on and off (see figures 19.26 to 19.28)
Do not apply a high level to the FWE pin until VCC has stabilized. Also, drive the FWE pin low
before turning off VCC.
When applying or disconnecting VCC power, fix the FWE pin low and place the flash memory
in the hardware protection state.
The power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a
power failure and subsequent recovery.
3. FWE application/disconnection (see figures 19.26 to 19.28)
FWE application should be carried out when MCU operation is in a stable condition. If MCU
operation is not stable, fix the FWE pin low and set the protection state.
The following points must be observed concerning FWE application and disconnection to
prevent unintentional programming or erasing of flash memory:
•
Apply FWE when the VCC voltage has stabilized within its rated voltage range.
Apply FWE when oscillation has stabilized (after the elapse of the oscillation settling
time).
•
In boot mode, apply and disconnect FWE during a reset.
•
In user program mode, FWE can be switched between high and low level regardless of
RES input.
FWE input can also be switched during execution of a program in flash memory.
•
Do not apply FWE if program runaway has occurred.
•
Disconnect FWE only when the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, P1, and E1 bits in
FLMCR1 are cleared.
Make sure that the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, P1, and E1 bits are not set by mistake
when applying or disconnecting FWE.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 680 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
4. Do not apply a constant high level to the FWE pin.
Apply a high level to the FWE pin only when programming or erasing flash memory. A
system configuration in which a high level is constantly applied to the FWE pin should be
avoided. Also, while a high level is applied to the FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be
activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc.
5. Use the recommended algorithm when programming and erasing flash memory.
The recommended algorithm enables programming and erasing to be carried out without
subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. When setting the
P1 or E1 bit in FLMCR1, the watchdog timer should be set beforehand as a precaution against
program runaway, etc.
6. Do not set or clear the SWE1 bit during execution of a program in flash memory.
Do not set or clear the SWE1 bit during execution of a program in flash memory. Wait for at
least 100 µs after clearing the SWE1 bit before executing a program or reading data in flash
memory. When the SWE1 bit is set, data in flash memory can be rewritten, but when SWE1 =
1, flash memory can only be read in program-verify or erase-verify mode. Access flash
memory only for verify operations (verification during programming/erasing). Do not clear the
SWE1 bit during programming, erasing, or verifying.
Similarly, when using the RAM emulation function while a high level is being input to the
FWE pin, the SWE1 bit must be cleared before executing a program or reading data in flash
memory. However, the RAM area overlapping flash memory space can be read and written to
regardless of whether the SWE1 bit is set or cleared.
7. Do not use interrupts while flash memory is being programmed or erased.
All interrupt requests, including NMI, should be disabled during FWE application to give
priority to program/erase operations.
8. Do not perform additional programming. Erase the memory before reprogramming.
In on-board programming, perform only one programming operation on a 128-byte
programming unit block. In programmer mode, also, perform only one programming operation
on a 128-byte programming unit block.
9. Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM
programmer.
Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer
socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
10. Do not touch the socket adapter or chip during programming.
Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 681 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Wait time:
x
Programming/
erasing
possible
Wait time:
100 µs
φ
Min 0 µs
tOSC1
VCC
tMDS*3
FWE
Min 0 µs
MD2 to MD0*1
tMDS*3
RES
SWE1 set
SWE1 cleared
SWE1 bit
Period during which flash memory access is prohibited
(x: Wait time after setting SWE1 bit)*2
Period during which flash memory can be programmed
(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations
prohibited)
Notes: 1. Except when switching modes, the level of the mode pins (MD2–MD0) must be fixed until poweroff by pulling the pins up or down.
2. See section 22.6, Flash Memory Characteristics.
3. Mode programming setup time tMDS (min) = 200 ns
Figure 19.26 Power-On/Off Timing (Boot Mode)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 682 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Wait time:
x
Programming/
erasing
possible
Wait time:
100 µs
φ
Min 0 µs
tOSC1
VCC
FWE
MD2 to MD0*1
tMDS*3
RES
SWE1 set
SWE1 cleared
SWE1 bit
Period during which flash memory access is prohibited
(x: Wait time after setting SWE1 bit)*2
Period during which flash memory can be programmed
(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations
prohibited)
Notes: 1. Except when switching modes, the level of the mode pins (MD2–MD0) must be fixed until poweroff by pulling the pins up or down.
2. See section 22.6, Flash Memory Characteristics.
3. Mode programming setup time tMDS (min) = 200 ns
Figure 19.27 Power-On/Off Timing (User Program Mode)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 683 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Wait time: 100 µs
Programming/
erasing possible
Wait time: x
Wait time: x
Programming/
erasing possible
Wait time: 100 µs
Wait time: x
Programming/
erasing possible
Wait time: 100 µs
Wait time: 100 µs
Wait time: x
Programming/
erasing possible
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
φ
tOSC1
VCC
Min 0µs
FWE
tMDS
tMDS*2
MD2 to MD0
tMDS
tRESW
RES
SWE1
cleared
SWE1 set
SWE1 bit
Mode
change*1
Boot
mode
Mode
User
change*1 mode
User program mode
User
mode
User program
mode
Period during which flash memory access is prohibited
(x: Wait time after setting SWE1 bit)*3
Period during which flash memory can be programmed
(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations prohibited)
Notes: 1. When entering boot mode or making a transition from boot mode to another mode, mode switching must be carried
out by means of RES input. The state of ports with multiplexed address functions and bus control output pins
(AS, RD, WR) will change during this switchover interval (the interval during which the RES pin input is low),
and therefore these pins should not be used as output signals during this time.
2. When making a transition from boot mode to another mode, a mode programming setup time, tMDS (min), of 200 ns
is necessary with respect to the RES clearance timing.
3. See section 22.6, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Figure 19.28 Mode Transition Timing
(Example: Boot Mode → User Mode ↔ User Program Mode)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 684 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
19.14
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version
The mask ROM version does not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are
provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 19.23 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT
version but not in the mask ROM version. If a register listed in table 19.23 is read in the mask
ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed
on the F-ZTAT version is switched to a mask ROM version product, it must be modified to ensure
that the registers in table 19.23 have no effect.
Table 19.23 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version
Register
Abbreviation
Address
Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR1
H'FFA8
Flash memory control register 2
FLMCR2
H'FFA9
Erase block register 1
EBR1
H'FFAA
Erase block register 2
EBR2
H'FFAB
RAM emulation register
RAMER
H'FEDB
Flash memory power control register
FLPWCR
H'FFAC
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 685 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 19 ROM (Preliminary)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 686 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
20.1
Overview
The H8S/2626 Group and H8S/2623 Group have an on-chip clock pulse generator (CPG) that
generates the system clock (φ), the bus master clock, and internal clocks.
The clock pulse generator consists of an oscillator, PLL (phase-locked loop) circuit, clock
selection circuit, medium-speed clock divider, bus master clock selection circuit, subclock
oscillator*, and waveform shaping circuit*. The frequency can be changed by means of the PLL
circuit in the CPG. Frequency changes are performed by software by means of settings in the
system clock control register (SCKCR) and low-power control register (LPWRCR).
Note: * Supported only in the H8S/2626 Group; not available in the H8S/2623 Group.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 687 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
20.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 20.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator.
LPWRCR
SCKCR
STC1, STC0
EXTAL
System
clock
oscillator
XTAL
SCK2 to SCK0
Mediumspeed
clock divider
PLL circuit
(×1, ×2, ×4)
Clock
selection
circuit
φSUB
OSC1
Waveform
shaping
circuit*
Subclock
oscillator*
OSC2
φ/2 to
φ/32
Bus
master
clock
selection
circuit
φ
System clock
Internal clock to
to ø pin
supporting modules
Bus master clock
to CPU and DTC
WDT1 count clock
Legend:
LPWRCR: Low-power control register
SCKCR: System clock control register
Note: * Supported only in the H8S/2626 Group, not available in the H8S/2623 Group.
Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator
20.1.2
Register Configuration
The clock pulse generator is controlled by SCKCR and LPWRCR. Table 20.1 shows the register
configuration.
Table 20.1 Clock Pulse Generator Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
System clock control register
SCKCR
R/W
H'00
H'FDE6
Low-power control register
LPWRCR
R/W
H'00
H'FDEC
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 688 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
20.2
Register Descriptions
20.2.1
System Clock Control Register (SCKCR)
Bit
:
Initial value:
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PSTOP
—
—
—
STCS
SCK2
SCK1
SCK0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCKCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs φ clock output control, selection of
operation when the PLL circuit frequency multiplication factor is changed, and medium-speed
mode control.
SCKCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—φ
φ Clock Output Disable (PSTOP): Controls φ output.
Description
Bit 7
Software
Standby Mode
Hardware
Standby Mode
PSTOP
High-speed Mode,
Medium-Speed Mode
0
φ output (initial value)
φ output
Fixed high
High impedance
1
Fixed high
Fixed high
Fixed high
High impedance
Sleep Mode
Bits 6 to 4—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3—Frequency Multiplication Factor Switching Mode Select (STCS): Selects the operation
when the PLL circuit frequency multiplication factor is changed.
Bit 3
STCS
Description
0
Specified multiplication factor is valid after transition to software standby mode
(Initial value)
1
Specified multiplication factor is valid immediately after STC bits are rewritten
Bits 2 to 0—System Clock Select 2 to 0 (SCK2 to SCK0): These bits select the bus master
clock.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 689 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCK2
SCK1
SCK0
Description
0
0
0
Bus master is in high-speed mode
1
Medium-speed clock is φ/2
0
Medium-speed clock is φ/4
1
Medium-speed clock is φ/8
0
Medium-speed clock is φ/16
1
Medium-speed clock is φ/32
—
—
1
1
0
1
20.2.2
(Initial value)
Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
Bit
7
6
DTON
LSON
5
4
3
NESEL SUBSTP RFCUT
2
1
0
—
STC1
STC0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
LPWRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control.
LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a
manual reset or in software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 2—Reserved: The function of these bits differs between the H8S/2623 Group and
H8S/2626 Group.
For details see sections 21A.2.3, 21B.2.3, Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR).
Bits 1 and 0—Frequency Multiplication Factor (STC1, STC0): The STC bits specify the
frequency multiplication factor of the PLL circuit.
Bit 1
Bit 0
STC1
STC0
Description
0
0
×1
1
×2
0
×4
1
Setting prohibited
1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 690 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
Note: A system clock frequency multiplied by the multiplication factor (STC1 and STC0) should
not exceed the maximum operating frequency defined in sections 21A and 21B, Electrical
Characteristics.
20.3
Oscillator
Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock.
In either case, the input clock should not exceed 20 MHz.
20.3.1
Connecting a Crystal Resonator
Circuit Configuration: A crystal resonator can be connected as shown in the example in figure
20.2. Select the damping resistance Rd according to table 20.2. An AT-cut parallel-resonance
crystal should be used.
CL1
EXTAL
XTAL
Rd
CL2
CL1 = CL2 = 10 to 22pF
Figure 20.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example)
Table 20.2 Damping Resistance Value
Frequency (MHz)
4
8
12
16
20
Rd (Ω)
500
200
0
0
0
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 691 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
Crystal Resonator: Figure 20.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. Use a crystal
resonator that has the characteristics shown in table 20.3. The crystal resonator frequency should
not exceed 20 MHz.
CL
L
Rs
XTAL
EXTAL
AT-cut parallel-resonance type
C0
Figure 20.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit
Table 20.3 Crystal Resonator Parameters
Frequency (MHz)
4
8
12
16
20
RS max (Ω)
120
80
60
50
40
C0 max (pF)
7
7
7
7
7
Note on Board Design: When a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be
noted:
Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from
interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 20.4.
When designing the board, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible
to the XTAL and EXTAL pins.
Avoid
Signal A Signal B
CL2
H8S/2626 Group or
H8S/2623 Group
XTAL
EXTAL
CL1
Figure 20.4 Example of Incorrect Board Design
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 692 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
External circuitry such as that shown below is recommended around the PLL.
R1: 3 kΩ
C1: 470 pF
PLLCAP
Rp: 200 Ω
PLLVCC
PLLVSS
CPB: 0.1 µF*
PVCC1 to PVCC4
VCC
VSS
CB: 1000pF*
CB: 300pF*
(Values are preliminary recommended values.)
Note: * CB and CPB are laminated ceramic capacitors.
Figure 20.5 Points for Attention when Using PLL Oscillation Circuit
Place oscillation stabilization capacitor C1 and resistor R1 close to the PLLCAP pin, and ensure
that no other signal lines cross this line. Supply the C1 ground from PLLVSS.
Separate PLLVCC and PLLVSS from the other VCC/VSS and PVCC/PVSS lines at the board power
supply source, and be sure to insert bypass capacitors CPB and CB close to the pins.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 693 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
20.3.2
External Clock Input
Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure
20.6. If the XTAL pin is left open, make sure that stray capacitance is no more than 10 pF.
In example (b), make sure that the external clock is held high in standby mode.
EXTAL
External clock input
XTAL
Open
(a) XTAL pin left open
EXTAL
External clock input
XTAL
(b) Complementary clock input at XTAL pin
Figure 20.6 External Clock Input (Examples)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 694 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
External Clock: Use an external clock frequency of 20 MHz or less.
Table 20.4 and figure 20.7 show the input conditions for the external clock.
Table 20.4 External Clock Input Conditions
VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V,
PVCC = 5.0 V ±10%
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
External clock input
low pulse width
tEXL
15
—
ns
Figure 20.7
External clock input high
pulse width
tEXH
15
—
ns
External clock rise time
tEXr
—
5
ns
External clock fall time
tEXf
—
5
ns
Clock low pulse
width level
tCL
0.4
0.6
tcyc
φ ≥ 5 MHz
80
—
ns
φ < 5 MHz
Clock high pulse
width level
tCH
0.4
0.6
tcyc
φ ≥ 5 MHz
80
—
ns
φ < 5 MHz
tEXH
Figure 22.2
tEXL
EXTAL
VCC × 0.5
tEXr
tEXf
Figure 20.7 External Clock Input Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 695 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
20.4
PLL Circuit
The PLL circuit has the function of multiplying the frequency of the clock from the oscillator by a
factor of 1, 2, or 4. The multiplication factor is set with the STC bits in LPWRCR. The phase of
the rising edge of the internal clock is controlled so as to match that at the EXTAL pin.
When setting the multiplication factor, ensure that the clock frequency after multiplication does
not exceed the maximum operating frequency of the chip.
When the multiplication factor of the PLL circuit is changed, the operation varies according to the
setting of the STCS bit in SCKCR.
When STCS = 0 (initial value), the setting becomes valid after a transition to software standby
mode. The transition time count is performed in accordance with the setting of bits STS2 to STS0
in SBYCR.
[1] The initial PLL circuit multiplication factor is 1.
[2] A value is set in bits STS2 to STS0 to give the specified transition time.
[3] The target value is set in STC1 and STC0, and a transition is made to software standby mode.
[4] The clock pulse generator stops and the value set in STC1 and STC0 becomes valid.
[5] Software standby mode is cleared, and a transition time is secured in accordance with the
setting in STS2 to STS0.
[6] After the set transition time has elapsed, the LSI resumes operation using the target
multiplication factor.
If a PC break is set for the SLEEP instruction that causes a transition to software standby mode in
[3], software standby mode is entered and break exception handling is executed after the
oscillation stabilization time. In this case, the instruction following the SLEEP instruction is
executed after execution of the RTE instruction.
When STCS = 1, the LSI operates on the changed multiplication factor immediately after bits
STC1 and STC0 are rewritten.
20.5
Medium-Speed Clock Divider
The medium-speed clock divider divides the system clock to generate φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, and φ/32.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 696 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
20.6
Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit
The bus master clock selection circuit selects the system clock (φ) or one of the medium-speed
clocks (φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, and φ/32) to be supplied to the bus master, according to the settings of
the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in SCKCR.
20.7
Subclock Oscillator (H8S/2626 Group Only)
(1) Connecting 32.768kHz Crystal Oscillator
To supply a clock to the subclock oscillator, connect a 32.768kHz crystal oscillator, as shown in
figure 20.8. See section 20.3.1, Connecting a Crystal Resonator.
C1
OSC1
C2
OSC2
C1 = C2 = 15 pF (typ)
Figure 20.8 Example Connection of 32.768 kHz Crystal Oscillator
Figure 20.9 shows the equivalence circuit for a 32.768kHz oscillator.
Ls
Cs
Rs
OSC1
OSC2
Co
Co = 1.5 pF (typ)
Rs = 14 kΩ (typ)
fw = 32.768 kHz
Type No.: MX38T (Nihon Dempa Kogyo)
Figure 20.9 Equivalence Circuit for 32.768 kHz Oscillator
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 697 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator
(2) Handling pins when subclock not required
If no subclock is required, connect the OSC1 pin to Vcc and leave OSC2 open, as shown in figure
20.10.
VCC
OSC1
OSC2
Open
Figure 20.10 Pin Handling When Subclock Not Required
20.8
Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit (H8S/2626 Group Only)
To eliminate noise from the subclock input to OSC1, the subclock is sampled using the dividing
clock φ. The sampling frequency is set using the NESEL bit of LPWRCR. For details, see section
21B.2.3, Low Power Control Register (LPWRCR).
No sampling is performed in sub-active mode, sub-sleep mode, or watch mode.
20.9
Note on Crystal Resonator
Since various characteristics related to the crystal resonator are closely linked to the user’s board
design, thorough evaluation is necessary on the user’s part, for both the mask versions and
F-ZTAT versions, using the resonator connection examples shown in this section as a guide. As
the resonator circuit ratings will depend on the floating capacitance of the resonator and the
mounting circuit, the ratings should be determined in consultation with the resonator
manufacturer. The design must ensure that a voltage exceeding the maximum rating is not applied
to the oscillator pin.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 698 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
Section 21A Power-Down Modes
[H8S/2623 Group]
Subclock functions are not available in the H8S/2623 Group.
21A.1 Overview
In addition to the normal program execution state, the H8S/2623 Group has five power-down
modes in which operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced.
Low-power operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip supporting
modules, and so on.
The H8S/2623 operating modes are as follows:
(1) High-speed mode
(2) Medium-speed mode
(3) Sleep mode
(4) Module stop mode
(5) Software standby mode
(6) Hardware standby mode
(2) to (6) are power-down modes. Sleep mode is CPU states, medium-speed mode is a CPU and
bus master state, and module stop mode is an internal peripheral function (including bus masters
other than the CPU) state. Some of these states can be combined.
After a reset, the LSI is in high-speed mode with modules other than the DTC in module stop
mode.
Note: Subclock functions (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode) are not available in
the H8S/2623 Group.
Table 21A.1 shows the internal state of the LSI in the respective modes.
Figure 21A.1 is a mode transition diagram.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 699 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
Table 21A.1 LSI Internal States in Each Mode
HighSpeed
MediumSpeed
Sleep
Module Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby
System clock pulse
generator
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Halted
Halted
CPU
Instructions
Registers
Functioning
Medium-speed Halted
operation
(retained)
High/medium- Halted
speed
(retained)
operation
Halted
(undefined)
NMI
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Halted
WDT0
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning

Halted
(retained)
Halted (reset)
DTC
Functioning
Medium-speed Functioning
operation
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted (reset)
TPU
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
(PBC mediumspeed
operation)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted (reset)
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Halted (reset)
Halted (reset)
Halted (reset)
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
(DTC)
Functioning
Retained
Retained
I/O
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Retained
High impedance
HCAN
Functioning
Functioning*
Functioning
Halted (reset)
Halted (reset)
Halted (reset)
Function
External
interrupts
Peripheral
functions
IRQ0–IRQ5
PBC
PPG
SCI0
SCI1
SCI2
PWM
A/D
RAM
Notes: “Halted (retained)” means that internal register values are retained. The internal state is
“operation suspended.”
“Halted (reset)” means that internal register values and internal states are initialized.
In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted
(reset or retained).
* Note, however, that registers cannot be read or written to.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 700 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
Program-halted state
STBY pin = Low
Reset state
Hardware
standby mode
STBY pin = High
RES pin = Low
RES pin = High
Program execution state
SSBY = 0
Sleep mode
(main clock)
SLEEP command
High-speed mode
(main clock)
Any interrupt
SCK2 to
SCK0= 0
SCK2 to
SCK0 0
Medium-speed
mode
(main clock)
SLEEP
command
SSBY = 1
Software
standby mode
External
interrupt*
: Transition after exception processing
: Low power dissipation mode
Notes: When a transition is made between modes by means of an interrupt, the transition cannot be made
on interrupt source generation alone. Ensure that interrupt handling is performed after accepting the
interrupt request.
From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs when RES is
driven low.
From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY is driven low.
* NMI and IRQ0 to IRQ5
Figure 21A.1 Mode Transition Diagram
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 701 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
21A.1.1 Register Configuration
Power-down modes are controlled by the SBYCR, SCKCR, LPWRCR, and MSTPCR registers.
Table 21A.2 summarizes these registers.
Table 21A.2 Power-Down Mode Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Standby control register
SBYCR
R/W
H'08
H'FDE4
System clock control register
SCKCR
R/W
H'00
H'FDE6
Low power control register
LPWRCR
R/W
H'00
H'FDEC
Module stop control register
A, B, C
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
MSTPCRB
R/W
H'FF
H'FDE9
MSTPCRC
R/W
H'FF
H'FDEA
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
21A.2 Register Descriptions
21A.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
OPE
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control.
SBYCR is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—Software Standby (SSBY): When making a low power dissipation mode transition by
executing the SLEEP instruction, the operating mode is determined in combination with other
control bits.
Note that the value of the SSBY bit does not change even when shifting between modes using
interrupts.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 702 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
Bit 7
SSBY
Description
0
Shifts to sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed
mode or medium-speed mode.
(Initial value)
1
Shifts to software standby mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in highspeed mode or medium-speed mode.
Bits 6 to 4—Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the MCU wait time
for clock stabilization when shifting to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode by using a
specific interrupt or command to cancel software standby mode. With a quartz oscillator (table
21A.4), select a wait time of 8ms (oscillation stabilization time) or more, depending on the
operating frequency. With an external clock, there are no specific wait requirements.
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
STS2
STS1
STS0
Description
0
0
0
Standby time = 8192 states
1
Standby time = 16384 states
0
Standby time = 32768 states
1
Standby time = 65536 states
0
0
Standby time = 131072 states
1
Standby time = 262144 states
1
0
Reserved
1
Standby time = 16 states
1
1
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Output Port Enable (OPE): This bit specifies whether the output of the address bus and
bus control signals (AS, RD, HWR, LWR) is retained or set to high-impedance state in the
software standby mode.
Bit 3
OPE
Description
0
In software standby mode, address bus and bus control signals are high-impedance.
1
In software standby mode, the output state of the address bus and bus control signals
is retained.
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: These bits always return 0 when read, and cannot be written to.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 703 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
21A.2.2 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PSTOP
—
—
—
STCS
SCK2
SCK1
SCK0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCKCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs φ clock output control and mediumspeed mode control.
SCKCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—φ
φ Clock Output Disable (PSTOP): In combination with the DDR of the applicable port,
this bit controls φ output. See section 21A.8, φ Clock Output Disable Function, for details.
Description
Bit 7
PSTOP
High-Speed Mode,
Medium-Speed Mode
Sleep Mode
Software Standby
Mode
Hardware Standby
Mode
0
φ output (initial value)
φ output
Fixed high
High impedance
1
Fixed high
Fixed high
Fixed high
High impedance
Bits 6 to 4—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Bit 3—Frequency Multiplication Factor Switching Mode Select (STCS): Selects the operation
when the PLL circuit frequency multiplication factor is changed.
Bit 3
STCS
Description
0
Specified multiplication factor is valid after transition to software standby mode
(Initial value)
1
Specified multiplication factor is valid immediately after STC bits are rewritten
Bits 2 to 0—System clock select (SCK2 to SCK0): These bits select the bus master clock in
high-speed mode, and medium-speed mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 704 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCK2
SCK1
SCK0
Description
0
0
0
Bus master in high-speed mode
1
Medium-speed clock is φ/2
0
Medium-speed clock is φ/4
1
Medium-speed clock is φ/8
0
Medium-speed clock is φ/16
1
Medium-speed clock is φ/32
—
—
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
21A.2.3 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
DTON
LSON
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
3
2
1
0
—
STC1
STC0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
NESEL SUBSTP RFCUT
The LPWRCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the low power dissipation modes.
The LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and when in hardware standby mode. It is not
initialized in software standby mode. The following describes bits 7 to 2. For details of other bits,
see section 20.2.2, Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR).
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: Bits DTON, LSON, NESEL, and SUBSTP must always be written with 0
in the H8S/2623 Group, as this version does not support subclock operation.
Bit 3—Oscillation Circuit Feedback Resistance Control Bit (RFCUT): This bit turns the
internal feedback resistance of the main clock oscillation circuit ON/OFF.
Bit 3
RFCUT
Description
0
When the main clock is oscillating, sets the feedback resistance ON. When the main
clock is stopped, sets the feedback resistance OFF.
(Initial value)
1
Sets the feedback resistance OFF.
Bit 2—Reserved: Only write 0 to this bit.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 705 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
21A.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
MSTPCRA
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPCRB
Bit
:
MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4 MSTPB3 MSTPB2 MSTPB1 MSTPB0
Initial value :
R/W
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
:
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPCRC
Bit
MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0
Initial value :
R/W
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCR, comprising three 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control.
MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC are initialized to H'3FFFFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
They are not initialized in software standby mode.
MSTPCRA/MSTPCRB/MSTPCRC Bits 7 to 0—Module Stop (MSTPA7 to MSTPA0,
MSTPB7 to MSTPB0, MSTPC7 to MSTPC0, MSTPD7 and MSTPD6): These bits specify
module stop mode. See table 21A.3 for the method of selecting the on-chip peripheral functions.
MSTPCRA/MSTPCRB/
MSTPCRC Bits 7 to 0
MSTPA7 to MSTPA0,
MSTPB7 to MSTPB0,
MSTPC7 to MSTPC0
Description
0
Module stop mode is cleared (initial value of MSTPA7 and MSTPA6)
1
Module stop mode is set (initial value of MSTPA5–0, MSTPB7–0,
MSTPC7–0)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 706 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
21A.3 Medium-Speed Mode
In high-speed mode, when the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in SCKCR are set to 1, the operating mode
changes to medium-speed mode as soon as the current bus cycle ends. In medium-speed mode, the
CPU operates on the operating clock (φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, or φ/32) specified by the SCK2 to SCK0
bits. The bus masters other than the CPU (DTC) also operate in medium-speed mode. On-chip
supporting modules other than the bus masters always operate on the high-speed clock (φ).
In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to
the bus master operating clock. For example, if φ/4 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip
memory is accessed in 4 states, and internal I/O registers in 8 states.
Medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing all of bits SCK2 to SCK0 to 0. A transition is made to
high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle.
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, a transition is
made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored.
When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SSBY bit = 1, operation shifts to the software
standby mode. When software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed
mode is restored.
When the RES pin is set low and medium-speed mode is cancelled, operation shifts to the reset
state. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer.
When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
Figure 21A.2 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode.
Medium-speed mode
φ,
supporting module clock
Bus master clock
Internal address bus
SBYCR
SBYCR
Internal write signal
Figure 21A.2 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 707 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
21A.4 Sleep Mode
21A.4.1 Sleep Mode
When the SLEEP instruction is executed when the SBYCR SSBY bit = 0, the CPU enters the
sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops but the contents of the CPUís internal registers
are retained. Other supporting modules do not stop.
21A.4.2 Exiting Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is exited by any interrupt, or signals at the RES, or STBY pins.
Exiting Sleep Mode by Interrupts: When an interrupt occurs, sleep mode is exited and interrupt
exception processing starts. Sleep mode is not exited if the interrupt is disabled, or interrupts other
than NMI are masked by the CPU.
Exiting Sleep Mode by RES pin: Setting the RES pin level Low selects the reset state. After the
stipulated reset input duration, driving the RES pin High starts the CPU performing reset
exception processing.
Exiting Sleep Mode by STBY Pin: When the STBY pin level is driven Low, a transition is made
to hardware standby mode.
21A.5 Module Stop Mode
21A.5.1 Module Stop Mode
Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip supporting modules.
When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of
the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating
independently.
Table 21A.3 shows MSTP bits and the corresponding on-chip supporting modules.
When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module
starts operating at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of modules
other than the SCI, A/D converter and HCAN are retained.
After reset clearance, all modules other than DTC are in module stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 708 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
When an on-chip supporting module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is
disabled.
Table 21A.3 MSTP Bits and Corresponding On-Chip Supporting Modules
Register
Bit
MSTPCRA
MSTPA7*
Module
MSTPA6
Data transfer controller (DTC)
MSTPA5
MSTPA4*
16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU)
MSTPA3
MSTPA2*
Programmable pulse generator (PPG)
MSTPA1
A/D converter
MSTPA0*
MSTPCRB
MSTPB7
Serial communication interface 0 (SCI0)
MSTPB6
Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1)
MSTPB5
MSTPB4*
Serial communication interface 2 (SCI2)
MSTPB3*
MSTPB2*
MSTPB1*
MSTPB0*
MSTPCRC
MSTPC7*
MSTPC6*
MSTPC5*
MSTPC4
PC break controller (PBC)
MSTPC3
HCAN
MSTPC2*
MSTPC1*
MSTPC0*
Note:
*
MSTPA7 is a readable/writable bit with an initial value of 0.
MSTPA4, MSTPA2, MSTPA0, MSTPB4 to MSTPB0, MSTPC7 to MSTPC5, and
MSTPC2 to MSTPC0 are readable/writable bits with an initial value of 1 and should
always be written with 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 709 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
21A.5.2 Usage Notes
DTC Module Stop: Depending on the operating status of the DTC, the MSTPA7 and MSTPA6
bits may not be set to 1. Setting of the DTC module stop mode should be carried out only when
the respective module is not activated.
For details, refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
On-Chip Supporting Module Interrupt: Relevant interrupt operations cannot be performed in
module stop mode. Consequently, if module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been
requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC activation source.
Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode.
Writing to MSTPCR: MSTPCR should only be written to by the CPU.
21A.6 Software Standby Mode
21A.6.1 Software Standby Mode
A transition is made to software standby mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed when the
SBYCR SSBY bit = 1. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and oscillator all stop.
However, the contents of the CPU’s internal registers, RAM data, and the states of on-chip
supporting modules other than the SCI, A/D converter, HCAN and I/O ports, are retained.
Whether the address bus and bus control signals are placed in the high-impedance state or retain
the output state can be specified by the OPE bit in SBYCR.
In this mode the oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced.
21A.6.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode
Software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI pin, or pins IRQ0 to IRQ5), or by
means of the RES pin or STBY pin.
• Clearing with an interrupt
When an NMI or IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and
after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR, stable clocks are supplied to
the entire chip, software standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started.
When clearing software standby mode with an IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt, set the corresponding
enable bit to 1 and ensure that no interrupt with a higher priority than interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5
is generated. Software standby mode cannot be cleared if the interrupt has been masked on the
CPU side or has been designated as a DTC activation source.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 710 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
• Clearing with the RES pin
When the RES pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as clock
oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire chip. Note that the RES pin must be held
low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin goes high, the CPU begins reset
exception handling.
• Clearing with the STBY pin
When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
21A.6.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode
Bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below.
Using a Crystal Oscillator: Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is at least 8 ms (the
oscillation stabilization time).
Table 21A.4 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits STS2
to STS0.
Table 21A.4 Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings
STS2
STS1
STS0
Standby Time
20
MHz
16
MHz
12
MHz
10
MHz
8
MHz
6
MHz
4
MHz
Unit
0
0
0
8192 states
0.41
0.51
0.68
0.8
1.0
1.3
2.0
ms
1
16384 states
0.82
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.7
4.1
0
32768 states
1.6
2.0
2.7
3.3
4.1
5.5
1
65536 states
3.3
4.1
5.5
6.6
0
131072 states
6.6
1
262144 states
1
1
0
1
8.2
13.1 16.4
10.9
21.8
8.2
13.1 16.4
26.2
32.8
8.2
10.9 16.4
21.8
32.8
43.6
65.6
0
Reserved
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
16 states*
0.8
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
1.7
4.0
µs
: Recommended time setting
Note: * Do not use this setting.
Using an External Clock: It is necessary to allow time for the PLL circuit to stabilize. Therefore,
the standby time should be set to a value of 2 ms or greater.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 711 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
21A.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example
Figure 21A.3 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at the
falling edge on the NMI pin, and software standby mode is cleared at the rising edge on the NMI
pin.
In this example, an NMI interrupt is accepted with the NMIEG bit in SYSCR cleared to 0 (falling
edge specification), then the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification), the SSBY bit is set
to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed, causing a transition to software standby mode.
Software standby mode is then cleared at the rising edge on the NMI pin.
Oscillator
φ
NMI
NMIEG
SSBY
NMI exception
handling
NMIEG = 1
SSBY = 1
Software standby mode
(power-down mode)
Oscillation
stabilization
time tOSC2
NMI exception
handling
SLEEP instruction
Figure 21A.3 Software Standby Mode Application Example
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 712 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
21A.6.5 Usage Notes
I/O Port Status: In software standby mode, I/O port states are retained. If the OPE bit is set to 1,
the address bus and bus control signal output is also retained. Therefore, there is no reduction in
current dissipation for the output current when a high-level signal is output.
Current Dissipation during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period: Current dissipation
increases during the oscillation stabilization wait period.
Write Data Buffer Function: The write data buffer function and software standby mode cannot
be used at the same time. When the write data buffer function is used, the WDBE bit in BCRL
should be cleared to 0 to cancel the write data buffer function before entering software standby
mode. Also check that external writes have finished, by reading external addresses, etc., before
executing a SLEEP instruction to enter software standby mode. See section 7.7, Write Data Buffer
Function, for details of the write data buffer function.
21A.7 Hardware Standby Mode
21A.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode
When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode from any mode.
In hardware standby mode, all functions enter the reset state and stop operation, resulting in a
significant reduction in power dissipation. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, on-chip
RAM data is retained. I/O ports are set to the high-impedance state.
In order to retain on-chip RAM data, the RAME bit in SYSCR should be cleared to 0 before
driving the STBY pin low.
Do not change the state of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) while the H8S/2623 Group is in
hardware standby mode.
Hardware standby mode is cleared by means of the STBY pin and the RES pin. When the STBY
pin is driven high while the RES pin is low, the reset state is set and clock oscillation is started.
Ensure that the RES pin is held low until the clock oscillator stabilizes (at least 8 ms—the
oscillation stabilization time—when using a crystal oscillator). When the RES pin is subsequently
driven high, a transition is made to the program execution state via the reset exception handling
state.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 713 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21A Power-Down Modes [H8S/2623 Group]
21A.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing
Figure 21A.4 shows an example of hardware standby mode timing.
When the STBY pin is driven low after the RES pin has been driven low, a transition is made to
hardware standby mode. Hardware standby mode is cleared by driving the STBY pin high, waiting
for the oscillation stabilization time, then changing the RES pin from low to high.
Oscillator
RES
STBY
Oscillation
stabilization
time
Reset
exception
handling
Figure 21A.4 Hardware Standby Mode Timing
21A.8 φ Clock Output Disabling Function
Output of the φ clock can be controlled by means of the PSTOP bit in SCKCR, and DDR for the
corresponding port. When the PSTOP bit is set to 1, the φ clock stops at the end of the bus cycle,
and φ output goes high. φ clock output is enabled when the PSTOP bit is cleared to 0. When DDR
for the corresponding port is cleared to 0, φ clock output is disabled and input port mode is set.
Table 21A.5 shows the state of the φ pin in each processing state.
Table 21A.5 φ Pin State in Each Processing State
DDR
0
1
1
PSTOP
—
0
1
Hardware standby mode
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
Software standby
High impedance
Fixed high
Fixed high
Sleep mode
High impedance
φ output
Fixed high
High-speed mode, medium-speed
mode
High impedance
φ output
Fixed high
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 714 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Section 21B Power-Down Modes
[H8S/2626 Group]
21B.1 Overview
In addition to the normal program execution state, the H8S/2626 Group has nine power-down
modes in which operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced.
Low-power operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip supporting
modules, and so on.
The H8S/2626 operating modes are as follows:
(1) High-speed mode
(2) Medium-speed mode
(3) Subactive mode*
(4) Sleep mode
(5) Subsleep mode*
(6) Watch mode*
(7) Module stop mode
(8) Software standby mode
(9) Hardware standby mode
(2) to (9) are power-down modes. Sleep mode and sub-sleep mode are CPU states, medium-speed
mode is a CPU and bus master state, sub-active mode is a CPU and bus master and internal
peripheral function state, and module stop mode is an internal peripheral function (including bus
masters other than the CPU) state. Some of these states can be combined.
After a reset, the LSI is in high-speed mode with modules other than the DTC in module stop
mode.
Note: * Subclock functions are available in the H8S/2626 Group.
See section 20.7, Subclock Oscillator (H8S/2626 Group Only), for the method of fixing
pins OSC1 and OSC2 when not used.
Table 21B.1 shows the internal state of the LSI in the respective modes. Table 21B.2 shows the
conditions for shifting between the power-down modes.
Figure 21B.1 is a mode transition diagram.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 715 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Table 21B.1 LSI Internal States in Each Mode
Function
HighSpeed
System clock pulse
generator
Function- Function- Function- Function- Halted
ing
ing
ing
ing
Subclock pulse
generator
Function- Function- Function- Function- Function- Function- Function- Function- Halted
ing
ing
ing
ing
ing
ing
ing
ing
CPU
MediumSpeed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Watch
Subactive
Software Hardware
Subsleep Standby Standby
Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
Instructions Function- Medium- Halted
High/
Halted
Subclock Halted
Halted
Halted
Registers
ing
speed
(retained) medium- (retained) operation (retained) (retained) (undefined)
operation
speed
operation
Function- Function- Function- Function- Function- Function- Function- Function- Halted
External NMI
ing
ing
ing
ing
ing
ing
ing
ing
interrupts
IRQ0–IRQ5
Peripheral WDT1
functions
Function- Function- Function- 
ing
ing
ing
Subclock Subclock Subclock Halted
Halted
operation operation operation (retained) (reset)
WDT0
Function- Function- Function- 
ing
ing
ing
Halted
Subclock Subclock Halted
Halted
(retained) operation operation (retained) (reset)
DTC
Function- Medium- Function- Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
ing
speed
ing
(retained) (retained) (retained) (retained) (retained) (reset)
operation
TPU
Function- Function- Function- Halted
Halted
ing
ing (PBC ing
(retained) (retained)
mediumspeed
operation)
Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
(retained) (retained) (retained) (reset)
(PBC
subclock
operation)
Function- Function- Function- Halted
ing
ing
ing
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
PBC
PPG
D/A2, 3
SCI0
SCI1
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
SCI2
PWM
A/D
RAM
Function- Function- Function- Function- Retained
ing
ing
ing (DTC) ing
Function- Retained
ing
Retained
Retained
I/O
Function- Function- Function- Function- Retained
ing
ing
ing
ing
Function- Retained
ing
Retained
High
impedance
HCAN
Function- Function- Function- Halted
ing
ing*
ing
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Notes: “Halted (retained)” means that internal register values are retained. The internal state is
“operation suspended.”
“Halted (reset)” means that internal register values and internal states are initialized.
In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted
(reset or retained).
* Note, however, that registers cannot be read or written to.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 716 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Program-halted state
STBY pin = Low
Hardware
standby mode
Reset state
STBY pin = High
RES pin = Low
RES pin = High
Program execution state
SSBY = 0, LSON = 0
Sleep mode
(main clock)
SLEEP command
High-speed mode
(main clock)
Any interrupt
SCK2 to
SCK0= 0
SCK2 to
SCK0 0
Medium-speed
mode
(main clock)
SLEEP
command
SLEEP command
SSBY = 1, PSS = 1
DTON = 1, LSON = 1
Clock switching
exception processing
SLEEP
command
SSBY = 1,
PSS = 1, DTON = 0
Watch mode
(subclock)
SLEEP
command
Interrupt*1
LSON bit = 1
Sub-active mode
(subclock)
Software
standby mode
External
interrupt*3
Interrupt*1
LSON bit = 0
SLEEP command
SSBY = 1, PSS = 1
DTON = 1, LSON = 0
After the oscillation
stabilization time
(STS2 to 0), clock
switching exception
processing
SSBY = 1,
PSS = 0, LSON = 0
SLEEP command
Interrupt*2
: Transition after exception processing
SSBY = 0,
PSS = 1, LSON = 1
Sub-sleep mode
(subclock)
: Power-down mode
Notes: When a transition is made between modes by means of an interrupt, the transition cannot be made
on interrupt source generation alone. Ensure that interrupt handling is performed after accepting the
interrupt request.
From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs when RES is
driven Low.
From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY is driven low.
Always select high-speed mode before making a transition to watch mode or sub-active mode.
1. NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ5, and WDT1 interrupts
2. NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ5, WDT0 interrupts, and WDT1 interrupt.
3. NMI and IRQ0 to IRQ5
Figure 21B.1 Mode Transition Diagram
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 717 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Table 21B.2 Power-Down Mode Transition Conditions
State After Transition
State After Transition Back from Power-Down
Invoked by SLEEP
Mode Invoked by
LSON DTON Command
Interrupt
Status of Control Bit at
Transition
Pre-Transition
State
SSBY PSS
High-speed/
0
Medium-speed 0
*
0
*
Sleep
High-speed/Medium-speed
*
1
*
—
—
1
0
0
*
Software standby
High-speed/Medium-speed
1
0
1
*
—
—
1
1
0
0
Watch
High-speed
1
1
1
0
Watch
Sub-active
1
1
0
1
—
—
1
1
1
1
Sub-active
—
0
0
*
*
—
—
0
1
0
*
—
—
0
1
1
*
Sub-sleep
Sub-active
1
0
*
*
—
—
1
1
0
0
Watch
High-speed
1
1
1
0
Watch
Sub-active
1
1
0
1
High-speed
—
1
1
1
1
—
—
Sub-active
Legend:
—: Do not set.
*: Don’t care
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 718 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.1.1 Register Configuration
Power-down modes are controlled by the SBYCR, SCKCR, LPWRCR, TCSR (WDT1), and
MSTPCR registers. Table 21B.3 summarizes these registers.
Table 21B.3 Power-Down Mode Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*
Standby control register
SBYCR
R/W
H'08
H'FDE4
System clock control register
SCKCR
R/W
H'00
H'FDE6
Low-power control register
LPWRCR
R/W
H'00
H'FDEC
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/W
H'00
H'FFA2
Module stop control register
A, B, C
MSTPCRA
R/W
H'3F
H'FDE8
MSTPCRB
R/W
H'FF
H'FDE9
MSTPCRC
R/W
H'FF
H'FDEA
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
21B.2 Register Descriptions
21B.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
OPE
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control.
SBYCR is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 719 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Bit 7—Software Standby (SSBY): When making a low power dissipation mode transition by
executing the SLEEP instruction, the operating mode is determined in combination with other
control bits.
Note that the value of the SSBY bit does not change even when shifting between modes using
interrupts.
Bit 7
SSBY
Description
0
Shifts to sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed
mode or medium-speed mode.
Shifts to sub-sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in
sub-active mode.
1
(Initial value)
Shifts to software standby mode, sub-active mode, and watch mode when the SLEEP
instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode.
Shifts to watch mode or high-speed mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in
sub-active mode.
Bits 6 to 4—Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the MCU wait time
for clock stabilization when shifting to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode by using a
specific interrupt or command to cancel software standby mode, watch mode, or sub-active mode.
With a quartz oscillator (table 21B.5), select a wait time of 8ms (oscillation stabilization time) or
more, depending on the operating frequency. With an external clock, there are no specific wait
requirements.
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
STS2
STS1
STS0
Description
0
0
0
Standby time = 8192 states
1
Standby time = 16384 states
0
Standby time = 32768 states
1
Standby time = 65536 states
0
Standby time = 131072 states
1
Standby time = 262144 states
0
Reserved
1
Standby time = 16 states
1
1
0
1
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 720 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
(Initial value)
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Bit 3—Output Port Enable (OPE): This bit specifies whether the output of the address bus and
bus control signals (AS, RD, HWR, LWR) is retained or set to high-impedance state in the
software standby mode, watch mode, and when making a direct transition.
Bit 3
OPE
Description
0
In software standby mode, watch mode, and when making a direct transition, address
bus and bus control signals are high-impedance.
1
In software standby mode, watch mode, and when making a direct transition, the
output state of the address bus and bus control signals is retained.
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: These bits always return 0 when read, and cannot be written to.
21B.2.2 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PSTOP
—
—
—
STCS
SCK2
SCK1
SCK0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCKCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs φ clock output control and mediumspeed mode control.
SCKCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—φ
φ Clock Output Disable (PSTOP): In combination with the DDR of the applicable port,
this bit controls φ output. See section 21B.12, φ Clock Output Disabling Function, for details.
Description
PSTOP
High-Speed Mode,
Medium-Speed Mode, Sleep Mode,
Sub-Active Mode
Sub-Sleep Mode
Software Standby
Mode, Watch Mode, Hardware
Direct Transition
Standby Mode
0
φ output (initial value)
φ output
Fixed high
High impedance
1
Fixed high
Fixed high
Fixed high
High impedance
Bit 7
Bits 6 to 4—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 721 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Bit 3—Frequency Multiplication Factor Switching Mode Select (STCS): Selects the operation
when the PLL circuit frequency multiplication factor is changed.
Bit 3
STCS
Description
0
Specified multiplication factor is valid after transition to software standby mode, watch
mode, or subactive mode
(Initial value)
1
Specified multiplication factor is valid immediately after STC bits are rewritten
Bits 2 to 0—System clock select (SCK2 to SCK0): These bits select the bus master clock in
high-speed mode, medium-speed mode, and sub-active mode.
Set SCK2 to SCK0 all to 0 when shifting to operation in watch mode or sub-active mode.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCK2
SCK1
SCK0
Description
0
0
0
Bus master in high-speed mode
1
Medium-speed clock is φ/2
1
0
Medium-speed clock is φ/4
1
Medium-speed clock is φ/8
0
Medium-speed clock is φ/16
1
Medium-speed clock is φ/32
—
—
1
0
1
(Initial value)
21B.2.3 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
:
7
6
DTON
LSON
5
4
3
NESEL SUBSTP RFCUT
2
1
0
—
STC1
STC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The LPWRCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the low power dissipation modes.
The LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and when in hardware standby mode. It is not
initialized in software standby mode. The following describes bits 7 to 2. For details of other bits,
see section 20.2.2, Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 722 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Bit 7—Direct Transition ON Flag (DTON): When shifting to low power dissipation mode by
executing the SLEEP instruction, this bit specifies whether or not to make a direct transition
between high-speed mode or medium-speed mode and the sub-active modes. The selected
operating mode after executing the SLEEP instruction is determined by the combination of other
control bits.
Bit 7
DTON
Description
0
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, operation shifts to sleep mode, software standby mode, or watch mode*.
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in sub-active mode, operation shifts
to sub-sleep mode or watch mode.
(Initial value)
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, operation shifts directly to sub-active mode*, or shifts to sleep mode or
software standby mode.
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in sub-active mode, operation shifts directly
to high-speed mode, or shifts to sub-sleep mode.
1
Note:
Always set high-speed mode when shifting to watch mode or sub-active mode.
*
Bit 6—Low-Speed ON Flag (LSON): When shifting to low power dissipation mode by executing
the SLEEP instruction, this bit specifies the operating mode, in combination with other control
bits. This bit also controls whether to shift to high-speed mode or sub-active mode when watch
mode is cancelled.
Bit 6
LSON
Description
0
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, operation shifts to sleep mode, software standby mode, or watch mode*.
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in sub-active mode, operation shifts to
watch mode or shifts directly to high-speed mode.
1
Note:
*
•
Operation shifts to high-speed mode when watch mode is cancelled.
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode, operation shifts to
watch mode or sub-active mode.
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in sub-active mode, operation shifts to subsleep mode or watch mode.
•
Operation shifts to sub-active mode when watch mode is cancelled.
(Initial value)
Always set high-speed mode when shifting to watch mode or sub-active mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 723 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Bit 5—Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select (NESEL): This bit selects the sampling
frequency of the subclock (φSUB) generated by the subclock oscillator is sampled by the clock (φ)
generated by the system clock oscillator. Set this bit to 0 when φ=5MHz or more.
Bit 5
NESEL
Description
0
Sampling using 1/32 xφ
1
Sampling using 1/4 xφ
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Subclock enable (SUBSTP): This bit enables/disables subclock generation.
Bit 4
SUBSTP Description
0
Enables subclock generation
1
Disables subclock generation
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Oscillation Circuit Feedback Resistance Control Bit (RFCUT): This bit turns the
internal feedback resistance of the main clock oscillation circuit ON/OFF.
Bit 3
RFCUT
Description
0
When the main clock is oscillating, sets the feedback resistance ON. When the main
clock is stopped, sets the feedback resistance OFF.
(Initial value)
1
Sets the feedback resistance OFF.
Bit 2—Reserved: Only write 0 to this bit.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 724 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
Bit
:
Initial value :
R/W
Note:
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
PSS
RST/NMI
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Only write 0 to clear the flag.
*
TCSR is an 8-bit read/write register that selects the clock input to WDT1 TCNT and the mode.
Here, we describe bit 4. For details of the other bits in this register, see section 12.2.2, Timer
Control/Status Register (TCSR).
The TCSR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and when in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized
in software standby mode.
Bit 4—Prescaler select (PSS): This bit selects the clock source input to WDT1 TCNT.
It also controls operation when shifting low power dissipation modes. The operating mode
selected after the SLEEP instruction is executed is determined in combination with other control
bits.
For details, see the description for clock selection in section 12.2.2, Timer Control/Status Register
(TCSR), and this section.
Bit 4
PSS
Description
0
•
TCNT counts the divided clock from the φ -based prescaler (PSM).
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, operation shifts to sleep mode or software standby mode.
(Initial value)
•
TCNT counts the divided clock from the φsubclock-based prescaler (PSS).
•
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, operation shifts to sleep mode, watch mode*, or sub-active mode*.
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in sub-active mode*, operation shifts to
sub-sleep mode*, watch mode*, or high-speed mode.
1
•
Note:
*
Always set high-speed mode when shifting to watch mode or sub-active mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 725 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
MSTPCRA
Bit
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0
Initial value :
R/W
:
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPCRB
Bit
:
MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4 MSTPB3 MSTPB2 MSTPB1 MSTPB0
Initial value :
R/W
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
:
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSTPCRC
Bit
MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0
Initial value :
R/W
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MSTPCR, comprising three 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control.
MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC are initialized to H'3FFFFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
They are not initialized in software standby mode.
MSTPCRA/MSTPCRB/MSTPCRC Bits 7 to 0—Module Stop (MSTPA7 to MSTPA0,
MSTPB7 to MSTPB0, MSTPC7 to MSTPC0): These bits specify module stop mode. See table
21B.4 for the method of selecting the on-chip peripheral functions.
MSTPCRA/MSTPCRB/
MSTPCRC Bits 7 to 0
MSTPA7 to MSTPA0,
MSTPB7 to MSTPB0,
MSTPC7 to MSTPC0
Description
0
Module stop mode is cleared (initial value of MSTPA7 and MSTPA6)
1
Module stop mode is set (initial value of MSTPA5–0, MSTPB7–0,
MSTPC7–0)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 726 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.3 Medium-Speed Mode
In high-speed mode, when the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in SCKCR are set to 1, the operating mode
changes to medium-speed mode as soon as the current bus cycle ends. In medium-speed mode, the
CPU operates on the operating clock (φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, or φ/32) specified by the SCK2 to SCK0
bits. The bus masters other than the CPU (DTC) also operate in medium-speed mode. On-chip
supporting modules other than the bus masters always operate on the high-speed clock (φ).
In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to
the bus master operating clock. For example, if φ/4 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip
memory is accessed in 4 states, and internal I/O registers in 8 states.
Medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing all of bits SCK2 to SCK0 to 0. A transition is made to
high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle.
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, and LSON bit in
LPWRCR is cleared to 0, a transition is made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an
interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored.
When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SSBY bit = 1, LPWRCR LSON bit = 0, and
TCSR (WDT1) PSS bit = 0, operation shifts to the software standby mode. When software
standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored.
When the RES pin is set low and medium-speed mode is cancelled, operation shifts to the reset
state. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer.
When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
Figure 21B.2 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode.
Medium-speed mode
φ,
supporting module clock
Bus master clock
Internal address bus
SBYCR
SBYCR
Internal write signal
Figure 21B.2 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 727 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.4 Sleep Mode
21B.4.1 Sleep Mode
When the SLEEP instruction is executed when the SBYCR SSBY bit = 0 and the LPWRCR
LSON bit = 0, the CPU enters the sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops but the
contents of the CPU’s internal registers are retained. Other supporting modules do not stop.
21B.4.2 Exiting Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is exited by any interrupt, or signals at the RES, or STBY pins.
Exiting Sleep Mode by Interrupts: When an interrupt occurs, sleep mode is exited and interrupt
exception processing starts. Sleep mode is not exited if the interrupt is disabled, or interrupts other
than NMI are masked by the CPU.
Exiting Sleep Mode by RES pin: Setting the RES pin level Low selects the reset state. After the
stipulated reset input duration, driving the RES pin High starts the CPU performing reset
exception processing.
Exiting Sleep Mode by STBY Pin: When the STBY pin level is driven Low, a transition is made
to hardware standby mode.
21B.5 Module Stop Mode
21B.5.1 Module Stop Mode
Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip supporting modules.
When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of
the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating
independently.
Table 21B.4 shows MSTP bits and the corresponding on-chip supporting modules.
When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module
starts operating at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of modules
other than the SCI, A/D converter and HCAN are retained.
After reset clearance, all modules other than DTC are in module stop mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 728 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
When an on-chip supporting module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is
disabled.
Table 21B.4 MSTP Bits and Corresponding On-Chip Supporting Modules
Register
Bit
MSTPCRA
MSTPA7*
Module
MSTPA6
Data transfer controller (DTC)
MSTPA5
MSTPA4*
16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU)
MSTPA3
MSTPA2*
Programmable pulse generator (PPG)
MSTPA1
A/D converter
MSTPA0*
MSTPCRB
MSTPB7
Serial communication interface 0 (SCI0)
MSTPB6
Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1)
MSTPB5
MSTPB4*
Serial communication interface 2 (SCI2)
MSTPB3*
MSTPB2*
MSTPB1*
MSTPB0*
MSTPCRC
MSTPC7*
MSTPC6*
MSTPC5
D/A converter (channels 2, 3)
MSTPC4
PC break controller (PBC)
MSTPC3
HCAN
MSTPC2*
MSTPC1*
MSTPC0*
Note:
*
MSTPA7 is a readable/writable bit with an initial value of 0.
MSTPA4, MSTPA2, MSTPA0, MSTPB4 to MSTPB0, MSTPC7 to MSTPC4, and
MSTPC2 to MSTPC0 are readable/writable bits with an initial value of 1 and should
always be written with 1.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 729 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.5.2 Usage Notes
DTC Module Stop: Depending on the operating status of the DTC, the MSTPA7 and MSTPA6
bits may not be set to 1. Setting of the DTC module stop mode should be carried out only when
the respective module is not activated.
For details, refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
On-Chip Supporting Module Interrupt: Relevant interrupt operations cannot be performed in
module stop mode. Consequently, if module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been
requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC activation source.
Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode.
Writing to MSTPCR: MSTPCR should only be written to by the CPU.
21B.6 Software Standby Mode
21B.6.1 Software Standby Mode
A transition is made to software standby mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed when the
SBYCR SSBY bit = 1 and the LPWRCR LSON bit = 0, and the TCSR (WDT1) PSS bit = 0. In
this mode, the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and oscillator all stop. However, the contents of
the CPU’s internal registers, RAM data, and the states of on-chip supporting modules other than
the SCI, A/D converter, HCAN and I/O ports, are retained. Whether the address bus and bus
control signals are placed in the high-impedance state or retain the output state can be specified by
the OPE bit in SBYCR.
In this mode the oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced.
21B.6.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode
Software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI pin, or pins IRQ0 to IRQ5), or by
means of the RES pin or STBY pin.
• Clearing with an interrupt
When an NMI or IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and
after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR, stable clocks are supplied to
the entire chip, software standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started.
When clearing software standby mode with an IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt, set the corresponding
enable bit to 1 and ensure that no interrupt with a higher priority than interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 730 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
is generated. Software standby mode cannot be cleared if the interrupt has been masked on the
CPU side or has been designated as a DTC activation source.
• Clearing with the RES pin
When the RES pin is driven Low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as clock
oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire chip. Note that the RES pin must be held
Low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin goes high, the CPU begins reset
exception handling.
• Clearing with the STBY pin
When the STBY pin is driven Low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
21B.6.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode
Bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below.
Using a Crystal Oscillator: Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is at least 8 ms (the
oscillation stabilization time).
Table 21B.5 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits STS2
to STS0.
Table 21B.5 Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings
STS2
STS1
STS0
Standby Time
20
MHz
16
MHz
12
MHz
10
MHz
8
MHz
6
MHz
4
MHz
Unit
0
0
0
8192 states
0.41
0.51
0.68
0.8
1.0
1.3
2.0
ms
1
16384 states
0.82
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.7
4.1
0
32768 states
1.6
2.0
2.7
3.3
4.1
5.5
1
65536 states
3.3
4.1
5.5
6.6
0
131072 states
6.6
1
262144 states
1
1
0
1
8.2
13.1 16.4
10.9
21.8
8.2
13.1 16.4
26.2
32.8
8.2
10.9 16.4
21.8
32.8
43.6
65.6
0
Reserved
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
16 states*
0.8
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
1.7
4.0
µs
: Recommended time setting
Note: * Do not use this setting.
Using an External Clock: It is necessary to allow time for the PLL circuit to stabilize. Therefore,
the standby time should be set to a value of 2 ms or greater.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 731 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example
Figure 21B.3 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at the
falling edge on the NMI pin, and software standby mode is cleared at the rising edge on the NMI
pin.
In this example, an NMI interrupt is accepted with the NMIEG bit in SYSCR cleared to 0 (falling
edge specification), then the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification), the SSBY bit is set
to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed, causing a transition to software standby mode.
Software standby mode is then cleared at the rising edge on the NMI pin.
Oscillator
φ
NMI
NMIEG
SSBY
NMI exception
handling
NMIEG = 1
SSBY = 1
Software standby mode
(power-down mode)
Oscillation
stabilization
time tOSC2
NMI exception
handling
SLEEP instruction
Figure 21B.3 Software Standby Mode Application Example
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 732 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.6.5 Usage Notes
I/O Port Status: In software standby mode, I/O port states are retained. If the OPE bit is set to 1,
the address bus and bus control signal output is also retained. Therefore, there is no reduction in
current dissipation for the output current when a high-level signal is output.
Current Dissipation during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period: Current dissipation
increases during the oscillation stabilization wait period.
Write Data Buffer Function: The write data buffer function and software standby mode cannot
be used at the same time. When the write data buffer function is used, the WDBE bit in BCRL
should be cleared to 0 to cancel the write data buffer function before entering software standby
mode. Also check that external writes have finished, by reading external addresses, etc., before
executing a SLEEP instruction to enter software standby mode. See section 7.7, Write Data Buffer
Function, for details of the write data buffer function.
21B.7 Hardware Standby Mode
21B.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode
When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode from any mode.
In hardware standby mode, all functions enter the reset state and stop operation, resulting in a
significant reduction in power dissipation. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, on-chip
RAM data is retained. I/O ports are set to the high-impedance state.
In order to retain on-chip RAM data, the RAME bit in SYSCR should be cleared to 0 before
driving the STBY pin low.
Do not change the state of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) while the H8S/2626 Group is in
hardware standby mode.
Hardware standby mode is cleared by means of the STBY pin and the RES pin. When the STBY
pin is driven high while the RES pin is low, the reset state is set and clock oscillation is started.
Ensure that the RES pin is held low until the clock oscillator stabilizes (at least 8 ms—the
oscillation stabilization time—when using a crystal oscillator). When the RES pin is subsequently
driven high, a transition is made to the program execution state via the reset exception handling
state.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 733 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing
Figure 21B.4 shows an example of hardware standby mode timing.
When the STBY pin is driven low after the RES pin has been driven low, a transition is made to
hardware standby mode. Hardware standby mode is cleared by driving the STBY pin high, waiting
for the oscillation stabilization time, then changing the RES pin from low to high.
Oscillator
RES
STBY
Oscillation
stabilization
time
Reset
exception
handling
Figure 21B.4 Hardware Standby Mode Timing
21B.8 Watch Mode
21B.8.1 Watch Mode
CPU operation makes a transition to watch mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in highspeed mode or sub-active mode with SBYCR SSBY=1, LPWRCR DTON = 0, and TCSR
(WDT1) PSS = 1.
In watch mode, the CPU is stopped and supporting modules other than WDT1 are also stopped.
The contents of the CPU is internal registers, the data in internal RAM, and the statuses of the
internal supporting modules (excluding the SCI, ADC, HCAN) and I/O ports are retained.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 734 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.8.2 Exiting Watch Mode
Watch mode is exited by any interrupt (WOVI interrupt, NMI pin, or IRQ0 to IRQ5), or signals at
the RES, or STBY pins.
(1) Exiting Watch Mode by Interrupts
When an interrupt occurs, watch mode is exited and a transition is made to high-speed mode or
medium-speed mode when the LPWRCR LSON bit = 0 or to sub-active mode when the LSON bit
= 1. When a transition is made to high-speed mode, a stable clock is supplied to all LSI circuits
and interrupt exception processing starts after the time set in SBYCR STS2 to STS0 has elapsed.
In the case of IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupts, no transition is made from watch mode if the
corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0, and, in the case of interrupts from the internal
supporting modules, the interrupt enable register has been set to disable the reception of that
interrupt, or is masked by the CPU.
See section 21B.6.3, Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode,
for how to set the oscillation stabilization time when making a transition from watch mode to
high-speed mode.
(2) Exiting Watch Mode by RES pins
For exiting watch mode by the RES pins, see, Clearing with the RES pins in section 21B.6.2,
Clearing Software Standby Mode.
(3) Exiting Watch Mode by STBY pin
When the STBY pin level is driven Low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
21B.8.3 Notes
(1) I/O Port Status
The status of the I/O ports is retained in watch mode. Also, when the OPE bit is set to 1, the
address bus and bus control signals continue to be output. Therefore, when a High level is output,
the current consumption is not diminished by the amount of current to support the High level
output.
(2) Current Consumption when Waiting for Oscillation Stabilization
The current consumption increases during stabilization of oscillation.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 735 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.9 Sub-Sleep Mode
21B.9.1 Sub-Sleep Mode
When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 0, LPWRCR LSON bit = 1,
and TCSR (WDT1) PSS bit = 1, CPU operation shifts to sub-sleep mode.
In sub-sleep mode, the CPU is stopped. Supporting modules other than WDT0, and WDT1 are
also stopped. The contents of the CPUís internal registers, the data in internal RAM, and the
statuses of the internal supporting modules (excluding the SCI, ADC, HCAN) and I/O ports are
retained.
21B.9.2 Exiting Sub-Sleep Mode
Sub-sleep mode is exited by an interrupt (interrupts from internal supporting modules, NMI pin, or
IRQ0 to IRQ5), or signals at the RES or STBY pins.
(1) Exiting Sub-Sleep Mode by Interrupts
When an interrupt occurs, sub-sleep mode is exited and interrupt exception processing starts.
In the case of IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupts, sub-sleep mode is not cancelled if the corresponding
enable bit has been cleared to 0, and, in the case of interrupts from the internal supporting
modules, the interrupt enable register has been set to disable the reception of that interrupt, or is
masked by the CPU.
(2) Exiting Sub-Sleep Mode by RES
For exiting sub-sleep mode by the RES pins, see, Clearing with the RES pins in section 21B.6.2,
Clearing Software Standby Mode.
(3) Exiting Sub-Sleep Mode by STBY Pin
When the STBY pin level is driven Low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 736 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.10 Sub-Active Mode
21B.10.1 Sub-Active Mode
When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1,
LPWRCR DTON bit = 1, LSON bit = 1, and TCSR (WDT1) PSS bit = 1, CPU operation shifts to
sub-active mode. When an interrupt occurs in watch mode, and if the LSON bit of LPWRCR is 1,
a transition is made to sub-active mode. And if an interrupt occurs in sub-sleep mode, a transition
is made to sub-active mode.
In sub-active mode, the CPU operates at low speed on the subclock, and the program is executed
step by step. Supporting modules other than WDT0, and WDT1 are also stopped.
When operating the CPU in sub-active mode, the SCKCR SCK2 to SCK0 bits must be set to 0.
21B.10.2 Exiting Sub-Active Mode
Sub-active mode is exited by the SLEEP instruction or the RES or STBY pins.
(1) Exiting Sub-Active Mode by SLEEP Instruction
When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1, LPWRCR DTON bit =
0, and TCSR (WDT1) PSS bit = 1, the CPU exits sub-active mode and a transition is made to
watch mode. When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 0, LPWRCR
LSON bit = 1, and TCSR (WDT1) PSS bit = 1, a transition is made to sub-sleep mode. Finally,
when the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1, LPWRCR DTON bit = 1,
LSON bit = 0, and TCSR (WDT1) PSS bit = 1, a direct transition is made to high-speed mode
(SCK0 to SCK2 all 0).
See section 21B.11, Direct Transitions, for details of direct transitions.
(2) Exiting Sub-Active Mode by RES Pins
For exiting sub-active mode by the RES pins, see, Clearing with the RES pins in section 21B.6.2,
Clearing Software Standby Mode.
(3) Exiting Sub-Active Mode by STBY Pin
When the STBY pin level is driven Low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 737 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.11 Direct Transitions
21B.11.1 Overview of Direct Transitions
There are three modes, high-speed, medium-speed, and sub-active, in which the CPU executes
programs. When a direct transition is made, there is no interruption of program execution when
shifting between high-speed and sub-active modes. Direct transitions are enabled by setting the
LPWRCR DTON bit to 1, then executing the SLEEP instruction. After a transition, direct
transition interrupt exception processing starts.
(1) Direct Transitions from High-Speed Mode to Sub-Active Mode
Execute the SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode when the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1, LPWRCR
LSON bit = 1, and DTON bit = 1, and TSCR (WDT1) PSS bit = 1 to make a transition to subactive mode.
(2) Direct Transitions from Sub-Active Mode to High-Speed Mode
Execute the SLEEP instruction in sub-active mode when the SBYCR SSBY bit = 1, LPWRCR
LSON bit = 0, and DTON bit = 1, and TSCR (WDT1) PSS bit = 1 to make a direct transition to
high-speed mode after the time set in SBYCR STS2 to STS0 has elapsed.
21B.12 φ Clock Output Disabling Function
Output of the φ clock can be controlled by means of the PSTOP bit in SCKCR, and DDR for the
corresponding port. When the PSTOP bit is set to 1, the φ clock stops at the end of the bus cycle,
and φ output goes high. φ clock output is enabled when the PSTOP bit is cleared to 0. When DDR
for the corresponding port is cleared to 0, φ clock output is disabled and input port mode is set.
Table 21B.6 shows the state of the φ pin in each processing state.
Table 21B.6 φ Pin State in Each Processing State
DDR
0
1
1
PSTOP
—
0
1
Hardware standby mode
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
Software standby mode, watch
mode, and direct transition
High impedance
Fixed high
Fixed high
Sleep mode and subsleep mode
High impedance
φ output
Fixed high
High-speed mode, medium-speed
mode, and subactive mode
High impedance
φ output
Fixed high
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 738 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
21B.13 Usage Notes
1. When making a transition to sub-active mode or watch mode, set the DTC to enter module
stop mode (write 1 to the relevant bits in MSTPCR), and then read the relevant bits to confirm
that they are set to 1 before mode transition. Do not clear module stop mode (write 0 to the
relevant bits in MSTPCR) until a transition from sub-active mode to high-speed mode or
medium-speed mode has been performed.
If a DTC activation source occurs in sub-active mode, the DTC will be activated only after
module stop mode has been cleared and high-speed mode or medium-speed mode has been
entered.
2. The on-chip peripheral modules (DTC and TPU) which halt operation in sub-active mode
cannot clear an interrupt in sub-active mode. Therefore, if a transition is made to sub-active
mode while an interrupt is requested, the CPU interrupt source cannot be cleared. Disable the
interrupts of each on-chip peripheral module before executing a SLEEP instruction to enter
sub-active mode or watch mode.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 739 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 21B Power-Down Modes [H8S/2626 Group]
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 740 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
22.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 22.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
— Preliminary —
Item
Symbol
Value
Unit
Power supply voltage
VCC
–0.3 to +4.3
V
PVCC1–4
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Input voltage (XTAL, EXTAL,
OSC1, OSC2)
Vin
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
Input voltage (ports 4 and 9)
Vin
–0.3 to AVCC +0.3
V
Input voltage (except ports 4 and 9) Vin
–0.3 to PVCC +0.3
V
Reference voltage
Vref
–0.3 to AVCC +0.3
V
Analog power supply voltage
AVCC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Analog input voltage
VAN
–0.3 to AVCC +0.3
V
Operating temperature
Topr
Regular specifications: –20 to +75
°C
Wide-range specifications: –40 to +85
°C
–55 to +125
°C
PLLVCC
Storage temperature
Tstg
Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum rating are exceeded.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 741 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
22.2
DC Characteristics
Table 22.2 lists the DC characteristics. Table 22.3 lists the permissible output currents.
Table 22.2 DC Characteristics
— Preliminary —
Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
1
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)*
Item
Symbol
Schmitt
trigger input
voltage
IRQ0 to IRQ5 VT
Input high
voltage
–
+
VT
Output high
Max
Unit
PVCC × 0.2
—
—
V
—
—
RES, STBY, VIH
NMI, MD2
to MD0, FWE
PVCC × 0.9
PVCC + 0.3 V
EXTAL, OSC1
VCC × 0.7
—
VCC + 0.3
Ports 1, A to
F, HRxD
PVCC × 0.7
—
PVCC + 0.3 V
–
—
Test
Conditions
PVCC × 0.7 V
—
V
V
AVCC × 0.7
—
AVCC + 0.3 V
–0.3
—
PVCC × 0.1 V
EXTAL, OSC1
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.2
Ports 1, A to
F, HRxD
–0.3
—
PVCC × 0.2 V
Ports 4 and 9
–0.3
—
AVCC × 0.2 V
All output pins VOH
PVCC – 0.5 —
—
V
IOH = –200 µA
PVCC – 1.0 —
—
V
IOH = –1 mA
—
—
0.4
V
IOL = 1.6 mA
—
—
1.0
µA
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 to
PVCC – 0.5 V
—
—
1.0
µA
RES, STBY,
NMI,
MD2 to MD0,
FWE
VIL
voltage
Output low
voltage
Typ
PVCC × 0.05 —
+
VT – VT
Port 4 and 9
Input low
voltage
Min
All output pins VOL
Input leakage RES
| Iin |
current
STBY, NMI,
HRxD, MD2 to
MD0, FWE
Ports 4 and 9
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 742 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
V
Vin = 0.5 to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
Item
Three-state
leakage
current
(off state)
Symbol
Typ
Max
Unit
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 to
PVCC – 0.5 V
–IP
30
—
300
µA
Vin = 0 V
Cin
—
—
30
pF
NMI
—
—
30
pF
All input pins
except RES
and NMI
—
—
15
pF
Vin = 0 V,
f = 1 MHz,
Ta = 25°C
—
55
65
mA
VCC = 3.3 V VCC = 3.6 V
f = 20 MHz
Sleep mode
—
50
mA
40
VCC = 3.3 V VCC = 3.6 V
f = 20 MHz
All modules
stopped
—
40
—
mA
f = 20 MHz,
VCC = 3.3 V
(reference
values)
Mediumspeed mode
(φ/32)
—
30
—
mA
f = 20 MHz,
VCC = 3.3 V
(reference
values)
Subactive
mode
—
90
200
µA
Using 32.768
kHz crystal
resonator
Subsleep
mode
—
120
µA
Using 32.768
kHz crystal
resonator
Watch mode
—
30
µA
Using 32.768
kHz crystal
resonator
Ports 1, A to F ITSI
MOS input
Ports A to E
pull-up current
Input
capacitance
Current
2
dissipation*
Test
Conditions
Min
RES
Normal
operation
4
ICC*
VCC = 3.3 V
60
VCC = 3.3 V
12
VCC = 3.3 V
Standby
3
mode*
—
2.0
5.0
µA
Ta ≤ 50°C
—
—
20
µA
50°C < Ta
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 743 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
Item
Port power
supply
current
During
operation
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
PICC
—
15
20
mA
PVCC =
5.0 V
PVCC =
5.5 V
—
5.0
In standby
3
mode*
Analog
During A/D
power supply and D/A
current
conversion
—
AlCC
—
—
—
5.0
µA
AlCC
—
2.5
4.0
mA
—
—
5.0
µA
VRAM
2.0
—
—
V
Idle
RAM standby voltage
µA
PVCC =
5.5 V
Idle
Reference
During A/D
power supply and D/A
current
conversion
Test
Conditions
1.0
2.0
mA
AVCC = 5.0 V
Vref = 5.0 V
Notes: 1. If the A/D and D/A converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, Vref , and AVSS pins
open. Apply a voltage between 4.5 V and 5.5 V to the AVCC and Vref pins by connecting
them to PVCC, for instance. Set Vref ≤ AVCC.
2. Current dissipation values are for VIH = VCC (EXTAL, OSC1), AVCC (ports 4 and 9), or
PVCC (other), and VIL = 0 V, with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip MOS pull-up
transistors in the off state.
3. The values are for VRAM ≤ PVCC < 3.0 V, VIH min = VCC – 0.1 V, and VIL max = 0.1 V.
4. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows:
ICC max = 8.0 (mA) + 0.8 (mA/(MHz × V)) × VCC × f (normal operation)
ICC max = 8.0 (mA) + 0.58 (mA/(MHz × V)) × VCC × f (sleep mode)
5. Applies to the mask ROM version only.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 744 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
Table 22.3 Permissible Output Currents
— Preliminary —
Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)*
Item
Symbol Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Permissible output
low current (per pin)
All output
pins
PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
IOL
—
—
10
mA
Permissible output
low current (total)
Total of all
output pins
PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
∑ IOL
—
—
100
mA
Permissible output
All output
high current (per pin) pins
PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
–IOH
—
—
2.0
mA
Permissible output
high current (total)
PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
∑ –IOH
—
—
30
mA
Note:
22.3
*
Total of all
output pins
To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 22.3.
AC Characteristics
Figure 22.1 show, the test conditions for the AC characteristics.
3V
RL
LSI output pin
C
RH
C = 50 pF: Ports 10 to 13, A to F
(In case of expansion bus control signal output pin setting)
C = 30 pF: All ports
RL = 2.4 kΩ
RH = 12 kΩ
Input/output timing measurement levels
• Low level : 0.8 V
• High level : 2.0 V
Figure 22.1 Output Load Circuit
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 745 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
22.3.1
Clock Timing
Table 22.4 lists the clock timing
Table 22.4 Clock Timing
— Preliminary —
Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, φ = 32.768 kHz, 4 to 20 MHz, Ta = –20°C to
+75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Clock cycle time
tcyc
50
250
ns
Figure 22.2
Clock high pulse width
tCH
15
—
ns
Clock low pulse width
tCL
15
—
ns
Clock rise time
tCr
—
5
ns
Clock fall time
tCf
—
5
ns
Oscillation stabilization time at
reset (crystal)
tOSC1
20
—
ms
Figure 22.3
Oscillation stabilization time in
software standby (crystal)
tOSC2
8
—
ms
Figure 21A.3,
Figure 21B.3
External clock output stabilization
delay time
tDEXT
2
—
ms
Figure 22.3
32-kHz clock oscillation settling
time
tOSC3
—
2
s
Sub clock oscillator frequency
fSUB
32.768
—
kHz
Sub clock (φSUB) cycle time
tSUB
30.5
—
µs
tcyc
tCH
tCf
φ
tCL
tCr
Figure 22.2 System Clock Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 746 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
EXTAL
tDEXT
tDEXT
VCC
STBY
tOSC1
tOSC1
RES
φ
Figure 22.3 Oscillation Stabilization Timing
22.3.2
Control Signal Timing
Table 22.5 lists the control signal timing.
Table 22.5 Control Signal Timing
Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, φ = 32.768 kHz, 4 to 20 MHz, Ta = –20°C to
+75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
RES setup time
tRESS
200
—
ns
Figure 22.4
RES pulse width
tRESW
20
—
tcyc
NMI setup time
tNMIS
150
—
ns
NMI hold time
tNMIH
10
—
NMI pulse width (exiting
software standby mode)
tNMIW
200
—
ns
IRQ setup time
tIRQS
150
—
ns
IRQ hold time
tIRQH
10
—
ns
IRQ pulse width (exiting
software standby mode)
tIRQW
200
—
ns
Figure 22.5
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 747 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
φ
tRESS
tRESS
RES
tRESW
Figure 22.4 Reset Input Timing
φ
tNMIH
tNMIS
NMI
tNMIW
IRQi
(i = 0 to 2)
tIRQW
tIRQS
tIRQH
IRQ
Edge input
tIRQS
IRQ
Level input
Figure 22.5 Interrupt Input Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 748 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
22.3.3
Bus Timing
Table 22.6 lists the bus timing.
Table 22.6 Bus Timing
— Preliminary —
Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, φ = 32.768 kHz, 4 to 20 MHz, Ta = –20°C to
+75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Address delay time
tAD
—
25
ns
Address setup time
tAS
0.5 × tcyc – 20
—
ns
Figure 22.6 to
Figure 22.10
Address hold time
tAH
0.5 × tcyc – 15
—
ns
AS delay time
tASD
—
20
ns
RD delay time 1
tRSD1
—
20
ns
RD delay time 2
tRSD2
—
20
ns
Read data setup time
tRDS
15
—
ns
Read data hold time
tRDH
0
—
ns
Read data access time 1 tACC1
—
1.0 × tcyc – 35
ns
Read data access time 2 tACC2
—
1.5 × tcyc – 25
ns
Read data access time 3 tACC3
—
2.0 × tcyc – 35
ns
Read data access
time 4
tACC4
—
2.5 × tcyc – 25
ns
Read data access
time 5
tACC5
—
3.0 × tcyc – 35
ns
WR delay time 1
tWRD1
—
20
ns
WR delay time 2
tWRD2
—
20
ns
WR pulse width 1
tWSW1
1.0 × tcyc – 20
—
ns
WR pulse width 2
tWSW2
1.5 × tcyc – 20
—
ns
Write data delay time
tWDD
—
30
ns
Write data setup time
tWDS
0.5 × tcyc – 20
—
ns
Write data hold time
tWDH
0.5 × tcyc – 10
—
ns
WAIT setup time
tWTS
30
—
ns
WAIT hold time
tWTH
5
—
ns
Figure 22.8
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 749 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
BREQ setup time
tBRQS
30
—
ns
Figure 22.11
BACK delay time
tBACD
—
15
ns
Bus-floating time
tBZD
—
50
ns
BREQO delay time
tBRQOD
—
25
ns
T1
T2
φ
tAD
A23 to A0
tAS
tAH
tASD
tASD
AS
tRSD1
RD
(read)
tRSD2
tACC2
tAS
tACC3
tRDS tRDH
D15 to D0
(read)
tWRD2
HWR, LWR
(write)
tWRD2
tAH
tAS
tWDD
tWSW1
tWDH
D15 to D0
(write)
Figure 22.6 Basic Bus Timing (Two-State Access)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 750 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Figure 22.12
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
T1
T2
T3
φ
tAD
A23 to A0
tAS
tAH
tASD
tASD
AS
tRSD1
RD
(read)
tRSD2
tACC4
tAS
tRDS tRDH
tACC5
D15 to D0
(read)
tWRD1
tWRD2
HWR, LWR
(write)
tAH
tWDD tWDS
tWSW2
tWDH
D15 to D0
(write)
Figure 22.7 Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 751 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
T1
T2
TW
T3
φ
A23 to A0
AS
RD
(read)
D15 to D0
(read)
HWR, LWR
(write)
D15 to D0
(write)
tWTS tWTH
tWTS tWTH
WAIT
Figure 22.8 Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access with One Wait State)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 752 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
T1
T2 or T3
T1
T2
φ
tAD
A23 to A0
tAS
tASD
tASD
tAH
AS
tRSD2
RD
(read)
tACC3
tRDS
tRDH
D15 to D0
(read)
Figure 22.9 Burst ROM Access Timing (Two-State Access)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 753 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
T1
T2 or T3
T1
φ
tAD
A23 to A0
AS
tRSD2
RD
(read)
tACC1
tRDS
tRDH
D15 to D0
(read)
Figure 22.10 Burst ROM Access Timing (One-State Access)
φ
tBRQS
tBRQS
BREQ
tBACD
tBACD
BACK
tBZD
A23 to A0,
AS, RD,
HWR, LWR
Figure 22.11 External Bus Release Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 754 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
tBZD
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
φ
tBRQOD
tBRQOD
BREQO
Figure 22.12 External Bus Request Output Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 755 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
22.3.4
Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules
Table 22.7 lists the timing of on-chip supporting modules.
Table 22.7 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules
— Preliminary —
Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, φ = 32.768 kHz, 4 to 20 MHz, Ta = –20°C to
+75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
I/O port
TPU
SCI
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Output data delay time
tPWD
—
50
ns
Figure 22.13
Input data setup time
tPRS
30
—
Input data hold time
tPRH
30
—
Timer output delay time
tTOCD
—
50
ns
Figure 22.14
Timer input setup time
tTICS
30
—
Timer clock input setup
time
tTCKS
30
—
ns
Figure 22.15
Timer clock
pulse width
Single edge
tTCKWH
1.5
—
tcyc
Both edges
tTCKWL
2.5
—
Input clock
cycle
Asynchronous
tScyc
4
—
6
—
Synchronous
A/D
converter
HCAN*
tcyc
Input clock pulse width
tSCKW
0.4
0.6
tScyc
Input clock rise time
tSCKr
—
1.5
tcyc
Input clock fall time
tSCKf
—
1.5
Transmit data delay time
tTXD
—
50
Receive data setup time
(synchronous)
tRXS
50
—
Receive data hold time
(synchronous)
tRXH
50
—
Trigger input setup time
tTRGS
30
Transmit data delay time
tHTXD
Transmit data setup time
Transmit data hold time
Figure 22.16
ns
Figure 22.17
—
ns
Figure 22.18
—
100
ns
Figure 22.19
tHRXS
100
—
tHRXH
100
—
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 756 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
tPOD
—
50
ns
Figure 22.20
PPG
Pulse output delay time
WDT0
Overflow output delay time tWOVD
—
50
ns
Figure 22.21
Buzz output delay time
—
50
ns
Figure 22.22
WDT1
Note:
*
tBUZD
The HCAN input signal is asynchronous. However, its state is judged to have changed
at the leading edge (two clock cycles) of the CK clock signal shown in figure 22.19. The
HCAN output signal is also asynchronous. Its state changes based on the leading edge
(two clock cycles) of the CK clock signal shown in figure 22.19.
T1
T2
φ
tPRS
tPRH
Ports 1, 4, 9
A to F (read)
tPWD
Ports 1, A to F
(write)
Figure 22.13 I/O Port Input/Output Timing
φ
tTOCD
Output compare
output*
tTICS
Input capture
input*
Note: * TIOCA0 to TIOCA5, TIOCB0 to TIOCB5, TIOCC0, TIOCC3, TIOCD0, TIOCD3
Figure 22.14 TPU Input/Output Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 757 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
φ
tTCKS
tTCKS
TCLKA to TCLKD
tTCKWL
tTCKWH
Figure 22.15 TPU Clock Input Timing
tSCKW
tSCKr
tSCKf
SCK0 to SCK3
tScyc
Figure 22.16 SCK Clock Input Timing
SCK0 to SCK3
tTXD
TxD0 to TxD3
(transit data)
tRXS
tRXH
RxD0 to RxD3
(receive data)
Figure 22.17 SCI Input/Output Timing (Clock Synchronous Mode)
φ
tTRGS
ADTRG
Figure 22.18 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 758 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
(Preliminary)
VOL
VOL
CK
tHTXD
TX
(transmit data )
tHRXS
tHRXH
RX
(receive data)
Figure 22.19 HCAN Input/Output Timing
φ
tPOD
PO15 to 8
Figure 22.20 PPG Output Timing
φ
tWOVD
tWOVD
WDTOVF
Figure 22.21 WDT0 Output Timing
φ
tBUZD
tBUZD
BUZZ
Figure 22.22 WDT1 Output Timing
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 759 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
22.4
A/D Conversion Characteristics
Table 22.8 lists the A/D conversion characteristics.
Table 22.8 A/D Conversion Characteristics
— Preliminary —
Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, φ = 4 to 20 MHz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C
(regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Resolution
10
10
10
bits
Conversion time
—
—
—
µs
10
—
—
Analog input capacitance
—
—
20
pF
Permissible signal-source
impedance
—
—
5
kΩ
Nonlinearity error
—
—
±3.5
LSB
Offset error
—
—
±3.5
LSB
Full-scale error
—
—
±3.5
LSB
Quantization
—
±0.5
—
LSB
Absolute accuracy
—
—
±4.0
LSB
22.5
Test Conditions
AVCC < 4.5 V
AVCC ≥ 4.5 V
D/A Conversion Characteristics
Table 22.9 shows the D/A conversion characteristics.
Table 22.9 D/A Conversion Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, φ = 4 to 20 MHz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C
(regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Resolution
8
8
8
bits
Conversion time
—
—
10
µs
20-pF capacitive load
Absolute accuracy
—
±1.5
±2.0
LSB
2-MΩ resistive load
—
—
±1.5
LSB
4-MΩ resistive load
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 760 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Test Conditions
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
22.6
Flash Memory Characteristics
Table 22.10 Flash Memory Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C
(regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Programming time*1 *2 *4
Erase time*1 *3 *5
tP
—
10
200
ms/128 bytes
tE
—
100
1000
ms/block
Number of rewrites
NWEC
—
—
100
Times
Wait time after SWE1 bit setting*1
Wait time after PSU1 bit setting*1
x0
1
—
—
µs
y
50
—
—
µs
Wait time after P1 bit setting*1 *4
z0
—
—
30
µs
z1
—
—
10
µs
z2
—
—
200
µs
Wait time after P1 bit clearing*1
α
5
—
—
µs
Wait time after PSU1 bit clearing*1
Wait time after PV1 bit setting*1
β
5
—
—
µs
γ
4
—
—
µs
Wait time after H'FF dummy write*1
Wait time after PV1 bit clearing*1
ε
2
—
—
µs
η
2
—
—
µs
Maximum number of writes*1 *4
N1
—
—
6
Times
Programming
Common
Erasing
N2
—
—
994
Times
Wait time after SWE1 bit clearing*1
Wait time after SWE1 bit setting*1
x1
100
—
—
µs
x
1
—
—
µs
Wait time after ESU1 bit setting*1
Wait time after E1 bit setting*1 *5
y
100
—
—
µs
z
—
—
10
ms
Wait time after E1 bit clearing*1
α
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after ESU1 bit clearing*1
Wait time after EV1 bit setting*1
β
10
—
—
µs
γ
6
—
—
µs
Wait time after H'FF dummy write*1
Wait time after EV1 bit clearing*1
ε
2
—
—
µs
η
4
—
—
µs
Maximum number of erases*1 *5
Notes:
N
—
—
100
Times
1. Follow the program/erase algorithms when making the time settings.
2. Programming time per 128 bytes. (Indicates the total time during which the P1 bit is set in flash
memory control register 1 (FLMCR1). Does not include the program-verify time.)
3. Time to erase one block. (Indicates the time during which the E1 bit is set in FLMCR1. Does not
include the erase-verify time.)
4. Maximum programming time
(tP(max) = Wait time after P1 bit setting (z) × maximum number of writes (N))
(z0 + z1) × 6 + z2 × 994
5. Maximum erase time
(tE(max) = Wait time after E1 bit setting (z) × maximum number of erases (N))
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 761 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (Preliminary)
22.7
Usage Note
Although both the F-ZTAT and mask ROM versions fully meet the electrical specifications listed
in this manual, there may be differences in the actual values of the electrical characteristics,
operating margins, noise margins, and so forth, due to differences in the fabrication process, the
on-chip ROM, and the layout patterns.
Therefore, if a system is evaluated using the F-ZTAT version, a similar evaluation should also be
performed using the mask ROM version.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 762 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Appendix A Instruction Set
Appendix A Instruction Set
A.1
Instruction List
Operand Notation
Rs
General register (destination)*
General register (source)*
Rn
General register*
Rd
ERn
General register (32-bit register)
MAC
Multiply-and-accumulate register (32-bit register)
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
EXR
Extended control register
CCR
Condition-code register
N
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#IMM
Immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Add
–
Subtract
×
Multiply
÷
Divide
∧
Logical AND
∨
Logical OR
⊕
Logical exclusive OR
→
Transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or
transition from the state on the left to the state on the right
¬
Logical NOT (logical complement)
( ) < >
Contents of operand
:8/:16/:24/:32
8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length
Note:
*
General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0
to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7).
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 763 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Appendix A Instruction Set
Condition Code Notation
Symbol
Changes according to the result of instruction
*
Undetermined (no guaranteed value)
0
Always cleared to 0
1
Always set to 1
—
Not affected by execution of the instruction
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 764 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
MOV
B
B
B
B
W 4
W
W
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV.B Rs,@aa:16
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV.W Rs,Rd
MOV.W @ERs,Rd
B
MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
B
B
MOV.B Rs,@ERd
MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
B
MOV.B @aa:32,Rd
B
MOV.B @ERs+,Rd
B
B
MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd
B
B
MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @aa:16,Rd
B
MOV.B @ERs,Rd
MOV.B @aa:8,Rd
B
MOV.B Rs,Rd
Operand Size
B 2
#xx
MOV.B #xx:8,Rd
Mnemonic
Rn
2
2
@ERn
2
2
2
@(d,ERn)
8
4
8
4
@–ERn/@ERn+
2
2
2
@aa
@(d,PC)
6
4
2
6
4
— —
— —
— —
— —
#xx:16→Rd16
Rs16→Rd16
@ERs→Rd16
— —
Rs8→@(d:16,ERd)
Rs8→@aa:32
— —
Rs8→@ERd
— —
— —
@aa:32→Rd8
Rs8→@aa:16
— —
@aa:16→Rd8
— —
— —
@aa:8→Rd8
— —
— —
@ERs→Rd8,ERs32+1→ERs32
ERd32-1→ERd32,Rs8→@ERd
— —
@(d:32,ERs)→Rd8
Rs8→@aa:8
— —
@(d:16,ERs)→Rd8
— —
— —
@ERs→Rd8
Rs8→@(d:32,ERd)
— —
Rs8→Rd8
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
2
1
2
4
3
2
3
5
3
2
4
3
2
3
5
3
2
1
1
Advanced
0 —
I H N Z V C
— —
Operation
#xx:8→Rd8
No. of States*1
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Table A.1
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
Instruction Set
(1) Data Transfer Instructions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 765 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
MOV
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 766 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
L
L
MOV.L @ERs,ERd
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd
L
L
MOV.L ERs,ERd
MOV.L @aa:32,ERd
L 6
MOV.L #xx:32,ERd
L
W
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32
MOV.L @aa:16,ERd
W
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16
L
W
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd
L
W
MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.L @ERs+,ERd
W
MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd
W
W
W
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd
MOV.W Rs,@ERd
W
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd
W
W
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd
Operand Size
#xx
MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd
Rn
2
@ERn
4
2
4
@(d,ERn)
10
6
8
4
8
@–ERn/@ERn+
4
2
2
@aa
8
6
6
4
6
4
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
@aa:32→Rd16
Rs16→@ERd
Rs16→@(d:16,ERd)
Rs16→@(d:32,ERd)
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
Rs16→@aa:32
#xx:32→ERd32
ERs32→ERd32
@ERs→ERd32
@(d:16,ERs)→ERd32
@(d:32,ERs)→ERd32
— —
— —
@aa:16→ERd32
@aa:32→ERd32
@ERs→ERd32,ERs32+4→ERs32 — —
— —
Rs16→@aa:16
ERd32-2→ERd32,Rs16→@ERd — —
— —
@aa:16→Rd16
@ERs→Rd16,ERs32+2→ERs32 — —
— —
@(d:32,ERs)→Rd16
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
I H N Z V C
@(d:16,ERs)→Rd16
Operation
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Mnemonic
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@(d,PC)
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
6
5
5
7
5
4
1
3
4
3
3
5
3
2
4
3
3
5
3
Advanced
No. of States*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
#xx
— —
— —
— —
— —
— — — — — —
@SP→Rn16,SP+2→SP
@SP→ERn32,SP+4→SP
SP-2→SP,Rn16→@SP
SP-4→SP,ERn32→@SP
(@SP→ERn32,SP+4→SP)
[2]
[2]
Cannot be used in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group
Cannot be used in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group
MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd
MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
4
Repeated for each register saved
(SP-4→SP,ERn32→@SP)
Repeated for each register restored
L
STM (ERm-ERn),@-SP
— — — — — —
7/9/11 [1]
7/9/11 [1]
5
3
STM
4
0 —
0 —
L
4
2
LDM @SP+,(ERm-ERn)
5
3
6
5
5
7
5
4
LDM
0 —
0 —
0 —
— —
ERs32→@aa:32
0 —
— —
ERs32→@aa:16
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
L
PUSH
4
2
— —
ERs32→@(d:32,ERd)
ERd32-4→ERd32,ERs32→@ERd — —
— —
PUSH.L ERn
W
POP.W Rn
8
6
— —
ERs32→@(d:16,ERd)
Advanced
I H N Z V C
ERs32→@ERd
Operation
L
L
MOV.L ERs,@aa:32
@–ERn/@ERn+
4
@aa
@(d,PC)
W
L
MOV.L ERs,@aa:16
@@aa
PUSH.W Rn
L
MOV.L ERs,@-ERd
10
Rn
MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd) L
4
@ERn
6
L
@(d,ERn)
MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd) L
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
—
POP.L ERn
POP
MOV
Operand Size
Mnemonic
No. of States*1
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 767 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
L
B
W
W
L
ADDS #4,ERd
INC.B Rd
INC.W #1,Rd
INC.W #2,Rd
INC.L #1,ERd
W 4
L
ADDS #2,ERd
SUB.W #xx:16,Rd
L
ADDS #1,ERd
B
B
ADDX Rs,Rd
SUB.B Rs,Rd
B 2
ADDX #xx:8,Rd
SUB
L
ADD.L ERs,ERd
L
L 6
ADD.L #xx:32,ERd
B
W
ADD.W Rs,Rd
DAA Rd
W 4
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd
INC.L #2,ERd
B 2
B
ADD.B Rs,Rd
Operand Size
ADD.B #xx:8,Rd
#xx
DAA
INC
ADDS
ADDX
ADD
Rn
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
I H N Z V C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
—— — —— —
—
—
—
—
—— — —— —
—
—
—— — —— —
—
— [4]
Rd8+#xx:8+C→Rd8
Rd8+Rs8+C→Rd8
ERd32+1→ERd32
ERd32+2→ERd32
ERd32+4→ERd32
1
——
——
——
——
——
— *
—
— [3]
Rd8+1→Rd8
Rd16+1→Rd16
Rd16+2→Rd16
ERd32+1→ERd32
ERd32+2→ERd32
Rd8 decimal adjust→Rd8
Rd8-Rs8→Rd8
Rd16-#xx:16→Rd16
*
1
2
1
1
[5]
[5]
3
1
2
1
— [4]
— [3]
— [3]
Rd16+Rs16→Rd16
—
Rd16+#xx:16→Rd16
—
Rd8+#xx:8→Rd8
Rd8+Rs8→Rd8
ERd32+ERs32→ERd32
1
Advanced
No. of States*1
ERd32+#xx:32→ERd32
Operation
↔ ↔
↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Mnemonic
Condition Code
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 768 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
↔
↔
↔
↔
—
@@aa
@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
@ERn
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
(2) Arithmetic Instructions
L
L
B
B
W
B
W
DEC.L #2,ERd
DAS Rd
MULXU.B Rs,Rd
MULXU.W Rs,ERd
MULXS.B Rs,Rd
MULXS.W Rs,ERd
DAS
MULXU
MULXS
DEC
DEC.L #1,ERd
L
SUBS #2,ERd
W
L
SUBS #1,ERd
DEC.W #2,Rd
B
SUBX Rs,Rd
W
B 2
SUBX #xx:8,Rd
DEC.W #1,Rd
L
SUB.L ERs,ERd
L
L 6
SUB.L #xx:32,ERd
B
W
SUB.W Rs,Rd
DEC.B Rd
Operand Size
SUBS #4,ERd
SUBS
SUBX
SUB
Rn
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
(signed multiplication)
— —
Rd16×Rs16→ERd32
— —
— —
5
4
— —
Rd8×Rs8→Rd16 (signed multiplication)
(unsigned multiplication)
Rd16×Rs16→ERd32
4
1
—
— — — — — —
— *
Rd8 decimal adjust→Rd8
1
—
1
— —
ERd32-2→ERd32
3
— —
ERd32-1→ERd32
1
—
1
1
Rd8×Rs8→Rd16 (unsigned multiplication) — — — — — —
— —
Rd16-2→Rd16
—
1
1
* —
— —
— — — — — —
ERd32-4→ERd32
Rd16-1→Rd16
1
— — — — — —
ERd32-2→ERd32
[5]
—
— — — — — —
ERd32-1→ERd32
— —
1
—
Rd8-Rs8-C→Rd8
Rd8-1→Rd8
1
1
—
Rd8-#xx:8-C→Rd8
[5]
— [4]
ERd32-ERs32→ERd32
3
— [4]
1
— [3]
ERd32-#xx:32→ERd32
Advanced
No. of States*1
Rd16-Rs16→Rd16
I H N Z V C
↔ ↔ ↔
Operation
↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
Mnemonic
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
@ERn
#xx
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 769 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 770 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
EXTU
NEG
CMP
DIVXS
DIVXU
L
W
L
EXTU.L ERd
W
NEG.W Rd
EXTU.W Rd
B
NEG.B Rd
NEG.L ERd
L 6
L
CMP.L ERs,ERd
W
CMP.W Rs,Rd
CMP.L #xx:32,ERd
W 4
CMP.W #xx:16,Rd
W
DIVXS.W Rs,ERd
B 2
B
divxs.B Rs,Rd
B
W
DIVXU.W Rs,ERd
CMP.B Rs,Rd
B
#xx
CMP.B #xx:8,Rd
Operand Size
DIVXU.B Rs,Rd
Rn
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
21
1
ERd32÷Rs16→ERd32 (Ed: remainder, — — [8] [7] — —
—
—
— [3]
— [3]
— [4]
— [4]
—
—
—
— — 0
— — 0
Rd8-#xx:8
Rd8-Rs8
Rd16-#xx:16
Rd16-Rs16
ERd32-#xx:32
ERd32-ERs32
0-Rd8→Rd8
0-Rd16→Rd16
0-ERd32→ERd32
0→(<bit 15 to 8> of Rd16)
0→(<bit 31 to 16> of ERd32)
Rd: quotient) (signed division)
0 —
0 —
13
Rd16÷Rs8→Rd16 (RdH: remainder, — — [8] [7] — —
RdL: quotient) (signed division)
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
20
Rd: quotient) (unsigned division)
RdL: quotient) (unsigned division)
ERd32÷Rs16→ERd32 (Ed: remainder, — — [6] [7] — —
Advanced
12
I H N Z V C
No. of States*1
Rd16÷Rs8→Rd16 (RdH: remainder, — — [6] [7] — —
Operation
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Mnemonic
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@(d,PC)
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
STMAC
L
L
STMAC MACL,ERd
LDMAC
STMAC MACH,ERd
—
CLRMAC
CLRMAC
L
—
MAC @ERn+,@ERm+
MAC
L
B
TAS @ERd *3
TAS
LDMAC ERs,MACL
L
EXTS.L ERd
LDMAC ERs,MACH
W
EXTS.W Rd
EXTS
Operand Size
Mnemonic
Rn
2
2
2
2
2
2
@ERn
4
@–ERn/@ERn+
4
—
2
1
0 —
0 —
2 [11]
— —
MACL→ERd
—
1 [11]
2 [11]
1 [11]
—
— —— — — —
— —
ERs→MACL
MACH→ERd
2 [11]
— —— — — —
— —— — — —
0→MACH,MACL
[10] [10] [10]
4
4
1
0 —
— —— — — —
— —
— —
— —
Advanced
I H N Z V C
ERs→MACH
ERn+2→ERn,ERm+2→ERm
(signed multiplication)
@ERn×@ERm+MAC→MAC
(<bit 7> of @ERd)
@ERd-0→CCR set, (1)→
(<bit 31 to 16> of ERd32)
(<bit 15> of ERd32)→
(<bit 15 to 8> of Rd16)
(<bit 7> of Rd16)→
Operation
No. of States*1
↔
↔
↔
↔
Condition Code
↔
↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
@@aa
@aa
@(d,PC)
@(d,ERn)
#xx
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 771 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 772 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
NOT
XOR
OR
AND
AND.L ERs,ERd
L
NOT.L ERd
XOR.L ERs,ERd
W
L 6
L
XOR.L #xx:32,ERd
NOT.W Rd
W
XOR.W Rs,Rd
B
W 4
XOR.W #xx:16,Rd
NOT.B Rd
B
OR.L ERs,ERd
XOR.B Rs,Rd
L
OR.L #xx:32,ERd
B 2
L 6
OR.W Rs,Rd
XOR.B #xx:8,Rd
W 4
W
OR.W #xx:16,Rd
B
L 6
L
AND.L #xx:32,ERd
OR.B Rs,Rd
W
AND.W Rs,Rd
B 2
W 4
AND.W #xx:16,Rd
OR.B #xx:8,Rd
B 2
B
Operand Size
AND.B Rs,Rd
#xx
AND.B #xx:8,Rd
Mnemonic
Rn
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
Rd8∧Rs8→Rd8
Rd16∧#xx:16→Rd16
Rd16∧Rs16→Rd16
ERd32∧#xx:32→ERd32
ERd32∧ERs32→ERd32
Rd8∨#xx:8→Rd8
Rd8∨Rs8→Rd8
Rd16∨#xx:16→Rd16
Rd16∨Rs16→Rd16
ERd32∨#xx:32→ERd32
ERd32∨ERs32→ERd32
Rd8⊕#xx:8→Rd8
Rd8⊕Rs8→Rd8
Rd16⊕#xx:16→Rd16
Rd16⊕Rs16→Rd16
ERd32⊕#xx:32→ERd32
ERd32⊕ERs32→ERd32
¬ Rd8→Rd8
¬ Rd16→Rd16
¬ ERd32→ERd32
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
0 —
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
Advanced
I H N Z V C
Rd8∧#xx:8→Rd8
Operation
No. of States*1
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
@ERn
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
(3) Logical Instructions
SHLL
SHAR
SHAL
W
W
L
L
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.W #2,Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAL.L #2,ERd
W
W
L
L
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.W #2,Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLL.L #2,ERd
SHAR.L #2,ERd
B
L
SHAR.L ERd
SHLL.B #2,Rd
L
SHAR.W #2,Rd
B
W
SHAR.W Rd
SHLL.B Rd
B
W
SHAR.B #2,Rd
B
B
SHAR.B Rd
B
SHAL.B #2,Rd
Rn
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
C
C
MSB
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
C
0
0
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I H N Z V C
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Operand Size
SHAL.B Rd
Operation
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Mnemonic
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
@ERn
#xx
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Advanced
No. of States*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
(4) Shift Instructions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 773 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 774 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
ROTXR
ROTXL
SHLR
B
W
W
L
L
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.W #2,Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
ROTXR.L #2,ERd
L
ROTXL.L #2,ERd
B
L
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXR.B #2,Rd
W
ROTXR.B Rd
W
ROTXL.W #2,Rd
L
SHLR.L #2,ERd
ROTXL.W Rd
L
SHLR.L ERd
B
W
SHLR.W #2,Rd
ROTXL.B #2,Rd
W
SHLR.W Rd
B
B
ROTXL.B Rd
B
SHLR.B #2,Rd
Operand Size
SHLR.B Rd
#xx
Rn
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
C
LSB
C
— —
—
— —
— MSB
— —
— —
—
C
— —
—
LSB
— —
—
—
— —
— —
—
—
— —
—
— —
— —
—
LSB
— —
—
MSB
— — 0
—
—
— — 0
—
— — 0
— — 0
—0
MSB
— — 0
—
— — 0
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I H N Z V C
—
Operation
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Mnemonic
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@(d,PC)
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
@ERn
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Advanced
No. of States*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
ROTR
ROTL
W
W
L
L
ROTR.W #2,Rd
ROTR.L ERd
ROTR.L #2,ERd
L
ROTL.L #2,ERd
ROTR.W Rd
L
ROTL.L ERd
B
W
ROTL.W #2,Rd
ROTR.B #2,Rd
W
ROTL.W Rd
B
B
ROTR.B Rd
B
ROTL.B #2,Rd
Rn
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
MSB
C
— —
—
— —
— —
—
1
— —
— —
—
— —
— —
— —
LSB
LSB
—
MSB
C
— —
— —
— —
— —
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I H N Z V C
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Operand Size
ROTL.B Rd
Operation
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Mnemonic
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
@ERn
#xx
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Advanced
No. of States*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 775 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 776 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
BCLR
BSET
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
BSET Rn,@ERd
BSET Rn,@aa:8
BSET Rn,@aa:16
BSET Rn,@aa:32
BCLR #xx:3,Rd
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32
BCLR Rn,Rd
BCLR Rn,@ERd
BCLR Rn,@aa:8
BCLR Rn,@aa:16
B
BSET #xx:3,@aa:16
B
B
BSET #xx:3,@aa:8
BSET Rn,Rd
B
BSET #xx:3,@aa:32
B
BSET #xx:3,@ERd
Operand Size
BSET #xx:3,Rd
Mnemonic
Rn
2
2
2
2
@ERn
4
4
4
4
@aa
6
4
8
6
4
8
6
4
8
6
4
—
@@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
#xx
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
(#xx:3 of Rd8)←1
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)←1
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)←1
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)←1
(Rn8 of Rd8)←1
(Rn8 of @ERd)←1
(Rn8 of @aa:8)←1
(Rn8 of @aa:16)←1
(Rn8 of @aa:32)←1
(#xx:3 of Rd8)←0
(#xx:3 of @ERd)←0
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)←0
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)←0
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)←0
(Rn8 of Rd8)←0
(Rn8 of @ERd)←0
(Rn8 of @aa:8)←0
(Rn8 of @aa:16)←0
I H N Z V C
(#xx:3 of @ERd)←1
Operation
Condition Code
5
4
4
1
6
5
4
4
1
6
5
4
4
1
6
5
4
4
1
Advanced
No. of States*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
(5) Bit-Manipulation Instructions
BTST
B
B
B
BTST #xx:3,@aa:16
B
BTST #xx:3,Rd
BTST #xx:3,@aa:8
B
BNOT Rn,@aa:32
BTST #xx:3,@ERd
B
B
BNOT Rn,Rd
BNOT Rn,@aa:16
B
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32
B
B
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16
B
B
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8
BNOT Rn,@aa:8
B
BNOT #xx:3,@ERd
BNOT Rn,@ERd
B
BNOT #xx:3,Rd
B
BCLR Rn,@aa:32
BNOT
Operand Size
BCLR
Mnemonic
#xx
Rn
2
2
2
@ERn
4
4
4
@aa
6
4
8
6
4
8
6
4
8
6
— — — — — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8)→Z
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd)→Z
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)→Z
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)→Z
[¬ (Rn8 of @aa:32)]
(Rn8 of @aa:32)←
[¬ (Rn8 of @aa:16)]
— —
— —
— —
4
3
3
1
5
— — — — — —
— —
4
(Rn8 of @aa:8)←[¬ (Rn8 of @aa:8)] — — — — — —
(Rn8 of @aa:16)←
4
(Rn8 of @ERd)←[¬ (Rn8 of @ERd)] — — — — — —
6
5
1
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
(Rn8 of Rd8)←[¬ (Rn8 of Rd8)]
[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)]
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)←
[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)]
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)←
[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)]
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)←
4
4
[¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd)]
1
(#xx:3 of @ERd)←
— — — — — —
6
Advanced
— — — — — —
I H N Z V C
No. of States*1
(#xx:3 of Rd8)←[¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8)] — — — — — —
(Rn8 of @aa:32)←0
Operation
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 777 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 778 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
BST
BILD
BLD
BTST
B
BST #xx:3,@aa:8
B
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16
B
B
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8
BST #xx:3,@ERd
B
BILD #xx:3,@ERd
B
B
BILD #xx:3,Rd
B
B
BLD #xx:3,@aa:32
BST #xx:3,Rd
B
BLD #xx:3,@aa:16
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32
B
BLD #xx:3,@aa:8
B
BTST Rn,@aa:32
B
B
BTST Rn,@aa:16
BLD #xx:3,@ERd
B
BTST Rn,@aa:8
B
B
BTST Rn,@ERd
BLD #xx:3,Rd
B
B
BTST Rn,Rd
Operand Size
BTST #xx:3,@aa:32
Rn
2
2
2
2
@ERn
4
4
4
4
@aa
4
8
6
4
8
6
4
8
6
4
8
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
C→(#xx:3 of @ERd24)
— — — — —
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
C→(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
— — — — —
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
— — — — —
— — — — —
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd)→C
— — — — — —
— — — — —
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
— — — — —
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
C→(#xx:3 of Rd8)
— — — — —
— — — — —
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
— — — — —
(#xx:3 of @ERd)→C
4
4
1
5
4
3
3
1
5
4
3
3
1
5
— — — — —
(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
4
— —
— — —
— —
— — —
¬ (Rn8 of @aa:16)→Z
3
¬ (Rn8 of @aa:32)→Z
3
— —
— — —
¬ (Rn8 of @aa:8)→Z
1
— —
— — —
¬ (Rn8 of @ERd)→Z
5
— — —
— —
— — —
¬ (Rn8 of Rd8)→Z
Advanced
No. of States*1
— —
I H N Z V C
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)→Z
Operation
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Mnemonic
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
#xx
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
BOR
BIAND
BAND
BIST
BST
B
B
B
B
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32
BOR #xx:3,Rd
BOR #xx:3,@ERd
B
BAND #xx:3,@aa:16
B
B
BAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8
B
BAND #xx:3,@ERd
B
B
BAND #xx:3,Rd
BIAND #xx:3,@ERd
B
BIST #xx:3,@aa:32
B
B
BIST #xx:3,@aa:16
B
B
BIST #xx:3,@aa:8
BIAND #xx:3,Rd
B
BIST #xx:3,@ERd
BAND #xx:3,@aa:32
B
B
BIST #xx:3,Rd
B
BST #xx:3,@aa:32
Operand Size
BST #xx:3,@aa:16
Mnemonic
Rn
2
2
2
2
@ERn
4
4
4
4
@aa
@(d,PC)
8
6
4
8
6
4
8
6
4
8
6
— — — — —
— — — — —
C∨(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
C∨(#xx:3 of @ERd24)→C
— — — — —
C∧[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)]→C
— — — — —
— — — — —
C∧[¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24)]→C
— — — — —
— — — — —
C∧[¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8)]→C
C∧[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)]→C
— — — — —
C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
C∧[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)]→C
— — — — —
1
C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
6
— — — — — —
¬ C→(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
3
1
5
4
3
3
1
5
4
3
3
5
— — — — — —
¬ C→(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
— — — — —
4
— — — — — —
¬ C→(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
4
— — — — — —
¬ C→(#xx:3 of @ERd24)
— — — — —
1
— — — — — —
¬ C→(#xx:3 of Rd8)
— — — — —
6
— — — — — —
C→(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
C∧(#xx:3 of @ERd24)→C
5
— — — — — —
C→(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
C∧(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
Advanced
I H N Z V C
No. of States*1
Operation
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
#xx
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 779 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 780 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
BIXOR
BXOR
BIOR
BOR
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BIXOR #xx:3,Rd
BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
B
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:32
B
B
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:16
B
B
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BXOR #xx:3,@ERd
B
BIOR #xx:3,@ERd
BXOR #xx:3,Rd
B
B
BOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BIOR #xx:3,Rd
B
B
BOR #xx:3,@aa:16
Operand Size
#xx
BOR #xx:3,@aa:8
Mnemonic
Rn
2
2
2
@ERn
4
4
4
4
@aa
8
6
4
8
6
4
8
6
4
8
6
— — — — —
— — — — —
— — — — —
— — — — —
— — — — —
— — — — —
— — — — —
C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
C⊕[¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8)]→C
C⊕[¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24)]→C
C⊕[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)]→C
C⊕[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)]→C
C⊕[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)]→C
— — — — —
C∨[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)]→C
— — — — —
— — — — —
C∨[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)]→C
C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
— — — — —
C∨[¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)]→C
C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
— — — — —
C∨[¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24)]→C
— — — — —
— — — — —
C∨[¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8)]→C
— — — — —
— — — — —
C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
C⊕(#xx:3 of @ERd24)→C
— — — — —
C⊕(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
— — — — —
C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
I H N Z V C
C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
Operation
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
5
4
3
3
1
5
4
3
3
1
5
4
3
3
1
5
4
3
Advanced
No. of States*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Bcc
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BRA d:16(BT d:16)
BRN d:8(BF d:8)
BRN d:16(BF d:16)
BHI d:8
BHI d:16
BLS d:8
BLS d:16
BCC d:B(BHS d:8)
BCC d:16(BHS d:16)
BCS d:8(BLO d:8)
BCS d:16(BLO d:16)
BNE d:8
BNE d:16
BEQ d:8
BEQ d:16
BVC d:8
BVC d:16
Operand Size
BRA d:8(BT d:8)
Mnemonic
@aa
@(d,PC)
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
—
@@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
@ERn
Rn
#xx
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Branching
Condition
else next;
PC←PC+d
V=0
Z=1
Z=0
C=1
C=0
C∨Z=1
C∨Z=0
Never
if condition is true then Always
Operation
3
— — — — — —
3
2
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
3
2
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
3
2
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
3
2
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
3
2
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
3
2
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
3
2
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
2
— — — — — —
2
3
— — — — — —
Advanced
No. of States*1
— — — — — —
I H N Z V C
Condition Code
Appendix A Instruction Set
(6) Branch Instructions
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 781 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Bcc
Operand Size
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Mnemonic
BVS d:8
BVS d:16
BPL d:8
BPL d:16
BMI d:8
BMI d:16
BGE d:8
BGE d:16
BLT d:8
BLT d:16
BGT d:8
BGT d:16
BLE d:8
BLE d:16
@(d,PC)
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 782 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
—
@@aa
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
@ERn
#xx
Rn
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Operation
3
2
3
2
3
Z∨(N⊕V)=0 — — — — — —
— — — — — —
Z∨(N⊕V)=1 — — — — — —
— — — — — —
2
3
— — — — — —
2
— — — — — —
3
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
2
— — — — — —
3
— — — — — —
N⊕V=1
N⊕V=0
N=1
2
— — — — — —
3
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
V=1
N=0
2
I H N Z V C
Advanced
No. of States*1
Branching
Condition
Condition Code
Appendix A Instruction Set
RTS
JSR
BSR
JMP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
JMP @aa:24
JMP @@aa:8
BSR d:8
BSR d:16
JSR @ERn
JSR @aa:24
JSR @@aa:8
RTS
Operand Size
JMP @ERn
Mnemonic
@ERn
2
2
4
4
2
@aa
@(d,PC)
4
@@aa
2
2
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
PC←@aa:8
PC→@-SP,PC←PC+d:8
PC→@-SP,PC←PC+d:16
PC→@-SP,PC←ERn
PC→@-SP,PC←aa:24
PC→@-SP,PC←@aa:8
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
PC←aa:24
I H N Z V C
Condition Code
PC←ERn
Operation
2 PC←@SP+
—
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
Rn
#xx
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
5
6
5
4
5
4
5
3
2
Advanced
No. of States*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 783 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
W
W
LDC @aa:32,CCR
LDC @aa:32,EXR
W
LDC @ERs+,CCR
W
W
LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR
LDC @aa:16,EXR
W
LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR
W
W
LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR
W
W
LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR
LDC @aa:16,CCR
W
LDC @ERs+,EXR
W
LDC @ERs,EXR
B 4
LDC #xx:8,EXR
LDC @ERs,CCR
B 2
LDC #xx:8,CCR
LDC
B
—
SLEEP
SLEEP
B
—
RTE
RTE
LDC Rs,EXR
—
Mnemonic
LDC Rs,CCR
Operand Size
#xx
TRAPA #xx:2
2
Rn
2
@ERn
4
4
@(d,ERn)
10
10
6
6
4
8
8
6
6
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
4
Operation
I H N Z V C
1 — — — — —
4
5
— — — — — —
@ERs→CCR,ERs32+2→ERs32
@ERs→EXR,ERs32+2→ERs32
@aa:16→CCR
@aa:16→EXR
@aa:32→CCR
5
4
4
— — — — — —
@(d:32,ERs)→EXR
— — — — — —
6
4
— — — — — —
@(d:32,ERs)→CCR
@aa:32→EXR
4
6
— — — — — —
@(d:16,ERs)→EXR
3
4
@(d:16,ERs)→CCR
3
@ERs→EXR
— — — — — —
@ERs→CCR
1
— — — — — —
Rs8→EXR
2
1
— — — — — —
Rs8→CCR
#xx:8→EXR
2
1
— — — — — —
5 [13]
8 [13]
Advanced
No. of States*1
#xx:8→CCR
Transition to power-down state
PC←@SP+
EXR←@SP+,CCR←@SP+,
EXR→@-SP,<vector>→PC
PC→@-SP,CCR→@-SP,
↔
↔
↔
↔
TRAPA
Condition Code
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 784 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
—
@@aa
@(d,PC)
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
(7) System Control Instructions
NOP
XORC
ORC
ANDC
B 4
—
XORC #xx:8,EXR
NOP
B 2
B 4
ORC #xx:8,EXR
XORC #xx:8,CCR
B 2
ORC #xx:8,CCR
B 4
W
STC EXR,@aa:32
ANDC #xx:8,EXR
W
STC CCR,@aa:32
B 2
W
STC EXR,@aa:16
2
2
#xx
Rn
ANDC #xx:8,CCR
W
W
STC CCR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC CCR,@aa:16
W
STC EXR,@(d:16,ERd)
W
W
STC CCR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC EXR,@-ERd
W
STC EXR,@ERd
W
W
STC CCR,@ERd
W
B
STC CCR,@-ERd
B
STC EXR,Rd
STC EXR,@(d:32,ERd)
Operand Size
STC CCR,Rd
@ERn
4
4
@(d,ERn)
10
10
6
6
@–ERn/@ERn+
4
4
@aa
8
8
6
6
6
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
CCR→@ERd
EXR→@ERd
CCR→@(d:16,ERd)
EXR→@(d:16,ERd)
CCR→@(d:32,ERd)
EXR→@(d:32,ERd)
1
—
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
EXR⊕#xx:8→EXR
2 PC←PC+2
1
2
2
CCR⊕#xx:8→CCR
1
— — — — — —
EXR∨#xx:8→EXR
2
5
— — — — — —
EXR→@aa:32
— — — — — —
5
— — — — — —
CCR→@aa:32
CCR∨#xx:8→CCR
4
— — — — — —
EXR→@aa:16
EXR∧#xx:8→EXR
4
— — — — — —
CCR→@aa:16
1
4
— — — — — —
ERd32-2→ERd32,EXR→@ERd
CCR∧#xx:8→CCR
4
ERd32-2→ERd32,CCR→@ERd — — — — — —
6
4
4
3
3
1
— — — — — —
1
— — — — — —
EXR→Rd8
Advanced
CCR→Rd8
I H N Z V C
↔
↔
↔
STC
Operation
No. of States*1
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
Mnemonic
Condition Code
↔
↔
↔
@@aa
@(d,PC)
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 785 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 786 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
EEPMOV
—
—
EEPMOV.B
EEPMOV.W
@@aa
@aa
@(d,PC)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d,ERn)
@ERn
Rn
#xx
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
4 if R4≠0
Repeat @ER5→@ER6
ER5+1→ER5
ER6+1→ER6
R4-1→R4
Until R4=0
else next;
I H N Z V C
4 if R4L≠0
Repeat @ER5→@ER6
ER5+1→ER5
ER6+1→ER6
R4L-1→R4L
Until R4L=0
else next;
Operation
Condition Code
4+2n*2
4+2n*2
Advanced
No. of States*1
The number of states is the number of states required for execution when the instruction and its operands are located in on-chip memory.
n is the initial value of R4L or R4.
Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Seven states for saving or restoring two registers, nine states for three registers, or eleven states for four registers.
Cannot be used in the H8S/2626 Group or H8S/2623 Group.
Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0.
Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0.
Retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
Set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
Set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
Set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
One additional state is required for execution when EXR is valid.
MAC instruction results are indicated in the flags when the STMAC instruction is executed.
A maximum of three additional states are required for execution of one of these instructions within three states after execution of a
MAC instruction. For example, if there is a one-state instruction (such as NOP) between a MAC instruction and one of these instructions,
that instruction will be two states longer.
Operand Size
Mnemonic
—
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Appendix A Instruction Set
(8) Block Transfer Instructions
Appendix A Instruction Set
A.2
Instruction Codes
Table A.2 shows the instruction codes.
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 787 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 788 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Bcc
BAND
ANDC
AND
ADDX
1
rs
1
0
8
9
9
9
A
A
B
B
B
rd
E
rd
7
0
7
0
0
0
0
9
0
E
W
L
L
L
L
L
B
B
B
ADD.W Rs,Rd
ADD.L #xx:32,ERd
ADD.L ERs,ERd
ADDS #1,ERd
ADDS #2,ERd
ADDS #4,ERd
ADDX #xx:8,Rd
ADDX Rs,Rd
AND.B #xx:8,Rd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rs
6
F
4
0 IMM
0 erd
1
3
6
A
1
6
1
6
C
E
A
A
0
8
1
8
6
7
0
0
0
7
7
7
6
6
4
5
4
5
W
L
L
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
—
—
—
—
AND.W Rs,Rd
AND.L #xx:32,ERd
AND.L ERs,ERd
ANDC #xx:8,CCR
ANDC #xx:8,EXR
BAND #xx:3,Rd
BAND #xx:3,@ERd
BAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BAND #xx:3,@aa:32
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
BRA d:16 (BT d:16)
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
BRN d:16 (BF d:16)
1
0
6
9
7
rd
rd
rd
rd
disp
disp
abs
0
0
0
0
0
rd
1
0
0 erd
IMM
rs
6
1
B
W
AND.W #xx:16,Rd
IMM
AND.B Rs,Rd
rs
IMM
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
1 ers 0 erd
rs
8
0
B
W
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd
IMM
2nd byte
ADD.B Rs,Rd
rd
8
1st byte
B
Size
ADD.B #xx:8,Rd
Mnemonic
IMM
IMM
0 IMM
6
disp
disp
abs
0 IMM
6
IMM
0
0
abs
0 ers 0 erd
7
6
6
IMM
IMM
4th byte
7
0
6
3rd byte
7
6
0 IMM
0
6th byte
Instruction Format
5th byte
7
6
7th byte
0 IMM
0
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Table A.2
ADDS
ADD
Instruction
Appendix A Instruction Set
Instruction Codes
Bcc
Instruction
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BHI d:16
BLS d:8
BLS d:16
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16)
BNE d:8
BNE d:16
BEQ d:8
BEQ d:16
BVC d:8
BVC d:16
BVS d:8
BVS d:16
BPL d:8
BPL d:16
BMI d:8
BMI d:16
BGE d:8
BGE d:16
BLT d:8
BLT d:16
BGT d:8
BGT d:16
BLE d:8
BLE d:16
Size
BHI d:8
Mnemonic
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
8
F
8
E
8
D
8
C
8
B
8
A
8
9
8
8
8
7
8
6
8
5
8
4
8
3
8
2
1st byte
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2nd byte
3rd byte
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
4th byte
6th byte
Instruction Format
5th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 789 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
Rev. 5.00 Jan 10, 2006 page 790 of 1042
REJ09B0275-0500
BIOR
BILD
BIAND
BCLR
Instruction
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32
BCLR Rn,Rd
BCLR Rn,@ERd
BCLR Rn,@aa:8
BCLR Rn,@aa:16
BCLR Rn,@aa:32
BIAND #xx:3,Rd
BIAND #xx:3,@ERd
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32
BILD #xx:3,Rd
BILD #xx:3,@ERd
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32
BIOR #xx:3,Rd
BIOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:32
0 erd
D
0 erd
C
rd
0
1 IMM
0 erd
7
C
0 erd
C
0
0
1
3
A
0
A
abs
1 IMM
4
E
0
3
A
rd
0
1
A
abs
0
3
A
E
0
1
0
A
abs
1 IMM
6
E
8
3
A
rd
8
1
A
0
rd
rn
2
abs
8
3
A
F
8
0
1
abs
A
F
0 erd
7
B
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8
D
7
B
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd
rd
0 IMM
2
7
2nd byte
1st byte
B
Size
BCLR #xx:3,Rd
Mnemonic
0 IMM
2
1 IMM
6
1 IMM
7
7
1 IMM
4
7
abs
1 IMM
4
7
abs
1 IMM
7
7
abs
1 IMM
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
rn
2
7
0
rn
2
6
0
0
6
abs
abs
0 IMM
2
7
4th byte
7
3rd byte
abs
abs
abs
abs
abs
7
7
7
6
7
4
7
6
2
2
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
6th byte
Instruction Format
5th byte
7
7
7
6
7
4
7
6
2
2
7th byte
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Appendix A Instruction Set
BNOT
BLD
BIXOR
BIST
Instruction
8
8
0
0
0
0
8
8
rd
8
8
1
3
1 IMM
0 erd
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
1